Sony A3880003 Licensed transmitter User Manual 08 user guide part 1

Sony Mobile Communications Inc Licensed transmitter 08 user guide part 1

UserManual.wiki >

Sony >

A3880003 User Manual >

08 user guide part 1 HTML Version

1. 08 user guide part 1
2. 08 user guide part 2

08 user guide part 1

FOMA® SO706i

NAME:

PHONE NUMBER:

MAIL ADDRESS:

ISSUE DATE:

‘08.7

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

●

⇒ お知らせ ⇒ドコモショップ

＜＞

＊

＜＞

＊

●

＊

＜＞

＊

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Before Using the Handset

Voice/Videophone Calls

Phonebook

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Security Settings

Camera

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Mail

i-αppli

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

Full Browser

1seg

Data Display/Edit/Management

Music&Video Channel/

Music Playback

Convenient Functions

Character Entry

Network Services

PC Connection

Overseas Use

Appendix/External Devices/

Troubleshooting

Index/Quick Manual

○

KDIC 2484 SO706i (英文1版) H1H4

DOCOMO

W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS Systems

Thank you for choosing FOMA SO706i.

Read this manual carefully before use or during operation as well as separate manuals for other

components, and use FOMA SO706i properly. If you have further questions regarding manuals,

contact the inquiries number provided on the back of this manual.

FOMA SO706i is your useful companion. Take good care of it for so long a period.

Notes on use

●FOMA terminals use wireless communications and cannot be used in tunnels, underground areas,

buildings, and other areas without reception; in outdoor locations with weak reception; or outside the

service area. Reception may also be weak in even some unobstucted upper floors of high-rise buildings and

apartments. Please be aware that calls or communications may be disconnected even under optimal

conditions when reception is strong and all three antenna marks are displayed, and when in a stationary

position.

●Please be careful not to disturb people around you when using your mobile phone in public places, crowded

areas, or quiet locations.

●A third party may be able to use special equipment to listen in on your calls, as FOMA terminals use radio

waves. However, W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS automatically support privacy protection with a scrambling

function for all calls to make conversations incomprehensive to third parties.

●FOMA terminals convert voice into digital signals for wireless communications, and therefore if you are in an

area where radio reception is weak, these signals may not be properly reconverted and this may result in

distortion of the caller’s voice.

●The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL/TLS.

Neither DOCOMO nor the certifier as listed herein makes any representation or warranty as for security in

the use of SSL/TLS. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL/TLS,

neither DOCOMO nor the certifier shall be responsible for any damage or loss.

Certifier: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Co., Ltd., GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Inc. and SECOM Trust

Systems Co., Ltd.

●This FOMA terminal is available in FOMA Plus-Area/FOMA HIGH-SPEED area.

●The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by DOCOMO and DOCOMO’s

roaming area.

●Please keep a separate record of the information (Phonebook, Schedule, Text memo, Record message,

Voice memo, Video memo, etc.) you have registered in your FOMA terminal or FOMA card. Please be

aware that DOCOMO bears no obligation or responsibility in the event that data is altered or lost.

●It is recommended to back up the important data to the microSD card. If you own a PC, you can also

transfer and save the data such as Phonebook, Mail or Schedule to your PC by using DOCOMO keitai

datalink.

Before using this manual

This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (p.97). When you change the design of the menu display using

Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may change in accordance with frequency of using functions. Also, you

cannot access some functions entering the menu number assigned to the functions.

In this case, it is not possible to operate it according to this manual, so be sure to switch the main menu to

“Standard Menu” (p.33) or perform “Reset menu op. log” (p.91).

Latest information regarding to this manual may be downloaded from the DOCOMO website.

・To download “Instruction Manual” (PDF file), access the following site

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html

* The URL and the contents are subject to change without notice.

How to Refer to This Manual

In this manual, following methods are available to find the descriptions of functions and

services.

Index

You can find keywords and functions displayed on the

display of the FOMA terminal.

Easy Search

You can find often-used functions and convenient functions

in simple terms.

Index on the front cover

You can find the table of contents for each chapter by

using the Index on the front cover.

Contents

You can find descriptions using the Table of Contents which is divided by the function.

Feature Preview

You can find main functions of the FOMA SO706i, such as new functions and convenient

functions.

Menu Function List

You can find menu displayed on the display of the FOMA SO706i and default settings.

Quick Manual

You can find brief descriptions of the basic functions. You can also remove the pages to

take along.

Take Quick Manual (For Overseas Use) when using your FOMA terminal abroad.

See the next

page for details.

Cover

p.396

p.4

p.6

p.8

p.340

p.408

zIn this manual for FOMA SO706i, the “FOMA SO706i” is described as the “FOMA terminal”.

zThis manual describes functions that use the microSD card. To use these functions, the microSD card is

required. microSD Card→p.243

zIt is prohibited to reprint a part or all of the contents of this manual without permission.

zThe contents of this manual may change without prior notification.

zMain menu and screen color patterns are described using default settings when the phone color is

platinum white.

How to Refer to This Manual (continued)

* The contents above differ from the actual ones in this manual.

Convenient Functions

Multi Access.................................................................................................. 282

Multitask............................................................................................................. 283

Assigning a Function to the FUNC Key ............................................ 284

Sorting the Main Menu ................................................................................................... 284

Using the Alarm Function ...................................................................................... 284

Managing Schedule .......................................................................................... 285

Adding To Do List Entries ................................................................................. 288

Setting the Alarm Mode ............................................................................... 289

Multi access

Multitask

Holding down ch-key

Alarm

Schedule

To D o l i st

Alarm setting

・Use microSD card

・

Exchange information with PC or other FOMA terminal

・Listen to music

・Use alarm

・Use as calculator

・Use FOMA terminal overseas

・Update for the latest software

・Update for the latest security settings

Calculator

Infrared data exchange/iC communication

Alarm

Music Player/Music&Video Channel

Software Update

Scanning function

OBEX™ connection

p.243 p.255

p.267

p.284

p.295

p.331

p.377

p.383

p.260

INSTRUCTION MANUAL Music&Video Channel/

Music Playback

Convenient Functions

Character Entry

Network Services

Alphabetical/Numerical/Kana

A mode (2in1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

AC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Accessories/Options . . . . . . . . . .363

A-Continuous mode . . . . . . . . . . .124

Add bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Adding a new word (Own dictionary)

. .309

Signal quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Alarm notification actions . . 290, 295

Alarm setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Alarm tone (pre-installed) . . . . . . . 82

Alarm tone (stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Alarm (Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Animation (create). . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Animation (playback) . . . . . . . . . . 231

Anniversary (check). . . . . . . . . . . 287

Answer hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Auto Decomail-picture (download)

. . 146

Auto power ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . 45

Auto receive (Mail/Message) . . . 162

Auto redial as voice . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Auto replay (i-motion) . . . . . . . . . 152

Auto reset total cost . . . . . . . . . . 294

Auto save set (Movie) . . . . . . . . . 127

Auto save set (Still image) . . . . . 123

Auto timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Auto-display setting . . . . . . . . . . 148

Following example shows how to look up the alarm function using “Index”, “Easy Search” and

“Index on the front cover”.

You can find keywords and functions displayed on the display of the FOMA terminal.

Index

Easy Search

You can find often-used functions and convenient functions in simple terms.

Index on the Cover

Refer to “Cover”, “Chapter title page” and “Description pages” sequentially

to ﬁnd the descriptions of the function you want to set. You can ﬁnd the

detailed table of contents on the chapter title page.

Cover

p.396

p.4

zThe screens shown as examples in this manual are displayed when “English” is set for “バイリンガル” (Select

language). Set “English” for “バイリンガル” (Select language) in advance.→p.45

zTo view a sample screen easily, this manual adopts the color setting to white as background and black as font

with “Stand-by display” set to “OFF”. In addition, “Style” is set to “24th clock” and “Size” is set to “Big” as the

main clock description.

zDescriptions are basically based on the default settings, and screens displayed on the FOMA terminal may

differ from the descriptions in this manual.

zA screen is used as an image in this manual. Some screens are zoomed in for explanation. Therefore they

may differ from the actual ones.

zIn this manual, “Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli compatible with IC card function” is described as “Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli”.

zIn the operation explanation in this manual, simple key illustrations are used to indicate the operation to press

the key.

284

Continued on next page

tcnuF

neinev

noC

Using the Alarm Function

<Alarm>

You can store up to 10 alarms.

1i“LIFEKIT” “Alarm”

The “Alarm list” screen

appears.

■To switch ON/OFF with

the last settings

Highlight the setting item

p (ON/OFF)

“ON/OFF” switches each

time you press p.

■To check the previous

settings

Select the setting item

The “Alarm detail” screen

appears.

2Highlight the item to set o (Edit)

3Select any item:

Edit title……Enters the title of the alarm. You

can enter up to 6 double-byte or 12 single-byte

characters.

Time setting……Enters the time at which the

alarm will sound.

Repeat……Selects the alarm repetitions from

“1 time/Daily ( )/Select day ( )”.

Alarm tone……Selects the alarm tone from

clock alarm tone or folders of melody, i-motion,

music, etc.

Vol u m e……Sets the alarm tone volume with c.

Snooze setting……Specifies whether a snooze

(repeating) alarm is set or not.

ON……Enter the number of times for ringing (01

to 10 times) and the ringing interval (01 to 10

minutes).

The alarm tone (about 1 minute) rings repeatedly

for the set number of times in the set interval.

OFF……Enter the ringing time (01 to 10 minutes).

Sounds the alarm tone continuously for the

specified time.

Auto power ON……Specifies whether the

FOMA terminal is automatically turned on or not

when the time for an alarm is reached.

4Set the respective items o (Finish)

Alarm list screen (p.284)/Alarm

detail screen (p.284)

Edit……Edits the alarm.

Display detail*……Displays the alarm contents.

Set this……Activates the alarm.

Release this……Disables one alarm.

Release all……Disables all set alarms.

* : Available only with the Alarm list screen.

Managing Schedule

If you add an event to your schedule, an alarm tone

sounds at the specified date and time and the FOMA

terminal displays an animation and message notifying

you of the details stored for the event. You can also

add holidays and anniversaries. Stored scheduled

events and holidays can be quickly checked on the

FOMA terminal’s calendar. You can switch the

calendar display mode between 1-month and 1-week

to view the number or details of scheduled or To Do

list events for a given day.

The FOMA terminal supports from January 1, 2004

to December 31, 2037.

Adding schedule entries

You can organize your schedule in variety of ways,

such as storing regularly scheduled events such as

weekly meetings on a set day every week or setting

alarm tones and animations that match the scheduled

event.

Alarm list

Function menu p.284

Alarm detail

When the FOMA terminal is automatically turned on to

notify you of an alarm, if you set a melody, i-motion or

music downloaded from sites as alarm tone, the

“Clock Alarm Tone” is played.

Before entering an area such as an aircraft or hospital

where there is electronic equipment that uses

extremely precise control systems or very low signal

levels and the use of mobile phones is prohibited, set

the “Auto power ON” setting to “OFF” and then turn

the FOMA terminal off.

This manual uses illustrations and marks to explain how to operate the function so that you

can use the FOMA terminal correctly.

Describes the

function name.

Describes the

operation on

each step.

The function menu

title is described

with the icon of the

function menu and

the screen name

on which the

function menu is

displayed.

Describes the

screen at the time

of the operation.

Compare it with

the screen when

you operate.

You can search

the chapters

using the index.

Describes the

explanation of

each item.

Page number

Indicates that the

descriptions go on

to the next page.

Describes the

necessary settings,

notes or useful

information about

the function.

Describes the items

displayed on the

screen (some items

cannot be operated

depending on the

operation).

* The contents above differ from the actual ones in this manual.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Find out a function with easy words from the Easy Search index below.

Easy Search

・Show/Hide your caller ID

・Switch voice/videophone call during call

・Adjust the volume during a call

・Hold the current call

・Hold the ringing call without answering

・Notify that you cannot answer the call

・

Have your party record voice/videophone message

・Mark (icon) on the display

・Switch menu display

・Change standby screen (wallpaper)

On hold

Record message

Public mode (Driving mode) Public mode (Power OFF)

Select ring tone

Ring volume

Manner mode

Display setting

Simple Menu

Font

Display

Ring tone/Image

When you cannot answer incoming call

Useful functions for talking

Change melody or illumination

Change/Understand display

Caller ID Notification

Volume

Holding

Vibrator

・Adjust the ring volume

・Set ring tone to specify party

・Change ring tone

・

Set vibration to notify incoming call or mail

・Mute keypad tone

・Set silent mode

・Change illumination color or pattern

・Display calendar on the standby screen

・Change font size

Keypad sound

Illumination set

p.46

p.62

p.61

p.50

p.62

p.62 p.63

p.64

p.61

p.77

p.82

p.84

p.85

p.86

p.92

p.27

p.33

p.88

p.89

p.93

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Master camera

Use your phone without worries

Miscellaneous

・

Change the size of image to shoot

・Display the shot

・

Save image on the microSD card

・

Lock the FOMA terminal remotely when lost

・

Prevent others from viewing the phonebook

・Reject unidentified calls

・

Reject calls from callers who are not stored in phonebook

・

Save data such as phonebook in case of loss of data

・Read QR code or bar code

・Use microSD card

・

Exchange information with PC or other FOMA terminal

・Listen to music

・Use alarm

・Use as calculator

・Use FOMA terminal overseas

・Update for the latest software

・Update for the latest security settings

My picture

Secret mode/Secret data only mode

Reject unknown

Omakase Lock*1

Call setting w/o ID

Calculator

Bar code reader

Infrared data exchange/iC communication

Alarm

Data Security Service*2

Music Player/Music&Video Channel

Software Update

Scanning function

・Send Deco-mail

・Send image or melody

・Sort and save mail automatically

Deco-mail®

Attach file

Auto-sort

Master mail

*1: Omakase Lock is a pay service.

*2: Data Security Service is a pay service you need to apply for. (i-mode subscription is necessary to apply for this service.)

OBEX™ connection

Master 1seg

・Watch 1seg

・Record 1seg

・Program 1seg

・Change TV/sound settings

Active 1Seg

Record 1seg

Booking program list/Timer recording list

User settings

p.158

p.160

p.174

p.122

p.225

p.249

p.103

p.101

p.114

p.115

p.129

p.243 p.255

p.267

p.284

p.295

p.331

p.377

p.383

For mode information about other operation guides, see “How to refer to this manual”.→p.1

Also, “Quick Manual” instructs you how to operate the functions used often.→p.408

p.260

p.210

p.214

p.213

p.215

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

How to Refer to This Manual ..................................................1

Easy Search ...........................................................................4

Contents .................................................................................6

Feature Preview of the FOMA SO706i ...................................8

Mastering the FOMA SO706i!...............................................10

Precautions...........................................................................12

Handling with Care ...............................................................18

Intellectual Property Right.....................................................20

Package Contents ................................................................22

Contents

Before Using the

Handset

aNames and functions aHow to view the display

aSelecting the menu aBasic operations aFOMA card (UIM)

aAttaching/Removing the battery pack aCharging

aTurning on the FOMA terminal aInitial setting aSet time

aCaller ID notification, etc.

p.23

Voice/Videophone

Calls

aMaking a voice/videophone call

aSwitching between voice/videophone calls aHands-free

aRedial/Received calls aChaku-moji aWORLD CALL

aReceiving a voice/videophone call aVolume aRing volume

aAnswer hold aPublic mode (Driving mode/Power off)

aRecord message aVideophone settings, etc.

p.47

Phonebook aAdd to phonebook aGroup setting aSearch phonebook

aEditing/deleting phonebook entries aRing tone/Image

aChoku-Den aData Security Service, etc.

p.69

Sound/Screen/Light

Settings

aRing tone aVibrator aManner mode aDisplay setting

aShield veiw aBacklight aDisplay design

aChanging menu display aIndicator display aIllumination set

aKisekae Tool, etc.

p.81

Security Settings aSecurity code aPIN code aDial lock aOmakase Lock

aSecret mode aSecret folder aOriginal lock aKeypad lock

aIC card authentication aSide key guard aSelf mode, etc.

p.99

Camera

p.117

aPhoto mode aMovie mode aSettings for shooting

aBar code reader aText reader, etc.

i-mode/i-motion/

i-Channel

aWhat is i-mode? aViewing sites

aHow to view sites and operations ai-mode password

aInternet access aBookmark

aPhone To/AV Phone To · Mail To · Web To · Media To

aDownloading i-motion aUsing i-Channel, etc.

p.135

Mail aWhat is i-mode mail? aComposing/Sending i-mode mail

aDeco-mail®aAttaching files aReceiving mails

aCheck new messages aReplying/Forwarding mails

aSaving attached files aUsing mail boxes aMail Setting

aMessage service aWhat is Early Warning “Area Mail”?

aSMS, etc.

p.155

i-αppli aWhat is an i-αppli? aDownloading an i-αppli

aLaunching an i-αppli aPre-installed software

ai-αppli standby screen aUpgrading an i-αppli, etc.

p.185

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Osaifu-Keitai/

ToruCa

aWhat is Osaifu-Keitai? aWhat is iC transfer service?

aUsing Osaifu-Keitai aWhat is ToruCa? aAcquiring ToruCa

aViewing ToruCa aIC card lock, etc.

p.201

1seg aWhat is 1seg? aChannel setting aViewing 1seg

aData broadcasting aBooking program/Timer recording

a1seg settings, etc.

p.207

Full Browser aDisplaying website designed for PC

aFull Browser settings, etc.

p.217

Data Display/Edit/

Management

aData box aStill image aMovie/i-motion aPlaying video

aChara-den aMelody aKisekae Tool amicroSD card

aMovable contents aUIM operation

aInfrared data exchange/iC communication

aViewing PDF data aViewing documents, etc.

p.223

Music&Video

Channel/Music

Playback

aWhat is Music&Video Channel? aDownloading Chaku-Uta-Full®

aPlaying music aUsing playlist aUsing the Music Player, etc.

* “Chaku-Uta-Full” is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment (Japan) Inc.

p.267

Convenient

Functions

aMulti access aMultitask aAlarm aSchedule aTo Do list

aAlarm setting aMy profile aChecking Call data aCalculator

aText memo aDictionary aEarphone/microphone with switch

aReset settings aInitialize, etc.

p.281

Character Entry aCharacter entry a5-touch input aFixed common phrases

aCopying/cutting/pasting text aOwn dictionary

aClear learning record aDownload dictionary a2-touch, etc.

p.301

Network Services aVoice Mail service aCall Waiting aCall Forwarding service

aNuisance Call Blocking aCaller ID Request service

aDual Network Service a2in1, etc.

p.311

PC Connection aData communication available for the FOMA terminal, etc.

* The details are described in “Manual for PC Connection” (PDF

format) in the provided CD-ROM.

p.325

Overseas Use aWORLD WING aAvailable overseas service

aChecking before using overseas aMaking/Receiving a call abroad

aNW search mode, etc.

p.331

Appendix/External

Devices/

Troubleshooting

aMenu function list aCharacter assignment to dial keys

aSymbols/pictographs/face marks/fixed common phrases list

aMulti access/Multitask combination patterns aOptions/Accessories

aTroubleshooting aSoftware Update aSpecifications, etc.

p.339

Index/Quick Manual aIndex aQuick Manual

aQuick Manual (For Overseas Use)

p.395

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Feature Preview of the FOMA SO706i

FOMA is the name of DOCOMO’s service based on the W-CDMA system approved as one of

the global standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).

Features of SO706i

■

i-mode mail/Deco-mail

/Deco-mail

pictograph

→pp.156, 158

In addition to the message body, you can attach pictures

or video clips. As the FOMA terminal is compatible with

Deco-mail®/Deco-mail® pictograph, you can change the

character color, size, or background color of the message

body or insert images or moving pictographs.

■International roaming →p.332

The FOMA terminal, phone number and mail address you

use in Japan are also available overseas (GSM/3G

areas). You can use voice call, videophone call, i-mode,

i-mode mail, SMS and network services.

■High-speed communication

The data is received at the maximum speed of 3.6 Mbps

and sent at the maximum speed of 384 kbps in the FOMA

high speed communication area.

* 3.6M bps and 384K bps are maximum values on

technical standards, and the actual communication

speed varies depending on the network congestion or

environment. When out of FOMA HIGH-SPEED area or

connecting to an access point such as mopera

incompatible with HIGH-SPEED, data are sent and

received at 384K bps max.

■Mega i-αppli/Chokkan game (touchy-feely

game) →p.185

You can automatically receive updated stock prices,

weather information, etc., and play games. As the FOMA

terminal supports chokkan games, you can enjoy touchy-

feely operations when playing games by waving/shaking

the handset or talking.

■Chaku-Uta-Full®/Uta-hodai/Music&Video

Channel*/Video clip →pp.272, 267, 151

*: This is a pay service you need to apply for.

You can download the entire track (Chaku-Uta-Full®) and

use another service (Uta-hodai) that you can download

the entire track as many as you want with fixed monthly

charge.

Music&Video Channel is also available, that you can enjoy

the music/video programs downloaded by the automatic

operation at night time only by setting it beforehand. The

FOMA terminal also supports i-motion up to 10M bytes,

you can enjoy music clips of the entire track or video clips.

■Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa →pp.195, 201

By downloading an Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli, you can transmit

electric money from the site into the IC card in your FOMA

terminal or check the accountant balance or transaction

history. The i-αppli of the DOCOMO credit service

“DCMX” is pre-installed in your FOMA terminal. “iC

transfer service” is also supported so that you can easily

move your IC card data to a new terminal when replacing

your FOMA terminal.

ToruCa can be acquired via a reader/writer unit or

websites and easily exchanged via mail or Infrared data

exchange.

■Kisekae Tool →p.97

Favorite standby screen or menu screen can be replaced

at a time. SO706i enables the change of menu sequence

in high use and customization of the menu screen to your

favor.

i-mode

i-mode is an online service that you can use to send e-mail as well as using the useful information from the i-mode

menu site (program) and i-mode compatible website.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Wide variety of functions

■Colorful illuminations →p.92

3 lamps, 11 patterns and 20 color combinations offer

favorites illuminations.

Time signal can be received using illumination.

■Style-Up® panel

Style-Up® panel is adopted. You can enjoy changing the

optional panel to your moods.

Also, it is available to download panel-fit Kisekae Tool

from “PlayNow” by SO.

■“POBox Pro” and handy text entry →p.301

The prediction conversion function “POBox Pro”

(Predictive Operation Based On eXample Pro) is installed.

Pressing g for 1 second or longer moves the candidates

in “POBOx” on a line basis and selects a target word.

Press and hold the dial keys and you can switch the

character assigned to the dial keys consecutively such as

“a→b→c→A→B→C→２→…”.

■Stand-by books →p.89

Flash contents with a difference are preinstalled. Every

time you open the standby screen, various information

such as bits of knowledge, general knowledge and picture

books appear. Select your favorite contents from

DATA BOXMy picturePre-installed and set it to the

standby screen for your enjoyment.

■Contents useful when traveling overseas

→pp.89, 298

Contains Flash content “TalkMan” useful for foreign

language conversation. The content can be downloaded

from “PlayNow” by SO. Also contains “地球の歩き方”

(Chikyu-no Arukikata) and “世界遺産” (World Heritage) as

stand-by books, supporting overseas travel.

■Dictionary →p.296

Japanese, English-Japanese and Japanese-English

dictionaries are available.

■Wide scale display

The approximately 2.8-inch high-resolution display is

adopted. This recreates the still images or videos in bright

and vivid colors.

■Camera →p.117

Use the camera with the effective pixels 2 million

(maximum recorded pixels 1.9 million) to take 2M (1,200 ×

1,600) pictures.

■microSD card →pp.243, 252

Your FOMA terminal supports the microSD card where

you can copy data such as phonebook entries, mail

messages and images from the FOMA terminal storage

and view them on the display.

Connecting the FOMA terminal with PC enables you to

use it as a reader/writer for the microSD card.

■Full Browser →p.217

You can access websites for PC to view more information.

■PDF viewer/Document viewer→pp.261, 263

• With the PDF viewer, you can easily view useful

information such as map, catalogue or time table on

your i-mode terminal.

• The document viewer allows you to view Microsoft®

Word, Microsoft® Excel and Microsoft® PowerPoint

files.

■Infrared data exchange or Infrared remote

control →pp.257, 261

You can exchange data with other FOMA terminals using

infrared communication. You can also operate the

devices such as a TV which supports the infrared remote

control.

■Multi access/Multitask →pp.282, 283

You can use voice phone, packet communication and

SMS simultaneously (Multi access). You can activate

multiple functions and use them simultaneously by

switching them (Multitask).

Security

■Omakase Lock →p.102

You can lock your FOMA terminal if you lost it, and cancel

lock on your request. For inquiries, see the back cover of

this manual.

* Omakase Lock service is charged. However, it shall be

free of charge when you subscribe to this service at the

same time or during the period that you suspend the

subscription of the FOMA terminal.

* Omakase Lock is a service to lock the FOMA terminal

at the subscriber’s request. If the subscriber and user

are different, the FOMA terminal may be locked on the

subscriber’s request.

■Data Security Service →p.115

Back up the Phonebook and other data on your FOMA

terminal at Data Center on the i-mode network to be able

to smoothly restore data if you lose your FOMA terminal,

etc. You can edit or manage data stored at Data Center

using a PC and restore edited data on the FOMA

terminal.

* For precautions and usage instructions on “Data

Security Service”, see “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”. For inquiries, see the back of

this manual.

* This is a pay service you need to subscribe to.

Wide variety of network services (→p.311)

• Voice Mail (charged)*

• Call Waiting (charged)*

• Call Forwarding (free)*

*: You need to apply for.

• Nuisance Call Blocking (free)

• Caller ID Request (free)

• Dual Network (charged)*

• English Guidance (free)

• Multi Number (charged)*

• 2in1(charged)*

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Mastering the FOMA SO706i!

Image at the

other side

Image at the

other side

Image at your

side

Image at your

side

Send and receive real-time movie while talking

You can talk to the other party seeing images.

Your FOMA terminal is set to emit other party's voice through

the speaker by default so that you can start talking immediately

when making or answering a call. Furthermore, you can change

the call mode from voice to videophone without having to end the call.

* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera. A substitute image (Chara-den)

or rear camera image will be sent to the other party.

Chaku-moji

Notify the arrival of your phone call with an animation before answering

When calling someone, you can show a message on the

screen of the other party’s phone. The other party can

see your business or feeling from the message before

answering the call.

Enjoy viewing 1seg (mobile digital terrestrial TV service).

View subtitles or data broadcast, or record programs you are viewing.

Program booking and timer recording are also supported.

Digital terrestrial TV service

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

ドキュメンタリー

１１：００−１１：３０

Connect

The telop appears on the standby screen when the latest information is distributed

あすの天気：東京最高

２８

Videophone →p.49

i-Channel→p.153

You can receive news or weather report as

graphical information.

You can also select optional channels on

the channel list screen to receive rich,

detailed information which was created by

Flash (more detail→p.140).

* This is a pay service you need to apply

for.

Chaku-moji→p.55

1seg→p.207

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Music

microSD card

Music distribution

website

FOMA terminal

Connect the flat-plug stereo

earphone (optional).

You can use the FOMA

terminal as a portable

audio player.

“Napster®” compatible

“Napster®” service provides you of copying songs

downloaded from sites or on music CDs to the

microSD card using a PC and play music on the

FOMA terminal. Since “Chaku-Uta-Full®” is

supported, you can download the entire track from

an online music distribution site to play it. Other

functions include BGM playback, which allows you

to listen to music while you use other functions,

display of album cover images and lyric sheets,

and creation of the playlist on the FOMA terminal.

You can also play the i-motion and use

Music&Video Channel that downloads the

specified program automatically during the night.

Use 2 phone numbers and e-mail addresses for your FOMA terminal

You can separately use 2 phone numbers

and 2 mail addresses on your FOMA

terminal as if you have 2 terminals. You

can manage the data in your FOMA

terminal, such as Phonebook, Mail boxes,

Dialed calls or standby screen, separately

in “A mode” and “B mode”, or all together

of A/B mode in “Dual mode”.

* Subscription is required (Charged).

mode

Dual

mode

Phonebook A

Mail box A

Dialed/received calls A

Voice mail A

・・・・・

Phonebook A/B

Mail box A/B

Dialed/received calls A/B

Voice mail A/B

・・・・・

Phonebook B

Mail box B

Dialed/received calls B

Voice mail B

・・・・・

Menus

Set display design simultaneously

Installed “ダイレクトメニュー” (Direct menu) allows you to access often-used functions/

services easily. Menus are categorized into 4 and located vertically and horizontally. “LAST10”

button is located at the center and automatically displays 10 previously-used functions/

services. The 5 categories link to the multi-function key, and are easy to memorize and operate.

h: SERVICES (Mail, i-mode, i-αppli, Full Browser, Osaifu-Keitai, 1seg, etc.)

j: TOOLS (Alarm, Caluculator, Text memo, Schedule, Receive Ir data, etc.)

g: SETTINGS (Settings, Network services, My profile)

f: DATABOX (My picture, etc.)

d: LAST10 (10 previously-used menu items appear)

* Functions are stored at the time of purchase.

Phone number: 090-AAAA-AAAA

Mail address: xxA@docomo.ne.jp

Phonebook: For A mode

A mode

Phone number: 090-BBBB-BBBB

Mail address: xxB@docomo.ne.jp

Phonebook: For B mode

B mode

Make a call/send

a mail in A mode

Make a call/send

a mail in B mode

2in1→p.320

Music Player→p.277

Kisekae Tool/Direct Menu→p.97

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

■To ensure that you use your FOMA terminal

correctly, read the Precautions carefully

before use. Keep this manual after reading

for future reference.

■The precautions must be observed at all

times since they contain the information

intended to prevent the bodily injuries or

the damage to the property.

■The following symbols indicate the

different degrees of injuries and damage

that may occur if the information provided

is not observed and the FOMA terminal is

used incorrectly:

■The following symbols indicate the specific

directions:

■Safety Precautions are explained in the

following categories:

1. Handling the FOMA terminal, Battery Pack,

Adapter (including the Charger) and FOMA

card (Common) ........................................... 12

2. Handling the FOMA terminal ..................... 13

3. Handling the Battery Pack ......................... 15

4. Handling the Adapter (including the

Charger)....................................................... 16

5. Handling the FOMA card (UIM) .................. 17

6. Handling Mobile Phones near Electronic

Medical Equipment ..................................... 17

DANGER

Don’t

Do not use, keep or leave the devices in

locations subject to high temperatures,

such as near the fire or heater, in direct

sunlight or inside a car on a hot day.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite, cause the devices to

malfunction or be deformed, or suffer

performance loss and a reduced service life.

Also, this may cause a part of the case to

become hot and burn you.

No disassembly

Do not disassemble or rebuild. Also, do

not solder the devices.

This may cause fire, injury, electric shock or

malfunction.

This also may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

No liquids

Do not wet the devices.

Exposing the FOMA terminal and other devices

to liquids such as water or pet urine may cause

overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction,

injury, etc. Be careful where and how you use

the devices.

Precautions

(ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS)

Indicates that the death or

serious bodily injury may result

directly and immediately from

the improper use.

Indicates that the death or

serious bodily injury may

result from the improper use.

Indicates that the bodily injury and/

or damage to the property may

result from the improper use.

Don’t

Indicates that it is prohibited.

No disassembly

Indicates that it must not be

disassembled.

No wet hands

Indicates that you must not touch

it with your wet hand.

No liquids

Indicates that it must not be used

near the water, which means that

you must not wet it.

Indicates that you must do it

following the instructions.

Unplug

Indicates that you must unplug

the power code from the outlet.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

1. Handling the FOMA terminal,

Battery Pack, Adapter

(including the Charger) and

FOMA card (Common)

Continued on next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Use the battery pack and adapter

(including the charger) specified by NTT

DOCOMO for the FOMA terminal.

Using the devices other than those specified by

NTT DOCOMO Group may cause the FOMA

terminal, battery pack and other devices to leak,

overheat, explode, ignite or malfunction.

Battery Pack SO03

Desktop Holder SO11

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

FOMA DC Adapter 01/02

FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use

FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01

FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01

* For the information on other compatible

products, contact the NTT DOCOMO shop or

service counter.

WARNING

Don’t

Do not place the FOMA terminal, battery

pack, adapters (including the charger) or

FOMA card in cooking appliances such as

microwave ovens or in a pressure cooker.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite, cause the FOMA

terminal or adapter (including the charger) to

overheat, smoke or ignite, or damage the IC.

Don’t

Do not shock or throw the FOMA terminal.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices

to malfunction or ignite.

Don’t

Keep the conductive foreign materials

(metal, pencil lead, etc.) away from the

charge terminal or external connector. Do

not insert those matters inside.

This may result in the short-circuit causing the

FOMA terminal to ignite or malfunction.

Turn off the FOMA terminal, when you are

near the flammable gas such as at the

gas station. Do not also charge. It may

cause to ignite to the gas.

Turn off the FOMA terminal, when you use

Osaifu-keitai at the gas station (if IC card lock is

set, turn the FOMA Terminal off after lock is

released).

If you find extraordinary happenings, such

as an unusual odor, overheating,

discoloration or deformation during the

use, charge or storage, make sure to:

Unplug the power code from the power

outlet or the cigar lighter outlet.

2. Turn off the FOMA terminal.

3. Remove the battery pack from the

FOMA terminal.

Continuing to use or charge the FOMA terminal

may cause it to overheat, explode, ignite or leak

of battery.

CAUTION

Don’t

Do not leave the FOMA terminal on a

slope or unstable surface.

This may fall the FOMA terminal and cause the

injury or malfunction.

Don’t

Keep the FOMA terminal away from the

humid, dusty or hot places.

This may cause malfunction.

If your child uses the FOMA terminal,

instruct him/her how to use it. Make sure

that he/she always uses the FOMA

terminal correctly as you instruct.

Improper usage could result in the bodily injury.

Keep the FOMA terminal out of young

children’s reach.

A young child may swallow it or suffer from the

injury.

Pay a special attention when you use the

FOMA terminal connected to the adapter

(including the charger) for a long

duration.

If you use i-αppli or videophone or view 1seg for

a long time while charging the FOMA terminal,

the temperature of the FOMA terminal, battery

pack or adapter (including charger) may rise.

If you touch the warm part of these devices for a

long period of time, it may cause redness, itch,

skin irritation, or burns depending on your

constitution or physical condition.

WARNING

Don’t

Do not direct the infrared data port towards

your or another person’s eyes.

This may cause the eye injury. Do not aim or

direct the infrared data port towards another

infrared device as this may interfere with the

operation of the device.

Don’t

Do not put the FOMA terminal on the

dashboard, etc. as a problem may occur

due to air bag inflation.

The air bag inflation may cause the FOMA

terminal to hit you or another person, which may

lead to injury, malfunction, breakage, etc.

Don’t

If you are wearing electronic medical

equipment, do not put the FOMA terminal

in your breast pocket or in the inside

pocket.

Using the FOMA terminal in close proximity to

electronic medical equipment may cause the

equipment to malfunction.

2. Handling the FOMA terminal

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Don’t

Do not put fluids such as water or objects

such as pieces of metal or flammable

materials into the FOMA card inserting

slots or microSD card slots inside of the

FOMA terminal.

Such actions could cause fire, electric shock or

malfunction.

Turn off the FOMA terminal in a place

where it is prohibited to use the mobile

phone, such as in an airplane or in a

hospital.

This may affect the electric or medical

equipment. If the FOMA terminal is set with the

Auto power function, make sure to disable the

function before turning off the FOMA terminal.

Follow the instructions provided by the medical

facility about using the mobile phone.

If you use the phone in an airplane, which

is prohibited, you may be punished by law.

Make sure to hold the FOMA terminal off

your ear and keep enough distance from

it when you talk in the handsfree mode.

When you also play games or music with

an earphone-microphone connected to

the FOMA terminal, adjust the volume

properly.

If the volume is too high, it may cause an

auditory disturbance.

Also, it may cause an accident if you have difficulty

in hearing the sound of your surroundings.

If you have a weak heart, take

precautions when setting the Vibrator or

Ring volume.

This may affect your heart.

If you hear thunder while using the FOMA

terminal outdoors, immediately turn off

the FOMA terminal and take shelter in a

safe location.

There is a risk of being struck by the lightning

and suffering an electric shock.

Turn off the FOMA terminal near the

electric equipment using the high-

precision control or weak signals.

This may interfere with the operation of sensitive

electronic equipment.

* Take great care on the following electric

devices:

Hearing aids, implantable cardiac pacemakers,

implantable cardioverter-defibrillators, and other

electronic medical equipment, fire alarms,

automatic doors and other equipment controlled

by electronic signals.

If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker,

implantable cardioverter-defibrillator or other

electronic medical equipment, contact the

respective manufacturer or vendor to check

whether the operation of the equipment is

affected by radio waves.

If the display or camera lens is broken, be

careful of the broken glass and the inside

of exposed FOMA terminal.

The surface of the display or camera lens is

covered by a plastic panel to minimize the

possibility of glass scattering. However, touching

the broken or exposed parts cause the injury.

CAUTION

Don’t

Do not swing the FOMA terminal by its

strap or other parts.

The FOMA terminal may strike you or others

around you, resulting in body injury, malfunction

or damage to the FOMA terminal or other

property.

Don’t

When you use the motion tracking, be

sure to confirm surrounding safety, grasp

the FOMA terminal firmly and do not

swing the FOMA terminal more than the

necessity.

Motion tracking is a function to operate the

FOMA terminal by inclining and shaking it. It hits

the person and others because of the shake too

much, and there is a possibility of causing a

serious accident and damage.

Don’t

With metallic straps or other metallic

objects in the FOMA terminal and

applying the motion tracking, be sure to

not hit the person or others.

It causes injury, malfunction or breakage.

Don’t

Do not let the FOMA terminal come close

to or sandwich magnetic cards, etc.

between the FOMA terminal.

The magnetic data stored on cash cards, credit

cards, telephone cards, floppy disks, etc. may

be erased.

Don’t

Do not let the FOMA terminal come close

to magnetism.

If strong magnetism is brought close, operation

may fail.

Don’t

If the display is broken and the liquid

crystal leaks, do not take it in, draw it in

or put it on your skin.

If the liquid crystal comes into your eyes

or mouth, immediately rinse your eyes or

mouth with clean water and see a doctor.

If the liquid crystal adheres to your skin

or clothing, immediately wipe it off with

alcohol and rinse it off with water and

soap.

It may cause a loss of eyesight or damage your

skin.

Don’t

When the FOMA terminal plays the ring

tone or plays a melody, do not bring the

speaker close to your ear.

It may cause a hearing defect.

Continued on next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

In some types of vehicle, using the FOMA

terminal in the vehicle may interfere with

the operation of the vehicle’s electronic

equipment.

Do not use the FOMA terminal if the terminal

may impair the safe driving.

Using the FOMA terminal may cause skin

irritations such as itch, rashes or

eczema. If this occurs, immediately stop

using the FOMA terminal and see a

doctor.

Metal components are used for the following

parts.

Take care not to pinch your finger or

strap when opening or folding the FOMA

terminal.

It cause injury or breakage.

When viewing 1seg programs, keep a

proper distance from the display in a

bright place.

Failure to observe this precaution may cause

visual deterioration.

■Refer to the information shown on

the battery pack label to check the

type of battery pack you have.

DANGER

Don’t

Do not let wire or other metals touch the

terminal. Also, do not carry or store the

battery pack with metallic necklaces, etc.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

Don’t

If you have difficulty in attaching the

battery pack to the FOMA terminal, do

not use the excessive pressure to force

the battery into place. Check that the

battery pack is facing in the correct

direction before you try to attach it.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

Don’t

Do not throw the battery pack into a fire.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

Don’t

Do not puncture the battery pack, hit it

with a hammer or step on it.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

If battery fluid comes into your eyes, do

not rub your eyes but immediately rinse

your eyes with clean water and see a

doctor.

This may result in loss of eyesight.

WARNING

Don’t

If a battery pack malfunction is found due

to an external shock such as deformation

or damage by a fall, immediately stop

using the FOMA terminal.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices

to malfunction or ignite.

If the battery pack is not fully charged

after the specified charging time has

elapsed, stop charging.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite.

If the battery pack leaks or emits an

unusual odor, stop using it immediately

and move it away from any flame or fire.

The battery fluid is flammable and could ignite,

causing a fire or explosion.

Be sure that your pet doesn’t bite to the

battery pack.

This may cause the battery pack to leak,

overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices

to malfunction or ignite.

CAUTION

Don’t

Do not dispose of used battery packs

with ordinary garbage.

This causes a fire and constitute an

environmental hazard. Apply insulation tape to

the terminal of used battery pack and return it to

the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter, or

dispose the battery pack in accordance with

your local regulations.

Parts Material Finish

Multifunction key PC resin Aluminum

deposition + UV

coating

Sidekeys

Illumination parts Tin deposition +

UV coating

Camera parts ABS resin Tin deposition +

UV coating

Hinge parts Nickel Chromium plating

Charging terminal

(contact terminal

for desktop holder)

Phosphorus

bronze

Nickel + Gold plate

3. Handling the Battery Pack

Display Battery type

Li-ion00 Lithium-ion

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Don’t

Do not charge the wet battery pack.

This causes the battery pack to overheat, ignite,

or explode.

If battery fluid comes into contact with

your skin or clothing, stop using the

FOMA terminal immediately and rinse it

off with clean water.

Battery fluid is harmful to your skin.

WARNING

Don’t

Do not use the adapter (including

charger) of which the cord or power cord

is damaged.

This may cause electric shock, overheat or fire.

Don’t

Do not use the AC adapter or desktop

holder in humid locations such as

bathroom.

This may cause an electric shock.

Don’t

The DC adapter must be used only for

vehicles with a negative ground. Do not

use the adapter in positively grounded

vehicles.

This may cause a fire.

Don’t

Do not touch the FOMA terminal, adapter

(including charger) when you hear a

crash of thunder.

There is a risk of being struck by the lightning

and suffering an electric shock.

Don’t

Do not short-circuit the charging terminal

when the adapter or charger is plugged

to the power outlet or the socket in a

vehicle. Also, do not let the charging

terminal contact with your body (hand,

finger, etc.).

This may cause fire, malfunction, electric shock

or injury.

Don’t

Place the charger or desktop holder on a

stable surface during charging. Also, do

not cover or wrap the charger or desktop

holder with clothing or bedding.

This may cause the FOMA terminal to fall out of

the charger or heat to build up, resulting in a fire

or malfunction.

Don’t

Do not put heavy objects on the power

cord of the adapter (including charger).

This may cause electric shock or fire.

No wet hands

Do not touch the power cords of the

adapter (including charger) or the power

outlet with wet hands.

This may cause an electric shock.

Use the specified power supply and

voltage.

Using the adapters with incorrect voltage may

cause a fire or malfunction. Use the AC adapter

for global use to charge the terminal overseas.

AC adapter: AC 100V

DC adapter:

DC12V/24V (specific to vehicle with

negative ground)

AC Adapter for global use:

100V to 240V AC (should be plugged to

AC power outlet for home use only)

If the fuse in the DC adapter blows,

always replace it with the specified type

of fuse.

Using the unspecified fuse may cause a fire or

malfunction.

Refer to the respective manuals for the

information on the specified fuse.

Wipe off any dust on the plug.

This may cause a fire.

When plugging the AC adapter into a

power outlet, make sure that no metallic

straps or other metallic objects are

caught between the plug and the socket.

This may result in an electric shock, short-circuit

or fire.

Always grasp the plug when unplugging

the adapter or charger from the power

outlet or cigar lighter socket. Do not pull

the cord itself.

Pulling the cord may damage the cord and

cause an electric shock or fire.

Unplug

Unplug the power code from the power

outlet when it will be left unused for a

long period.

This may cause electrical shock, fire or

malfunction.

Unplug

If any water or other liquid gets into the

adapter or charger, immediately unplug it

from the power outlet or socket.

This may cause an electric shock, smoke

emission or fire.

Unplug

Unplug the adapter or charger from the

power outlet or cigar lighter socket

before cleaning.

This may cause an electric shock.

4. Handling the Adapter

(including the Charger)

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

CAUTION

Be careful about a cut surface when

dismounting the FOMA card (IC part).

This may injure your hands or fingers.

■The following precautions conform

to the guidelines drawn up during

the Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conference Japan, regarding how

to protect electronic medical

equipment from radio waves

emitted by mobile phones.

WARNING

Observe the following in hospitals or

other medical facilities:

aDo not take your FOMA terminal into

operating rooms, ICUs (Intensive Care Units)

or CCUs (Coronary Care Units).

aTurn off your FOMA terminal inside hospital

wards.

aTurn off the FOMA terminal even if you are in

a hospital lobby when electronic medical

equipments are in use nearby.

aIf a medical facility gives specific instructions

prohibiting you from carrying or using mobile

phones, follow those instructions.

aIf the FOMA terminal is set with the Auto

power function, make sure to disable the

function before turning off the FOMA

terminal.

Turn off the FOMA terminal in crowded

places such as rush-hour trains in case

somebody nearby is using an

implantable cardiac pacemaker or

implantable cardioverter-defibrillator.

Radio waves may affect the operation of

implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter-defibrillators.

If you use an implantable cardiac

pacemaker or implantable cardioverter-

defibrillator, keep the FOMA terminal at

least 22 cm away from the devices.

Radio waves may affect the operation of

implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter-defibrillators.

If you use the electronic medical

equipment other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter-defibrillators out of the

medical facility due to the home

treatment, etc,, consult the respective

manufacturers for the information about

the effects of radio waves on the

equipment.

Radio waves may affect the operations of the

electronic medical equipment.

5. Handling the FOMA card

6. Handling Mobile Phones near

Electronic Medical Equipment

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

General Notes

cDo not water the devices.

The FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapter

(including the charger) and the FOMA card (UIM)

are not water-proof. Do not use them in humid

locations such as bathrooms, and avoid exposing

them to rain. If you carry your FOMA terminal close

to your skin, sweat may cause internal components

to corrode and result in a malfunction. If the

problem is found to be due to moisture, it will not be

covered by the warranty and in some cases may be

irreparable. Even if it can be fixed, you will be

charged since the damage is not covered by the

warranty.

cWipe with a soft, dry cloth (such as a cloth

for glasses).

aThe surface of the FOMA terminal’s LCD has a

specific coating to improve the visibility of the

color display. Rubbing the LCD of the FOMA

terminal with a dry cloth to clean it may scratch

the LCD surface. Handle the FOMA terminal

carefully and clean it using a soft dry cloth (of a

type used for eyeglasses). The LCD coating may

peel off or stain if moisture or soiling is left on the

surface for a long period.

aNever use chemicals such as alcohol, thinners,

benzene or detergents as these agents may

erase the printing on the FOMA terminal or

cause discoloration.

cOccasionally clean the connection

terminals with a dry cotton bud.

Soiled connection terminals may result in poor

connections and loss of power. Also, as it may

cause insufficient charging, clean the terminal with

a dry cloth or cotton bud when it is dirty.

cDo not place the FOMA terminal near an air

conditioning vent.

Condensation may form due to rapid changes in

temperature, and this may cause internal corrosion

and malfunction.

cDo not apply an excessive pressure or

weight to the FOMA terminal and battery

pack.

Do not put the FOMA terminal in a bag filled with

many objects or in the hip pocket of clothing as you

sit down. This may result in faults or damage to the

LCD, other internal components or battery pack.

When an external device is connected to external

connector, it may cause connecting breakage or

malfunction.

cRead the separate manuals supplied with

the FOMA terminal, adapter and charger

carefully.

cDo not scrabble the display with metallic

objects.

This may cause scratch, malfunction or damage.

Handling the FOMA Terminal

cAvoid using the FOMA terminal in extremely

high or low temperatures.

Use the FOMA card within a temperature range

between 5°C and 35°C with humidity between 45%

and 85%.

cUsing the FOMA terminal close to ordinary

phones, TVs or radios may affect the

operation of such devices. Use the FOMA

terminal away from such devices.

cIt is your responsibility to keep a separate

record of all data stored on your FOMA

terminal.

Under no circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be

liable for any loss or damage to the data stored on

your FOMA terminal.

cWhen connecting an external device to the

external connector (Earphone/microphone

terminal), do not plug inclined in the

connector or pull the code.

This may cause malfunction or damage.

cDo not fold the FOMA terminal with its strap

caught between the folding parts.

This may cause malfunction or damage.

cIt is normal for the FOMA terminal to become

warm while being used or charged. It is not a

malfunction and you can keep on using.

cDo not leave the camera exposed to direct

sunlight.

This may discolor or burn the element.

cUsually fit the external connector cap and

microSD card slot cap before use.

Failing to fit these covers may cause the FOMA

terminal to malfunction due to the dust or water

getting in.

cDo not use FOMA terminal when the back

cover is removed.

This may cause of removing the battery pack,

malfunction or damage.

Do not put a sticker with an extreme thickness,

etc. on the face of the display or keys.

This may cause malfunction.

cDo not remove the microSD card or turn off

the FOMA terminal when using the microSD

card.

Otherwise, loss of data or malfunction may result.

Handling the Battery Pack

cThe battery pack is consumable.

If the battery pack does not work for enough time

even when it is fully charged, it is time to exchange

it. Exchange it for a specified new battery pack.

cCharge the battery pack within the proper

ambient temperature range (5°C to 35°C).

Make sure to charge the battery when you use

the FOMA terminal for the first time or if you

have not used it for a long period of time.

Handling with Care

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

cThe available operating time of the battery

pack depends on the conditions in which

you use it and the condition of the battery

pack itself.

cWhen the life of the battery pack is near

end, the battery pack may expand a little

according to the usage condition, but this is

not a malfunction.

cDo not keep or leave the battery pack

empty.

The performance and life of the battery pack may

be deteriorated.

Handling the Adapter (including the

Charger)

cCharge the battery pack within the proper

ambient temperature range (5°C to 35°C).

Do not charge the battery pack in the

following places:

aIn a humid, dusty or shaky place

aNear your home phone, TV or radio

cIt is normal for the adapter or charger to

become warm while being charged. It is not

a malfunction and you can keep on using.

cDo not use the DC adapter to charge the battery

pack when the car engine is not running.

This may drain the car battery.

If you use an electrical outlet with a disconnection

prevention mechanism, follow the instructions of

the user’s manual of the outlet.

Do not shock the adapter or charger. Do not

deform the charging terminal.

This may cause malfunction.

Handling the FOMA card

cDo not apply unnecessary force to attach or

remove the FOMA card.

cIt is normal for the FOMA card to become

warm while being used. It is not a

malfunction and you can keep on using.

cThe warranty does not cover damage

caused by inserting the FOMA card into

some other type of IC Card reader/writer.

cAlways keep the IC part clean.

cWipe with a soft, dry cloth (such as a cloth

for glasses).

cIt is the user’s responsibility to keep a

separate record of all data stored on your

FOMA card.

Under no circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be

liable for any loss or damage to the data stored on

your FOMA terminal.

cTo preserve the environment, take

discarded FOMA card to the NTT DOCOMO

shop or service counter.

cAvoid using the FOMA card in extremely

high or low temperatures.

cDo not damage, scratch, touch imprudently,

or short circuit the IC.

Otherwise, loss of data or malfunction may result.

cBe careful not to drop the FOMA card or

apply an impact to it.

This may cause malfunction.

cDo not bend the FOMA card or place a

heavy object on it.

This may cause malfunction.

cDo not attach the FOMA card to the FOMA

terminal with a label or sticker is pasted.

This may cause malfunction.

Handling the FeliCa Reader/Writer

cThe FeliCa reader/writer function of the

FOMA terminal uses very weak radio waves

that require no licensing of radio stations.

cThe 13.56MHz frequency band is used. If

there is another reader/writer around, keep

enough distance between the FOMA

terminal and that reader/writer. Also, make

sure that there is no radio equipment using

the same frequency band nearby.

Caution

cDo not use the altered FOMA terminal.

Using the altered device is a violation of the

Radio Law.

The FOMA terminal is certified to conform to

technical regulations for specified radio

equipments that are based on the Radio Law, and

“Technical Conformity Mark ” is affixed on the

model name seal as the certification. If you remove

the screw and alter inside of the FOMA terminal,

the technical regulations conformity certification

becomes invalid. Do not use the FOMA terminal

with the certification invalid, as it is a violation of

the Radio Law.

cBe careful when you use the FOMA terminal

while driving a vehicle.

The penalty is imposed on using a mobile phone

while driving. Unwillingly receiving a call, use the

Hands-free to tell the caller that you will call back,

then stop the car in a safe place before using the

phone.

cUse the FeliCa reader/writer function in

Japan.

The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA

terminal complies with radio standard in Japan.

You may be punished if you use it overseas.

cUse the IC card authentication function in

Japan.

The IC card authentication function of the FOMA

terminal complies with radio standard in Japan and

is certified. You may be punished if you use it

overseas.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

It is prohibited to duplicate, modify or publicly transmit

content such as text, images, music or software that was

photographed using the FOMA terminal or downloaded

from Internet website and that is subject to third-party

except where the duplication or quoting of the content for

personal use is permitted under copyright law.

It may be prohibited to shoot or record the stage

performance, entertainment or exhibition even if it is for

personal use.

Shooting a photo of someone by the FOMA terminal

without his or her permission, or displaying a photo of

someone shot by the FOMA terminal on the website

without his or her permission is a breach of portrait right.

Trademarks

a“FOMA”, “mova”, “i-mode”, “i-αppli”, “i-αppli DX”,

“i-motion”, “Deco-mail®”, “Chaku-motion”,

“Chara-den”, “ToruCa”, “mopera”, “mopera U”,

“WORLD CALL”, “Dual Network”, “FirstPass”,

“visualnet”, “V-live”, “i-Channel”, “DCMX”, “iD”,

“Security Scan”, “i-shot”, “i-motion mail”, “i-area”,

“Short Mail”, “WORLD WING”, “Public mode”,

“DoPa”, “sigmarion”, “musea”, “IMCS”,

“OFFICEED”, “2in1”, “FOMA” logo, “i-mode” logo,

“i-αppli” logo, “ToruCa” logo, “DCMX” logo, “iD” logo

and “HIGH-SPEED” logo are trademarks or

registered trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, Inc.

aFree Dial logo mark is a registered trademark of

NTT Communications Corporation.

a“Catch Phone (Call Waiting service)” is a registered

trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone

Corporation.

aMcAfee® is registered trademarks or trademarks of

McAfee, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the US and/or

other countries.

aG-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE and their logos are

registered trademarks in Japan of U.S. Gemstar-TV

Guide International, Inc. and/or its affiliates.

2008 Aplix Corporation.

JBlend and JBlend-related trademarks

are trademarks or registered trademarks

of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries.

a is a registered trademark of FeliCa Networks,

Inc.

aThe microSD logo is a trademark.

a“Multitask” is a registered trademark of NEC

Corporation.

a“Ericle”, “Deco-e maker”, “Style-Up”, “Stand-by

books”, “Shield View”, and “My Shortcut” are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony

Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.

a“PlayNow” is a trademark of Sony Ericsson Mobile

Communications AB.

a“TALKMAN” is a registered trademark of Sony

Computer Entertainment, Inc.

aPOBox and POBox Pro are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

aQuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.,

in the US and other countries.

aMicrosoft®, Windows®, Windows Media® and

Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

aNapster is a registered trademark of Napster, LLC.

and/or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries.

aQR code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave

Inc.

aJava and all Java-related trademarks and logos are

trademarks or registered trademarks of US Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other

countries.

aPowered By Mascot Capsule®/Micro3D Edition™

MASCOT CAPSULE® is a registered trademark of

HI CORPORATION.

aThe other company names and brand names

described in this manual are trademarks or

registered trademarks of the respective companies.

Others

aThis product is licensed complying with MPEG-4

Visual Patent Portfolio License, and you are

permitted to use personally and for the nonprofit

purpose in the following situations:

aTo record a movie based on the standard of

MPEG-4 Visual (MPEG-4 Video)

aTo play MPEG-4 Video recorded by the consumer

engaged in the nonprofit activities

aTo play MPEG-4 Video provided by the provider

licensed by MPEG-LA

When you use it for other purposes, such as

promotion, in-house information and profit activity,

contact the U.S. corporation MPEG LA, LLC.

aFeliCa is a contactless IC card technology

developed by Sony Corporation. FeliCa is a

registered trademark of Sony Corporation.

aPOBox technology has been developed by Sony

Computer Science Laboratories, Inc. and Sony

Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.

Intellectual Property Right

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

aContains Adobe® Flash® Lite™ and Adobe®

Reader® LE technology by Adobe Systems

Incorporated.

Adobe, Adobe Reader, Flash and Flash Lite are

registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

aContent owners protect copyrighted intellectual

properties by WMDRM (Windows Media digital

rights management) technology. This product uses

the WMDRM software to access WMDRM-

protected contents. If the WMDRM software is

unable to protect contents, the content owners

request Microsoft to disable the WMDRM function

of the software for playing or copying protected

contents. No contents other than protected ones

are affected by disabling the function. Please note

that, if downloading the license to use protected

contents, Microsoft may include the revocation list

in the license. Content owners may request

upgrading of the WMDRM software when you

access the contents. If rejecting the upgrade,

contents requiring the upgrade cannot be

accessed.

aThis product contains NetFront Browser and

NetFront Sync Client of ACCESS CO., LTD.

ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or

registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in

Japan, the United States and other countries.

reserved.

aThis product contains the module developed by

Independent JPEG Group.

aThis product contains NetFront

Document Viewer as a document

viewer function by ACCESS CO.,

LTD.

ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or

registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in

Japan and/or other countries.

aIrSimple™, IrSS™ or IrSimpleShot™

are trademarks of Infrared Data

Association®.

aThis product is equipped with IrFront by ACCESS

CO,. LTD. as the infrared data exchange function.

ACCESS and IrFront are trademarks or registered

trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and/or

other countries.

aDialog Clarity and WOW technologies are

industrialized based on the license from SRS Labs,

Inc.

Dialog Clarity, SRS, WOW and the symbol

are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

aThis product contains software licensed complying

with GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU

Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. For

more details, see “readme.txt” in the “GPL・LGPL

等について” folder on the bundled CD-ROM.

(“readme.txt” is only available in Japanese version.)

aThis product is equipped with NetFront DTV Profile

Wireless Edition as data broadcast BML browser by

ACCESS CO., LTD.

This product is equipped with Media:/media colon

as broadcast content activation function by

ACCESS CO., LTD.

ACCESS, NetFront and Media:/media colon are

trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS

CO., LTD. in Japan and/or other countries.

aThis product is equipped with the font “FontAvenue”

product by NEC Corporation.

FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC

Corporation.

aGoogle and mobile Google map are registered

trademarks of Google, Inc.

a© ATR-Trek Co.,Ltd.

aThis product is equipped with GestureTek

technology.

Reserved.

Description of Windows

aIn this manual, each OS (Japanese Edition) is

described as follows:

• Windows Vista stands for Windows Vista® (Home

Basic, Home Premium, Business, Enterprise,

Ultimate).

• Windows XP stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP

Professional operating system or Microsoft®

Windows® XP Home Edition operating system.

• Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft® Windows®

2000 Professional operating system.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Other options and accessories →p.363

Package Contents

FOMA SO706i

(Including the warranty and

Back Cover SO12)

CD-ROM for FOMA SO706i

* This CD-ROM contains the PDF files of

“Manual for PC Connection” and “Kuten

Code List”.

Battery Pack SO03

Manual for FOMA SO706i

(This manual)

* The Quick Manual starts on p.408.

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

(Including warranty and manual)

Desktop Holder SO11

(Including manual)

Before Using the Handset

Component Names and Functions ................................................................................. 24

Display ............................................................................................................................ 27

Menu Selection ............................................................................................................... 29

Changing the Main Menu................................................................................................ 33

The Basic Operations on the Screens ............................................................................ 34

Description of the Operations ......................................................................................... 36

Function Menu ................................................................................................................ 37

Setting the FOMA Card .................................................................................................. 39

Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack ............................................................................ 41

Charging ......................................................................................................................... 41

Checking the Battery Level ........................................................................... 44

Turning the FOMA Terminal On/Off .......................................................... 44

Switching Between Japanese and English .............................................. 45

Setting the Default ........................................................................................ 45

Setting the Clock............................................................................................................. 45

Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number .............................. 46

Checking Your Own Phone Number ................................................................ 46

Battery level

Power ON/OFF

Select language

Initial setting

Caller ID Notification

My Profile

Before Using the Handset

Component Names and Functions

■Functions

1Infrared data port→p.257

2Earpiece

3Display

4u Function key 1

• Performs the function displayed (principally the

FUNC menu)→p.32

• Displays the mail menu

5o Function key 2

• Performs the displayed function →p.32

• Displays the i-mode menu

• Makes videophone calls→p.48

• Switches the character type when entering

characters→p.306

6Multi-function keys

f/g

• Moves the cursor or the displayed contents, etc.

up or down (scrolls continuously when the key is

held down)

•f: Displays Choku-Den→p.78

•g: Displays the phonebook

h/j

• Moves the cursor to the left or right

• Scrolls the display to the previous or next

screens by pages→p.34

•h: Displays the Received calls record →p.53

•j: Displays the Redial→p.53

(

)

* : The Antenna of the FOMA terminal is built-in.

Before Using the Handset

• Performs the function displayed (“Select” or

“Set”, mainly) →p.32

7i Function key 3

• Performs the function displayed→p.32

• Displays the main menu/Simple Menu

→pp.29, 33

• Displays the task change screen→p.283

8p Function key 4

• Performs the function displayed→p.32

• Displays the i-Channel list

9r Send key

• Makes voice calls→p.48

• Receives voice/videophone calls →p.59

• Switches the entered character into upper or

lower case→p.306

0t Back (Clear) key

• Undoes the last step in the operation→p.35

• Puts a call on hold→p.62

• Deletes the entered phone number or

characters→pp.48, 307

!y Power/End of operation/Hold key

• Turns on the power (1 second or longer)/turns

off the power (2 seconds or longer)→p.44

• Ends each function→p.35

• Ends a call→p.49

• Puts an incoming call on hold→p.62

@0 to 9 Dial keys

• Enters phone numbers, characters and numbers

#w key

• Sets the IC card lock (1 second or longer)

→p.206

• Enters “＊” or dakuten/handakuten/kutoten

→p.306

$q/Public mode (Driving mode) key

• Sets Public mode (Driving mode) (1 second or

longer)→p.62

• Enters “#” or the line feed “ ”→p.306

• Returns to the previous reading in 5-touch

→p.306

%Mouthpiece/Microphone

^Charging terminal

&a (▲マナー) Volume up key

• Sets Manner mode (1 second or longer)→p.86

• Raises the earpiece volume during a call →p.61

• Scrolls back the display to the previous screens

by pages→p.34

• Connects to the site set as “Home URL”→p.148

*s (▼メモ) Volume down key/MUSIC

• Lowers the earpiece volume during a call→p.61

• Scrolls the display to the next screens by pages

→p.34

• Reads out the current time (Voice clock)→p.64

• Plays recorded messages→p.65

(microSD card slot

• Used to insert the microSD card→p.244

)External connecter

• Connects an AC adapter (optional), DC adapter

(optional), FOMA USB Cable with Charge

Function 01/02 (optional) or Earphone Plug

Adapter for External connector terminal

(optional)* etc.

* : Connects the flat-plug stereo earphone set

(optional) or the flat-plug earphone/microphone with

switch (optional), etc.

qSpeaker (mono)

wIllumination lamp

• Flashes in the set color when a call/mail arrives

→p.92

• Flashes when there is a missed call/new mail

→p.92

• The center lamp lights in red while charging

→p.44

• The center lamp flashes in red during shooting

mode→p.119

• The center lamp flashes in blue while the auto

timer is activated→p.119

e Lens selector switch

• Switches ● (Standard)/ (Macro) for the

camera→p.118

rCamera

• Shoots still images and movies

• Shoots the movie of scenery during videophone

calls

tThrough-hole for strap

yFeliCa mark

• Reads the IC card→p.202

• iC communication→p.259

uBack cover

*a (▲マナー ) and s (▼メモ ) are

referred to as side keys in this

manual.

Before Using the Handset

Functions that involve holding down keys for 1 second or

longer

The functions available by holding down each key for 1 second or longer in the standby screen are as

follows:

Key Function

Ref. page

hDisplays the Received address

list.

p.177

jDisplays the Sent address list. p.177

2Switches the Shield view. p.90

5Turns the display light on/off. p.90

7Displays the font setting

screen.

p.93

8Sets 2in1. p.320

0Enters “+”. p.51

qSets/Releases Public mode

(Driving mode).

p.62

wSets/Releases IC card lock. p.206

cAdjusts the earpiece volume. p.61

(

▲マナー

)

Sets/Releases Manner mode. p.86

s (▼メモ)Activates the Music Player and

Quits it when playing BGM.

p.280

uCheck new messages p.164

oDisplays the i-αppli software

list screen.

p.187

Activates the function set in

“Holding down ch-key”

(Default: The Photo mode

screen appears)

p.118

tClears the advising shortcut

icons.

p.95

Key Function

Ref. page

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Display

zThe symbols (such as , , , etc.) displayed on the screen are referred to as icons.

zA calendar, etc. can be set to the display.→p.89

●Icons that indicates the status of the FOMA terminal

■Display

The status of the FOMA terminal is indicated with icons in this area →p.27

Clock display→p.93

Shortcut icon display area

・ etc. : Advising shortcut icons→p.94

・ etc. : Pasted shortcut icons→p.94

(1Seg), (Photo mode) and (My selection) are the

default settings.

Task icon display area

・ etc. : Task icons of the activated functions →p.283

Function /i-Channel ticker display area →pp.32, 153

1 3 5 7 9 ! #

2 4 86 0 @

$ ^ *

% & (

) w r y

q e t

Icon Description

1 Signal strength→p.44

Out of service area/Radio wave

does not reach→p.44

Self mode→p.115

2 / i-mode/i-mode communication in

progress→p.136

/ / Packet communication in progress

(no data exchange/sending/

receiving)*

/ Packet communication in progress

(sending/receiving)*

3 SSL-compatible page displayed

→p.138

4 /

(Red)

Unread mail/Inbox is full→p.163

SMS in the FOMA card (UIM) is full

→p.254

Unread mail/SMS in the FOMA

card (UIM) is full→pp.163, 254

(Red)

Inbox is full/SMS in the FOMA card

(UIM) is full→pp.163, 254

Unread Area Mail→p.181

5 /

(Red)

Unread MessageR/Full→p.179

(Red)

Unread MessageF/Full→p.179

Icon Description

Before Using the Handset

* : For details on the icons, refer to the “Manual for PC

Connection” (PDF format) in the provided CD-ROM.

5 / / / Unread message R and F (in red

when each of them is full) →p.179

6 /

(Red)

Mail kept at the i-mode Center/Full

→p.164

“Receive option setting” is set to

“ON” and a mail is kept at the

i-mode Center→p.164

(Red)

MessageR kept at the i-mode

Center/Full→p.179

(Red)

MessageF kept at the i-mode

Center/Full→p.179

7Dial lock→p.101

Secret mode/Secret data only

mode→p.103

/Original lock/Original lock released

temporarily→pp.106, 107

/Secret mode or Secret data only

mode and Original lock is set or

released temporarily→pp.103, 106

8 IC card lock→p.206

9 / microSD mode/MTP mode set→p.251

// USB cable connected and

Communication mode/microSD

mode/MTP mode set→p.251

// Handsfree compatible device

connected and Communication

mode/microSD mode/MTP mode

set→pp.59, 251

// USB cable/Handsfree compatible

device connected and

Communication mode/microSD

mode/MTP mode set→pp.59, 251

0 Infrared data exchange in progress

→p.257

Infrared remote control operated

→p.261

IC card authentication in progress

→p.111

iC communication in progress

(sending/receiving data) →p.259

! microSD card inserted →p.244

microSD card (invalid) inserted

→p.244

Icon Description

! microSD reader/writer operated

→p.252

microSD being accessed→p.247

@ During a voice call →p.48

64K data communication in progress*

During a videophone call →p.48

Switching between voice call and

videophone call →pp.50, 60

# Battery level→p.44

$ Vibrator→p.84

% Ring volume set to “Silent”→p.61

Mail/Msg. ring time is set to “OFF”

→p.85

^ Manner mode→p.86

& Public mode (Driving mode)→p.62

* Music&Video Channel program

reservation set→p.269

( Alarm notification function→p.289

) 1seg timer recording→p.214

q to Voice mail message→p.312

w to Record message→p.65

e to Record VP message→p.65

r Display light set to “OFF”→p.90

Shied view set to “ON”→p.90

Shield veiw set to “ON”, backlight

set to “OFF” →p.90

t Keypad being locked/standby

(Timer set)→p.110

y Side key guard set to “ON”→p.112

zThe display adopts state-of-the-art technology; some

dots (points) may not light up while others may

constantly light up due to its characteristics. Note that

this phenomenon is not a failure.

zYou can check the name of the displayed icons by

selecting “SETTINGS”“Display”“Icons

description”.

Icon Description

Before Using the Handset

Menu Selection

You can run, set, and check the FOMA terminal’s functions in a variety of ways. There are various

methods of the rest though the method of selecting the function from the main menu is general.

Selecting functions from the main menu

You can select the functions of the FOMA terminal from the main menu displayed by pressing i in the

standby screen. The menus are sorted by function.→p.340

<Example: To set “Setting when folded”>

1Press i on the standby screen to display the main menu

2Use b to move the highlight, then press d (Select) to select the displayed

menu sequentially

Tip

If you do not press any key for 15 seconds while

the main menu is displayed, the main menu is

turned off and returns to the previous screen.

c d cd

The highlighted item is

displayed in two lines

and the current setting

is displayed.

Tip

Holding down c

moves the highlight

in sequence.

Before Using the Handset

Accessing functions with the function keys

On each screen, you can access functions easily by pressing the function keys pre-assigned to the

function.

1Press the function key on the standby screen

zWhen using the Simple Menu (p.33), pressing u or o on the standby screen displays the Simple Menu’s Mail

menu or i-mode menu.

Pressing u displays

the mail menu.→p.156

Pressing o displays

the i-mode menu.

→p.136

Pressing p displays

the Channel list.→p.153

Pressing h displays

the Received calls

screen.→p.53

Pressing j displays

the Redial screen.

→p.53

Pressing g displays

the phonebook list

screen.→p.73

Pressing f displays

the Choku-Den

screen.→p.78

Before Using the Handset

Searching menu items to access functions

Even if you do not know the procedure to access the menu, you can still access the desired function by

entering key words to search menu items.

<Example: To access “Select ring tone”>

1Press i on the standby screen, then press u (FUNC), and highlight

“Search”, then press d (Select)

2Enter “ring” and press d (Set), then select the displayed menu

Selecting functions from My select

By storing your frequently used functions (p.92), you can access the menus easily.

1Press i on the standby screen to display the main menu, then press

p (MySelect) in sequence

Pressing p switches between the main menu and My select.

i d

If there are two or

more search

results, press

p (Next) to move

the frame.

The search result

is displayed with an

underline.

Before Using the Handset

Accessing functions by selecting menu numbers

When the main menu is set to “Standard Menu” (p.33), you can access functions quickly by pressing

the keys pre-assigned to the menu numbers (p.340).

<Example: To access “Select ring tone”>

1Press i on the standby screen, then press 13 in sequence

i 13

How to use the function keys

The operation icons (Function display) corresponding to u, d, o, i, p and the direction icons

corresponding to b are displayed on the screen. Only when the corresponding keys can be used, those

icons are displayed.

■Performing the functions assigned to the function key

Press the key for 1 to 5, the function is activated.

1includes (FUNC), (Exit), etc.

When the FUNC key is displayed, press u to show the function menu.

→p.37

The center of 2 includes (Select), (Set), (Play), (Dial) etc.

3includes (Edit), (Finish), (Chrct) etc.

4includes (MENU) and (MULTI).

5includes (ch), (Change), (Ir data), (Pict/Sym) etc.

■Moving or scrolling the screen

Press b in the direction you want to scroll.

[Notation]

■Description of the function display

In this manual, operations related to the keys for the function display are generally described with the

function display in the parenthesis, such as Xd (Select) and Zu (FUNC).

Before Using the Handset

Changing the Main Menu

You can change the design of the main menu (style for background or icon, etc.) as you want.

zWhen you change the design of the menu display using Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may change in

accordance with frequency of using functions. Also, you cannot access some functions entering the menu

number assigned to the functions. In this case, change the main menu to “Standard Menu” (p.33) or perform

“Reset menu op. log” (p.91) so as to operate as described in this manual.

1Press i on the standby screen, then press o (Change) in sequence

2Select an item

“Lacy Pink” to “Standard Menu”

Switches the display design in each menu. When set to “Standard Menu”, you can

access functions by entering the menu numbers.→p.32

“Large Menu”

Large-font menu appears.

“Simple Menu”

Simple Menu consists of frequently used menus, and its character size is large and

operation procedure is simple.→p.349

Sets the character size of the screens to “X-large” all at once. →p.93

“Original theme”→p.91

You can change the icons and background image used on the main menu. You can also set the picture

you shot as the background.

“Kisekae Tool”→p.97

You can change various design of the FOMA terminal such as the main menu all at once with the

Kisekae Tool package.

■Changing the Main Menu temporarily

Highlight an item on the theme screen and press o (Change) to change the main menu temporarily.

When the main menu is displayed again, the main menu before it sets is displayed.

zWhen you set the menu that supports the user customizing, you can sort the menu items by selecting “Manual-sort”

by pressing u (FUNC) in the main menu.→p.284

[Notation]

■Description of the main menu

The menu name may be different depending on the selected theme of Menu display set. Steps are described

using default settings when the phone color is platinum white.

①MAIL ②I-MODE ③I-APPLI ④SETTINGS

⑤DATA BOX ⑥LIFEKIT ⑦SERVICE ⑧PHONE BOOK

⑨OWN DATA ⑩MUSIC ⑪1SEG ⑫OSAIFU-KEITAI

ThemeMain Menu

Switching pages→p.34

Simple Menu

Before Using the Handset

The Basic Operations on the Screens

●When items appear in multiple pages

1Press v to display other pages

To switch the page, press h (or a ( ▲マナー)) for the previous page and press j (or s ( ▼メモ )) for

the next page.

■To display other pages using c

Pressing f displays the previous page when the highlight is located at the top of the list, and pressing

g displays the next page when the highlight is located at the bottom of the list.

●Using the dial keys to select items

1Press 1 to 90wq corresponding to the menu numbers

●Selecting “YES/NO” or “ON/OFF”

1Press c to move the frame, then press d (Select)

Current page/Total pages

The number corresponding to the dial key

Before Using the Handset

●To display images in 9 images display

1Press b to move the frame, then press d (Disp.)

●Entering a security code

1Enter the 4 to 8 digit security code, then press d (Set)

The numbers of the entered security code is displayed as “_”.

The detail screen of the function is displayed when the security code is

successfully entered.

■If the entered security code is incorrect

A message notifying that the security code is wrong is displayed. Re-enter the

security code from the beginning.

●Entering numbers

1Enter numbers by pressing 0 to 9

To enter a 1-digit number or 2-digit number in a 3-digit number entry screen, press

0 twice or once before entering a number.

■To enter “3”

003

●To cancel operations, and to return to the standby screen

■t

Press t to cancel the last operation, such as when you select wrong menu item. Though the previous

screen appears basically, another screen may appear depending on the function.

■y

Press y to complete operations such as settings and to return to the standby screen. Though the function is

completed and the standby screen appears basically, another screen may appear depending on the current

displayed screen and function. If you press y during setting operation, the setting operation is canceled and

the standby screen reappears.

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

Before Using the Handset

Description of the Operations

In this manual, instructions for menu operations are briefly described in almost all cases as follows:

The example of description of operations and the actual operations

1i“LIFEKIT”“Alarm”Highlight the item to set u (FUNC)

①: Press i on the standby screen.

②: Press b to move the highlight to the menu in the double quotation mark, then press d (Select).

③: Press b to move the highlight to the item in the double quotation mark, and then press

d (Select).

Or, press 1 to 9 0 w q for the menu number in the double quotation mark.

④: Press b to move the highlight.

⑤: Press the key for the function displayed in parentheses.

[Notation]

■Omission of Xd in the “Select” and “Set” operations

• When a target function is selected from the main menu or list, such as example ② and ③, Xd (Select) is

omitted.

• In the cases such as “Select an item” or “Enter your security code”, Xd (Select) and Xd (Set) are omitted

in the same way.

• When you are supposed to move to the next step without pressing Xd (Select), “Highlight xxx” is used,

such as example ④.

■Easy operations are preferred

• Though the operation of the main menu has been described, this manual gives priority to the operations

by short cut keys operations (p.30).

• If you select the menu from the Simple Menu, refer to “Simple Menu function list” (p.349).

■Omission of the descriptions after completing the operations

• The descriptions for the operations after completing the function are omitted.

• “To cancel operations, and to return to the standby screen”→p.35

■Brief description of keys and menus

• In this manual, instructions for key illustrations/menu displays/holding down keys are simply described as

follows:

① ② ③ ④ ⑤

Key Menu display Holding down keys

Actual display/operation Menu Press and hold down q for 1

second or longer

Description in this manual 1iMenu q (1 second or longer)

Before Using the Handset

Function Menu

“Function Menu” is one of the menus of the FOMA terminal that can be accessed from the function

display. The function menu activates supplementary functions of each screen.

For example, you can use the function menu to delete a mail after reading it, or to select the folder to

save an image you shot with the camera.

●How to use the function menu

There are mainly three ways to use the function menus. Use the appropriate method depending on the

situation.

①Refer to the explanation of the function menu items from the reference page stated with the operation

screen.

②Refer to the explanation of the function menu items from the function menu index.

③Find the procedure to display the operation screen from the reference page of the function menu.

* “Function menu item” and “Function menu index” in the above illustration are only excerpts.

●Operation target on the list screen

In the function menu on the list screen, either data highlighted in the list or all the data in the list is

targeted by the function. For example, “Edit title” or “Delete this” targets a highlighted title or data, and

“Delete all” targets all the data.

When you select a function menu which targets one data in the list, such as “Edit title” or “Delete this”,

highlight the data, then press u (FUNC).

<Example: To edit the bookmark title on the list screen>

Function menu

Mail

Address (list/detail) . . . . . . . . . 177

Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Folder list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

New mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

New mail

New mail screen (p.156)

Send……Sends i-mode mail.

Save→p.161

Delete receiver……If there are 2 or more addresses

entered, you can delete the address you select.

Change rcv. type……Changes the address type with an

address highlighted.

①

③②

Operation screen with the reference page for the function menu is

illustrated in a blue frame and differentiated from others.

Function menu



p.157

Highlight the bookmark

u (FUNC)

“Edit title” Edit the title

d (Set)

The bookmark title

changes.

Before Using the Handset

●About multiple-choice

When you delete unnecessary data, protect important data or move the data you do not want to be

viewed by others to the secret folder, etc., you can select not only one data or all data but also multiple

data. In this case, perform the following operation.

<Example: To delete multiple mail on the received mail list screen>

●Menus which switch alternately

Depending on the menu, menu items switches alternately as follows:

When the Phonebook detail screen is displayed in “Set

normal font” mode, “Set large font” appears as in

<Example 1>. If “Set large font” is selected, the font

mode changes to large font mode, and “Set normal

font” appears next time the function menu appears.

[Notation]

■Description of the menus which switch alternately

Such menus are described as “Set large font⇔Set normal font”.

zWhen the displayed menu contains sub menus, “ ” appears on the right.

zThe displayed contents of the function menu may vary or you may not be able to select the item of function menu

depending on the operating function and settings. The function menu items you cannot select are displayed in gray.

“Delete selected” Check mails to delete o (Finish) “YES”

Marking a checkbox

When you use b to move the frame to the item to select and press d (Select), the checkbox changes

from to . This means that the item is selected. Pressing d (Select) switches between and .

In the images display, appears when the item is selected. Nothing appears when unselected.

• When “ ” appears on the function display area, pressing u (FUNC) allows you to use “Select all”

or “Release all”.

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

“When normal font is set” “When large font is set”

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Setting the FOMA Card

The FOMA card is an IC card that contains private

information such as your phone number.

Before inserting or removing the FOMA card, first turn

the power off and remove the battery pack. →p.41

Note also that when you try to insert or remove the

FOMA card, keep the FOMA terminal folded and held

in your hand.

●Attaching/Removing the FOMA card

The illustration shows how to attach the FOMA card.

1Put the FOMA card into the card inserting

slot with the IC side downward as shown

in the illustration

2Insert the FOMA card until it is fixed

To remove the FOMA card, carefully pull it out

straight from the following status.

Security codes

You can set two security codes of PIN1 code and

PIN2 code for the FOMA card (UIM). →p.100

FOMA card security function

The FOMA terminal incorporates the FOMA card

security function (FOMA card operational restriction

function) to protect your data and files.

zWhen you download data or files from sites or

receive data attached to mails, the FOMA card

security function is automatically set to these data

and files.

zData and files with this function set are accessible

only when the same FOMA card (UIM) used when

downloading these data or files is used.

zTarget data and files for the FOMA card security

function are as follows:

• File attached to i-mode mail (except for ToruCa)

• Screen memo

• Image inserted into Deco-mail® or signature

•i-αppli (including i-αppli standby screen)

• Image (including the animation and Flash movie)

•Melody

• Word/Excel/PowerPoint data

• Image of ToruCa (detail)

• Image downloaded from the Data Security

Center

• Program of the Music&Video Channel

• Movable contents data

• i-motion

• Chara-den

•Chaku-Uta

®*/Chaku-Uta-Full®

• PDF data

• Kisekae Tool

• Record Videophone message

• Template including data to protect

• Download dictionary

• MessageR/F with attached file (melody/image)

* : “Chaku-Uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment (Japan) Inc.

zThe FOMA card (UIM) that was inserted when you

downloaded or received data or files is referred to

as “your FOMA card (UIM)” and other FOMA cards

as “other FOMA card (UIM)” hereinafter.

Gold colored IC

side down

FOMA card

inserting slot

FOMA card (UIM)

Cut corner

Properly inserted

Before Using the Handset

Settings for replacing the FOMA card

(UIM)

When you replace the FOMA card (UIM) inserted to

the FOMA terminal with other FOMA card (UIM), the

following settings are changed:

zFunctions of which settings are changed to settings

stored on the newly inserted FOMA card (UIM)

• Select language • SMS center selection

• SMS validity period • PIN setting

• Host selection of i-mode common set

zFunctions that are reverted to the default setting

• i-Channel setting

• Access setting for Full Browser

zFunctions that are set to “Invalid”

• Cookie settings for Full Browser

(Cookie information is kept)

zFunctions of which current settings of the FOMA

card (UIM) become invalid

• Program setting of the Music&Video Channel

(Set the program again)

FOMA card type

The FOMA card (UIM) (blue) has the following

functional differences from the FOMA card (green/

white).

zIf the FOMA card (UIM) is not attached or you replace

the FOMA card (UIM) with another one, “ ” is

attached to data and files with this function set and

you cannot set these data to “Display setting” or

“Select ring tone”.

zData and files with this function set are only can be

moved and deleted with other FOMA cards (UIM).

zIf you remove the FOMA card (UIM) or change to

other FOMA card (UIM) when data or a file with this

function set is set to “Display setting” or “Select ring

tone”, these settings are reset to the default settings.

When your FOMA card (UIM) is inserted again, the

settings return to your settings.

When the inserted FOMA

card (UIM) was used to

download data or receive

mails, you can view or play

the data that applies to the

FOMA card security

function.

When the inserted FOMA

card (UIM) was not used to

download data or receive

mails, you cannot view or

play the data that applies to

the FOMA card security

function.

Changing the FOMA card

Your FOMA card

Another

FOMA card

Function Blue Green/White

Max number of

digits for phone

number to be

stored in the

FOMA card (UIM)

phonebook

20 digits 26 digits

User certificate

operation to use

FirstPass

Not available Available

WORLD WING Not available Available

Service Numbers Not available Available

WORLD WING

WORLD WING is DOCOMO’s FOMA international

roaming service that you can make or receive a

call with your proper phone number even oversea

using your FOMA terminal with the FOMA card

(UIM) (green/white) and supporting services.

zFor the customers who have subscribed to the

FOMA service on September 1, 2005 or after, a

separate subscription is not necessary.

However, customers who declared that they did

not require this service at the FOMA service

subscription or who unsubscribe from this

service need a separate subscription.

zFor the customers who have subscribed to the

FOMA service on August 31, 2005 or before

without subscribing to “WORLD WING”, a

separate subscription is necessary.

zThis service is not available in some payment

plans.

zIn case the FOMA card (UIM) (green/white) is lost

or stolen in overseas, contact to DOCOMO as

soon as possible and take the course of service

interruption. Refer to the back of this manual for

the inquiries numbers. Note that you are charged

for the call and communication even after the

FOMA card (UIM) (green/white) is lost or stolen.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Attaching/Removing the

Battery Pack

zMake sure to turn the FOMA terminal off before

removing the battery pack. Note also that keep the

FOMA terminal folded and held in your hand.

●Attaching

1Remove the back cover

Pressing the back cover in direction ①, slide it in

direction ② to remove the back cover.

2Attach the battery pack

With the “ ” side of the battery pack facing up,

attach the battery pack in direction ③ making

sure that the “▲” mark of the battery pack fits

the “▲” mark of the FOMA terminal (Phone),

then press the battery pack down in direction ④.

3Attach the back cover

Lift the back cover about 3 mm and fit the back

claws in the groove of the FOMA terminal

(Phone). Pressing the back cover in direction ⑤,

slide it in direction ⑥ and press the back cover

until the catch clicks shut.

●Removing

1Remove the back cover

2Remove the battery pack

Press the tab on the side of the battery pack in

direction ①, then lift upwards in direction ② to

remove the battery pack.

Charging

Use the specified Battery Pack SO03 for the FOMA

terminal.

■Battery pack life

• The battery pack is consumable. The amount of

usable time decreases every time the battery pack

is recharged.

• When a fully charged battery pack only lasts half as

long as it did at the time of purchase, the battery

pack life is almost over, so it is recommended to

replace it with a new one. When the life of the

battery pack is near end, the battery pack may

expand a little according to the usage condition, but

this is not a malfunction.

• The battery pack life may be shortened if i-αppli or

videophone is used or 1seg is viewed for a long

time while charging.

Make sure that there is no space between the

Back cover and the FOMA terminal (Phone).

Back claws

zDo not use excessive force when the tip of the back

cover is inserted into the FOMA terminal. The finger

tab of the back cover may be broken.

To protect the environment,

take used battery packs to NTT

DOCOMO, the agency, the

recycle shop, etc.

Finger tab

Before Using the Handset

■Battery pack charging

• For details, refer to the manuals for the FOMA AC

Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter for

Global Use 01 (optional) and FOMA DC Adapter

01/02 (optional).

• FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports voltage of 100V AC

only.

• FOMA AC Adapter 02 and FOMA AC Adapter 01

for Global Use support voltage from 100V AC to

240V AC, but the plug shape of the AC adapter is

for 100V AC (domestic). For overseas use, the

compatible conversion plug adapter is required. Do

not charge the battery using the transformer for

travel.

• When charging the battery pack, the battery pack

must be attached to the FOMA terminal.

• You can receive calls during charging if the FOMA

terminal is turned on. However, the battery level will

fall during the call and the time required for

charging will increase. Charging time also

increases when “Charging” of “Backlight” setting is

set to “All time ON”.

• When plugging in or out the connector, do it slowly

and securely not to apply an excessive force.

• When you make a call or perform packet

communication during charging in a high-

temperature environment, the FOMA terminal’s

temperature may rise and the charging may be

stopped. If this occurs, stop a running function and

wait for the temperature or the FOMA terminal to

fall before you retry charging.

■Do not charge the battery pack for a long

period of time (several days) with the

FOMA terminal turned on

• If you charge the battery pack for a long period of

time with the FOMA terminal turned on, power to

the FOMA terminal will be supplied from the battery

pack once charging ends. As a result, you will only

be able to use the FOMA terminal for a short time

and the low-voltage alarm may sound immediately.

In this case, recharge the battery pack correctly.

Disconnect the FOMA terminal from the AC

adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter, then set

it again for recharging.

■Battery usage rough time (The duration

varies depending on the charging time

and the deterioration of the battery pack)

* : To switch networks, use “3G/GSM setting” (p.336).

• The continuous standby time in stationary is the

average usage time when the FOMA terminal is

folded and standing still while radio waves can be

normally received.

• The continuous standby time in moving is the

average usage time when the FOMA terminal is

folded under condition of “stationary”, “moving”,

and “out of service area” within the area where

radio waves can be normally received.

• Note that the actual continuous talk/standby time

and 1seg viewing time may decrease by as much

as half depending on the following conditions: the

battery pack charging level, the function settings,

ambient environment such as temperature, the

status of radio waves (out of service area or weak

radio waves). It may shorten the talk

(communication)/standby time to make i-mode

communication, compose i-mode mail, transfer

data, execute multi access, activate i-αppli or

i-αppli standby screen, use camera, play movie/

i-motion/music and view 1seg.

• Depending on the network condition of the country, talk

(communications) and standby time may decrease.

• When using in Japan, talk (communications) and

standby times will be longer if “3G/GSM setting”

(p.336) is set to “3G”.

Charging the battery pack with the AC/

DC adapter

■AC adapter (optional)

Continuous Standby Time

[FOMA/3G] Stationary (“Auto”*): Approx. 580 hrs.

In transit (“3G”*): Approx. 430 hrs.

In transit (“Auto”*): Approx. 360 hrs.

[GSM] Stationary (“Auto”*): Approx. 290 hrs.

Continuous Talk Time

[FOMA/3G] Voice communications: Approx. 220 min.

Videophone: Approx. 100 min.

[GSM] Voice communications: Approx. 190 min.

1seg Viewing Time

Normal: Approx. 280 min.

ECO mode: Approx. 350 min.

100V AC power outlet

Plug

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

Release

button

Plug the connector with arrows

side facing upward

Connector cap

Connector

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

■DC adapter (optional)

1Open the external connector cap of the

FOMA terminal

2Plug the AC/DC adapter connector

horizontally into the FOMA terminal’s

external connector

3Plug the AC adapter into the outlet

Plug the DC adapter into the cigarette

lighter socket in your car

Charging starts.

4When charging is completed, remove

the AC adapter/DC adapter connector

horizontally from the FOMA terminal

while pressing the release button

Do not pull the connector with excessive force

because this may cause a malfunction.

5Unplug the AC adapter from the outlet

Unplug the DC adapter from the

cigarette lighter socket in your car

6Close the external connector cap of

the FOMA terminal

Charging the battery pack with the

desktop holder

Plug the connector of the AC adapter

(optional) horizontally to the terminal on

the back of the desktop holder (optional)

2Plug the AC adapter into the outlet

3Hold down the desktop holder and

place the FOMA terminal securely in

the direction of the arrow

4After charging is completed, hold down

the desktop holder, then lift the FOMA

terminal up in the direction of the arrow

Standard charging time

Approx. 120 min.

Cigarette lighter socket

Plug

FOMA DC Adapter 01/02

Standard charging time

Approx. 120 min.

Plug

100V AC power outlet

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

Desktop Holder SO11

Connector

Plug the connector

with arrows side

facing upward

Before Using the Handset

Checking the Battery Level

The battery level is indicated only as a guide.

Checking the battery level with icon

When the FOMA terminal is turned on, the icon

indicating the remaining battery level is displayed.

Checking the battery level with sound

and animation

The current battery level is indicated by sound and

animation.

1i“SETTINGS”“Other settings”

“Battery level”

The check screen is displayed, and beeps sound

in accordance with the level. The battery level

animation disappears in about 3 seconds.

“3 short beeps” : Full charge.

“2 short beeps” : Partial charge.

“1 short beep” : The battery is almost running

out. Recharge the battery.

When the battery runs out

The screen as shown on the left

appears and the low-voltage

alarm sounds. The alarm sounds

for about 10 seconds and the

power is turned off in about 1

minute. To stop this alarm, press

any key (except for side keys).

Turning the FOMA Terminal

On/Off

Turning the FOMA terminal on

zBefore turning the FOMA terminal on, make sure

that the FOMA card is inserted correctly.

1y (1 second or longer)

After Wake-up screen appears, the standby

screen or initial settings screen appears. If you

have just attached the battery pack or you turn

the FOMA terminal back on immediately after

turning it off, “Wait a minute” message may

appear for a short time.

■When “ ” appears

You are outside the FOMA

service area or in a place

where radio waves do not

reach. Move to a place where

the radio reception level icon

such as “ ” appears. The

reception level is displayed

as follows:

■If the Initial setting screen appears→p.45

■If the PIN1 code/PIN2 code entry screen

appears→p.100

zThe center illumination lamp lights up in red during

charging. The charge lamp turns off when charging

ends (Full charge). If the FOMA terminal is turned on,

“ ” flashes during charging and “ ” lights when

charging ends.

You can set illumination for charge start/end.→p.92

zThe battery pack cannot be charged separately.

Always charge the battery pack while it is attached to

the FOMA terminal.

zIf the battery runs out, the center illumination lamp may

not lights up right away, but the charging itself has started.

zWhen the center illumination lamp of the FOMA terminal

(Phone) and “ ” on the display disappears, and the

message “Charge unusual Stop charge” is displayed,

disconnect the FOMA terminal from the AC adapter or DC

adapter and remove the battery pack. Then set them again

for recharging. If the same error occurs again, there may be

a problem or fault on the AC adapter or DC adapter.

Contact the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter.

The DC Adapter uses a 2A fuse. If the fuse (2A) blows,

always use a fuse with the same specifications. Fuses

(2A) are consumable items. Purchase a replacement

fuse at your local car accessory shop, etc.

zAttach the FOMA terminal to the desktop holder

securely. Also, take care not to pinch the strap.

: Full charge.

: Partial charge.

: The battery is almost running

out. Recharge the battery.

zThe recharge battery screen and 3 short beeps sound

during a voice call and the recharge battery screen

(“Camera Off” message to the other party) appears

during a videophone call to notify. Note that the call

will be disconnected in about 20 seconds and the

power turns off in about one minute.

zWhen you change the FOMA card (UIM), you have to

enter the 4 to 8 digit security code after turning on the

FOMA terminal. The standby screen appears when the

security code is successfully entered. When you enter

wrong security code for 5 times, the FOMA terminal turns

off (however, you can turn on the FOMA terminal again).

Ｒｅｃｈａｒｇｅｂａｔｔｅｒｙ

Standby

Good Poor

Before Using the Handset

Turning the FOMA terminal off

1y (2 second or longer)

The shutdown screen “SO706i” appears and the

power is turned off.

Turning the FOMA terminal on/off

automatically

Set the Auto power function, the power supply

automatically on or off at the specified time.

zThe FOMA terminal does not turn off during using

another function, even if the Auto power OFF set time is

reached. In addition, the FOMA terminal does not turn

off when the alarm notification time or the i-αppli Auto-

start time is the same as the Auto power OFF set time.

The FOMA terminal turns off after finish the function.

zIf the FOMA terminal turns off, the Music&Video

Channel program is not downloaded and reserved

update of the software or 1seg timer recording is not

available. Note above when setting Auto power OFF.

<Example: To turn the FOMA terminal on automatically>

1i“SETTINGS”“Clock”“Auto

power ON”

■To turn the FOMA terminal off automatically

“Auto power OFF”

2“Active”Enter the timeSelect

whether to repeat or not

■To cancel the Auto power ON/OFF

“Inactive”

Switching Between Japanese

and English

You can switch the languages between Japanese and

English to display function names and messages on

the display.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“Select

language”“English”

■To change from English to Japanese

“日本語”

Setting the Default

After turning the FOMA terminal on, you can set “Set

main time”, “Change security code”, “Character size”

and “Keypad sound” as initial settings.

1Initial setting screen“YES”

2Set the main time→p.46

3Change the security

code→p.101

The default setting is “0000” (4

zeros).

4Set the font size→p.93

5Set the keypad sound→p.85

6Check the contents about Software

Update, then select “OK”

Setting the Clock

Use “Set main time” to set the date and time for the

FOMA terminal. Use “Set sub clock” to show/hide the

sub clock or set the display mode.

zThe FOMA terminal offers the function to retrieve

the time information (Greenwich Mean Time, GMT)

and time zone information (Area you are in) and

adjust time automatically.

zThere are different time zones from GMT. If multiple

cities or areas are registered in the same time

zone, “ ” appears. Press o to change cities

or areas.

zIf the battery runs out or “Auto power OFF” activates

then the power is turned off, a screen appears

indicating that the power was turned off last time.

zBefore entering an area such as an aircraft or hospital

where there is electronic equipment that uses

extremely precise control systems or very low signal

levels and the use of mobile phones is prohibited, set

the “Auto power ON” setting to “Inactive” and then turn

the FOMA terminal off.

N N

zWhen the FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, Select

language setting is stored on the FOMA card (UIM).

zWhen “Select language” is set to “English”, only two

options of “ON/OFF” are available for “Info notice

setting”.

You can switch announcement language between

Japanese and English for outgoing and incoming

calls in some announcements.→p.316

zWhen you set all functions, the initial setting screen no

longer appears when you turn on the FOMA terminal.

Initial setting

Ｃｈａｎｇｅ

Before Using the Handset

Setting the main clock

1i“SETTINGS”“Clock”“Set main

time”“Auto time adjust”

■To set summer time

“Summer time”

When set to “ON”, time is displayed with 1 hour added.

2Select any item:

Auto……Adjusts the date and time of the main clock

automatically.

Auto……Adjusts the date and time

automatically based on the retrieved time

information and time zone information. Local

time appears during international roaming.

Manual(Time zone set)……Select a time zone

to display the local time.

Manual(Date time set)……Set the date and time of

the main clock manually. Select a time zone, and

enter the date and time.

■To enter the date and time

Use b to move the highlight, then use the dial keys

to enter the numbers.

Setting the sub clock

1i“SETTINGS”“Clock”“Set sub

clock”“display method”

■To set summer time

“Summer time”

When set to “ON”, time is displayed with 1 hour added.

2Select any item:

Auto……Displays the sub clock automatically during

international roaming. If the main time “Auto time

adjust” is set to “Auto”, the main time automatically

changes to the local time, but the Japan time

appears for the sub clock.

Always……Select a time zone to always display the

local time for the sub clock.

OFF……Hides the sub clock.

3“YES” or “NO”

Select “YES” to display the sub clock.

If “OFF” is selected in Step 2, this step is skipped.

Notifying the Other Party of

Your Phone Number

The FOMA terminal can send your phone number

(caller ID) to the other party’s phone (Display) when

you make a call.

zSince the phone number is important information,

please take care when you send your caller ID.

zYou cannot perform the setting when “ ” is

displayed.

1i“SERVICE”“Caller ID

Notification”Select any item:

Activate/Deactivate……Sets whether to send your

caller ID or not.

Check setting……Checks the current Caller ID

Notification settings.

Checking Your Own Phone

Number

You can display and check your phone number (own

number) stored in your FOMA card (UIM).

1i0

zAfter you set the date and time, you can use functions

such as “Alarm” or “Schedule” which manages the

date and time.

zThe adjustable range of the date and time is between

00:00 on January 1, 2004 and 23:59 on December 31,

2037.

zTime is automatically adjusted e.g. when the power is

turned on with a FOMA card (UIM) inserted.

zA several-second time lag may occur. Time may not

be adjusted depending on the signal status or i-αppli

set as the standby screen.

zTime may not be adjusted depending on the overseas

carrier’s network.

zThe sub clock appears only when “Size” under “Clock

display” is set to “Small”.

zIf “Auto” is selected here and “GMT+09” is not

selected as time zone under “Set main time”, the

Japan time appears for the sub clock (If the time zone

is “GMT+09”, the sub clock does not appear in Japan.

zThis function is available only when the other party’s

phone is capable of displaying the caller ID.

zIf you hear a message requesting your caller ID, make

a call again after setting your caller ID activated.

zYou can easily quote the information stored in “My

Profile” when entering the owner information (such as

name or mail address) on websites, etc. →p.307

zYou can check your i-mode address by selecting

“i-mode menu”“iMenu”“English”“Options” “Mail

Settings”“Confirm Settings”.

zWhen 2in1 is in Dual mode, press c to switch the My

Profile display.

zReset My Profile in B mode when you exchange the

FOMA card (UIM) while using 2in1. →p.291

Voice/Videophone Calls

■Making a Voice/Videophone Call

Making a Voice/Videophone Call .................................................................................... 48

Switching a Voice/Videophone Call During a Call (Caller).............................................. 50

Making International Calls ......................................................................... 51

Using Handsfree Call During a Call ................................................................ 52

Using the Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls Record..... 53

Using Chaku-moji .......................................................................................... 55

Setting Caller ID Notification........................................................................................... 56

Sending Push Signals...................................................................................... 57

Using the Prefix Function................................................................................................ 57

Setting Sub-addresses When Making Calls ...................................... 58

Setting the Alarm Used for Reconnection.............................................. 58

Blocking Out Ambient Noise .................................................................... 58

Making Handsfree Calls in the Car........................................................ 59

■Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call

Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call................................................................................ 59

When the Other Party Switches a Voice/Videophone Call (Caller)................................. 60

Using the Dial Keys to Answer a Call......................................................... 60

Ending/Holding Calls with the FOMA Terminal Folded ....................... 61

Adjusting the Earpiece Volume............................................................................ 61

Adjusting the Ring Volume............................................................................ 61

■Settings for when you cannot take calls

Holding the Ringing/Current Call ....................................................... 62

Using the Public Mode (Driving Mode) .................................... 62

Using the Public Mode (Power OFF) .......................................... 63

When You Cannot Answer a Received Call.................................................. 64

Having the Caller Leave a Message ....................................................... 64

Having Callers Leave a Message During an Incoming Call...................... 65

Playing/Erasing Recorded Messages and Voice Memos ............................................... 65

■Setting the Videophone

Using Chara-den............................................................................................................. 66

Setting Functions for the Videophone............................................................................. 67

Using the Videophone Connecting to External Devices ................................................. 68

WORLD CALL

Hands-free

Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls

Chaku-moji

Pause dial

Sub-address setting

Reconnect signal

Noise reduction

In-car Hands-free

Answer setting

Setting when folded

Volume

Ring volume

Answer hold/Holding

Public mode (Driving mode)

Public mode (PowerOFF)

Missed calls

Record message

Quick message

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making a Voice/Videophone

Call

1Enter the phone number of the other

party

The “Enter phone number”

screen appears.

Always start by entering the

area code, even for calls

within the same area.

You can enter up to 80 digits

for the phone number.

However, only the last 26

digits are displayed.

■To insert a number

Press v to move the cursor to the number to

the left of the position where you want to insert

the number, then enter the number.

■To delete a number

Press v to move the cursor to the number you

want to delete, then press t.

Hold down t for 1 second or longer to delete

all the numbers to the left of the cursor and the

number in the cursor position.

■To re-enter the number

Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the

number and hold down t for 1 second or

longer to return to the standby screen.

2r (voice call) /o (V. phone)

■To switch a voice/videophone call during a

call→p.50

■To put the current voice/videophone call

on hold→p.62

* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera.

A substitute image (Chara-den) or rear

camera image will be sent to the other party.

A substitute image (Chara-den) can be

changed to an image in “My picture”, etc.

using “Select image”.→p.67

■To change a substitute image (Chara-

den)

Zu (FUNC)“Select image”“Chara-den”

Select Chara-den

Enter phone number

Function menu



p.49

The “In-call” screen

appears.

“ ” flashes while dialing

and lights up during the

call.

■If you hear the busy

tone

The line is busy. Call again

after a while.

■If you hear a message saying that the

other party cannot be reached

The other party’s mobile phone is not turned on

or is out of signal range. Call again after a while.

■If you hear a message requesting your

caller ID

Call again with caller ID notification enabled.

→p.46

The “Videophone in-call”

screen appears.

“ ” flashes while dialing

a videophone call and

lights up during the call.

■If a videophone call is

not connected→p.50

■To switch between

substitute image and

camera image

Xd (Change)

Each time you press Xd

(Change), the substitute

image and camera image switch.

■To switch the main screen

Xd (1 second or longer)

“Change main disp.”→p.49

■To enlarge the image to be sent

Adjust the zoom using Xv

Zoom→p.128

■To mute the voice to send

Ya (▲マナー ) (1 second or longer)

The “ ” icon is displayed.

Press Ya (▲マナー ) (1 second or longer)

again cancels muting.

In-call

Videophone in-call

Function menu



p.49

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

■When the 2in1 is in Dual mode

The Outgoing number selection screen appears.

Select a phone number.

3y after talking

Enter phone number screen

(p.48)

Notify Caller ID→p.56

Prefix numbers→p.58

Chaku-moji→p.55

Int’l call→p.52

Multi Number→p.319

Add to phonebook→p.70

Compose message*→p.156

Select image……Selects the image used during a

videophone call from “Chara-den”.

Select “Release settings” to cancel the setting.

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Videophone in-call screen

(p.48)

Substitute image⇔Camera image……Switches

between the camera image and the substitute image.

Change main disp.……Changes the main display.

The screen changes in the order of “Displaying the image

from the other party’s camera on your main screen”→

“Displaying your image on your main screen”→

“Displaying only the image from the other party’s camera”

→“Displaying only your image”

V.phone settings……Sets the screen for videophone call.

Visual prefer.……Sets the image sent to and

received from the other party from “Normal/Prefer

img qual/Prefer motion spd”.

This setting is only retained during the call.

zIf you make a videophone call to an emergency

number (110, 119 or 118) from the FOMA terminal,

the call is automatically changed to a voice call.

zYou cannot receive i-mode mail or a MessageR/F during

a videophone call (you can receive SMS). Received mail

is kept at the i-mode Center and can be retrieved using

“Check new messages” after the videophone call.

zWhen you are using videophone and recording 1seg

simultaneously with the camera during charging, the

“Camera Off” message may appear and the camera

may turn off depending on the temperature of the

FOMA terminal.

zDigital communication charges are still applied to the

caller when the substitute image is displayed during a

videophone call.

What is the Videophone

You can use the videophone call function

between the terminals that support the DOCOMO

videophone system.

zDOCOMO videophone conforms to “the 3G-

324M*2 standard set down in the international

3GPP*1 standards”. Your FOMA terminal cannot

connect to a videophone terminal that uses a

different system from DOCOMO videophones.

*1: 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)

A regional standardization body established to

develop commonly applied technical

specifications for 3rd-generation mobile

communications systems (IMT-2000).

*2: 3G-324M

An international standard for 3rd-generation

mobile videophones.

■How to view the videophone screen

①Main screen (Camera image of the other party

is displayed at the time of purchase)

②Sub-screen (Your substitute image is

displayed at the time of purchase)

③Call duration

④Settings

: Sending or receiving voice/

Transmission error

: Sending or receiving video/

Transmission error

: Sending camera image/Sending

substitute image

: Hands-free ON/OFF

: Muting microphone (in silence)

: Photo mode (Portrait/Scenery/

Close-up)

: Key operation mode (DTMF

mode*1/Whole action mode*2/

Parts action mode*2)

: Sending Chara-den

*1: “Send DTMF tone/DTMF tone OFF”→p.50

*2: “Using Chara-den”→p.66

Voice/Videophone Calls

Brightness……Five brightness levels (-2 to 0 to +2)

are available.

White balance……Sets image color tones.→p.123

This setting is also applied to the equivalent camera

functions.

Color mode set……Selects the image effect from

“Normal/Sepia/Monochrome”.

This setting is only retained during the call.

Photo mode……Sets modes suited to the scene

being shot. →p.122

Chara-den set.……Set the following when Chara-den is

used. This setting cannot be set for the camera images.

Switch Chara-den……Selects the character to be

displayed.

Action List……Checks the available actions and

the corresponding keys. You can also view the action

list by pressing w.

Change Action……Changes the Action mode.

Switch image……Displays the image selected in

“Substitute image” (p.67) on the other party’s display.

Display light……Sets lighting of backlight.

All time ON (default)……Turns the backlight on all

the time.

15 seconds ON……Turns the backlight on for 15

seconds only.

Own number……Displays your phone number during a

videophone call.

Send DTMF tone⇔DTMF tone OFF……Sets/cancels

push signal transmission mode during Chara-den.

Except for Chara-den, videophone calls are always in

push signal transmission mode.

Change to voice→p.50

●If a videophone call is not connected

When a videophone call is not connected, the cause

of the failure appears.

zThe cause may not appear depending on the

situation.

zDepending on the type of other party’s phone or the

possible lack of a network service subscription, the

reason may not accurately reflect the other party’s

actual status.

zIf the videophone call is not connected, your call is

automatically switched to a voice call when you set

“Auto redial as voice” to “ON”. However, the call

may not be handled in this way if you call an ISDN

synchronous 64K, ISDN videophone which does

not support the 3G-324M standard (as of May,

2008) or if you dial a wrong number. Note that call

charge may be applied in some cases.

Switching a Voice/Videophone

Call During a Call (Caller)

zYou can use this function with the terminals

compatible with voice call/videophone call switch.

zYou can switch the voice call only when you are the

caller.

zTo switch the call, the receiver needs to set “Ntfy

switch-mode” to notify the switch beforehand.→p.67

<Example: To switch a voice call to a videophone call>

1In-call screen (p.48)d (V. phone)

“YES”

While switching, the screen which indicates that

the calls are being switched appears and the

voice guidance is played.

Display Cause

Check number then

redial

Phone number is not available

Busy The line is busy

Busy with packet

transmission

The other party is using packet

communication

Out of service area/

power off

The other party is out of service

area or the phone is turned off

Your call is being

forwarded

The call is being forwarded (A

Videophone call is made when

the forwarding number is for a

3G-324M-compatible

videophone.)

Redial using voice

call

The phone for the forwarding

number is not compatible with

videophone calls.

Please activate caller

ID before dialing again

The other party sets the Caller

ID request service.

Your call cannot be

connected

The other party sets the

Nuisance call blocking service.

Upper limit has been

exceeded

Connection failed

The upper limit set for a Limit

billing plan (Type Limit and

Family Wide Limit) is exceeded.

Connection failed Set the caller ID notification to

“ON” and retry

You connected without notifying

your caller ID (when dialing into

visualnet, etc.)

• This message may also

appear in other situations.

Please make your

call from the i-mode

web page

You attempted to make a

videophone call to watch V-live

without browsing the i-mode

official site.

Display Cause

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

■To switch a videophone call to a voice call

Videophone in-call screen (p.48)u (FUNC)

“Change to voice”

Making International Calls

WORLD CALL is an international dialing service that

can be used from DOCOMO mobile phones.

FOMA service subscribers are also subscribed to

“WORLD CALL” when they subscribe to the FOMA

service. (This excludes subscribers who declared that

they did not require the service.)

zWORLD CALL can be used to call around 240

countries and regions worldwide.

zThe “WORLD CALL” is charged with your monthly

call charges.

zIn addition to dialing a phone number, you can

make an international call by adding “+” or

selecting “Int’l call” or “Prefix numbers” from the

function menu in the enter phone number screen,

Redial/Dialed calls screen, Received calls screen

or Phonebook detail screen.

zThis service is not available in some payment

plans.

Using dial keys to make international

calls

1Dial the number in the following order:

010→Country code →Area code (Long

distance code)→The other party’s

phone number

“009130” can be added first.

If the area code (long distance code) begins with

“0”, omit the first “0”. However, to call to ordinary

phones in Italy, “0” is required.

The international call is made.

Quick and simple procedures for

making an international call

zYou can store the country codes and IDD prefix

codes in “Int’l dial assistance”.

●Using “+” to make an international call

By using the “+” that is automatically replaced with

the “IDD Prefix Code” set in the “Auto int’l call set.”,

you can make international calls without dialing the

IDD prefix code.

zIt takes about 5 seconds to switch the calls. Note that

the signal quality may affect how long it takes.

zYou cannot switch the calls during calling in the

following cases:

• When the other party is holding the call

• When the other party activates Record message

zThe displayed call duration is reset to 0 second each

time the calls are switched. However, the total time for

voice and videophone call is displayed after ending a

call.

zDepending on the other party’s communication

conditions or the signal quality, you may not be able to

switch the calls and the call may be canceled.

zWhen the call is switched, the first dialed or received

call is registered to the Redial/Dialed calls records or

Received calls records.

zIf the caller is using i-mode, the i-mode

communication is canceled to switch to videophone.

zIf the other party is using packet communication

(including i-mode), you receive the message “No

Switch” meaning you cannot switch the calls.

zYou cannot switch the calls when “Call Waiting” is

activated.

The digital communication

fee is charged after the

appearance of this screen.

For additional information regarding WORLD

CALL, refer to the contact information provided on

the back of the manual.

“International videophone calls” can be made to

users of some specific overseas 3G mobile

terminals by pressing o (V. phone) to make the

call after using the dialing procedure below.

zSee the DOCOMO website for information on

accessible countries and operators.

zDepending on the other party’s terminal, the image

of the other party displayed on your FOMA terminal

may be distorted or the connection may fail when

making a international videophone.

Voice/Videophone Calls

zAs “Auto int’l call set.” in “Int’l dial assistance” is set

to “ON” (automatically added) at the time of

purchase, the FOMA terminal automatically dials

the IDD prefix code.

1On the standby screen, dial the

following; + (0 (1 second or longer))

→Country code→Area code (Long

distance code)→The other party’s

phone number

If the area code (long distance code) begins with

“0”, omit the first “0”. However, to call to ordinary

phones in Italy, “0” is required.

2r“Dial”

The international call is made.

■To make a call without converting “+” into

the IDD prefix code

“Original phone No.”

* Not available in this terminal.

■To cancel the call

“Cancel”

●Making an international call from the

function menu

You can make an international call by adding a country

code and IDD prefix code from the function menu.

zYou can use the international dial function from the

“Enter phone number” screen and the detail

screens of “Phonebook/Received calls/Dialed calls/

Redial” screens.

<Example: To use the international dial function from

the enter phone number screen>

1Enter the phone number of the other

party

2u (FUNC)“Int’l call”Select the

country codeSelect the IDD prefix

code

The selected country code and IDD prefix code

are added. If the area code (long distance code)

begins with “0”, the first “0” is automatically

deleted (except when “Italy” is selected for the

country code).

The international call is made.

Making the setting for the

international call

<Int’l dial assistance>

You can set the automatic conversion of “+”, and also

edit and store the country codes and IDD prefix code

for international calls.

1i“SETTINGS”“Dialing”“Int’l dial

assistance”Select any item:

Auto int’l call set.……You can set the automatic

conversion of “+” when you make an international

call.

“ON”Select a country codeSelect an IDD

prefix code

■When you do not convert automatically

“OFF”

Country Code setting……

Stores up to 22 country names

and country codes used when

you make an international call.

See the DOCOMO website for

information on country codes.

Highlight an itemo (Edit)

Enter the country name

Enter the country code

IDD Prefix setting……Stores

the IDD prefix name and IDD

prefix code used when you

make an international call. Up

to 3 entries can be stored.

Highlight an item to be

stored or changedo (Edit)

Enter the IDD prefix name

Enter the IDD prefix code

Country Code setting screen

(p.52)

Edit……Edits the country code.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Using Handsfree Call During

a Call

<Hands-free>

You can hear the other party’s voice from the speaker

while talking.

1In-call screen (p.48)o ()

“ ” appears and you can hear other party’s

voice through a speaker during a handsfree call.

While your terminal is ringing, you can switch to

handsfree operation by pressing o (/

Country Code setting

Function menu



p.52

IDD Prefix setting

Function menu



p.58

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

■To cancel the handsfree operation

Press o ( ) during a handsfree call

“ ” disappears when you make a voice call.

“ ” is changed to “ ” in case of videophone.

●Notes on using the handsfree operation

It is recommended to keep a distance of about 30 cm

from the FOMA terminal during a handsfree call. If

the distance is longer or shorter than 30 cm, the other

party may find it difficult to hear you or your voice may

sound differently.

Using the Redial/Dialed Calls/

Received Calls Record

Information on dialed or received calls, including the

caller’s phone number and the date and time are

stored in the Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls

record. You can make a call to the other party easily

by using these records.

zWhen you make calls to the same phone number

repeatedly, the latest entry is stored as the Redial

record and separate entries are stored for the

Dialed calls record.

zThe Redial record can hold up to 30 phone

numbers for voice/videophone calls.

zThe Dialed calls/Received calls record stores up to

30 voice/videophone call entries and 30 packet

communication or 64K data communication entries.

zIf the maximum number of logs is exceeded, logs

are overwritten starting with the oldest one.

<Example: To make a call from the Redial/Received

calls list screen>

1On the standby screenj (Redial)/

h (Received calls)

The “Redial screen (list)”/

“Received calls screen (list)”

appears.

■To check the Dialed

calls

i“OWN DATA”

“Dialed calls”

The “Dialed calls screen

(list)” appears.

2Highlight the Redial/Received calls

record entry

■To make a call after

checking the details of

the Redial/Received

calls record

Select the Redial/

Received calls record entry

The “Redial screen (detail)”

or “Received calls screen

(detail)” appears.

3r (voice call)/o (V. phone)

●Checking the number of missed calls

■To confirm only the missed calls from the

Received calls record

i“OWN DATA”“Received calls”

Total number of received calls, the number of missed

calls and the number of unconfirmed missed calls

appear.

When you select “Missed calls”, only the missed calls

appears.

■Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls record icons

zMove to an area where your call will not disturb other

people before switching to a handsfree call.

zWhen a call is finished, the handsfree setting is

canceled.

Ex. Voice call Ex. Videophone call

Icon*1 Description

Incoming and outgoing/missed/

unconfirmed missed voice calls

Incoming and outgoing/missed/

unconfirmed missed international

voice calls

Incoming and outgoing/missed/

unconfirmed missed videophone

calls

７／２７８：１２

ＳｈｉｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２５２１：３３

ＳａｂｕｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２８１９：２４

ＳａｂｕｒｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２７２２：００

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２７１８：０１

ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２５１７：３０

ＪｉｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

１／２

Ex. Redial (list)

Ｒｅｄｉａｌ

Function menu



p.54

Ex. Redial (detail)

Function menu



p.54

Voice/Videophone Calls

*1: Some icons look different between the detail screen and

the list screen.

*2: Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode.

Redial/Dialed calls/Received

calls screen (p.53)

Notify Caller ID*1 →p.56

Prefix numbers*1 →p.58

Chaku-moji*1→p.55

Int’l call*1→p.52

2in1/Multi Num.*1……When 2in1 is set to ON and Dual

mode, selects from “Number A/Number B/Cancel

number” (p.323) (not available when A mode or B mode is

set).

Selects from “Basic number/Additional number 1/

Additional number 2/Cancel number” (p.319) at the Multi

Number when 2in1 set to OFF.

Ring time*2*3……Displays the missed call record entries

with the ringing times.

Add to phonebook→p.72

Look-up phonebook……“Accessing the phonebook

from the Redial or Dialed Calls record”→p.74

Add shortcut →p.94

Compose message*4→p.156

Compose SMS*4→p.182

Sent address*5*6……Displays the sent address list.

Received address*2……Displays the received address

list.

Select image……Selects the image used during a

videophone call from “Chara-den”.

Select “Release settings” to cancel the setting.

Set large font ⇔Set normal font*3……Switches the

character size of the displayed name.→p.93

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

*1: Available only for the detail screen.

*2: Available only for the Received calls screen.

*3: Available only for the list screen.

*4: Available only when 2in1 is in A mode or Dual mode, and

selecting the record screen for the A mode.

*5: Available only for the Redial/Dialed calls screen.

*6: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Incoming and outgoing/missed/

unconfirmed missed international

videophone calls

*2 Incoming and outgoing calls to B

mode for 2in1 setting

/Recorded voice record message/

videophone message

Received calls with Chaku-moji

Outgoing/Incoming/missed/

unconfirmed missed packet

communication

Incoming and outgoing/missed/

unconfirmed missed 64K data

communication

Incoming packet communication or

64K data communication that is

received without external device

connected

Incoming and outgoing calls when

the time zone is not “GMT+09”

regardless of the “Auto time adjust”

setting (if summer time is set, the

summer time setting applies)

zIf you use 2in1, up to 30 records are stored for each

phone number. Also, when set to Dual mode, up to 30

Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls records for both

phone numbers and total of the 60 records are

displayed.

zIf the same phone number is registered in the multiple

phonebook entries with different names, the name

retrieved by the phonebook search in the order of

reading is displayed in the Redial/Dialed calls/

Received calls record. →p.73

zSetting “Restrict dialing” deletes all the Redial/Dialed

calls records.

zIf you make a call by selecting Multi number from the

function menu, the registered name and number of the

additional number are displayed under the phone

number in the Redial screen (detail)/Dialed calls

record screen (detail). If you make a call without using

the function menu, nothing is displayed even when

“Set Multi Number” is set to additional number.

zWhen “Missed calls display” in the “Ring time(sec.)” is

set to “Not display” and you receive a call of which ring

tone sounded for shorter time than the time set in the

“Set mute seconds”, the call is not displayed on the

Received calls record.

zIf the caller is using “Dial-in”, a number different from

the “Dial-in” number may be displayed.

Icon*1 Description

zWhen you have subscribed to Multi number and make

a call from the Received calls record screen, the

phone call is made from the number which received

the call regardless of the “Set Multi Number” setting.

zWhen you receive a call for additional number of Multi

number, the registered name of the additional number

are displayed under the phone number in the

Received calls record screen (detail).

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Using Chaku-moji

<Chaku-moji>

When making a voice call or videophone call, you can

send a message (Chaku-moji) to the other party to

show the summary of the call, etc. beforehand.

z5 Chaku-moji messages are stored at the time of

purchase. You can change the pre-installed Chaku-

moji messages.

zYou can include pictographs or face marks in

Chaku-moji, and you can send a message of up to

10 characters including pictograph/symbol/double-

byte character/single-byte character.

zFor details on Chaku-moji and the compatible

models, refer to the DOCOMO website or “Mobile

Phone User’s Guide [Network services]”.

Making a call with a message

You can add Chaku-moji when making a voice or

videophone call from the “Enter phone number”

screen and the detail screen of the “Phonebook” or

“Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls”.

<Example: To make a call with Chaku-moji from the

enter phone number screen>

1Enter phone number screen (p.48)

u (FUNC)“Chaku-moji”Select any

item:

Create message……Enters Chaku-moji. You can

enter up to 10 characters.

Select message……Selects from the stored Chaku-

moji.

You can edit Chaku-moji by pressing o (Edit) on

the message selection screen.

Sent messages……Selects from the previously

sent Chaku-moji. You can edit Chaku-moji by

pressing o (Edit) on the sent message screen.

■To delete the entered Chaku-moji (to make

a call without Chaku-moji)

u (FUNC)“Chaku-moji”“Create message”

Clear all the entered Chaku-moji

2r (voice call) /o (V. phone)

●When you receive a voice or

videophone call with a message

The Chaku-moji appears on the ringing screen. The

Chaku-moji disappears when you answer the call.

zSelecting “Delete all” from the Redial/Dialed calls

record deletes all the Redial and Dialed calls records.

Note that selecting “Delete this” or “Delete selected”

for the Redial record does not delete the entries of

Dialed calls record, and selecting “Delete this” or

“Delete selected” for the Dialed calls record does not

delete the entries of the Redial record.

zWhen the phonebook stores the phone number and

the mail address, an address listed first is used as

destination to create a message.

zSending Chaku-moji is charged. Receiving Chaku-

moji is not charged.

zYou can store up to 30 Chaku-moji in the sent

messages record (if you use 2in1, up to 30 sent

messages records when set to each mode, and up to

30 sent messages records for each and total of the 60

records are stored when set to Dual mode). When you

send same Chaku-moji repeatedly, only the latest one

is recorded. When the entries exceed the maximum

number, entries are overwritten from the oldest entry.

zIf the receiver’s terminal is under the following

conditions, Chaku-moji cannot be sent. In this case,

no sending charges apply.

• The terminal is not compatible with Chaku-moji

(“Transmission failed” appears)

• Chaku-moji does not appear on the screen of the

receiver terminal because of the “MSG display settings”

on the receiver terminal (“Transmission failed” appears)

• Public mode (Driving mode) is set

• The ringing time for recording message is set to 0

second.

•

“”

or the FOMA terminal is turned off.

zDepending on the signal status, sending result does

not appear on the sender terminal even when the

receiver terminal receives Chaku-moji. In this case,

sending charges apply.

zYou cannot send or receive Chaku-moji when using

the FOMA terminal overseas.

When the other party’s terminal receives Chaku-

moji, the result “Transmission completed” appears.

Ex. Voice call

Chaku-moji

Voice/Videophone Calls

●Displaying a message from the

Received calls record

When you receive Chaku-moji, the “ ” icon

appears on the Received calls record, and you can

check the Chaku-moji message on the “Received

calls screen (detail)”.

Editing and setting messages

1i“SERVICE”“Chaku-moji”

Select any item:

Create message……Stores

or edits frequently used

Chaku-moji. You can store up

to 30 Chaku-moji (including 5

pre-installed).

Highlight an item to be

stored or editedo (Edit)

Enter the Chaku-moji

MSG display settings……Sets the Chaku-moji display

setting when you receive a call with Chaku-moji.

Display all messages……Displays all Chaku-

moji messages.

Only number in PH-book……Displays only

the Chaku-moji messages from senders stored

in the phonebook.

Calls with Caller ID……Displays only the

Chaku-moji messages from senders providing

the caller ID.

Hide all messages……Hides all Chaku-moji

messages.

Create message list screen

(p.56)

Edit……Edits Chaku-moji.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Setting Caller ID Notification

Set whether to display your phone number (caller ID)

on the other party’s phone (display) each time you

make a call.

zTake care when informing others of your phone

number, as this is important personal information.

zYou can set Caller ID Notification all at once.→p.46

Adding the “186”/“184” prefix to the

other party’s phone number

To provide your caller ID, add the “186” prefix when

you dial the phone number. To withhold your caller ID,

use the “184” prefix.

■To provide your phone number

186 - “The other party’s phone number” - r (voice

call)/o (videophone call)

■To withhold your phone number

184 - “The other party’s phone number” - r (voice

call)/o (videophone call)

Selecting from the function menu

Select “OFF” or “ON” from the function menu the

“Enter phone number” screen and the detail screens of

“Phonebook”/“Received calls”/“Dialed calls”/“Redial”.

<Example: To make a voice call from the Enter phone

number screen>

1Enter the phone number of the other

party

2u (FUNC)“Notify Caller ID”“OFF”

or “ON”

■To cancel “Notify Caller ID”

“Cancel prefix”

When “Cancel prefix” is selected, the “Caller ID

Notification” setting is applied.

zEven when you receive a call whose ring tone

sounded for shorter time than the time set in the “Set

mute seconds” of “Ring time (sec.)”, Chaku-moji is

displayed and recorded in the Received calls record.

zDepending on the status of the sender or receiver,

Chaku-moji may not be displayed even if you receive a

call with Chaku-moji.

zWhen the Original lock is set to “Chaku-moji”, Chaku-

moji is not displayed even if you receive a call with

Chaku-moji. In this case, Chaku-moji is stored to the

Received calls record after releasing the lock.

zEven when you make a call using the Received calls

record, the Chaku-moji in the record is not sent.

Create message list

Function menu



p.56

zYou cannot delete the pre-installed Chaku-moji. Even

when you change a pre-installed Chaku-moji and

delete the Chaku-moji, it is restored to the default.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

3r (voice call)/o (videophone)

Sending Push Signals

By sending push signals from the FOMA terminal,

you can use services such as ticket ordering and

bank balance requests.

Storing dialing data as pause dial

record entries

You can store the dialing data used as push signals to

Pause dial beforehand. Inserting P (pause) into the

dialing data allows you to send data with a separation

where a pause lies.

zYou can store 1 dialing data, consisting of up to 128

characters.

zYou can enter numbers from 0 to 9, the # and *

symbols, and P (pause) for dialing data.

zYou cannot enter P (pause) in succession or at the

beginning of the dialing data.

1i“SETTINGS”“Dialing”“Pause

dial”

The “Pause dial” screen

appears.

■If there is dialing data

already stored

The stored dialing data

appears.

2o (Edit)Enter the dialing data

Press 0 to 9, q and w to enter the

dialing data.

■To enter P (pause)

w (1 second or longer)

Pause dial screen (p.57)

Edit……Edits the dialing data.

Send pause dial……Enters the phone number of the

other party and sends the dialing data.

Each time you press r, the dialing data up to P (pause)

is transmitted.

Delete……Deletes the stored dialing data.

Transmitting the dialing data as a

pause dial

1i“SETTINGS”“Dialing”“Pause

dial”d (Send)

2Dial the phone number of the

destinationr

The FOMA terminal calls the entered phone

number and displays the dialing data up to the

first P (pause) while the dialed phone is ringing.

P (pause) is not displayed.

Each time you press r, the dialing data up to

P (pause) is transmitted. Once the FOMA

terminal has finished sending the last number,

the in-call screen reappears.

■To transmit all the dialing data at once

j (1 second or longer)“Send at one time”

It may not be possible to send all the data at

once to some recipients.

Using the Prefix Function

You can store the prefix numbers such as IDD prefix

code and 186/184 for notifying/withholding your caller

ID beforehand and add these prefix numbers when

you make calls.

Storing the prefix numbers

zYou can store up to 7 prefix numbers.

zYou can enter numbers from 0 to 9 and the #, *

and + symbols.

zThis function is available only when the other party’s

phone can display caller ID.

zIf you hear a message requesting your caller ID, show

your caller ID.

zWhen making an international call, “186”/“184” may be

disabled. Select “Notify Caller ID” from the function

menu.

zIf you make a call with the “186”/“184” prefix, the

phone number including this prefix is recorded in the

Redial/Dialed calls.

Pause dial

Function menu



p.57

zSome phones may be unable to receive push signals.

Voice/Videophone Calls

1i“SETTINGS”“Dialing”“Prefix

setting”

The “Prefix setting” screen

appears.

2Highlight the item to

store or change

o (Edit)

3Enter the name to be

stored

You can enter up to 8 double-byte or 16 single-

byte characters.

4Enter the numbers (prefix)

You can enter up to 10 digits.

Prefix setting screen (p.58)/IDD

Prefix setting screen (p.52)

Edit……Edits the prefix number or IDD prefix code.

Delete this・Delete all……Deletes one or all prefix

numbers/IDD prefix codes.

Making a call with the Prefix numbers

zYou can add the prefix numbers from the “Enter

phone number” screen and the detail screens of

“Phonebook/Received calls/Dialed calls/Redial”

screens.

<Example: To make a voice call by adding prefix

numbers from the enter phone number screen>

1Enter the phone number of the other party

2u (FUNC) “Prefix numbers”Select

the stored namer

Setting Sub-addresses When

Making Calls

<Sub-address setting>

You can set whether to specify “*” in the phone

number as a separator so that the numbers following

“*” are recognized as a sub-address (ON/OFF).

zSub-addresses are used in ISDN to identify calls

made from specific communications devices and to

select content in “V-live”.

1i“SETTINGS”“Dialing”“Sub-

address setting”“ON” or “OFF”

Setting the Alarm Used for

Reconnection

When the signal quality deteriorates during a voice/

videophone call and the call drops out, the FOMA

terminal will automatically reconnect the call if the

signal quality quickly improves. Set the type of alarm

when a call is reconnected for this function.

zThe interval for reconnection varies depending on

communication conditions or the signal quality. It

takes about 10 seconds.

1i“SETTINGS”“Talk”“Reconnect

signal”Select an alarm tone

Select from “No tone/High tone/Low tone”.

Blocking Out Ambient Noise

This function suppresses ambient noise and makes it

easier for the other party in a voice or videophone call

to hear you.

1i“SETTINGS”“Talk”“Noise

reduction”“ON” or “OFF”

Prefix setting

Function menu



p.58

zIn the following cases, “*” does not function as a sub-

address separator. The entered number including “*”

is recognized as an ordinary phone number:

• When the “*” is entered at the beginning of a

phone number

• When “*” immediately follows “186”/“184” at the

beginning of a phone number

• When “*” immediately follows a number entered

using “Prefix numbers”

• When the phone number contains “*590#/*591#/

*592#”

zCall charges apply in the interval (up to about 10

seconds) for reconnection.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making Handsfree Calls in the

Car

<In-car Hands-free>

You can make or receive voice calls with handsfree

compatible devices by connecting the FOMA terminal to

handsfree compatible devices such as the In-Car

Hands-Free Kit 01 (optional) or a car navigation system.

For information on how to use the handsfree device,

refer to the manual provided with the device. The FOMA

In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (optional) is required to

use the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (optional).

Receiving a Voice/

Videophone Call

1Voice/Videophone call is received

The ring tone sounds and the illumination

flashes. The “Ringing” screen/“Videophone

ringing” screen appears.

■When you receive a call with Chaku-moji

The Chaku-moji appears on the ringing screen/

videophone ringing screen. →p.55

■To put a voice/videophone call on hold

while the FOMA terminal is ringing →p.62

The “In-call” screen/“Videophone in-call” screen

appears.

■Operations during a videophone call

You can perform various operations such as

changing the camera image to the substitute

image and muting the sound.→p.48

■When the other party switches a voice/

videophone call during a call→p.60

■To put the current voice/videophone call

on hold→p.62

3To end the call, press y

zTo operate from the handsfree device, set the USB

mode to “Communication mode”.

zThe display and ring tones used for incoming calls and

mail are as specified in the FOMA terminal settings.

zWhen the handsfree device is set to emit the sound

from the handsfree device, the ring tone still sound

through the handsfree device even when the FOMA

terminal is set to Manner mode or the ring volume is

set to “Silent”.

zWhen the Public mode (Driving mode) is set,

operation for incoming calls and messages is as

specified in the “Public mode (Driving mode)” settings.

zWhen the Record message is set, operation for incoming

calls is as specified in the “Record message” settings.

zWhen the handsfree device is set to emit the sound

from the FOMA terminal, operation when the FOMA

terminal is folded during a call is as specified in

“Setting when folded”. When the handsfree device is

set to emit sound from the handsfree device, folding

the FOMA terminal does not affect the call status

regardless of the “Setting when folded” setting.

* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera.

A substitute image (Chara-den) or rear

camera image will be sent to the other party.

A substitute image (Chara-den) can be

changed to an image in “My picture”, etc.

using “Select image”.→p.67

Ringing Videophone ringing

Function menu



p.60 Function menu



p.60

Display while receiving a call

■When the other party’s phone number is

notified

The other party’s phone number appears on the

screen. When the caller is stored in the

phonebook, the name stored in the phonebook

appears (only the name is displayed while

Keypad lock is set).→p.70

zIf the same phone number is registered in the

multiple phonebook entries with different names,

the first name retrieved by the phonebook

search in the order of reading appears.→p.73

zIf the caller is stored as secret data, the name

or other information does not appear and only

the phone number appears.

zWhen you receive a call for additional number

of Multi number, the registered name of the

additional number is displayed on the ringing

screen.

■When the other party’s phone number is

not notified

The reason of not notifying appears.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Ringing screen/Videophone

ringing screen (p.59)

Call Rejection……Terminates the receiving call without

answering.

Call Forwarding……Forwards the call.

The call is forwarded regardless of the “Call Forwarding”

setting “Activate/Deactivate”.

Voice Mail……Connects the call to the voice mail service

center.

The call is connected to the voice mail service center

regardless of the “Voice Mail” setting “Activate/Deactivate”.

Change Display……Switches the display from additional

number 1 or 2 to the number from which the call is

forwarded. This can be selected when receiving multi

number call (for additional number 1 or 2) and the call is

forwarded at the same time.

When the Other Party

Switches a Voice/Videophone

Call (Caller)

When you receive a voice/videophone call, the other

party can switch the call between voice call and

videophone call.

zThe receiver cannot switch a voice call to a

videophone call.

zTo switch the call, the receiver needs to set “Ntfy

switch-mode” to notify the switch beforehand.

→p.67

zYou can use this function with the terminals

compatible with voice call/videophone call switch.

<Example: When the other party switched a voice call

to a videophone call>

1In-call screen (p.48)The other party

switches to a videophone call

While switching, the screen which indicates that

the calls are being switched appears and the

voice guidance is played.

When the voice call is switched to the

videophone call, the substitute image is sent to

the other party.

■When the other party switched a

videophone call to a voice call

Videophone in-call screen (p.48)The other

party switches to a voice call

The videophone call is switched to the voice call.

Using the Dial Keys to

Answer a Call

You can use this setting to turn off the ring tone or

answer the phone quickly when you receive a call.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Answer setting”Select any item:

Any key answer……Valid for voice calls. You can

answer the call by pressing any of the following keys.

r, d (Answer) , 0 to 9, q, w, t,

o, p, b

* For videophone calls, you can answer the call only by

ordinary key operations (r, d (Subst.)).

Quick silent……Pressing any of the following keys

or opening the FOMA terminal stops the incoming

call reaction while the caller continues to hear the

ring tone.

0 to 9, q, w, t, b, p or o (for

voice calls only)

To answer the call, press r or d (Answer/Subst.).

zYou can receive a call using a flat-plug earphone/

microphone with switch (optional). →p.298

zIf you have subscribed to the Call waiting, Voice mail

or Call forwarding service, activate “Set in-call arrival”

and set “Incoming Call Mng” to “Answer”, you will hear

a short double-beep (“bibip”) when you receive a call

when you are already on a call.

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail or Call forwarding

service, you can answer the call by ending the

current call.

• If you subscribe to the Call waiting service, you can

answer the voice call by putting the current call on

hold and you can answer the videophone call by

ending the current call.

zYou can set the incoming call management from the

caller who is not stored in the phonebook.→p.114

zYou can set the incoming call restriction for each

phone number stored in the phonebook.→p.112

zIt may take a few seconds to switch from a camera

image to a substitute image (Chara-den) depending

on the Chara-den.

Voice/Videophone Calls

OFF……You can answer the call only with r or

d (Answer/Subst.).

Ending/Holding Calls with the

FOMA Terminal Folded

You can set how your FOMA terminal operates when

it is folded during a voice or videophone call.

1i“SETTINGS”“Talk”“Setting

when folded”Select any item:

No tone……Mutes the sound. The other party does

not hear the hold tone.

Tone on……Puts a call on hold (holding). When the

FOMA terminal is folded, the other party hears the

hold tone. For videophone calls, the image for

holding is sent to the other party.

Speaker ON……The hold tone is sent to the

other party and also plays through the speaker.

Speaker OFF……Only the other party hears

the hold tone.

End the call……Ends the call. It is the same

operation as pressing y.

Adjusting the Earpiece

Volume

1On the standby screenc (1 second

or longer)Adjust the volume with c

Pressing c (1 second or

longer) displays the earpiece

volume screen. If no

operation is conducted for 2

seconds or longer when the

earpiece volume screen is

displayed, the earpiece

volume screen is expired.

You can adjust the volume in 6 steps from “Level

1” (quietest) to “Level 6” (loudest).

■To adjust the earpiece volume during a

call

During a voice call: c (1 second or longer)

During a videophone call: c

• You can also adjust with a (▲マナー )/s (▼メ

モ).

Adjusting the Ring Volume

You can adjust the volume of the ring tone for a

incoming call, mail, MessageR/F in 6 steps for each

type of call. You can also set to silent or to gradually

get louder.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Ring volume”Select an item to

adjust its volume

Select “Phone” to adjust the ring tone volume for

voice calls and 64K data communication.

Select “Mail” to adjust the ring tone volume for

i-mode mail, Area Mail, SMS or packet

communication.

2Use c to adjust the ring volume

d (Set)

■To raise the volume gradually

Press f in “Level 6”

When set to “Step”, the ring volume becomes

louder and louder in every 3 seconds.

■To set to silent

Press g in “Level 1”

An icon appears in the standby screen to

confirm that a “Silent” ring tone is set.

: “Phone” or “Videophone” is set to “Silent”

: “Silent” is set for “Mail”, “MessageR” and/or

“MessageF”.

: Both “ ” and “ ” are set.

zEven when “Quick silent” is set, the “Any key answer”

function is used in Manner mode.

zWhen Manner mode is set, no sound is played

through the speaker even if “Speaker ON” is set.

zWhen a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch

(optional) is connected, this function is disabled.

zEven if the “Tone on” setting is selected, folding the

FOMA terminal activates the “No tone” setting if “Call

Waiting” is switched on.

zIf you adjust the volume during a call, the adjusted

setting is retained after you end the call.

zThe ring volume setting specified for “Phone” in this

function is also applied to the “Select ring tone” setting

for a voice call, the alarm tones for “Schedule” and “To

Do list”.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Holding the Ringing/Current

Call

<Example: To put the ringing call on hold>

1While ringingy

The FOMA terminal makes

three rapid beeps and puts

the call on hold.

The caller hears a message

saying that you cannot

answer at the moment and

the call is held without

hanging up.

■To put the current call on hold

During a callt

■To end the call during answer hold/

holding

y

2Press r to resume the call

You can also use t to cancel holding when

you put the current call on hold.

Setting the hold tone

You can set the guidance messages to the other

party during the answer hold.

zYou cannot change the hold tone that is played

during a call.

1i“SETTINGS”“Talk”“Set hold

tone”“On hold tone” Select the

hold tone

Select from “Tone 1/Tone 2/Voice announce 1*/

Voice announce 2*”.

* : Not available when no Voice announce is recorded.

Using the Public Mode

(Driving Mode)

The Public mode is an automatic answering service

provided to keep manner in public circumstances.

During Public mode, a caller hears a message that

you cannot answer the call because you are driving or

you are in the place you have to refrain from calling

(on the train or bus, in the theater, etc.), then the call

ends.

zPublic mode can only be set/released from the

standby screen. (It can also be set/released when

the “ ” icon is displayed.)

zYou can still make calls when the FOMA terminal is

in Public mode.

zThis function is not available during data

communication.

zWhen you receive a call of “User unset” while

Caller ID Request is set to “Activate”, caller ID

request message is announced. (The Public mode

message is not announced.)

1On the standby screenq (1 second

or longer)

Public mode is set and “ ”

appears.

When you receive a call, the

caller hears the message “I

can’t answer the call

because I am driving or I

have to refrain from calling

now. Please call back later.”

■To release the Public mode (Driving mode)

On the standby screenq (1 second or

longer)

Public mode is canceled and “ ” disappears.

●When Public mode (Driving mode) is set

The FOMA terminal does not ring when you receive a

voice or videophone call. Calls are logged in the “Received

calls” record as “Missed calls” record, and the “Missed call”

shortcut icon appears on the standby screen.

zA caller making a voice call hears a message that

you cannot answer the call because you are driving

or you are in the place you have to refrain from

using mobile phones, then the call ends.

zA caller making a videophone call sees the Public

mode video message on his or her display, then the

call ends.

zCall charges apply while putting the ringing call or

current call on hold.

zThe Public mode setting takes priority when “Record

message” is “ON”.

zThe Public mode setting takes priority when Manner

mode is set at the same time.

zIf you make a voice call to an emergency number

(110, 119 or 118) while Public mode is set, Public

mode is released.

zThe following tones do not sound in Public mode:

• Ring tone for voice/videophone call

• Ring tone for mail or message

• Alarm tone

• Charge sound

• Software tone for i-αppli

• Ring tone for packet communication/64k data

communication

Voice/Videophone Calls

zIf the FOMA terminal is set to Public mode (Driving

mode) while network services are activated, voice

calls and videophone calls are handled as shown in

the Table 1 (p.63).

zWhen you receive a mail, the ring tone does not

sound and the “New mail” shortcut icon appears on

the standby screen.

Using the Public Mode (Power

OFF)

The Public mode (Power OFF) is an automatic

answering service provided to keep manner in public

circumstances. During Public mode (Power OFF), a

caller who made a call while the FOMA terminal is

turned off hears a message that you cannot answer

the call because you are in the place you have to turn

off the mobile phone (in the hospital, on the airplane,

around the priority seat on the train, etc.), then the

call ends.

1On the standby screen

w25251r

Public mode (Power OFF) is set. (Nothing

changes on the standby screen.)

When you receive a call after setting Public

mode (Power OFF) and turning off the FOMA

terminal, the caller hears the message “The

person you are calling is in an area where cell

phone should not be used. Please call back

later.”

■To cancel the Public mode (Power OFF)

On the standby screen

w25250r

■To check Public mode (Power OFF) setting

On the standby screen

w25259r

●When Public mode (Power OFF) is set

The setting is valid until “*25250” is dialed to release

the Public mode (Power OFF). The setting is not

canceled only by turning on the FOMA terminal.

The Public mode (Power OFF) message is

announced even when you are in an out-of-service

area or where the reception is very poor.

zA caller making a voice call hears a message that

you cannot answer the call because you are in the

place you have to turn off the mobile phone, then

the call ends.

zA caller making a videophone call sees the Public

mode (Power OFF) video message on his or her

display, then the call ends.

zIf the FOMA terminal is set to Public mode (Power

OFF) while network services are activated, voice

calls and videophone calls are handled as shown in

the Table 1 (p.63).

zIf the power is off or “ ” is displayed, the message

for “ ” is announced instead of the Public mode

message even when Public mode is set.

[Table 1] Handling of received calls when network services and Public mode (Driving mode/Power OFF) are set

* : If the ring time is set to 0 second, the Public mode message is not announced and the “Voice Mail Service” or “Call

Forwarding Service” is applied. In addition, they are not recorded in the “Received calls” record and “Missed call”

shortcut icon does not appear.

Service When a voice call is received When a videophone call is received

Voice Mail

Service

• Connects to the Voice mail service center after

announcing the Public mode message.*

• Connects to the Voice mail service center without

showing the Public mode video message.

Call

Forwarding

Service

• Transfers the call to the forwarding number

after announcing the Public mode message.*

• The Public mode message is announced or

not depending on the setting of the call

forwarding service.

• Transfers the videophone call to the forwarding

number without showing the Public mode video

message.

• The connection is not established when the

videophone for the forwarding number is not

compatible with 3G-324M.

Nuisance

Call Blocking

• Ends the call after showing the message that

the connection could not be established for the

barred callers.

• Ends the call after announcing the Public

mode message for other callers.

• Ends the call after showing the video message

that the connection could not be established for

the barred callers.

• Ends the call after showing the Public mode

video message for other callers.

Caller ID

Request

• Ends the call after announcing the caller ID

request message for the callers who do not

provide the caller ID.

• Ends the call after announcing the Public mode

message for the callers who provide the caller ID.

• Ends the call after showing the caller ID request

video message for the callers who do not

provide the caller ID.

• Ends the call after showing the Public mode video

message for the callers who provide the caller ID.

Voice/Videophone Calls

When You Cannot Answer a

Received Call

When you cannot answer a received call, the

appears on the standby screen. When you select ,

you can check the date, time and the caller ID about

the call.

z“Advising shortcut icons”→p.94

1On the standby screendSelect

“”

The Received calls list screen appears.→p.53

To check the information with the

FOMA terminal folded

When there is a missed call or new mail (i-mode mail,

Area Mail and SMS), the illumination keeps on

flashing. When you press s (▼メモ), you can

confirm the caller or sender in the voice.

1Press s (▼メモ) with the FOMA

terminal folded

Notify it with a voice according to the setting of

“Info notice setting”.

●Illumination flashing

When there is a missed call or new mail, the

illumination continues flashing according to the

following patterns and colors:

• Voice call/Videophone

Lighting pattern: Slow Beat

Flashing color: Citrine orange

• New mail/Area mail

Lighting pattern: Slow Beat

Flashing color: Light purple

■Flashing conditions

• If “Missed call” under “Illumination set” is set to

“OFF”, the illumination does not work when there is

a missed call.

• If “Missed mail” under “Illumination set” is set to

“OFF”, the illumination does not work when a new

mail arrives.

• The illumination does not flash in Public mode

(Driving mode).

■To turn off the lamp

• Selects the icon for “Missed call” or “New mail” in

the display or push t (1 second or longer) to

check the description.

Setting the Notification Method for

Missed Calls

You can set the notification type when s (▼メモ) is

pressed.

zThe following shows options and actions:

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Info notice setting”“ON” or “OFF”

■When ボイス(Voice) is selected

If you set “日本語” (Japanese) in “Select

language”, you can select “電子音” (electronic

sound), “ボイス” (voice) and “OFF”.

You can set the voice to read out (ON) the name

or not (OFF) when the caller is stored in the

phonebook, when a message is recorded or

when a mail arrives.

Having the Caller Leave a

Message

When you cannot answer a voice or videophone call,

this function allows you to record a message from the

caller on your FOMA terminal.

zThe voice call can record 5 messages up to 20

seconds, and the videophone call can record 2

messages up to 20 seconds for each 1 case.

Item When there is a missed

call, new mail, etc.

When there is no missed

call, new mail, etc.

ON “Bibip, bibip” tone. “Bibip” tone.

OFF The Confirmation Tone does not sound.

zThis function alerts you using a “YES” indication when

the “Missed call”, “New mail”, etc. shortcut icon is

displayed on the standby screen. →p.94

zYou cannot use s (▼メモ) to check for missed calls or

new mail in the following cases:

• When Side key guard is set to “ON”

• When playing music with the Music Player/

Music&Video Channel

zThe volume set in the “Phone” in the “Ring volume”

setting is used (if “Phone” is set to “Silent” or “Step”,

the volume is set to “Level 2”).

zOpening the FOMA terminal during the notification

stops the notification.

zIf the reading of caller’s name is not stored in the

phonebook or the name stored in the phonebook is

not displayed, the caller’s name is not read out even

when “名前通知” (name notification) of “ ボイス”

(voice) is set to “ON” in Japanese language mode.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Record message

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Record message”Select any item:

ON……Select the desired type of answer message

from “Japanese 1/Japanese 2/English/Voice announce

1*/Voice announce 2*”, then set the record message.

OFF……Cancels the Record message setting.

* : Not available when no Voice announce is recorded.

2Enter the ringing time (between 000 to

120 seconds in 3 digits)

The record message is set and “ ” and “ ”

appear on the standby screen.

When “Record message” is set

The record message activates when the set time is

elapsed.

zTo the caller of a voice call, the answer message is

played and the recording starts.

zTo the caller of a videophone call, the “Preparing”

image is sent and the answer message is played,

then the “Recording” image is sent and the

recording starts.

■When message recording starts

zThe recording screen appears. The caller’s voice

can be heard through the FOMA terminal earpiece

during message recording.

■To answer a voice/

videophone call while

recording

r

■When message recording ends

zThe original screen

reappears and the “Missed

call” and “Record message”

shortcut icons appear on the

standby screen. You can

check the contents by

selecting the one of the

shortcut icons.→p.65

zNumber of recordings are

displayed with icons on the

icon display area at the top of

the screen.

to : Recorded voice messages (1 to 5)

/ : Recorded videophone messages (1 or 2)

Having Callers Leave a

Message During an Incoming

Call

Even when the “Record message” function is not set

to “ON”, you can record messages while receiving a

call by pressing a key.

1While ringings (▼メモ)

The recording of the message starts.

■To set Manner mode when recording

starts

While ringinga (▲マナー )

Playing/Erasing Recorded

Messages and Voice Memos

zWhen there is a recorded message which has not

been played, “ ” (Record message) or “ ”

(Record VP message) appears on the standby

screen.

zTo give priority to “Record message” function when “Voice

Mail”, “Call Forwarding” and “Record message” are set at

the same time, set the ringing time of Record message

shorter than that of Voice mail and Call forwarding.

zIf the mute time set in “Ring time(sec.)” is longer than the

ringing time set for the Record message function, the

FOMA terminal switches directly to Record message

without ringing first. To have the FOMA terminal ring

before it records a message, make sure that the ringing

time for Record message is longer than the mute time.

zYou can use “Ring tone/Image” (for each phonebook

entry) to set an answer message for each phone

number and “Ring tone/Image” (for the phonebook

group) to set an answer message for each group.

Ex. Voice call

zWhen Manner mode is set, you cannot hear the

caller’s voice during a message recording.

zYou cannot answer another call while recording a

message.

zYou cannot set “Record message” to “ON” with this

operation.

zIf a voice/videophone call arrives when full of voices/

videos, Record message does not activate but the call

keeps ringing (with operational conditions set in

“Manner mode set” when a (▲マナー ) is pressed).

Voice/Videophone Calls

<Example: To check the recorded message which

has not been played>

1On the standby screendSelect

“ ” (Record message) or “ ”

(Record VP message)

The “Play/Erase msg.”

screen or “Play/Erase VP

msg.” screen appears.

“★” appears for the

recorded item.

■To play the recorded

message with the menu

operation

i“LIFEKIT”“Play/Erase. msg.” (voice) or

“Play/Erase. VP msg.”

2Select the item to play

■To make a voice/videophone call to the

phone number displayed while playing a

message

r (voice call) /o (V. phone)

■To erase the playing message

u (FUNC)“Erase”“YES”

Play/Erase msg. screen (voice/

video) (p.66)

Play……Plays the message.

Delete this……Erases one recorded message or voice

memo.

Delete rec. msg.*……Erases all the recorded messages.

Voice memos are not erased.

Delete all……Erases all the recorded messages and

voice memos.

* : Available only with the Play/Erase msg. screen.

Using Chara-den

This function sends a cartoon character instead of

your own image when you make a videophone call.

“What is Chara-den?”→p.237

zYou can display your favorite Chara-den if you set

“Substitute image” of “Select image” to “Chara-den”

beforehand.

You can also use Chara-den by setting Chara-den

in the phonebook or Ring tone/Image function.

1Sending a substitute image (Chara-

den) on videophoneControl your

character by pressing the dial keys

The FOMA terminal beeps and playback

begins. When the playback ends, the FOMA

terminal gives 2 short beeps and the “Play/

Erase msg.” screen reappears.

You can also play the messages by pressing

Vs (▼メモ) on the standby screen.

■To play the next message while playing

a message

Vs (▼メモ)

Each time you press Vs (▼メモ), the recorded

messages are played from the newest one.

Voice memos are played last.

■To stop the playback

Xd (Stop) or Wt

The “Play/Erase msg.” screen reappears.

The playback starts. When the playback ends,

the “Play/Erase VP msg.” screen reappears.

■To play another message while playing a

message

Xv

■To adjust volume while playing a message

Xc

■To switch ON/OFF of the speaker while

playing a message

Zu (FUNC)“Speaker ON” or “Speaker OFF”

■To pause the playback

Xd (Stop)

To resume playback, press Xd (Play).

■To stop the playback

Wt

The “Play/Erase VP msg.” screen reappears.

Play/Erase msg.

Function menu



p.66

zWhen 2in1 is in A mode or B mode, “★” does not

appear for the recorded message recorded in the

unused phone number. When set to “Dual mode”, “★”

appears for the recorded message recorded in the

both phone numbers.

Chara-den

Pressing a dial key makes

the character perform the

action assigned to that key.

“Using Chara-den

characters”→p.238

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Functions for the

Videophone

1i“SETTINGS”“Videophone”

The “Videophone settings”

screen appears.

2Select any item:

Visual preference……Selects the image quality of

videophone calls from “Normal/Prefer img qual/

Prefer motion spd”.

Select image→p.67

Auto redial as voice……Sets whether to switch to a

voice call when a videophone call cannot be made

(ON/OFF).

Display setting

Main display……Selects the image displayed

on the main display from “Other side/My side”.

Ntfy switch-mode→p.67

Hands-free switch……Sets whether to switch to

Handsfree automatically when starting a videophone

call (ON/OFF).

V-phone while packet→p.67

Setting an image to send

zYou can set a JPEG image whose file size is 100K

bytes or less and not larger than 854 dots wide ×

854 dots high, or a GIF image whose file size is

100K bytes or less and not larger than 854 dots

wide × 480 dots high or 480 dots wide × 854 dots

high (except for the files with restrictions).

1Videophone settings screen (p.67) 

“Select image”Select any item:

On hold……Sets the image sent for a call on

answer hold.

Holding……Sets the image sent while holding a call.

Substitute image……Sets the image.

Record message……You can set the image sent

while recording videophone messages.

Preparing……You can set the image sent while

preparing for recording videophone messages.

Voice memo……Sets the image sent while

recording the voice memo.

2Select the image to be sent:

Pre-installed……Sends only a message.

Original……Sends an image and a message.

To change the image, select an image from My

picture from “Change setting” of the function menu.

Chara-den*……Sends the image selected in

“Substitute image”.

Function menu of Chara-den list screen →p.238

Priority order for Chara-den setting→p.71

To change the Chara-den, select a Chara-den from

Chara-den list from “Change setting” of the function

menu.

* : Available only when “Substitute image” is selected.

Setting for Switching between Voice

Call and Videophone Call

You can set whether to notify the other party that your

FOMA terminal supports the switch between a voice

call and a videophone call.

zThe other party cannot switch the call when set to

“Indication OFF”.

zYou cannot set this function during a call or while

“ ” appears.

1Videophone settings screen (p.67) 

“Ntfy switch-mode”Select any item:

Indication ON・Indication OFF……Activates or

deactivates the Ntfy switch-mode.

Check Indication……Displays the “Ntfy switch-

mode” setting.

Setting the answer mode when you

receive a videophone call during

i-mode

<V-phone while packet>

zAs the multi access function cannot be used for

videophone, incoming videophone calls during

i-mode communication or while sending or receiving

mails are handled according to this setting.→p.360

1Videophone settings screen (p.67)“V-

phone while packet”Select any item:

V-phone priority……Switches to the videophone

ringing screen. When you answer the incoming

videophone, i-mode communication is disconnected.

Packet downld priority……Rejects the incoming

videophone call.

Videophone settings

Voice/Videophone Calls

V-phone answerphone……If you have subscribed

to the “Voice Mail Service”, the videophone call is

connected to the Voice Mail service center

regardless of “Activate/Deactivate” setting of Voice

Mail. When you have not subscribed to this service,

“Packet downld priority” is activated.

Call forwarding……If you have subscribed to the

Call Forwarding Service, the videophone call is

forwarded regardless of “Activate/Deactivate” setting

of “Call Forwarding”. When you have not subscribed

to this service, “Packet downld priority” is activated.

Using the Videophone Connecting

to External Devices

You can make or receive videophone calls from

external devices such as the PC by connecting to the

FOMA terminal with the FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 (Optional).

To use this function, you have to install a videophone

application on the dedicated external device or PC

and prepare commercially available devices such as

an earphone/microphone and USB compatible Web

camera.

zSet the USB mode setting to “Communication

mode”. There is no specific settings for connecting

external devices.

zFor details on the operational environment, settings,

operations of the videophone application, refer to the

manuals supplied with the external terminals.

z“ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone

Software)” (Japanese) is available as the

application which is compatible with this function.

You can download the Software from the website of

DOCOMO Videophone Software (Japanese).

(For details of the PC operating environment, etc.,

refer to the support website.)

zIf the signal quality deteriorates during a videophone

call, the image may become grainy or patchy

regardless of the settings in “Visual preference”.

zIf you delete the original still image, the “pre-installed”

image is displayed (sent).

zWhen the Chara-den character set as the substitute

image is deleted and the “Chara-den” substitute image

cannot be displayed, the pre-installed “ミッフィー (Miffy)”

is sent. If you delete the pre-installed “ミッフィー (Miffy)”,

the “Pre-installed” substitute still image is sent.

zWhen a videophone call is switched and redialed as a

voice call, the call is charged as a voice call and digital

communication charges are not applied.

zWhen a call is redialed, only the voice call records are

logged in the “Redial/Dialed calls” record.

zEven if “Auto redial as voice” is set to “ON”, it may not

be possible to redial due to the conditions of the

network or the other party, such as busy.

<Hands-free switch>

zThe FOMA terminal does not switch to handsfree

mode automatically in the following cases even when

“Hands-free switch” is set to “ON”:

• While Manner mode is set

• When a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch

(optional) is connected (however, the microphone

operation follows the “Select microphone” setting)

• When holding a call or Record message is activated

for the incoming call

<V-phone while packet>

zEven when set to “V-phone priority”, you cannot answer

the videophone call if you are using multi access such

as using the i-mode communication during a voice call.

zWhen set to “Packet downld priority”, “V-phone

answerphone” or “Call forwarding”, the received

videophone calls are recorded as “Missed calls” in the

“Received calls”.

zEven when set to “V-phone priority” or “Packet downld

priority”, “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding” service is

activated if the ring time for the “Voice Mail” or “Call

Forwarding” service is set to 0 second.

http://videophonesoft.nttdocomo.co.jp/

zYou cannot make a videophone call from the external

device during a voice call.

zWhen you have subscribed to either of the Call

Waiting service, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding

and you receive a videophone call from an external

device during a voice call, you can answer the call

after ending the current call. When you receive a voice

call, videophone call or 64K data communication

during a videophone call from the external device, you

can answer these calls in the same way.

FOMA videophone

Connection speed: 64K

Base station

FOMA

network

Phonebook

Phonebooks Available with the FOMA Terminal ............................................................. 70

Adding Information to the Phonebook .................................................. 70

Adding Phonebook Entries from the Redial, Dialed Calls and Other Records ............... 72

Renaming Groups....................................................................................... 72

Making a Call from the Phonebook...................................................... 73

Editing the Phonebook............................................................................. 76

Deleting a Phonebook Entry.......................................................................... 76

Checking the Phonebook Storage Status.............................................. 76

Setting Different FOMA Terminal Actions for Each Phone Number and Mail Address

................................................................................................................ 77

Using Choku-Den .......................................................................................... 78

Using Dialing Shortcuts ......................................................................... 79

Storing the Phonebook at the Data Security Center............................ 79

Add to phonebook

Group setting

Search phonebook

Edit phonebook

Delete data

No. of phonebook

Ring tone/Image

Choku-Den

Two-touch dialing

Data security serv.

Phonebook

Phonebooks Available with

the FOMA Terminal

Your FOMA terminal contains two phonebooks. One is

the phonebook in the FOMA terminal (Phone) itself, for

which you can set a range of functions, and the other is

the UIM (FOMA card) phonebook, which can also be

used in other FOMA terminals. Each phonebook can

be used differently depending on the purpose.

Differences between the FOMA terminal

(Phone) and FOMA card (UIM) phonebooks

■Phonebook data

■Features of the FOMA terminal (Phone)

phonebook

The following utility functions can be used with entries

stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook:

• “Choku-Den”→p.78

• “Two-touch dialing”→p.79

• “Ring tone/Image”→p.77

• “Restrictions”→p.112

• Storing as secret data→p.103

• Secret code setting→p.75

■Features of the UIM phonebook

As phonebook entries are stored on the FOMA card

(UIM), you can transfer your phonebook entries to

another FOMA terminal simply by switching the

FOMA card (UIM). This makes the UIM phonebook

very useful when you use multiple FOMA terminals.

Displaying names

■Voice and videophone calls

When receiving a call with

caller ID notified from

someone who is stored in the

phonebook, the phone

number and caller’s name is

displayed.

When a still image is stored in

the phonebook, the image is

displayed. However, depending

on the size and amount of data

of the stored image, it may take

time to display the image.

The caller’s name is also

displayed in the “Received

calls”, “Dialed calls” and

“Redial” records.

■Displaying names for i-mode mail and SMS

When you send/receive i-mode mail or SMS to/from

someone who is stored in the phonebook, his/her

name is displayed in the sent/received mail list/detail

screen or address list.

Adding Information to the

Phonebook

zThe entry cannot be stored unless the “Name” field

is filled.

1i“PHONEBOOK”u (FUNC)

“Add to phonebook”Select a

phonebookEnter a name

You can enter kanji characters, hiragana,

katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols and

pictographs (Phone only).

You can store up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-

byte characters for “Phone” and 10 double-byte

or 21 single-byte alphanumeric characters only

(including some single-byte symbols) for “UIM”.

2Check the readingd (Set)

■When the reading is incorrect

Correct the reading using katakana (single-byte

for “Phone” and double-byte for “UIM”), single-

byte alphabet, numbers and symbols.

You can store up to 32 single-byte characters for

“Phone” and 12 double-byte or 25 single-byte

alphanumeric characters only (including some

single-byte symbols) for “UIM”.

Entry

FOMA terminal (Phone)

FOMA card (UIM)

Number

of entries

Up to 1,000 entries Up to 50 entries

Group No Group, Group 01 to

No Group,

Group 01 to 10

Phone

number

storage

4 numbers per entry

(4,000 numbers in total

in the phonebook)

1 number per

entry

You can select from 23

icons

“” only

E-mail

address

storage

3 addresses per entry

(3,000 addresses in

total in the phonebook)

1 address per

entry

You can select from 5

icons

“” only

Image

storage

1 sill image and 1

Chara-den per entry

(respectively 100 in total

in the phonebook)

−

Other data

storage

Name, Reading, ZIP code,

Address, Birthday, Memo

Name, Reading

Phonebook

3Select any item:

(group)……Selects a group number among

“Group 01-19” for “Phone” or among “Group 01-10”

for “UIM”. If no group is selected, the entry is

automatically assigned to “No Group”.

(phone number)……Enters the phone number.

• Also select an icon for “Phone”. You can enter up

to 26 digits for the phone number. Once you have

stored the first phone number, the “ <Not

stored>” option appears on the Phonebook edit

screen. Select this option to store an additional

phone number.

• You can enter 20 digits for a blue FOMA card

(UIM), and 26 digits for a green/white FOMA card

(UIM).

(mail address)……Enters the e-mail address.

You can enter up to 50 single-byte alphabets,

numbers and symbols.

Also select an icon for “Phone”. Once you have

stored the first e-mail address, the “ <Not

stored>” option appears on the Phonebook edit

screen. Select this option to store an additional e-

mail address.

(address)……Enters the ZIP code and street

address. Enter the 7 single-byte numbers for ZIP

codes. You can enter up to 50 double-byte or 100

single-byte kanji characters, hiragana, katakana,

alphabets, numbers and pictographs.

(birthday)……Enters the contact’s birthday

(year, month and day).

Any year from 1800 to 2099 can be set.

(memorandums)……Enters a memo (short

note). You can enter up to 100 double-byte or 200

single-byte characters which include kanji

characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers

and pictographs.

(image)……Shoots or selects the image

displayed when you receive a call from the contact.

(Chara-den)……Selects the “Chara-den”

character displayed as the substitute image for

videophone calls.

(memory No.)……Memory numbers are

automatically* assigned when an entry is stored in

the phonebook, but can be changed to any number

between 000 and 999.

* : Assigned to the available number between 010 to

999 from the smallest number. If no number is

available from 010 to 999, it is assigned to the

available number between 000 to 009.

4o (Finish)

When phonebook editing is

interrupted

You can resume editing the phonebook entry which is

stopped being edited because of the emit of the low-

voltage alarm or activation of a task of Tool groups

using Multitask, etc.

1i“PHONEBOOK”u (FUNC)

“Add to phonebook”Select the

destination“Recall”

When you are re-editing the

entry, if you cancel editing

without storing the changes,

the data being edited is erased.

■To add a new phonebook

entry

“New”

zPhonebook entries stored using symbols or

pictographs may not be displayed correctly when data

are transferred by the infrared communication, etc.

zEnter the correct domain when storing e-mail

addresses. The domain is the part of the address that

follows the “@” symbol.

However, if the contact’s e-mail address is in the

“[phone number]@docomo.ne.jp” format, store just the

phone number as the e-mail address.

z“2in1 setting” in Phonebook is specified according to

the 2in1 mode at registration. The setting of

“Phonebook 2in1 setting” ( / / ) is displayed

on the Phonebook list screen or Phonebook detail

screen when 2in1 mode is in Dual mode. However,

when attaching the phonebook to a mail or copying it

to the UIM phonebook, Phonebook 2in1 setting is not

to be sent.

<Chara-den settings priority sequence>

zThe priority order for Chara-den settings is as follows:

①Chara-den setting of Ring tone/Image (for

individual)

②Chara-den setting of Ring tone/Image (for group)

③Chara-den stored in the phonebook entry

④Substitute image in Select image

Mode Phonebook 2in1 setting

Dual mode A

A mode A

B mode B

OFF A

You can change the Phonebook 2in1 setting in “2in1

setting”.→p.322

Phonebook

Adding Phonebook Entries

from the Redial, Dialed Calls

and Other Records

You can add information to the phonebook from the

“Received calls”, “Dialed calls”, “Redial”, “Received

address”, “Sent address”, “Text reader”, Site screen

or enter phone number screen, etc.

<Example: To add information from the “Received

calls” record to the FOMA terminal (Phone)

phonebook>

1Received calls screen (p.53)

u (FUNC)“Add to phonebook”

“Phone”

■To add to the FOMA card (UIM)

“UIM”

2“Add”Search for the phonebook

entry to add the information

Searching the phonebook→p.73

■To add a new phonebook entry

“New”

■To add information to the UIM

“New” or “Overwrite”

3Display the phonebook detail screen

d (Select)

Phone number is automatically entered and the

phonebook editing screen appears.

Editing the phonebook→p.76

4After completing the changes, press

o (Finish)

■If a message appears asking whether to

overwrite existing data

“YES”

Renaming Groups

You can assign your stored phonebook entries to

groups according to the contact role (“Work”,

“Friends”, etc.) or by hobby (“Baseball”, “Football”,

etc.). This allows you to use the phonebook as if it

were divided into different volumes according to

purpose.

z“No Group” cannot be renamed.

1Phonebook list screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Group setting”

The “Group setting” screen

appears.

2Select a groupEnter

the new group name

The “ ” icon appears next

to UIM groups.

You can enter up to 10

double-byte or 21 single-

byte characters.

If the same name is used for

groups on the FOMA terminal (Phone) and UIM,

they are displayed as separate groups.

Group setting screen (p.72)

Edit group name……Edits the group name.

Ring tone/Image→p.77

Reset group name……The changed group name is reset

to the default name assigned at the time of purchase.

zThe “Notify Caller ID” setting (“Notify” or “Not notify”)

displayed in the “Dialed calls” and “Redial” records is

not stored in the phonebook.

zResetting the group name does not clear the “Ring

tone/Image” setting.

Group setting

Function menu



p.72

Continued on next page

Phonebook

Making a Call from the

Phonebook

You can make a call by searching for the phonebook

entry from the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook or

the FOMA card (UIM) phonebook.

zWhen tabs appear on the phonebook list screen,

you can switch the display as follows:

<Example: To switch tabs from “他 (Others)” to “Ta-

column” in the Alphabet display>

Searching for the phonebook entry of

the person you want to make a call

1i“PHONEBOOK”

The “Phonebook list” screen

appears.

■To make a voice call

from the list screen

Highlight the phonebook

entry you want to call

r (voice call)

If the phonebook entry

contains multiple phone

numbers, the call is made to

the first phone number

stored for that entry.

■To switch the tab display

u (FUNC)“Change Display”

Select the tab from “Alphabet/Memory No./Group”.

2Select the phonebook entry you want

The “Phonebook detail”

screen appears.

3Use v to display the

phone number you

wantr (voice call)

or o (V.phone)

■To send a mail

Use v to display the

e-mail address you want

d (MAIL)

“Composing and Sending i-mode Mail”→p.156

Searching for the phonebook entry by

specifying the search method

You can search for a phonebook entry using any of 8

search criteria; reading, name, phone number, e-mail

address, memory number, group or “column” in

Japanese phonetics (a, ka, sa, ta, na, etc.) or all.

zSearch results are displayed in the sequence

shown below based on the reading entered when

the entry was stored (except for memory number

search).

katakana → alphabets → numbers → symbols →

the reading of caller’s name is not stored

* If a space is placed at the beginning, it is searched first.

1On the standby screen g

u (FUNC)Search phonebook

■To display your

preferred search

method first

Highlight the search

method that you want to

display firsto (Prefer)

“OK”

“★” appears next to the

preferred search method.

Pressing g on the standby

screen displays the

phonebook search screen

with your preferred method.

■To cancel your preferred search method

setting

On the standby screengtHighlight

the search method with the star “★”

o (Reset)

zYou can use v to switch pages within the same tab.

zYou cannot switch the tab with o ( ) when you

store to the Choku-Den or compose a message with

using the Look-up phonebook.

Tab

List of “他 (Others)”

p ()

Four times

List of “Ta-column”

o ()

Four times

Function menu



p.74

Phonebook list

Alphabet Memory No.

Group

zPressing f during a call displays the group search

screen and pressing g displays the column search

screen.

Phonebook detail

Function menu



p.75

Phonebook

2Select the search method:

Search reading……Enter the readingc

Enter the reading from the beginning. You do not

need to enter the entire name.

Search name……Enter the namec

Enter the name from the beginning. You do not need

to enter the entire name.

Search phone No.……Enter the phone

numberc

Enter some digits numbers of the phone number.

You can also search the phone number by entering a

part of the phone number and press c on the

“Enter phone number” screen (p.48).

Search e-mail……Enter the e-mail addressc

You do not need to enter the entire address.

Search memory No.……Enter the 3 digits

memory number.

You cannot search the UIM phonebook by memory

number.

Search group……Select the group you want

Note that the UIM phonebook uses different groups

from the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook.

Search column……Press the key for the

“column” (tab) you want to search

1: “a” column 2: “ka” column

3: “sa” column 4: “ta” column

5: “na” column 6: “ha” column

7: “ma” column 8: “ya” column

9: “ra” column 0: “wa” column

w: Others (alphabet or number, etc.)

Search all……All the stored phonebook entries are

displayed in the “Alphabet” tab.

When the search ends, the

“Phonebook list” screen that

meets the searching conditions

appears. “ ” is displayed for

the UIM phonebook.

●Accessing the phonebook from the

Redial or Dialed Calls record

You can access the stored phonebook detail screen

from the function menu of “Received calls”, “Dialed

calls”, “Redial”, “Received address” or “Sent address”

screen by selecting “Look-up phonebook”.

Phonebook list screen (p.73)

zThe available functions vary depending on the

searching method and display method.

Add to phonebook→p.70

Connect to Center……Stores the phonebook data at the

DOCOMO Data Security Center.→p.79

Search phonebook……Select the search type and call

the phonebook entry.→p.73

Sort*1……Sorts the phonebook list in a selected criteria.

Change Display……Select from “Alphabet/Memory No./

Group”.

Ring tone/Image→p.78

Restrictions→p.112

Group setting→p.72

Copy to microSD*2→p.248

• When “Copy all” is selected, you can select whether to

copy the My Profile data in addition to the phonebook

data.

iC transmission*2→p.259

iC trans. all*2→p.260

Send Ir data*2→p.258

Send all Ir data*2→p.258

No. of phonebook→p.76

Attach to mail*2……Displays a new mail screen with the

phonebook data attached.

Set large font ⇔Set normal font……Switches the

displayed font size between “Big font/Standard font”.

→p.93

microSD phonebook⇔Original phonebook……Refers

to the phonebook in the microSD card or the FOMA

terminal (Phone).

Delete data……Selects the deleting method from “Delete

this/Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

• “Delete all” deletes the phonebook on the FOMA card

(UIM).

*1: Available on the result screen displayed when the

phonebook is searched by entering a condition such as

Search reading.

*2: Not operate for the phonebook stored in the FOMA card

(UIM)

Phonebook list

Function menu



p.74

Phonebook

Phonebook detail screen (p.73)

Edit phonebook→p.76

Notify Caller ID→p.56

Chaku-moji→p.55

Dial setting

Prefix numbers→p.58

Int’l call→p.52

2in1/Multi Num.……When 2in1 is set to ON and

Dual mode, selects from “Number A/Number B/

Cancel number” (p.323) (not available when A mode

or B mode is set).

Selects from “Basic number/Additional number 1/

Additional number 2/Cancel number” (p.319) at the

Multi Number when 2in1 set to OFF.

Select image……Selects the image used during a

videophone call from “My side/Chara-den”.

Select “Release settings” to cancel the setting.

Ring tone/Image*1→p.77

Restrictions*1 →p.112

Move to top*1……Moves the displayed phone number/

mail address to the top when multiple phone numbers/

mail addresses are stored in one phonebook entry.

Add to Choku-Den*1 →p.78

Add shortcut →p.94

Compose message*2 →p.156

Attach to mail*1*2……Displays a new mail screen with

the phonebook data attached.

Compose SMS*2 →p.182

iC transmission*1→p.259

iC trans. all*1 →p.260

Send Ir data*1 →p.258

Send all Ir data*1→p.258

Copy to microSD*1 →p.248

Copy

Name……Copies the name. The copied name can

be pasted into input and other screens.→p.308

Phone number*3……Copies the phone number.

The copied phone number can be pasted into input

and other screens.→p.308

Secret code*1→p.75

Set code……Sets the secret code (4 digits).

Check code……Confirms the set secret code.

Release settings……Cancels the set secret code.

Set secret*1*4 →p.103

Copy to UIM*5→p.255

Set large font⇔Set normal font……Switches the

displayed font size between “Big font/Standard font”.

→p.93

Delete data→p.76

*1: Not operate for the UIM phonebook.

*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*3: Depending on the selected item, one of “Mail address/

Address/Birthday/Memorandums” appears.

*4: “Release secret” when referring to the phonebook of the

secret data.

*5: “Copy from UIM” when referring to the UIM phonebook.

●Secret code

When the mail address of the other party is “[phone

number]@docomo.ne.jp” and he/she sets a secret

code, you have to specify “[phone number + secret

code]@docomo.ne.jp” as the e-mail address.

There are 2 ways to send an e-mail to such a

destination.

zSet a secret code for the phonebook entry from the

phonebook detail screen function menu (when

referring to the mail address, the secret code is

automatically added to the mail address in the

phonebook).

zStore the mail address with a secret code in the

phonebook.

zWhen stored to Choku-Den, “★” appears on the

function menu.

zSecret code settings are valid only to mail addresses

in “[phone number]@docomo.ne.jp” or “phone

number” format.

zYou cannot set secret codes for the UIM phonebook.

Phonebook

Editing the Phonebook

1Phonebook detail screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Edit phonebook”Edit

the respective items

Edit the required items using the procedure used

in “Add to phonebook”.

Adding information to the phonebook→p.70

■To store in a new memory number

Select “ ”Enter a memory number (000 to

999) that has not already been stored.

The original phonebook entry is left in its pre-

edited state and the edited entry is stored as a

new phonebook entry with a different memory

number.

2After editing, press o (Finish)“YES”

■To add information to the UIM

o (Finish)“Overwrite” or “Add”

Selecting “Overwrite” stores the edited

information.

Selecting “Add” leaves the original phonebook

entry unchanged and stores the edited entry as

a new phonebook entry.

Deleting a Phonebook Entry

1Phonebook detail screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Delete data”Select any

item:

Delete phone No.*……Deletes the selected phone

number (e-mail address, address, birthday,

memorandums, image or “Chara-den” character).

Delete this……Deletes the phonebook entry.

* : Depending on the selected item, one of “Delete mail

add./Delete address/Delete birthday/Delete

memorandums/Delete image/Delete Chara-den”

appears.

Checking the Phonebook

Storage Status

<No. of phonebook>

1Phonebook list screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“No. of phonebook”

■Phone (the phonebook stored on the

FOMA terminal)

Phonebook : Displays the number of entries

stored in the phonebook.

Number of stored data/1,000

(storage limit)

Secret : Displays the number of entries

stored as secret data. (This can

only be displayed in “Secret mode”

or “Secret data only mode”.)

Image : Displays the number of images

stored in the phonebook.

Number of stored data/100

(storage limit)

Chara-den : Displays the number of “Chara-

den” characters stored in the

phonebook.

Number of stored data/100

(storage limit)

■UIM (the phonebook stored on the FOMA

card (UIM))

Phonebook : Displays the number of entries

stored in the phonebook.

Number of stored data/50 (storage

limit)

zWhen the edited entry is stored to the Choku-Den, the

Choku-Den is also changed.

zIf you delete a phone number or mail address in the

phonebook entry in which multiple phone numbers or

mail addresses are stored, the order of the

subsequent phone numbers or mail addresses moves

up.

Phonebook

Setting Different FOMA

Terminal Actions for Each

Phone Number and Mail

Address

You can set different ring tones or answer messages

for the Record message depending on groups, phone

numbers or e-mail address in the phonebook. This

function is useful when you want to distinguish the

caller only by the ring tone.

zYou cannot set this setting for “No Group” on the

FOMA terminal (Phone) or the phonebook or

groups on the FOMA card (UIM).

zThe Ring tone/Image functions are disabled when

the caller does not notify the caller ID. It is

recommended to set the “Caller ID Request”

service.

1Phonebook detail screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Ring tone/Image”

The “Ring tone/Image”

screen appears.

“★” appears next to the

selected function.

The available functions vary

depending on the item

selected in the phonebook detail screen.

■To set this function for each group

Group setting screen (p.72)u (FUNC)

“Ring tone/Image”

2Select the item to distinguish

Select the item from “Voice call (recv.)/V.phone

(dial/recv.)/Mail (recv.)”.

• When “Mail (recv.)” is selected, this function is

applied not only i-mode mail but SMS.

3Select any item:

“★” appears next to the selected function.

■To release a selected function

Highlight the function with “★”o (Reset)

The function is released and the “★” disappears.

Ring tone*1……Sets ring tones to distinguish the

caller of the phone or sender of mail.

“Changing the Ring Tone” →p.82

Image*1*2……Sets images to distinguish the caller

of the phone. “Changing the Display”→p.88

Chara-den setup*3……Selects Chara-den to be

displayed as the substitute image for videophone

calls.

Set illumination*1……Sets the illumination pattern

and color to distinguish the caller of the phone or

sender of mail.

“Setting the Flashing Mode of the Illumination”

→p.92

Vibrator*1……Sets vibration patterns to distinguish

the caller of the phone or sender of mail.

“Setting the Vibration to Notify You of Incoming

Calls”→p.84

Answer message*2……Changes the answer

message used when record message*4 or quick

message starts up depending on the caller.

“Having the Caller Leave a Message” →p.64

*1: You can also distinguish the incoming 64K data

communication.

*2: Available only when “Voice call (recv.)” or “V.phone

(dial/recv.)” is selected.

*3: Available only when “V.phone (dial/recv.)” is

selected.

*4: You need to set “Record message” to “ON”

beforehand.

■When you set Ring tone/Image

An icon appears in the phonebook detail screen

indicating that each item is set.

: Ring tone (voice/

videophone call)

: Ring tone (mail)

: Illumination (voice/

videophone call)

: Illumination (mail)

: Vibration (voice/

videophone call)

: Vibration (mail)

: Image (voice/videophone call)

: Answer message (voice/videophone call)

: Chara-den (videophone call)

Ring tone/Image

zYou cannot set this setting for the phonebook stored

as the secret data. Even if the setting is made for the

group, it is disabled for the phonebook entry stored as

the secret data.

zThe “Mail (recv.)” setting set for a phone number is

activated when you receive an SMS or the sender’s e-

mail address is “[phone-number]@ docomo.ne.jp”.

zRefer to the following pages for the priority when the

Ring tone/Image settings and other settings for

incoming calls, etc. are duplicated.

• Ring tone priority→p.83

• Vibrator priority→p.84

• Image priority→p.83

• Illumination priority →p.93

• Chara-den priority→p.71

Phonebook

Checking the Ring tone/Image

settings

You can check the phonebook entries or groups set in

“Ring tone/Image” by function or item.

1Phonebook list screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Ring tone/Image”

The “Ring tone/Image” screen appears.

“★” appears next to the items to which this

function is set.

2Select the function or item with “★”

Highlight the function or item with

“★”u (FUNC)Select any item:

Check settings……Checks the setting status.

Highlight the function or item with “★”* 

Check the phonebook or group which is set

Release settings……Releases all the settings of

the functions marked with “★”.

* : The number of the selected items (the number of

times d is pressed) varies depending on the

function or setting specified.

Using Choku-Den

<Choku-Den>

By storing frequently used phonebook to Choku-Den,

you can make a call or send a mail quickly.

zYou can store up to 5 Choku-Den by quoting the

stored data (such as phone number) from the

FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook.

zWhen mail addresses are stored to Choku-Den,

you can compose i-mode mail to all the members

easily.

zYou cannot use this function in Secret data only

mode.

zYou can use this function in Secret mode, but you

cannot add the phonebook stored as secret data to

Choku-Den.

Adding to Choku-Den

1On the standby screenf

The “Choku-Den” screen

appears.

When there is a stored data,

the Choku-Den screen of

the first tab with the stored

data appears.

■To change the location

to add

Use v to move the tab

You can also use 1 to

5 to move to the tab of

the respective number.

2o (Store) Search the phonebook

Searching the phonebook→p.73

■To change the added contents

o (Edit)

3d (Select)

The “Quote phonebook”

screen appears.

4Use c to select a

checkbox (□ )

Select only one phone

number and mail address to

add respectively.

When a checkbox (□) is selected, other phone

numbers or mail addresses are displayed in gray

and the checkbox cannot be selected. To select

another checkbox, release the selected

checkbox first.

5o (Finish)

zThe setting of “Phonebook 2in1 setting” is displayed

on the Choku-Den screen when 2in1 mode is in Dual

mode.

zWhen an image is stored in the phonebook, the image

in the phonebook is added to Choku-Den.

Choku-Den

Function menu



p.79

Quote phonebook

Phonebook

Making a call/composing a mail from

Choku-Den

<Example: To make a call>

1Choku-Den screen (p.78)Use v to

display Choku-Den screen to make a

call

You can also use 1 to

5 to move to the tab of

the respective number.

2Use c to select

“CALL”

■To compose a mail

Use c to select “MAIL”

→p.156

■To make a videophone call

Use c to select “VIDEO PHONE”

Choku-Den screen (p.78)

Store/Edit……Adds a phonebook to Choku-Den which is

not stored or edits the stored Choku-Den.→p.78

Image……Changes the image displayed in Choku-Den

by selecting an image from “My picture”.

Broadcast mail……Displays the new mail screen with all

mail addresses stored to Choku-Den are entered to the

address.→p.156

Release this・Release all……Releases one or all

Choku-Den.

Using Dialing Shortcuts

<Two-touch dialing>

By assigning memory numbers “000” to “009” to

phone numbers in the phonebook, you can call those

phone numbers only by pressing one of 0 to 9

(last digit of the memory number) and r.

10 to 9r (voice call)/

o (V.phone)

Storing the Phonebook at the

Data Security Center

You can store the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook

at the DOCOMO Data Security Center. The stored

phonebook can be restored to the FOMA terminal or

updated by connecting to the Data Security Center.

zData Security Service is a pay service you need to

apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service

and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the

notification screen appears.

zThe service is not available when out of i-mode

service area or the power is off.

zFollow the procedure below to restore the

phonebook or set the auto update (Japanese):

o“iMenu”“マイメニュー” (My Menu)“電話帳

お預かり” (Data Security)

zFor details on how to use the Data Security

Service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”.

1i“LIFEKIT”“Data security serv.”

“Connect to Center”

■To set about sending images in the

phonebook

“Sndg img in Phonebook”“ON” (default: “OFF”)

The images stored in the phonebook are also

stored at the Data Security Center.

2Enter your security code“YES”

The FOMA terminal connects to the Data

Security Center to start saving the phonebook.

3o (Finish)

<Image>

zYou can add an image whose file size is 100K bytes or

smaller and whose width or height is 854 dots or smaller.

zYou cannot add images other than JPEG or GIF.

zIf the phonebook entry contains multiple phone

numbers, the call is made to the first phone number

stored for that entry.

zYou cannot store the phonebook stored in the FOMA

card (UIM) at the Data Security Center.

zA phonebook entry with an image larger than 100K

bytes cannot be stored or updated.

Phonebook

●Restoring/updating the phonebook

The phonebook data stored at the Data Security

Center can be stored on the FOMA terminal from the

site of the Data Security Center.

You can also edit the phonebook data stored at the

Data Security Center from a PC, etc.

For details on how to use, refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

●Checking the communication log with

the Data Security Center

zYou can check up to 30 communication logs. If the

maximum number of logs is exceeded, logs are

overwritten starting with the oldest one.

zOn the communication log detail screen, the

transmission results, dates, transmission details, data

sizes, sending results to the Data Security Center,

reception results of the mobile phone and number of

data files left in the Data Security Center appear.

1i“LIFEKIT”“Data security serv.”

“Exchanging history”

The “Exchanging history”

screen appears.

2Select the communication log item

Exchanging history screen (p.80)

Delete this・Delete selected・Delete all……Select the

deleting method. “About multiple-choice”→p.38

zAutomatic update is not performed when another

function is activated while updating the phonebook.

zWhen the phonebook is not updated, it is notified with

“ ” shortcut icon.

zWhen you restore the phonebook data stored at the

Data Security Center to the FOMA terminal, icons

stored with phone number or mail address may be

replaced with “ ” or “ ”.

zDeleting the FOMA terminal’s phonebook also deletes

the phonebook in the Data Security Center when

updated. To download the phonebook in the Data

Security Center to the FOMA terminal, follow the

procedure below (Japanese):

o“iMenu”“マイメニュー ” (My Menu)“電話帳お

預かり” (Data Security)“お預かりセンター ” (Data

Security Center)Enter your i-mode password“決

定” (Select)“ケータイへダウンロード” (Download

to Phone)“OK”

Download starts in about 15 seconds. Redisplay the

standby screen.

Exchanging history

Ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｉｎｇｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ

２００８／７／２８１１：４０：００

２００８／７／２５１２：４０：１０

２００８／７／２４１２：４０：２０

２００８／７／２１１３：４０：３０

２００８／７／１８１５：４０：４０

２００８／７／１６１２：４０：５０

２００８／７／１０１９：４０：００

２００８／７／７１２：４０：１０

２００８／６／２７１８：４０：２０

Function menu



p.80

Sound/Screen/Light

Settings

■Sound Settings

Changing the Ring Tone .......................................................................... 82

Setting 3D Sound.......................................................................................... 84

Setting the Vibration to Notify You of Incoming Calls.......................................... 84

Changing the Ringback Tone............................................................... 84

Setting the Keypad Tone............................................................................ 85

Setting the Confirmation Tone for Charging................................................ 85

Setting the Clock Alarm Tone ........................................................... 85

Setting the FOMA Terminal to Warn You before a Call Drops Out .............. 85

Setting the Ring Time for Incoming Mail .............................................. 85

Enabling the Tone to Ring through the Earphone and Speaker ..... 85

Switching Off the FOMA Terminal’s Tone ................................................... 86

Modifying Manner Mode ........................................................................ 86

■Screen/Light Settings

Changing the Display................................................................................. 88

Displaying Phonebook Images When You Receive Calls ............. 89

Setting the Color for Incoming Call Display ...................................... 90

Preventing Others from Peeping the Screen ................................................. 90

Setting the Display and Keypad Lighting .......................................................... 90

Changing the Display Design..................................................................... 91

Changing the Menu Display............................................................................................ 91

Setting the Illumination Flashing............................................................... 92

Changing the Font ................................................................................................... 93

Setting the Clock Display ............................................................................. 93

Using Shortcut Icons ..................................................................................... 94

Selecting the Icons to Display on the Standby Screen ................................. 96

Setting the Kisekae Tool .................................................................... 97

Select ring tone

Sound effect

Vibrator

Melody Call setting

Keypad sound

Charge sound

Clock Alarm Tone set

Quality alarm

Mail/Msg. ring time

Headset usage setting

Manner mode

Manner mode set

Display setting

Disp. Phonebook image

Disp. call/receive No.

Shield view

Backlight

Display design

Illumination set

Font

Clock display

My shortcut

Icons setting

Kisekae Tool setting

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Changing the Ring Tone

You can set the ring tone and receiving screen in

each voice call, videophone call or i-mode mail. You

can also set the ring tone for specified phone number,

mail address or group of phonebook respectively.

→p.77

zGuide to the melody list→p.241

zSetting the sending screen→p.88

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Select ring tone”Select an item to

set a ring tone:

Select the item from “Phone/Videophone/Mail/

MessageR/MessageF”.

• When “Phone” is selected, the ring tone for

voice calls and 64K data communication is set.

• When “Mail” is selected, the ring tone for

i-mode mails, SMS and packet communication

is set.

2“Select ring tone”Select any item:

Melody……Select the ring tone or melody.

i-motion……Select the i-motion/Chaku-Uta®

downloaded to the FOMA terminal or a movie

(i-motion) shot using the camera.

When you receive a call, the video or sound for the

selected i-motion is played (Chaku-motion).

Music……Sets the Chaku-Uta-Full®. Set any item

from the following when the Chaku-Uta-Full®

contains the portion where the ring tone is specified

by the provider:

Fullsong ring tone……Sets the whole song

as the ring tone.

Point ring tone……Sets a part of the song as

the ring tone.

Use v to specify the portion (displayed

in orange) to set as the ring toned (Set)

When you select “Movable contents” folder,

select “YES” and select the destination folder.

Voice announce……Sets the message recorded

using “Voice announce”.

Random melody……Selects a folder containing

stored melodies. When you receive a call or

message, one of the melodies stored in the folder

played at random.

OFF……The FOMA terminal plays no ring tone.

■To set the calling/receiving display

“Select calling disp.” or “Select receiving disp.”

In “Ringing” screen, select an image from the My

picture or i-motion.

In “Select receiving disp.”, select an image from

the My picture.

3Select the ring tone

When you select a melody, the FOMA terminal

plays the melody.

Press r, q, u, o or p to stop the

melody playback.

■Pre-installed ring tones, melodies and alarms

■Pre-installed Chaku-Uta-Full®

Track Title Track Title

着信音1 to 5 Grand Clock

Go For It! Elevator

Sophisticated Lady Whistle

Classy Walts Piano Man

Kanon Hand Bell

Forest Brilliance

Cuckoo Clock Typewriter

School Chime Vibe X Vibe

Track Title

What Can U Do (Mashup Style)

zSome i-motion (i-motion with video only) and Chaku-

Uta-Full ® cannot be specified to the ring tone.

zAn i-motion with sound only (an i-motion with no video,

such as a singer’s voice) cannot be specified as the

receiving display.

zFlash movies can be set in the Select calling disp. /

Select receiving disp., but the ring tone used is the

tone set in “Select ring tone”.

zEven if the movie/i-motion can be set as Chaku-

motion or image displayed for incoming calls, you

cannot set these movie/i-motion in the following

cases:

• When the movie/i-motion is transferred to a PC or

other FOMA terminal through infrared data

exchange function, IC communication function or

DOCOMO keitai datalink (p.329), then returned to

the FOMA terminal (Phone)

• When the movie/i-motion is copied from a microSD

card to the FOMA terminal (Phone) (including the

case that the movie/i-motion is copied from the

FOMA terminal (Phone) to a microSD card, then

copied to the FOMA terminal (Phone))

zWhen you select the i-motion in the Movable contents

folder, the selected i-motion is moved to the Inbox

folder of “i-motion”.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

zWhen you select the Chaku-Uta-Full® in the Movable

contents folder and “Fullsong ring tone” is set, the

selected Chaku-Uta-Full® is moved to the Inbox folder

of “Music”. When “Point ring tone” is set, the selected

portion is clipped as an i-motion and stored in the

folder of “i-motion”.

zWhen you set Chaku-Uta-Full® stored on the FOMA

terminal (Phone) as a ring tone with “Point ring tone”,

it is not clipped as an i-motion and the selected portion

is set to the ring tone.

zThe ring tone is played at the volume set in “Ring

volume” while selecting the ring tone.

zIf you set an i-motion that includes both video and

sound as the ring tone and receiving display, the

FOMA terminal plays the i-motion set as the ring tone.

zIf you set something other than an i-motion that

includes both video and sound as the ring tone and

then set an i-motion that includes both video and

sound as the receiving display, the FOMA terminal

plays the i-motion set as the receiving display.

zWhen the i-motion is set to the ring tone for mail, the

default ring tone of “Mail” is used for the ring tone of

packet communication. The special screen appears

when packet communication is received regardless of

the incoming screen settings.

zWhen you set Chaku-Uta-Full® which contains the

jacket image as the ring tone, the jacket image is not

displayed when you receive a call.

zWhen multiple mails or MessageR/F are received at

the same time, the operation of the ring tone becomes

as follows:

Received contents Operation of the ring tone

Multiple mails are

received

The ring tone set for the last

received mail is used.

Mail and MessageR/

F are received at the

same time

MessageR/F are

received at the same

time

The ring tone set for

MessageR is used.

zWhen the ring tone settings for incoming calls are

duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:

①Ring tone for Multi number (additional number 1, 2)

②Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for individual)

③Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for group)

④Ring tone for B mode of 2in1

⑤Ring tone for Select ring tone/Kisekae Tool setting

* The priority is assigned as follows in the Ring tone/

Image (② above) and the Ring tone/Image (③

above).

①i-motion for Ring tone

②i-motion for Calling display

③i-motion for Ring tone (i-motion with no video,

such as a singer’s voice), melody or Chaku-Uta-

Full®

zWhen the ring tone settings for mails are duplicated,

the priority is assigned as follows:

①Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for individual)

②Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for group)

③Ring tone for Select ring tone/Kisekae Tool setting

zWhen the image settings for incoming calls are

duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:

①Image setting for Ring tone/Image (for individual)

②Image setting for “Ring tone/Image (for group)”

③Still image stored in the phonebook

④Image setting for B mode of 2in1

⑤i-motion for Select ring tone

⑥Display setting/Kisekae Tool setting

* The priority is assigned as follows in the “Ring tone/

Image (for individual)” (① above) and the “Ring

tone/Image (for group)” (② above):

①i-motion for Ring tone

②i-motion or still image/image for Select calling

disp.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Setting 3D Sound

Enjoy rich sounds of melodies, voice/videophone call

and mail ring tones, sound effects and i-motion when

an earphone/microphone (optional) is connected.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Sound effect”“Stereo&3D sound”

“ON” or “OFF”

●Sound effects

Create 3-dimensional and resonating sounds using

an earphone/microphone. Sound effects allow you to

enjoy i-αppli games and melody playback with richer

and more realistic sound.

Playing i-motion with sound effects adds effects such

as “natural third dimension”, “rich low sound” and

“clear instrumental or voice sound” to sounds heard

through earphone.

zAn icon appears for i-motion with sound effects on

the movie list screen.→p.226

Setting the Vibration to Notify

You of Incoming Calls

You can set different vibration patterns to notify you

when you receive a voice call, videophone call or

mail.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Vibrator”Select an item to set the

vibration:

Select “Phone” to set the vibration for voice calls

and 64K data communication.

Select “Mail” to set the vibration for i-mode mail,

Area Mail, SMS and packet communication.

2Select the vibration pattern:

Pattern 1-Pattern 3……Vibrates in each pattern.

When you switch the highlighted item while selecting

an item, the FOMA terminal vibrates in the

highlighted pattern.

Melody linkage……The FOMA terminal vibrates in

a pattern matched to the melody set as the ring tone.

OFF……The FOMA terminal does not vibrate.

■Icons on the standby screen while setting the

vibration pattern

: The vibration starts when receiving either voice

or videophone calls.

: The vibration starts when receiving either mail/

MessageR/F.

: Both “ ” and “ ” are set.

Changing the Ringback Tone

You can set whether to change the tone heard by the

other party or not (YES/NO) when you receive a voice

call.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Melody Call setting”“YES” or “NO”

When you select “YES”, accesses the Melody

Call i-mode site. Packet communications

charges apply when accessing an IP site,

i-mode menu site or free music corner except

the setup site.

Follow the instructions on the screen to set.

zIndividuals feel differently about 3 dimension. If sound

bothers you, set this function to “OFF”.

zSetting this function to “ON” does not add effects to

sounds heard through the built-in speaker.

zThis function is not available if “Headset usage

setting” is set to “Headset+speaker”. To enable the

function, set the setting to “Headset only”.

zWhen the vibration is set, take care that the vibration

does not move the FOMA terminal towards fire (e.g.

on a space heater) or cause it to fall off a table, etc.

zEven when “Melody linkage” is selected, the FOMA

terminal not always vibrates to the melody. When no

vibration pattern is set for the melody or when an

i-motion or Chaku-Uta-Full® is set as the ring tone, the

FOMA terminal vibrates in Pattern 2.

zWhen receiving Area Mail, vibration is linked with the

beep sound (when the buzzer sounds) or follows the

settings in “Mail” under “Vibrator” (when an incoming

Area Mail sounds).

zWhen the vibrator settings are duplicated, the priority

is assigned as follows:

①Vibrator for “Ring tone/Image (for individual)”

②Vibrator for “Ring tone/Image (for group)”

③Vibrator setting

zMelody Call is not activated when the other party dial

up from a videophone call.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Setting the Keypad Tone

zSetting this function to “OFF” also disables the

battery level tone and the warning tone.

zThe keypad sound is played at the level set in

“Volume” during a call, and fixed at the same level

while not talking on the phone.

1i“SETTINGS”“Other settings”

“Keypad sound”“ON” or “OFF”

Setting the Confirmation Tone

for Charging

This function sets to emit a sound when charging

starts or is completed.

zWhen the screen other than Standby screen is

displayed or when Manner mode or Public mode

(Driving mode) is set, the charge sound does not

ring.

1i“SETTINGS”“Other settings”

“Charge sound”“ON” or “OFF”

Setting the Clock Alarm Tone

You can change the clock alarm tone for Alarm,

Schedule, To Do list and 1Seg booking program.

1i“SETTINGS”“Clock”“Clock

Alarm Tone set”Select any item:

Select the alarm tone from “Melody/i-motion/

Music/Voice announce/OFF”.

Setting the FOMA Terminal to

Warn You before a Call Drops

Out

The FOMA terminal emits an alarm tone to warn you

that the signal quality is deteriorating and the call is

likely to drop out.

zThe call may drop out without a warning tone if the

signal quality worsens very quickly.

1i“SETTINGS”“Talk”“Quality

alarm”Select an alarm tone

Select the alarm tone from “No tone/High tone/

Low tone”.

Setting the Ring Time for

Incoming Mail

You can set a ring time when you receive mail or a

MessageR/F.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Mail/Msg. ring time”Select an item

to set the ring time:

Select “Mail” to set the ring time for i-mode mail,

Area Mail and SMS.

2“ON”Enter the ring time (01 to 30

seconds in 2 digits)

■To turn off the ring tone

“OFF”

When “Vibrator” is activated, the vibration stops.

Enabling the Tone to Ring

through the Earphone and

Speaker

You can set the FOMA terminal to play the ring tone

or alarm notification through the earphones and

speaker when a flat-plug earphone/microphone with

switch (optional) is connected.

1i“SETTINGS”“External

connection”“Headset usage setting”

“Headset+speaker” or “Headset only”

zIf “Ring volume” is set to “Silent”, there is no sound

from the earphone or speaker.

zWhen “Phone vol.” and “Mail vol.” in the Manner mode

(Original) is set to other than “Silent”, the ring tone still

sound. However, Manner mode (Manner mode and

Super silent) is set, the ring tone sounds only from the

earphones.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Switching Off the FOMA

Terminal’s Tone

You can set the FOMA terminal not to play the ring

tones or keypad tones through the speaker with a

single key operation.

zRefer to the Table 1 (p.87) and Table 2 (p.87) for

details of Manner mode setting.

zIn “Manner mode set”, you can select “Manner

mode/Super silent/Original” as the FOMA terminal

operation mode when Manner mode is set.

1On the standby screena ( ▲マナー )

(1 second or longer)

You can set the Manner

mode by pressing a (▲マ

ナー ) (1 second or longer)

during a voice call.

The FOMA terminal is set to

Manner mode, “ ”

appears, and the information

specified in “Manner mode

set” is displayed.

During a voice call, the FOMA terminal emits a

short double-beep (“bibip”) and a message

appears notifying you that Manner mode is set.

■To cancel Manner mode

On the standby screena (▲マナー ) (1

second or longer)

You can cancel the Manner mode by pressing

a (▲マナー) (1 second or longer) during a voice

call.

Manner mode is canceled and “ ” disappears.

During a voice call, the FOMA terminal emits a

short double-beep (“bibip”) and a message

appears notifying you that Manner mode is

canceled.

Modifying Manner Mode

You can select the FOMA terminal operations used in

Manner mode.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Manner mode set”

The “Manner mode set”

screen appears.

2 Select any item:

Manner mode……Mutes all tones played through

the speaker and uses vibration to notify you of

incoming calls, etc. However, confirmation tones

played through earpiece (when a voice memo or

memo is played) are not muted.

Super silent……Mutes all tones played through the

speaker and confirmation tones played through the

earpiece and uses vibration to notify you of incoming

calls, etc.

Original→p.88

The FOMA terminal notifies

you using “Vibrator”

: “Ring volume” is set to “Silent”

: “Record message” and

“Record VP message” is set to

record messages (The

number indicates the number

of recorded messages)

zEven in Manner mode, the camera shutter clicks.

zWhen the vibration is set, take care that the vibration

does not move the FOMA terminal towards fire (e.g.

on a space heater) or cause it to fall off a table, etc.

Manner mode set

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Table 1] When you set Manner mode

* : If all the following are set to “OFF” or “Silent”, the beep tone does not sound:

“Phone vol.” “Mail vol.” “Alarm vol.” “i-αppli vol.” “Keypad sound” “Record msg.” “LVA tone” “VM tone”

[Table 2] When earphones are connected

Item Manner

Mode

Super

silent

Original

(displays the Original manner mode settings)

Record message activation Record message

(p.65) setting

“Record message” setting

Vibrator ON “Vibrator” setting

Ring volume for voice/videophone call and

64K data communication

Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Ring volume for mail, packet

communication, MessageR/F and Area

Mail

Silent “Mail vol.” setting

Area Mail beep tone Silent “Level 6”*

Alarm volume (including snooze function) Silent “Alarm vol.” setting

i-αppli volume Silent “i-αppli vol.” setting

Schedule/To Do List/Cost limit alarm

volume

Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Activation and completion tones for

recorded messages, voice memos, etc.

ON OFF “VM tone” setting

Keypad sound OFF “Keypad sound” setting

Microphone sensitivity during calls Up “Mic sensitiv.” setting

Holding tone Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Played at “Level 1” when set to other than “Silent”

On hold tone Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Played at “Level 2” when set to “Step”

Low-voltage alarm OFF “LVA tone” setting

Even when “Phone vol.” is set to “Silent”, the low-

voltage alarm sounds at “Level 1” when “LVA

tone” is set to “ON”.

Reading out received mails “Phone” setting of “Ring volume”

Played at “Level 2” when set to “Silent” or “Step”

Valid only when “Read out message” in the function menu of the

received mail detail screen is selected

Voice clock (Standby, Snoozing)

Missed call/new mail confirmation tones

when the FOMA terminal is folded

Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Played at “Level 2” when set to “Step”

ToruCa acquisition tone Silent “Phone vol.” setting

Played at “Level 4” when set to “Step”

Item Manner

Mode

Super

silent

Original

(displays the Original manner mode settings)

Reading out received mails “Phone” setting of “Ring volume”

Played at “Level 2” when set to “Silent” or “Step”

Voice clock (during standby or snooze)

and missed call/new mail confirmation

tones when the FOMA terminal is folded

“Phone” setting of

“Ring volume”

Played at “Level 2”

when set to

“Silent” or “Step”

“Phone vol.” setting

Played at “Level 2” when set to “Step”

Music Player volume Volume setting of the Music Player (p.278)

1seg viewing/recording playback volume Volume setting for 1seg viewing/recording playback (p.210)

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Setting the Original manner

You can set your preferred Manner mode setting.

zThe following are the default settings of the

“Original” manner mode:

• Record msg.: OFF

• Vibrator: ON

• Phone vol.: Silent

• Mail vol.: Silent

• Alarm vol.: Silent

•i-αppli vol.: Silent

• VM tone: ON

• Keypad sound: OFF

• Mic sensitiv.: Up

• LVA tone: OFF

1Manner mode set screen (p.86)

“Original”Select any item:

Record msg.……Sets the Record message.→p.64

Vibrator……Sets the vibrator.→p.84

Phone vol.……Sets the ring tone volume for voice/

videophone calls and 64K data communication.

→p.61

Mail vol.……Sets the ring tone volume for mail,

packet communication and MessageR/F. →p.61

Alarm vol.……Sets the volume of the alarm.

→p.284

i-αppli vol.……Sets the volume of the i-αppli.

→p.189

However, “Step” cannot be set.

VM tone……Sets confirmation tones for “Record

msg.”, “Voice memo”, etc.

Keypad sound……Sets the keypad sound.→p.85

Mic sensitiv.……Selects from “Normal/Up” for the

microphone sensitivity during calls.

LVA tone……Sets the low-voltage alarm.

“When the battery runs out”→p.44

2Set the respective itemso (Finish)

Changing the Display

You can also set the still images you shot or

downloaded images as the standby screen, dialing/

calling screen, etc.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”

“Display setting”

The “Display setting” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Stand-by display……Changes the standby screen

image.→p.89

Wake-up display……Specifies a message or image

displayed when the FOMA terminal is turned on.

OFF……Does not display an image, etc.

Message……Enters a message. You can enter

up to 50 double-byte or 100 single-byte

characters.

My picture……Selects an image to be

displayed from My picture.

Dialing/Calling/V.phone Dialing/V.phone Calling/

Mail sending/Mail receiving……Sets the image

displayed when making/receiving voice/videophone

calls or sending/receiving mails (i-mode mails and

SMS).

■Dialing/V.phone Dialing/Mail sending setting

Select from My picture.

■Calling/V.phone Calling/Mail receiving setting

“Changing the Ring Tone (Step 2)” →p.82

Check new messages・Mail rec’d result……Selects

the image displayed for “Check new messages”

(i-mode mails and messages), “Check new SMS” or

mail received result screen from My picture.

zThe record message function set in “Original” starts

up after the ringing time set in “Record message”

(p.64) (when set to “OFF”, the recording starts after 13

seconds).

zIf the microphone sensitivity during calls is set to “Up”,

the volume of the voice heard by the other party raises

even if you speak quietly. The microphone sensitivity

is set to “Normal” when shooting movies in “Camera”

mode.

zSome i-motion cannot be specified.

Display setting

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Changing the standby screen image

zSome screens change its image depending on the

timing.

zThis function sets the standby screen when 2in1 is

in A mode or “2in1 setting” is set to OFF. The

settings are not applied when set to “B mode” or

“Dual mode”. Set “Standby display” of “2in1 setting”.

1Display setting screen (p.88)“Stand-

by display”Select any item:

OFF……No image is displayed.

Calendar……Sets a calendar.

Background……For the background image for

the calendar, selects one from My picture.

No background……Displays the calendar only.

My picture……Selects the standby screen image.

To set “Stand-by books”, select “ミッフィーおば

け”, “地球の歩き方 1 to 5” or “世界遺産 1 to 6” from

“Pre-installed”.

i-motion*……Selects the i-motion to be displayed

on the standby screen.

i-αppli display……Sets the i-αppli standby screen.

→p.198

When the i-αppli standby screen is set, “ ★” is

displayed.

Random display……Displays an image in the

specified folder at random each time you open the

FOMA terminal or display the standby screen.

* : When you select the i-motion in the Movable

contents folder, the content is moved to the Inbox

folder of the FOMA terminal, then set.

■When the screen for setting the display

style is displayed

Select the display styleCheck the image

d (Set)

The following display styles are available:

• Centering disp. (centering an image on the

screen)

• Fit in disp. (enlarging/reducing an image size

until its height or width fits to the screen)

• Arrange disp. (displaying images from upper

left side in order)

• Full-screen disp. (enlarging or clipping an

image to fit it into the screen size)

●When you set the calendar for the

standby screen

The calendar appears on the standby screen. You

can quickly and easily refer to previous or next

calendar dates or activate the schedule.

■To check the adjacent months on the calendar

Press d on the standby screen to select the shortcut

icons or calendar. After using c to highlight the

calendar, press d (Select). The shortcut icons

disappear and you can check the calendar of

previous or next month with c.

■To activate the schedule function

When the calendar of the previous or the next month

can be displayed with f or g, press d (Select) to

launch the schedule function and store a scheduled

event for the displayed month.

Displaying Phonebook

Images When You Receive

Calls

<Disp. Phonebook image>

You can set whether to display a still image when

receiving a voice/videophone call from a phone

number of which still image is stored in the

phonebook (ON/OFF).

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Disp. Phonebook image”“ON” or

“OFF”

zYou may not select how to display depends on images

you select.

zWhen “Bigger” is set to “Clock display” and Calendar

is also set, “Big” is applied.

zIf a movie or i-motion is set in the standby screen, it is

played when you open the FOMA terminal.

zWhen a Flash movie or GIF animation is set as the

standby screen, the movie or animation is played

when the following operations are performed (no

sound):

• FOMA terminal is opened

•t is pressed on the standby screen

• Return to the standby screen from another screen

If Keypad lock, etc. is active, Flash movies do not

work. Release the lock.

zIf the Flash movie clock stops, play the Flash movie to

restart the clock. If the time is not correct, it will be

adjusted within a minute after playback ends.

zPriority is assigned as follows when standby screen

settings are duplicated:

①Standby screen (i-αppli)

②Display setting/Kisekae Tool setting

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Setting the Color for

Incoming Call Display

<Disp. call/receive No.>

You can display names, phone numbers or mail

address on the Redial/Received calls screen or sent/

received address list screen with their font color

changed.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Disp. call/receive No.”Select a color

■To revert the setting to the original

p (Reset)

Preventing Others from

Peeping the Screen

You can make it difficult for others to see the contents

on the display.

12 (1 second or longer)

Shield view is set and “ ” appears.

■To release the setting

2 (1 second or longer)

Setting the Display and

Keypad Lighting

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”

“Backlight”Select any item:

Lighting……Selects “ON” or “OFF”.

Enter the waiting time for the Power saver mode (01

to 20 minutes in 2 digits) when you set the Power

saver mode to “ON”.

• You can also change the backlight operation (ON/

OFF) with 5 (1 second or longer).

• Setting the normal lighting settings for the

backlight to “OFF” displays the “ ” icon on the

standby screen.

• If you set the Power saver mode to “ON”, the

standby screen turns off when the specified

waiting time has elapsed. If any key is pressed

during the Power saver mode, the Power saver

mode is canceled.

Charging……Selects “Standard” or “All time ON”.

• When set to “Standard”, the backlight lights up

with the setting of Lighting ON (not enter Power

saver mode).

• When set to “All time ON”, the backlight of the

screen lights up all the time (when there is no

operation for about 15 seconds, the brightness is

set to “Dark”).

Area……Selects “LCD+Keys” or “LCD”.

Brightness……Selects backlight brightness from

“Bright/Middle/Dark”.

zPress o (Change) to switch the number of colors to be

selected from 16 to 256. The pallet of 16 colors and 256

colors switches each time you press o (Change).

zThis setting may change depending on the “Color

pattern” setting. To return to the setting corresponding

to “Color pattern”, press p (Reset) after changing this

setting.

zWhen you use 2in1, information of Number A/Address

A are displayed in the color set in this function. To

display the information of Number B/Address B in

different color, set “Disp. call/receive No.” of “2in1

setting”.

zYou cannot set or release shield view during editing

the text or i-αppli is activated.

zWhen “Lighting” is set to “ON”, the backlight turns on

when a call is received and lights for about 15 seconds

when you turn the FOMA terminal on, press one of the

keys, or unfold the FOMA terminal. The backlight also

stays on while using the camera or playing a movie/

i-motion. If you select “OFF”, the backlight does not

turn on. However, the backlight turns on during movie

shooting regardless of the “Lighting” setting.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Changing the Display Design

You can change the text, background and the

background pattern for the function keys.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”

“Display design”Select any item:

Color pattern……Selects the color pattern from

“White/Yellow/Blue/Red/Black”.

Icon pattern……Selects the design for the Battery

icon or Antenna icon from Pattern “1” to “5”.

Soft key……Selects the background pattern for the

function keys from Pattern “1” to “3”.

Changing the Menu Display

Setting the menu display mode

You can change the display of the branch settings

(functions) of “Settings” and the main menu design.

You can also set the last one function of the Main

Menu and Simple Menu.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“Menu

display set”

The “Menu display set”

screen appears.

2Select any item:

Menu display……Selects the display mode for the

branch settings from “List/Detail”.

Theme……Selects the background or icon for the

main menu from “Lacy Pink/Plain White/Seductive

Black/エリクル@World (Ericle@World)/Standard

Menu/Large Menu/Simple Menu/Original theme/

Kisekae Tool”.

• When Original theme is selected→p.91

• When Kisekae Tool is selected→p.242

Memory focus……Sets whether to highlight the last

selected main setting when the Main Menu or

Simple Menu is redisplayed (Last one function).

Reset menu op. log*……Resets the menu for the

automatically sort of menu items (p.33).

* : Only available on the menu display that supports this

function.

Changing the main menu screen

You can change the icons and background image

used on the main setting selection screen (main

menu).

1Menu display set screen (p.91)

“Theme”“Original theme”

The “Original theme” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Mail・i-mode・i-αppli・Settings・Data box・

LifeKit・Network service・Phonebook・Own

data・MUSIC・1Seg・Osaifu-Keitai……Selects

the icon images for the main menu from My picture.

Background image……Selects the background

image for the main menu from My picture.

zThere are some screens or functions that are not

affected by the changes made to the settings of this

function, such as i-mode sites.

Menu display set

zLast one function memorize the main menu icon when

a branch menu is displayed. The icon is not

memorized when the operation is interrupted while

sub item is selected.

zYou cannot set the following images:

• 100KB-or-larger image

• JPEG image larger than 854 dots wide × 854 dots

high

• GIF image larger than 854 dots wide × 480 dots

high or 480 dots wide × 854 dots high

zIf the image is larger than the display area, the size is

reduced without changing the aspect ratio, and

displayed in the middle if the image is smaller than the

display area.

Original theme

Function menu



p.92

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Original theme screen (p.91)

zThis setting is displayed only when you change the

Original theme setting.

Reset……Restores the changed main menu icon or

background image to the default settings.

All reset……Restores all the main menu icons and

background image to the default settings.

Creating My select

You can store the frequently used functions as “My

select” and easily call them up.→p.31

zYou can store up to 10 My select entries.

zYou can set the main menu of “Mail”, “i-mode” or

“i-αppli” or each item under “Settings”, “Data Box”,

“LifeKit”, “Service”, “Phonebook”, “Own data”,

“MUSIC”, “1Seg” and “Osaifu-keitai” as My select.

zYou cannot store the same function twice.

1ip (MySelect)

The “My select” screen

appears.

2Highlight an item to be

stored or changed

o (Edit) Use b to

select the function

My select screen (p.92)

Add to org. menu……Creates My select.

Sort……Press c to move the highlighted menu then sort

My select.

Add shortcut icon→p.94

Reset my select……Restores the menu to the default

settings.

Release……Removes one function from My select.

Release all……Removes all the stored functions from My

select.

Setting the Illumination

Flashing

Set the illumination flashing mode of receiving a

voice/videophone call or mail. You can also set the

illumination for power-on/off, alarm or time signal.

1i“SETTINGS”“Illumination set”

Select any item:

Dialing……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for voice/

videophone call reception.

Incoming Call, Incoming V.phone, Call light, Mail

receiving, Mail sending……Select the illumination

lighting pattern/flashing color.

• To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern

to “OFF”.

• “Incoming Call” can set illumination for receiving a

voice call or 64K data communication.

• “Mail receiving” can set illumination for receiving

i-mode mail, SMS or packet communication.

• You can set different lighting patterns/flashing

colors respectively for calls or messages from

specific phone numbers, mail addresses and

groups.→p.77

Missed mail……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

new mail.

Missed call……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

missed calls.

Open phone, Close phone……Select the

illumination lighting pattern/flashing color.

To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern to

“OFF”.

Power ON……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

power-on.

Power OFF……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

power-off.

Charging start, Charging end, To Do, Schedule/

Alarm……Select the illumination lighting pattern/

flashing color.

To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern to

“OFF”.

Time signal……Select the illumination pattern,

color and cycle (30 minutes/60 minutes).

To disable time signal, set the pattern to “OFF”.

Exchanging data……Set the illumination (ON/OFF)

for infrared communications.

Play sound……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

music playback.

Activate 1Seg……Set the illumination (ON/OFF) for

1seg activation.

My select

Function menu



p.92

Continued on next page

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Demo play……Flashes the illumination in order in

patterns other than Random and Melody linked.

(Color is all in “Rainbow”)

■To check the pattern or color for each

setting

o (Play)

Changing the Font

<Font>

You can change the characters displayed on the

screen to your favorite font (typeface).

1On the standby screen7 (1 second

or longer)Select any item:

Font type……Selects “Gothic” or “Ming-cho”.

Thickness……Selects “Thin” or “Bold”.

Character size……Sets the character size for the

respective screens.

Standard・X-large……Sets the character size

of the screens to “Standard” or “X-large” all at

once.

Separate setting……Sets the character size

of the screens respectively.

“Screens that can be set with Separate setting”

→p.93

■Screens that can be set with Separate setting

Setting the Clock Display

You can set the Clock display format (12h clock/24h

clock), size and character color. You can also set not

to display the date or time.

zIn the screens other than standby screen, only the

time is displayed in small size at the top of the

display regardless of this setting.

zSub clock can be displayed when setting “Size” to

“Small”.

1i“SETTINGS”“Clock”“Clock

display”Select any item:

Style……Selects “12h clock” or “24h clock”.

Size……Selects the display size of date and time

from “Bigger/Big/Small/Up Small/OFF”.

Color……Selects “Black” or “White”.

zWhen the Pattern/Color list screen is displayed,

illumination flashes in the highlighted pattern or color.

zIf Pattern is set to “Melody linked” but the melody-

linkage-compatible pattern is not registered, the

default pattern applies.

zArea Mail Illumination works as follows:

• Pattern: Flashes in Mail linkage when beep sounds,

and follows this function’s settings when new mail

tone sounds.

• Color: Red (Ruby red)

zIf you receive multiple mail at the same time, the

illumination flashes according to the illumination

setting of the last received mail.

zWhen the illumination settings are duplicated, the

priority is assigned as follows:

①Illumination for ring tones/images

②Illumination for group ring tones/images

③“Incoming Call” or “Incoming V.phone” under

Illumination set

Item Target screen for setting

Char. Input The character entry screen (Edit), the

new mail screen (excluding SMS), the

preview screen (excluding he sent SMS,

etc)

Mail Mail list/detail screen, screens displayed

when referring to Header/Signature/

Te m p l a t e

i-mode Sites screen, Screen memo, Message

list/detail screen

Full brw. Full Browser screen (except Original

layout)

Phonebook Phonebook list/detail screen, My Profile

screen

History data Redial/Dialed/Received calls screen,

Address list screen

i-Channel i-Channel ticker

zThe character in the enter phone number screen is not

included in this function.

zYou can change the character size in the following

menus.

Char. Input: CHG input size→p.303

Mail: Font size→pp.176, 178

i-mode: Font size→p.148

Full brw.: Change font size→p.220

Phonebook: Set large font⇔Set normal font

→pp.74, 75, 291

History data: Set large font⇔Set normal font

→pp.54, 177

i-Channel: Ticker size setting→p.154

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Using Shortcut Icons

Pasting frequently phone numbers and functions to

the standby screen as shortcut icons provides a quick

and simple way of accessing those numbers and

functions. When you cannot answer a received call or

when you receive a mail, the icon appears on the

standby screen.

■Shortcut icons that can be pasted

* When a shortcut icon is selected, only the first 11 double-

byte or 22 single-byte characters of the title are displayed.

You can edit the title.→p.95

■Advising shortcut icons

zThe Flash movie clock time on the standby screen

cannot be set in this function.

Icon Operation when selected

Phone number: Displays the Enter phone

number screen with the phone number

entered

Mail address: Displays the New mail

screen with the e-mail address entered

SMS address: Displays the New SMS

screen with the phone number entered

URL (i-mode): Displays the site

URL (Full Browser): Displays the site

Melody: Plays the melody

Image: Displays the image

Movie or i-motion: Plays the movie or

i-motion

Chara-den: Displays the Chara-den

PDF: Displays PDF data

i-αppli software: Launches the i-αppli

Inbox folder: Displays the Received mail

list screen

Photo mode: Activates the Photo mode

Movie mode: Activates the Movie mode

Voice mode: Activates the Voice mode

To Do list: Displays the To Do list screen

Schedule: Displays the Schedule screen

Text memo: Displays the Text memo

screen

Text reader: Activates the Text reader

Bar code reader: Activates the Bar code

reader

i-Channel: Displays the i-Channel

Music&Video Channel: Displays the

Music&Video Channel screen

Music: Displays the Music Player screen

Receive Ir data: Displays the Receive Ir

data screen

Dictionary: Displays the Dictionary screen

My select: Displays My select

Calculator: Activates the Calculator

1Seg: Activates 1seg

Icon Operation when selected

New mail: Displays received mail detail

screen

New message: Displays the received

message detail screen

New ToruCa: Displays the ToruCa list

screen

Missed call: Displays the missed call

screen

Record message: Displays the play/erase

msg. screen

Record VP message: Displays the play/

erase VP msg screen

Message in the voice mail service center:

Displays the voice mail screen

Missed alarm: Displays the details of the

missed alarm

If i-αppli could not be launched

automatically: Displays the auto-start info

screen

if i-αppli standby screen shut down due

to an error: Displays the security error

history screen

Receive software update notifications:

Updating Software

When the software update has been

completed: Displays the update results

screen after entering your security code

When the timer rewriting is set: Displays

the install content preview screen

When 1Seg timer recording ends:

Displays the result screen

When 1Seg booking program alarm does

not work: Displays unviewed program info

screen

When accumulated charge exceeds the

cost limit set: Displays the alarm

information for notify cost limit after entering

your security code

Automatic updating result of the pattern

data for the scanning function has been

completed: Displays the automatic

updating result of the pattern data

Icon Operation when selected

Continued on next page

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

* The shortcut icon that provides information disappears

when it is called from each function or when it is performed.

* To erase the display of the shortcut icon that provides

information, hold down t for 1 second or longer (you

cannot erase some icons).

Pasting shortcut icons

Select “Add shortcut icon” from the function menu on

the screen of the function you want to paste, the list

screen or the detail screen of the data.

z(1Seg), (Photo mode) and (My

selection) are pasted at default.

zYou can paste up to 15 shortcut icons for Theme 1

to 3 respectively.

<Example: To paste a phone number from the

phonebook>

“Add shortcut icon” in the Function menu (Phonebook

detail screen)→p.75

Using shortcut icons to retrieve data

or functions

1On the standby screend

The “Shortcut icon” screen

appears, and you can select

a shortcut icon. The title of

the highlighted shortcut icon

is displayed in the balloon.

2Use b to select the

shortcut icon

■If there are 6 or more shortcut icons

stored

The “ ” appears on the left or right of the

screen. You can use v to scroll through the

shortcut icons.

Changing the theme of My shortcut on

the standby screen

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“My

shortcut”

The “My shortcut” screen

(Theme) appears. The

“ ” appears for the

theme that is set.

2Select a theme“YES”

When adding shortcut icons

to the standby screen (p.95)

after this procedure, you can sort and paste

shortcut icons to the selected theme.

■To check the theme contents

Highlight the theme

o (Detail)

“My shortcut” screen (Detail)

appears.

Shortcut icon screen (p.95)/My

shortcut screen (Theme/Detail)

(p.95)

zAs available functions are different between the

Shortcut icon screen and My shortcut screen

(Theme/Detail), displayed items vary.

Add new icon……Select an icon to paste from the

function name list.

Create icon……Selects icons to be pasted from the

function name list, then selects the theme.

Sort icon……Changes the position of desktop icons.

Display setting……Selects the icon display method from

“Display always/Display at use”. When set to “Display at

use”, the desktop icons are displayed only when you

press d on the standby screen.

Edit title……You can enter up to 16 double-byte or 32

single-byte characters for the icon title, and 11 double-

byte or 22 single-byte characters for the theme.

Shortcut icon info……Displays the icon title, type,

contents, etc.

Copy……Selects from “Copy this/Copy selected/Copy all”

and copies the ions to another theme.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Move……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the icons to another theme.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

When the updating has not been done

successfully or when the new pattern

data has been released: The screen

prompting you to update the pattern data for

the scanning function appears

When the Data Security Service could

not be updated: Displays the screen that

allows you to connect to the Data Security

Center after you enter your security code

When the Music&Video channel

download has been completed: Displays

the Music&Video Channel screen

Icon Operation when selected

Desktop icon

Function menu



p.95

My shortcut screen (Theme)

Function menu



p.95

My shortcut screen (Detail)

Function menu



p.95

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Reset my shortcut……Restores the settings to the

default settings (“1Seg”, “Photo mode” and “My

selection”).

Change theme……Changes the theme of My shortcut.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Setting the standby screen

1On the standby screend

o (Settings)Select any item:

Stand-by image set……Changes the standby screen

image.→p.89

Kisekae Tool set.→p.97

ch-key setting →p.284

Clock disp set……Sets the clock on the standby screen.

→p.93

Selecting the Icons to Display

on the Standby Screen

You can set whether to use b or not (ON/OFF) for

selecting the icons, date or time displayed on the

standby screen.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“Icons

setting”“ON” or “OFF”

Selecting displayed icons

1On the standby screendHighlight

the icon with b

The title of the highlighted

icon is displayed.

2d (Select)

The setting screen for the selected icon, etc. is

displayed.

■Icon you can select

Icon After selected

Displays “Display design”

Displays the screen for

releasing “Self mode”

(Red)

Displays the unread mail list

Displays the “Inbox”

(Red)

Displays “MessageR” or

“MessageF”

(Red)

(R: Red)

(F: Red)

Displays the screen for

selecting “MessageR” or

“MessageF”

Displays the unread mail list

(Red)

Performs “Check new

messages”

Displays the “Lock function

selection” screen

Displays the screen for

releasing “IC card lock

setting”

Displays “USB mode setting”

Displays the screen for

selecting “Vibrator” or “Mail/

Msg. ring time”

When Manner mode is not

set : Displays the screen for

selecting “Ring volume” or

“Mail/Msg. ring time”

When Manner mode or

Super silent mode is set :

Displays the message that

the setting is not available

When Original manner is

set : Displays the screen for

selecting “Original” or “Mail/

Msg. ring time”

Displays “Manner mode set”

Displays the screen for

selecting “Schedule”,

“Alarm”, “To Do list”, “1Seg

booking program” or “1Seg

timer recording”

to Displays “Voice Mail”

, to

Displays a message notifying

that nothing is recorded. Or,

displays “Play/Erase msg.”

Icon After selected

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Setting the Kisekae Tool

You can change various design of the FOMA terminal

such as screens and ring tones all at once with the

Kisekae Tool package.

zIn addition to Kisekae Tool designed for the phone

color, “ミッフィー ”, “エリクル@World” and “ダイ

レクトメニュー ” are pre-installed at the time of

purchase.

zYou can download the Kisekae Tool package from

sites.→p.146

The downloaded packages are stored in Data Box

and you can check the contents.→p.225

zThe following items can be set all at once.

• “Display setting”

• “Select ring tone”

• “Clock Alarm Tone set”

• “Menu display set” - “Theme”

• “i-Channel” - “i-Channel setting” - “Ticker color

setting”

• “Change skin” of the Music Player

• “Clock display”

• “Display design”

zWhen 2in1 is set, Kisekae Tool set in any mode is

applied to all modes/phone numbers/mail

addresses except for the following:

• Standby screen are applied only to A mode.

• Ring tones for voice call and videophone call,

Voice call ringing screen and Videophone ringing

screen are applied only to A mode.

• Ring tone for mail is applied only to A mode.

zWhen you change the design of the menu display

using Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may

change in accordance with frequency of using

functions. Also, you cannot access some functions

entering the menu number assigned to the

functions. In this case, change the main menu to

“Standard Menu” (p.33) or perform “Reset menu

op. log” (p.91) so as to operate as described in this

manual.

Setting a package

zIf you store the current settings to “お気に入り” (My

favorite) before setting all at once, you can restore

the stored setting later.→p.98

1i“SETTINGS”“Kisekae Tool

setting”

The “Kisekae Tool set”

screen appears.

2Select an item“YES”

No item is set in “お気に入

り” (My favorite) at the time

of purchase.

■To check the settings

Highlight an itemo (Detail)Highlight an

itemo (Play)

■To search packages by i-mode

“Search by i-mode”“YES”

Displays a message notifying

that nothing is recorded. Or,

displays “Play/Erase VP

msg.”

Displays the screen for

selecting “Backlight” or

“Shield view”

Displays the screen for

setting “Keypad lock”

Displays “Side key guard”

Date

Displays “Schedule”

Displays “Set main time”

when the time is not set

Main clock

Displays “Alarm”

Displays “Set main time”

when the time is not set

Sub clock Displays “Set sub clock”

Switches and displays the

active tasks

Icon After selected

zItems to be changed vary depending on the package.

zWhen a package is set, the color of “Disp. call/receive

No.” may be changed.

zHighlighting the pre-install package in Kisekae-tool

setting list screen displays the color pattern and

standby image and the thumbnail of the main menu.

Kisekae Tool set

Function menu



p.98

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Kisekae Tool set list screen

(p.97)

Edit title……Edits the title. You can enter up to 10 double-

byte or 20 single-byte characters.

Check Setting info……Checks the set contents.

Reset Setting info……Deletes the “お気に入り” (My

favorite) settings.

Storing the current setting to “

お気に

入り

” (My favorite)

1Kisekae Tool set list screen (p.97)

Highlight “お気に入り”(My favorite)

o (Detail)

The “Contents checking”

screen appears.

“No data” appears for items

with no settings.

2u (FUNC)“Take

Setting info”“YES”

●Changing “お気に入り” (My favorite)

settings

You can change the items stored in “お気に入り” (My

favorite) on the contents checking screen.

1Contents checking screen (p.98)

Select an itemChange the setting

Contents checking screen

(p.98)

Set all*1/Finish*2……Sets to the currently displayed items

all at once.

Take Setting info*2……Retains the current settings and

stores in “お気に入り ” (My favorite).

Reset Setting info*2……Deletes settings stored in “お気

に入り” (My favorite) and set all items to “No data”.

*1: Available only for “ミッフィー ”, “ダイレクトメニュー ”

and downloaded Kisekae Tool package ( ) from sites.

*2: Displayed only with the data with “ ”

zThe details of “i-αppli display” is not stored to “Stand-

by image” in “お気に入り” (My favorite).

zIf an image, i-motion or melody stored in “お気に入り”

(My favorite) is deleted, it is also deleted from “お気に

入り” (My favorite) and “No data” appears.

Contents checking

Function menu



p.98

Security Settings

■About Your Security Codes

Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal................................................................. 100

Changing Your Security Code.......................................................... 101

Setting Your PIN Codes .................................................................................. 101

Release PIN Lock ........................................................................................................... 101

■Restricting the Phone Controls and Functions

Preventing Others from Using Your Terminal................................ 101

Preventing Others from Viewing Your Phonebook or Schedule Data

............................................................................................ 103

Preventing Others from Viewing Data........................................................... 104

Preventing Others from Viewing Your Personal Information or Performing

the Phone/Mail Operations ........................................................................... 106

Locking the Key Operation Automatically ..................................................... 110

Using the IC Card Authentication........................................................... 111

Disabling the Side Key .............................................................................. 112

■Restricting Incoming and Outgoing Calls or Transmissions

Preventing Unwanted Mail Display .............................................. 112

Restricting Incoming and Outgoing Calls for Specific Phone Numbers......... 112

Rejecting Calls from Unidentified Callers ............................................. 114

Muting Ring Tones for Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook.................... 114

Rejecting Calls from Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook ..................... 114

Disabling Making/Receiving Calls, etc. ............................................................ 115

■Other Security Settings

Data Security Service ...................................................................... 115

Other Security Settings................................................................................................... 116

Change security code

PIN setting

Dial lock/Omakase Lock

Secret mode/Secret data only mode

Secret folder

Original lock

Keypad lock

IC card authentic.

Side key guard

Mail box lock/Folder lock

Restrictions

Call setting w/o ID

Ring time(sec.)

Reject unknown

Self mode

Data Security Service

100

Security Settings

Security Codes Used on the

FOMA Terminal

To make the FOMA terminal more convenient and

secure, some functions require the security code. In

addition to the security code for various FOMA terminal

operations, you also have the Network security code for

accessing network services and the i-mode password.

Make use of the FOMA terminal using an appropriate

security code according to the purpose.

■Security Code

The security code is set to “0000” (4 zeros) at the

time of purchase. You can change the security code

by yourself.→p.101

When the security code screen

appears, enter the 4 to 8 digit

security code and press d (Set).

zThe entered security code is

displayed as “_” and the

numbers are not displayed.

zWhen you enter a wrong security code or enter

nothing for about 15 seconds, a warning tone

sounds and a warning message appears.

■Network Security Code

The network security code is a 4-digit number required for

using the DOCOMO e-site or various network services.

You can set any number at the time of subscription but

you can change it afterwards by yourself.

If you have the “docomo ID/Password” for general PC

support site “My docomo”, you can change the

network security code from your PC.

You can also change it by yourself using i-mode, from

“各種手続き” (Applications and Procedures) on the

DOCOMO e-site. (Only in Japanese)

* For details of “My docomo” and “DOCOMO e-site”,

see the back of the back cover of this manual.

■i-mode Password

The 4-digit “i-mode password” is required when

registering/unregistering My Menu, subscribing to/

unsubscribing from the message service or the pay

services of i-mode (There may be other passwords set

independently by the information service providers).

The i-mode password is set to “0000” (4 zeros) at the

time of subscription. You can change the i-mode

password by yourself.

You can change the password using i-mode, by

selecting o“iMenu”“English”“Options”

“Change i-mode Password”.

■PIN1 Code and PIN2 Code

You can set two security codes of PIN1 code and

PIN2 code for the FOMA card (UIM).

These security codes are set to “0000” (4 zeros) at

the time of subscription. You can change the PIN1/

PIN2 codes by yourself.→p.101

PIN1 code is a 4 to 8 digit number (code) you enter

each time you insert the FOMA card (UIM) to the FOMA

terminal or you turn on the FOMA terminal. This code

identifies you as the user and is designed to prevent

improper use of your FOMA card (UIM) by others. When

the PIN1 code entry set is set to “ON”, entering the PIN1

code enables you to make and receive calls and use the

functions of the FOMA terminal.

The PIN2 code is a 4 to 8 digit number that is used for

resetting the total cost, using or requesting the user

certificates, etc.

* When you purchase a new FOMA terminal and

insert your current FOMA card (UIM), use the PIN1

and PIN2 codes you set to the current card.

When the PIN1 or PIN2 code entry

screen appears, enter the 4 to 8

digit PIN1/PIN2 code and press

d (Set).

zThe entered PIN1/PIN2 code is

displayed as “_”.

zIf you enter a wrong PIN1/PIN2

code three times consecutively, the PIN1/PIN2

code is locked and cannot be used anymore. (The

remaining number of times for the entry appears on

the screen.) When you enter the correct PIN1/PIN2

code, the number of times for entry is reset to 3.

■PIN Unlock Code (PUK Code)

The PIN unlock code (PUK code) is an 8-digit number

for releasing the lock of PIN1/PIN2 code. You cannot

change the PUK code.

Notes on the security codes

zAvoid using a readily predictable number such as

“birthday”, “part of the phone number”, “street

address number or room number”, “1111” and

“1234”. Make sure to make a note of the security

code you set in case you forget it.

zTake great care not to disclose your security

code to others. If your security code is disclosed

to others and abused, NTT DOCOMO shall have

no liability for any damage due to any

unauthorized use of it.

zDOCOMO by no means inquire your security code.

zIf you forget any of your security codes, you must

bring your official identification providing that you

are the subscriber (such as a driver’s license),

the FOMA terminal, and the FOMA card (UIM)

with you to an NTT DOCOMO service counter.

For details, contact the inquiries number

provided on the back of this manual.

Ex. PIN1 code

101

Continued on next page

Security Settings

zIf you enter a wrong PUK code ten times

consecutively, the FOMA card is locked.

Changing Your Security Code

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Change security code”Enter your

current security codeEnter new 4 to 8

digits security code“YES”

Setting Your PIN Codes

You can set PIN1 code and PIN2 code for your FOMA

card (UIM). PIN1 code and PIN2 code→p.100

zPIN1 code, PIN2 code and PIN1 code entry set are

recorded to the FOMA card (UIM).

zTo change your PIN1 code, select “ON” in “PIN1

code entry set”.

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“PIN setting”Enter your security

code

The “PIN setting” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Change PIN1 code……Enter the current PIN1 code

(4 to 8 digit) and enter a new PIN1 code 2 times (1

time for confirmation).

Change PIN2 code……Enter the current PIN2 code

(4 to 8 digit) and enter a new PIN2 code 2 times (1

time for confirmation).

PIN1 code entry set……Sets whether PIN1 code to

be input when you turn the FOMA terminal on or not

(ON/OFF).

Release PIN Lock

If you enter incorrect PIN1 code or PIN2 code 3 times

in a row, you must unlock the locked PIN1 code or

PIN2 code then set a new PIN1 code or PIN2 code.

<Example: To unlock your PIN1 code>

1Enter the 8 digit PUK code

2Enter a new 4 to 8 digit PIN1 code

Enter the new 4 to 8 digit PIN1 code

again

Preventing Others from Using

Your Terminal

To lock your FOMA terminal to prevent others from

using, you can set “Dial lock” that can be set on the

FOMA terminal and “Omakase Lock” that can be set

remotely.

zDial lock or Omakase Lock is not released even

when the power is turned off.

●Available operations and functions

when Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set

○: Available ×: Unavailable

Enter PIN1 Set new PIN1/PIN2

Enter PUK

Contact a DOCOMO

shop

Enter PIN2

<Access FirstPass-compatible

site, etc.>

3 consecutive

errors

3 consecutive

errors

Entered

successfully

10 consecutive

errors

PIN setting

Function

Dial lock

Omakase

Lock

Turning the FOMA Terminal on/off ○○

Calling emergency numbers (110,

119 or 118)

○×

Setting/releasing Dial lock ○×

Setting/releasing Omakase Lock ○○

Receiving a voice or videophone

calls

○○

Updating the Data Security

Service data

○×

102

Security Settings

zWhen Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set, the

“Alarm”, “Schedule”, “To Do list”, “1Seg booking

program” and “1Seg timer recording” are not given.

Once Dial lock or Omakase Lock is released, the

“ (Missed alarm)” or “ (Missed program)”

shortcut icon appears on the standby screen.

zThe shortcut icon is not displayed when Dial lock or

Omakase Lock is set. Once Dial lock or Omakase

Lock is released, these icons reappear.

zEven when you receive calls from the callers stored

in the phonebook, only the phone numbers are

displayed when Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set.

Setting the Dial lock

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Lock”Enter your security code

“Dial lock”

●Operations during Dial lock

z“Dial lock” and “ ” appear

on the screen. IC card lock is

also set to “ON” and IC card

functions become unavailable

(Dial lock can be released using

the IC card authentication

function).

zYou can still receive MessageR/F, i-mode mail or

SMS automatically when Dial lock is set, but the

receiving screen or reception results screen does

not appear. Once Dial lock is released, the icon for

the received message/mail appears on the standby

screen.

• You can still receive the Area Mail automatically

and view the contents.

Releasing Dial lock

zIf you fail to release Dial lock 5 times in a row, the

FOMA terminal turns off. However, you can turn it

on again.

1Enter your security code on the screen

when Dial lock is setd

Dial lock is released and “ ” disappears.

■To release the lock using the IC card

authentication→p.111

Using Omakase Lock

This service enables you to remotely lock the FOMA

terminal with the FOMA card (UIM) you subscribed to

inserted by contacting DOCOMO or from My docomo

when you lost your FOMA terminal. You can release

the lock by calling DOCOMO, etc.

* Omakase Lock is a pay service. If you subscribe to the

service at the same time with the subscription of

suspending the service or while the service is suspended,

no charge applies.

* For details on Omakase Lock, refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

●Operations during Omakase Lock

z“おまかせロック中です ”

(Omakase Lock set) appears

on the display.

zWhen Omakase Lock is set, all

the key operations except

answering voice/videophone

calls and powering on/off are locked, and the

functions (including IC card) become unusable.

zAlthough you can receive voice/videophone calls,

only the phone number appears on the display

while the name, image, etc. stored in the

phonebook do not.

zMails received when Omakase Lock is set are kept

at i-mode center.

zYou can turn the FOMA terminal on/off, but

Omakase Lock is not released even when the

power is turned off.

zThe FOMA card (UIM) and microSD card remain

unlocked.

zEven if an incorrect security code is input while

releasing Dial lock, no error message appears. Press

y and input a correct security code again.

zWhen other function is activated, the function is

terminated and the FOMA terminal is locked (the

editing data may be canceled before terminating).

zYou can set Omakase Lock even when other lock

function is set. In this case, releasing Omakase Lock

returns to the lock setting before Omakase Lock is set

(however, Secret or Secret data only mode are

released).

zLock is not set when “ ”, Self mode is set or the

FOMA terminal is turned off.

zThe lock is not set if you subscribed to the “Dual

Network” service and are using the mova service.

0120-524-360

(Operating time: 24 hours a day)

(only in Japanese)

Call Center (for setting/releasing Omakase Lock)

* My docomo is also available to set/release

Omakase Lock via a PC, etc.

103

Continued on next page

Security Settings

Preventing Others from

Viewing Your Phonebook or

Schedule Data

When the phonebook or schedule entries are stored

in Secret or Secret data only mode, these entries are

stored as secret data and are not displayed in normal

mode. To display the secret data, set the FOMA

terminal to Secret mode (displays all data including

the secret data) or Secret data only mode (displays

only the secret data).

zYou can also keep the data in “My picture”,

“i-motion”, “Received mails”, “Sent mails” and

“Bookmark” into the secret folder to prevent others

from viewing the data.→p.104

Setting to Secret or Secret data only

mode

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Secret mode” or “Secret data only

mode”Enter your security code

When setting to Secret mode, “ ” appears.

When setting to Secret data only mode, “ ”

flashes and the number of secret data is

displayed for about 2 seconds.

Icons displayed when other lock function is set at

the same time→p.27

●Storing/viewing the Secret data and

setting the Secret data back to normal

data

zYou cannot set phonebook entries as secret data

on the FOMA card (UIM).

zWhen making or receiving voice/videophone calls

during secret mode or secret data only mode, set

mode is released even if you do not answer the call.

■Setting phonebook entries or schedule entries

as secret data

Store the information in Secret or Secret data only mode.

Adding information to the phonebook→p.70

Adding information to your schedule→p.285

■Setting the stored phonebook entries as secret

data

Select “Set secret” from the function menu of the

phonebook detail screen.

* If you set the phonebook entry stored to Choku-

Den as a secret data, the entry is deleted from

Choku-Den.

■Viewing the secret data

Set the FOMA terminal to Secret or Secret data only

mode, then view the phonebook or schedule.

Searching the phonebook→p.73

Checking your schedule→p.287

■Setting the secret data back to normal data

Set the FOMA terminal to Secret or Secret data only

mode, display the “Phonebook detail” screen (p.73) or

“Schedule list” screen (p.287) to select “Release

secret” from the function menu.

Canceling Secret or Secret data only

mode

1In Secret or Secret data only mode,

Secret or Secret data only mode is canceled and

“ ” disappears.

You can also release the set mode by selecting

i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”“Secret

mode” or “Secret data only mode”

zThe FOMA terminal is locked if the subscriber

requests even if the subscriber and the user of the

FOMA terminal are different.

zIf the FOMA terminal is on voice or videophone call

when you try to release Omakase Lock, the lock is

released after the call ends.

zWhen a secret data is highlighted in the list screen

during Secret mode or when the detail screen of a

secret data is displayed, the lighting of “ ” changes

to flashing.

z“Phonebook” or “Schedule” entries stored as secret

data can only be retrieved, modified, deleted or

referred in Secret or Secret data only mode. When the

FOMA terminal is in normal mode, you will be notified

of schedule events stored as secret data by an alarm,

but no alarm message is displayed.

104

Security Settings

Preventing Others from

Viewing Data

You can store images, movies, i-motion, received

mail, sent mail, and bookmarks you want to prevent

others from viewing data, using Secret folder which is

displayed only in Secret mode or Secret data only

mode.

zYou can store the data stored in the FOMA terminal

only.

zThe maximum number of data records that can be

stored in each secret folder is as follows:

* The data may not be able to be stored up to the maximum

number depending on the file size of each data.

<Example: To store an image in My picture into the

Secret folder>

1Switch the FOMA terminal to Secret

mode or Secret data only mode→p.103

2Image list screen (p.225)



Use b to

move the frame of the image



u (FUNC)



“Keep in secret”

zIf the caller of the incoming call is stored as secret

data and notifies the caller ID, the stored name or

image is not displayed and only the phone number is

displayed. Only the phone number is displayed in

“Received calls” record. Setting Secret mode or

Secret data only mode displays the name stored in the

“Received calls” record.

zIf the Secret mode or Secret data only mode is

released when you receive mail from a sender stored

as secret data, not the name but the mail address is

displayed. The mail address is not stored in “Received

address” record.

zIf you modify your “Phonebook” or “Schedule” in

Secret mode, the modified data becomes secret data.

If you modify the phonebook, all the items stored

under the modified memory number become secret

data.

zIf “Dial lock/Omakase Lock” is set at the same time

with “Secret mode” or “Secret data only mode”,

releasing “Dial lock/Omakase Lock” also cancels

“Secret mode” or “Secret data only mode”.

zWhen you make a call or send a mail using the

phonebook stored as a secret data, it is not recorded

in the “Redial”, “Dialed calls” or “Sent address”

records.

My picture i-motion Received mail

Approx. 100

(Approx. 2M

bytes)

Approx. 10

(Approx. 10M

bytes)

Approx. 100

(Approx. 1.2M

bytes)

Sent mail Bookmark

(i-mode)

Bookmark

(Full Browser)

Approx. 100

(Approx. 1.2M

bytes)

Approx. 10

(Approx. 3K

bytes)

Approx. 10

(Approx. 6K

bytes)

zThe Secret folder is already prepared for the FOMA

terminal. You cannot create another Secret folder, or

delete or rename the existing Secret folder.

zIf the secret/secret data only mode is canceled by an

incoming call, etc. while displaying the data in the

secret folder, the screen returns to the list screen of

each folder.

zWhen you receive the SMS report for the SMS stored

in the Secret folder, you cannot select “Disp. SMS

report” from the function menu of the SMS detail

screen. You can select after putting out a mail

message from the Secret folder.

105

Security Settings

●Function menu of the Secret folder

Some functions for the folder or data in the folder are

restricted in the Secret folder. The table below shows

the available functions on the folder list screen, the

data list screen, and the data detail screen. For

information on “Put out”, refer to “Changing a secret

data to normal data” (p.106).

■Function menu when the Secret folder is

highlighted on the folder list screen

*1: The data in the Secret folder are not included.

*2: Available only with the Inbox folder list screen.

■Function menu (Data list screen)

*1: In list display, “Chg. images view” appears.

*2: Available only with the received mail list screen.

*3: Available only with the sent mail list screen.

■Function menu (Data detail screen)

* : “Normal” appears when in the Full screen mode.

zWhen the image, movie or i-motion pasted as a

shortcut icon is stored in the Secret folder, it is not

displayed even when the shortcut icon is selected.

zEven when the Bookmark, received mail or sent mail

pasted as a shortcut icon is stored in the Secret folder,

normal operation is performed when the shortcut icon

is selected.

My picture

(p.253)

i-motion

(p.253)

Add folder

Delete all image*1

Memory info

Add folder

Delete all*1

Memory info

Received/Sent mail

(p.173)

Bookmark

(p.142)

Add folder

No. of messages*1

Open folder

iC trans. all*1

Send all Ir data*1

CopyAll to microSD*1

Delete read*1*2

Delete all*1

Add folder

No. of bookmarks*1

iC trans. all*1

Send all Ir data*1

CopyAll to microSD

Delete all*1

My picture

(p.228)

i-motion

(p.233)

Display image

Image info

Memory info

Chg. list view*1

Delete

Put out

i-motion info

Memory info

List setting

Delete

Put out

Received/Sent mail

(p.175)

Bookmark

(p.143)

Color coding

List setting

Protect*2

Unprotect*2

Protect ON/OFF*3

Unprotect all*3

Mail info*2

No. of messages

Delete

Put out

No. of bookmarks

Delete

Put out

My picture

(p.228)

i-motion

(p.279)

Image info

Set image disp.

Full screen*

Retry

Delete this

Action setting

Play menu

Detail Info

Select file

Help

Received/Sent mail

(p.176)

Protect ON/OFF

Scroll

Font size

Delete

Put out

106

Security Settings

Changing a secret data to normal data

To change the secret data back to normal data, move

the data from the Secret folder to another folder.

<Example: To return an image from the Secret folder

of My picture to normal data>

1Switch the FOMA terminal to Secret

mode or Secret data only mode→p.103

2Folder list screen (p.225)



“Secret”



Move the frame to an image



u (FUNC)



“Put out”

3Select a folder

Preventing Others from

Viewing Your Personal

Information or Performing the

Phone/Mail Operations

You can lock the functions which use your personal

information such as mails and phonebook to prevent

others from viewing these information or altering

improperly. You can also restrict making or receiving

voice/videophone calls, and sending i-mode mails or

SMS.

zYou can store the function or data you want to lock

to Original lock 1 to 3 individually depending on the

usage or purpose.

zOriginal lock is not released even when the power

is turned off.

zFunctions and data you can lock are described in

Table 1 (p.108). You can specify (customize)

whether to lock or not for each group and item.

→p.107

Activating Original lock

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Lock”Enter your security code

The “Lock selection” screen

appears.

2Select Original lock 1 to

The lock is activated and the

function or data to be locked

is locked.

“ ” appears on the screen.

Icons displayed when other

lock function is set at the same time→p.27

■To change the function or data to be

locked→p.107

■To edit the title

Highlight one of Original lock 1 to 3

u (FUNC)“Edit title”Enter the title

■To release Original lock

“OFF”

zIf you put out a mail message from the Secret folder,

the mail turns into a normal mail message. Therefore,

an old mail message may be deleted when new mail

messages are sent or received. It is recommended to

protect the mail message before putting it out from the

Secret folder.

Lock selection

107

Continued on next page

Security Settings

●Operations during Original lock

If you try to use the locked function or data when

Original lock is set, you are asked to enter your

security code.

zIf you enter your security code, the lock is

deactivated temporarily and you can use the locked

function or data (you cannot use the functions of

“Dial/sending mail” and “Incoming/Mail disp.” when

the lock is released temporarily). When you exit

from the activated function and return to the

standby screen, the lock is activated again.

<Example: To view an i-mode mail when Original lock

is set>

1On the standby screenu

2Enter your security code

Original lock is released temporarily and the mail

menu appears.

3Read an i-mode mail

4Exit the mail menu and return to the

standby screen

Original lock is activated and “ ” appears on

the screen.

Customizing the function or data to be

locked

zYou can store particular settings such as “locking

the phonebook only” or “restricting the outgoing

calls/mails only” to Original lock 1 to 3 individually

depending on the usage or purpose.

zYou can set (customize) the lock by each category,

group or function such as Table 1 (p.108).

zThe contents of the lock you set (customize) are

retained even when Original lock is set or released.

1Lock selection screen (p.106) 

Highlight one of Original lock 1 to 3

o (Detail)

The “Category list” screen

appears.

“ ” appears when any of

the item in the category is to

be locked and “ ” appears

when all items are to be

locked.

2Select the category

you want to change the setting

The “Group list” screen

appears.

“ ” appears when any of

the item in the group is to be

locked and “ ” appears

when all items are to be

locked.

3Select the group you

want to change the

setting

The “Function list” screen

appears.

4Use c to select □ (checkbox)

o (Finish)

The checked ( ) item is to

be locked.

Deselect items you do not

want to lock.

5o (Finish)

o (Finish)d (Set)

The number of times you

press o (Finish) varies depending on the

category.

Category list

Function menu



p.110

Group list

Function menu



p.110

Function list

Function menu



p.110

108

Security Settings

[Table 1] Functions and data for the Original lock

Group Function Operations when locked/Notes

Data disp. Edit del.

Mail Mail

Mail member

Locks the activation of each function.

• You can view the Area Mail contents.

i-mode i-mode Locks the i-mode function (i-mode, Full Browser and i-Channel).

Bookmark Locks the i-mode and Full Browser bookmark list displays.

i-αppli i-αppli Locks the i-αppli function or IC card list display.

• IC card function is not locked.

• When the i-αppli standby screen is set, the i-αppli standby screen is

deactivated when the lock is set.

ToruCa ToruCa Locks the display of ToruCa folder list screen.

• The ToruCa acquisition is available with a reader/writer unit even when the

lock is set, but the “New ToruCa” shortcut icon does not appear (once the

lock is released, the “New ToruCa” shortcut icon appears).

Multi media My picture

Music

i-motion

Melody

1Seg

Kisekae Tool

My document

Chara-den

Document viewer

Voice announce

Locks the activation of each function.

• The data cannot be accessed from other functions.

• If the data to be locked is set as the ring tone, receiving screen, standby

screen, etc., the default settings are used when the lock is set.

• When “My picture” or “Chara-den” is to be locked and an substitute image is

sent for a videophone call when the lock is set, the “Pre-installed” substitute

image is sent.

Music&Video Channel

Camera

Bar code reader

Text reader

Locks the activation of each function.

• Music&Video Channel programs can be downloaded even when the lock is

set.

Schedule Schedule

Alarm

To Do list

Locks the activation of each function.

• The alarm notification is not given when the lock is set and “Missed alarm”

shortcut icon appears.

Memo Play/Erase msg.

Play/Erase VP msg.

Locks the activation of each function (you can set the Record message).

• During any lock function is set, and when you press s (▼メモ) with the

FOMA terminal folded, you cannot check “Record message”.

Voice memo

Voice memo (in-call)

Locks the activation of each function.

• The play/erase a voice memo is not locked (Set the lock for “Play/Erase

msg.” screen)

Phonebook Phonebook/

Choku-Den

Locks the activation of the phonebook and Choku-Den (this affects many

other functions which use the phonebook).

• The stored name is not displayed when the lock is set in the Dialed and

Received call or Mail list screen. A phone number or mail address is

displayed.

• When “MSG display settings” of “Chaku-moji” is set to “Only number in PH-

book”, a Chaku-moji message is not displayed.

• You cannot set “Reject unknown” at the same time.

• “Call rejection”, “Call acceptation”, “Call Forwarding” and “Voice Mail”

settings are deactivated.

• Even if you press s (▼メモ) with the FOMA terminal folded while lock is

set, the FOMA terminal does not read out the caller or sender’s name of a

missed call or new mail.

My profile Locks the activation of My Profile.

Dialed calls Locks the activation of “Dialed calls”, “Redial” and “Sent address”.

Received calls Locks the activation of “Received calls” and “Received address”.

• Even if you press s (▼メモ) with the FOMA terminal folded while lock is

set, the FOMA terminal does not check a missed call.

109

Security Settings

* When the data to be locked are pasted as “Shortcut icon” on the standby screen, these shortcut icons are not

displayed when the lock is set.

Other

settings

Text memo Locks the activation of text memo.

Notice designate calls No alarm notification is given even when the specified upper cost limit is

exceeded.

• Once the lock is released, the “Notice designate calls” shortcut icon

appears.

Chaku-moji Locks the function of editing or setting Chaku-moji, and the function of “Select

message” or “Sent messages” when you send the Chaku-moji, and Chaku-

moji is not displayed.

• You can send or receive the Chaku-moji.

Dial/sending mail

Keypad dial Keypad dial You cannot make calls by dialing the phone number directly (you can make

calls using the phonebook, Redial/Dialed calls records and the Received calls

record of the recorded party.).

• You cannot add or edit phonebook entries, perform UIM operation or copy

phonebook from a microSD card.

• You can still call the emergency numbers (110, 119 or 118).

Sending

mail

Input add by keypad Locks to send i-mode mails or SMS by entering the address directly (you can

use only the phonebook, Redial/Dialed calls records, the sent address list,

the received calls record or the received address of the recorded party.).

• You cannot add or edit phonebook entries, perform UIM operation or copy

phonebook from a microSD card.

• Addresses of all mails in the Draft mailbox and the mails with addresses

only are deleted.

Sending mail Locks the i-mode mail and SMS.

Incoming/Mail disp.

Incoming call Rejects voice and videophone calls and packet communication (these are

recorded as missed calls).

• Once the lock is released, the “Missed call” shortcut icon appears.

Disp. recv. mail/msg. You can still receive MessageR/F, i-mode mail or SMS automatically, but the

receiving screen or reception results screen does not appear. Also, there is

no ring tone or other reaction when a call comes in and you are not notified of

a received call.

• You can still receive the Area Mail automatically and view the contents.

• Once the lock is released, shortcut icons such as “New mail” appear.

Group Function Operations when locked/Notes

110

Security Settings

Category list screen (p.107)/

Group list screen (p.107)

Select……Selects all items in the highlighted item.

Release……Deselects all selected items in the

highlighted item.

Select all……Selects all items under the displayed item.

Release all……Deselects all selected items under the

displayed item.

Function list screen (p.107)

Select all……Selects all the displayed items.

Release all……Deselects all the displayed items.

Locking the Key Operation

Automatically

You can lock the key operations automatically when

the FOMA terminal is folded or no operation is

performed for a certain period of time.

zThe center illumination lamp flashes in blue while in

Keypad lock.

Setting Keypad lock

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Keypad lock”Enter your security

codeSelect any item:

After folded……Sets whether to lock the keypad

automatically when the FOMA terminal is folded

(ON/OFF).

Timer……Selects the setting from “OFF/ON after 1

minute/ON after 5 minutes/ON after 15 minutes/ON

after 30 minutes”.

For example, when set to “ON after 5 minutes”, the

lock is set automatically after no operation is

performed for 5 minutes. When set to “OFF”, timer is

deactivated and no lock is set.

2Set the respective itemso (Finish)

●Operations during Keypad lock

z“ ” and “ ” appear

on the screen while the Keypad

lock is set.

zDuring Keypad lock, all the key

operations are unavailable

except for answering voice or

videophone calls, turning on/off

the FOMA terminal, the

operation of IC card

authentication function and

a (▲マナー ) (check for missed

call/new mail).

zWhile in Keypad lock, the FOMA terminal receives

MessageR/F, i-mode mail, SMS and Area mail, but

viewing or reading out messages is not available.

• You can still receive the Area Mail automatically

and view the contents.

zEven when Keypad lock is set, the “Alarm”,

“Schedule”, “To Do list”, “1Seg booking program”

and “1Seg timer recording” alarms are given.

zIf you can operate the FOMA terminal even when

Keypad lock is set (e.g. when receiving a voice call

or alarm notification is given), “ ” appears under

the function display.

Releasing Keypad lock temporarily

1Enter your security code on the screen

when Keypad lock is setd

■To release the lock temporarily using the

IC card authentication→p.111

zEven when keypad lock is set, you can directly dial

and make voice calls to emergency numbers (110,

119 and 118).

zThe lock may not be set during a call, data

communication (such as i-mode) or playback of

melody/i-motion/music, or when activating the

camera, etc.

zWhen “After folded” or “Timer” is set to ON then the

power is turned off, Keypad lock automatically

activates even if the FOMA terminal remains opened

or the time has not reached the specified time.

111

Security Settings

Using the IC Card

Authentication

You can release Dial lock or Keypad lock or you can

perform the user authentication without entering your

security code on the screen which requires your

security code entry only by placing the FOMA

terminal on a FeliCa-compatible contactless IC card

(external IC card).

zYou can use the IC card authentication even when

IC card lock is set.

zYou can store up to 2 contactless IC cards.

Activating the IC card authentication

You can store the contactless IC card to enable the

user authentication.

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“IC card authentic.”Enter your

security code

The “IC card authentic.”

screen appears.

2“ON”“OK”

■To activate the stored

contactless IC card

“ON”

■To deactivate the IC

card authentication

“OFF”“YES” or “NO”

Select “YES” when you

delete all the contactless IC card data, and

select “NO” when you do not delete them.

3Place the contactless IC card on the

FeliCa mark “e” on the FOMA

terminal

“ ” disappears when the card is stored.

IC card authentic. screen

(p.111)

New ext. IC card……Stores up to 2 contactless IC cards.

If 2 cards are already stored, delete the old data to store

the card.

Del. ext. IC card……Deletes the contactless IC card

data.

Using the IC Card Authentication

<Example: To release the Dial lock/Keypad lock>

1Open the FOMA terminal when Dial

lock/Keypad lock is set

“ ” appears on the screen and the user

authentication is enabled for about 10 seconds.

Pressing p (iC auth.) on the standby screen

also enables the user authentication.

■To release the lock with the FOMA

terminal folded

Pressing a (▲マナー ) (1 second or longer)

enables the user authentication for about 10

seconds.

2Place the contactless IC card on the

FeliCa mark “e” on the FOMA terminal

The lock is released when the user

authentication is performed successfully.

■When entering your security code

“ ” appears when the security code entry

screen appears and the user authentication is

enabled for about 10 seconds. If you place the

contactless IC card stored with this function on

the FeliCa mark on the FOMA terminal, the user

authentication is performed.

IC card authentic.

Function menu



p.111

zEven though the contactless card is compatible with

FeliCa, this function may not be available depending

on the card.

zWhen using the IC card authentication, hold the

contactless IC card and the FOMA terminal with your

hands.

zIf you fail 5 times in sequence, the IC card

authentication is deactivated and the authentication

can be performed only with the security code. After

the authentication with your security code is

performed successfully, you can use the IC card

authentication again.

Hold the contactless IC card and the FOMA

terminal in your hand, and put “e” of the

back cover close to the IC card.

* Put the IC card close to the FOMA terminal as illustrated

The FOMA terminal may have difficulty in authentication

depending on the IC card. In this case move the card

horizontal or vertical.

Contactless IC card

112

Security Settings

Disabling the Side Key

You can disable the function of the side keys (a (▲マ

ナー ) and s (▼メモ)) when the FOMA terminal is

folded.

zIn the following situations, the side key is enabled

regardless of this setting:

• When the FOMA terminal is opened

• When a flat-plug earphone/microphone with

switch (optional), etc. is connected

1iw (1 second or longer)

The side key operations are

disabled (ON) and “ ”

appears.

■To enable the external

keys when the FOMA

terminal is folded

Repeat step 1

“ ” disappears.

Preventing Unwanted Mail

Display

You can lock your Inbox, Outbox, Draft mailboxes or

other folders so that their contents cannot be viewed

by other people without your approval. Mail box or

folders which is locked cannot be opened without

entering a security code.

zOnce you enter your security code, it remains valid

until the mail task is finished, and you can open

mail folders without security code even if the lock is

set.

zFor folders that are locked, icons such as “ ” or

“ ” appear before the folder name on the folder

list screen.

zIcons such as “ ” appear next to the mail box

which is locked. (Only when in Standard Menu,

Simple Menu or Original theme)

zWhen lock is set to mail box or folder, mail

addresses for which lock is set are not recorded in

the Sent address and Received address lists.

Setting lock for individual mail boxes

1u“Mail settings”“Mail box lock”

Enter your security code

2Use c to select a checkbox (□ )

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

3o (Finish)

Setting lock for individual folders

1Inbox/Outbox folder list screen

(pp.170, 171)Highlight the folder to

be locked u (FUNC)“Folder lock”

Enter your security code“YES”

■To release the setting

Repeat step 1

Restricting Incoming and

Outgoing Calls for Specific

Phone Numbers

You can restrict incoming and outgoing calls for each

phone number stored in the Phonebook to prevent

personal phone calls or nuisance calls.

zYou can specify restrictions for up to 20 phone

numbers in each directory.

zThis setting is not available for the FOMA card

(UIM) phonebook.

zThis function is applied to only calls of which caller

ID is notified. It is recommended to set “Caller ID

Request” or “Call setting w/o ID” at the same time.

zYou cannot set Call rejection and Call acceptation

to the same phone number, or Call forwarding and

Voice mail to the same number.

zIf you set restrictions for the phone number and

then edit or delete that phone number, the

restrictions on the selected function are released

(however, when “Restrict dialing” is set, you cannot

edit or delete the phonebook).

Setting restrictions

1Phonebook detail screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Restrictions”Enter your

security codeSelect any item:

Restrict dialing……Restricts outgoing calls to the

phone numbers that are not specified. To make a

call to the specified phone number, call the number

from the phonebook.

Call rejection……Restricts incoming calls from the

specified phone number.

Call acceptation……Restricts incoming calls from

the phone numbers that are not specified.

113

Security Settings

Call Forwarding……Forwards incoming calls from

the specified phone number regardless of the Call

forwarding service setting (Activate/Deactivate).

Voice Mail……Transfers incoming calls from the

specified phone number to the Voice mail service

center regardless of the Voice mail service setting

(Activate/Deactivate).

“★” appears next to the selected function.

■To release a selected function

Select the function with “★”

The function is released and the “★” disappears.

■To set restrictions for multiple phone numbers

Press t twice to return to the phonebook

list screenSelect the phonebook entry you

wantRepeat step 1

Once you press y to return to the standby screen

after setting Restrict dialing, you cannot continue to

add restrictions. To add more numbers, release the

Restrict dialing that have already been set for the

phone number and then set the Restrictions again

including the released phone number.

●When Restrict dialing is set

zYou cannot dial including the specified phone

numbers using the Dialed calls and Received calls

records. Also, you cannot call numbers other than

the specified ones, add to, edit or delete

phonebook, exchange data between the FOMA

terminal (Phone) and the FOMA card (UIM), or

operate phonebook by “UIM operation”.

zThe current records of Redial/Dialed calls and Sent

address list are deleted after setting the Restrict

dialing. However, you can dial or send mails using

the records of Redial/Dialed calls or Sent address

list that have been stored after setting.

Checking the restriction settings

1Phonebook list screen (p.73)

u (FUNC)“Restrictions”Enter your

security code

The “Restrictions” screen

appears.

Restrictions screen (p.113)

Check settings……Displays a list of the phonebook

entries for which the function is set.

Release settings……Releases the function and “★”

disappears.

zIf you use 2in1, the restrictions on the selected

function work differently depending on the

combination of the current mode setting and

Phonebook 2in1 setting as shown below.

• In A mode, the specified phone number in the A or

common setting phonebook is applied.

• In B mode, the specified phone number in the B or

common setting phonebook is applied.

• In Dual mode, the specified phone number in all of

the phonebooks is applied.

However, as for Restrict dialing, you cannot call the

phone numbers that are not specified regardless of

the 2in1 mode setting.

zYou can still make calls to emergency numbers (110,

119 and 118) when the Restrict dialing is set.

zThe FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS

regardless of this function.

zIf you receive a call from a number that is specified on

Call rejection or from a number that is not specified on

Call acceptation, the number is recorded as “Missed

calls” in the received calls records and the “Missed

call” shortcut icon is displayed on the standby screen.

zIf you receive a call from a phone number for which

Call rejection is set or from a phone number other than

the number for which Call acceptation is set, the call is

rejected even when the “Voice Mail” and “Call

Forwarding” services are “Activate”. Note that if the

FOMA terminal is turned off or “ ” or if the ringing

time set for “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding” is 0 (zero)

second, “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding” is enabled.

zIf you receive a call from the specified phone number,

the FOMA terminal rings for about 1 second and the

call is forwarded to the designated number or

connected to the Voice mail service center, and the

“Missed call” shortcut icon appears on the standby

screen.

zIf no call forwarding number is designated or if you

have not subscribed to the “Call Forwarding” or “Voice

Mail” service, calls from the specified phone number

are handled as missed calls.

Restrictions

Function menu



p.113

114

Security Settings

Rejecting Calls from

Unidentified Callers

You can accept or reject voice/videophone calls from

callers who do not provide the caller ID depending on

the reason for no caller ID.

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Call setting w/o ID”Enter your

security codeSelect any item:

Unknown……Specifies whether to accept or reject

calls from callers who are unable to provide the

caller ID, such as calls from overseas or calls from

ordinary phones sent via a call forwarding service.

Some phone companies provide caller IDs.

Payphone……Specifies whether to accept or reject

calls dialed from pay phones.

User unset……Specifies whether to accept or reject

calls made by callers who withhold their caller IDs.

2“Accept” or “Reject”

■When “Accept” is selected

“Select ring tone” or “Select calling disp.”

• Select the ring tone from “Same as ring tone/

Melody/i-motion/Music/Voice announce/

Random melody/OFF” for “Select ring tone”

(when “Same as ring tone” is selected, the

“Phone” setting of “Select ring tone” is used).

• Select the calling display from “Same as

display/My picture/i-motion” for “Select calling

disp.” (when “Same as display” is selected, the

“Calling” setting of “Display setting” is used).

■When “Reject” is selected

The call is rejected and the other party hears the

busy tone.

Muting Ring Tones for Callers

Not Stored in the Phonebook

You can set the mute period for the ring tone for voice/

videophone calls from the phone number which is not

stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook or UIM

phonebook (Set mute seconds). You can prevent

accidentally dialing numbers, such as nuisance calls that

only ring for a short period from Received calls record.

z“Set mute seconds” also works when you receive a

voice/videophone call without caller ID or when there is

another incoming call during a voice/videophone call.

zYou cannot set “Set mute seconds” when “Reject

unknown” is set to “Reject”.

1i“SETTINGS”“Incoming call”

“Ring time(sec.)”Select any item:

Set mute seconds

ON……Enters the time for which the ring tone

is muted before starting up (01 to 99 seconds).

OFF……Sets the time for which the ring tone is

muted before starting up to 0 second.

Missed calls display……Specifies whether to

record received calls for which no ring tone sounded

to the missed calls record or the shortcut icon.

Rejecting Calls from Callers

Not Stored in the Phonebook

You can specify whether to accept or reject calls from

callers who are not stored in the phonebook of the

FOMA terminal (Phone) or the FOMA card (UIM).

zThis function is applied to only calls of which caller

ID is notified. It is recommended to set “Caller ID

Request” or “Call setting w/o ID” at the same time.

zThe ring tone or calling display selected in this

function is the setting for voice phone calls without

caller ID. When you receive videophone calls without

the caller ID, “Videophone” of “Select ring tone” or

“V.phone Calling” of “Display setting” is used.

zWhen you receive a call from a caller who is set to

“Reject”, the call is rejected even when “Voice Mail” or

“Call Forwarding” service is set to “Activate”. However,

if the FOMA terminal is turned off or

“”

or if the

ringing time set for “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding” is

0 (zero) second, “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding” is

enabled.

zThe FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS

regardless of this function.

zWhen you receive a call from someone who is stored

in the phonebook as a secret data, the FOMA terminal

operates as specified in this function.

zIf the mute time is longer than the ringing time for the

Record message function, the FOMA terminal

switches directly to Record message without ringing

first. To have the FOMA terminal ring before it records

a message, make sure that the ringing time for Record

message is longer than the mute time. The same

applies to the ringing times for Voice Mail, Call

Forwarding and Auto answer setting.

115

Continued on next page

Security Settings

zYou cannot set “Reject unknown” when “Set mute

seconds” of “Ring time(sec.)” is set to “ON”.

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Reject unknown”Enter your security

code“Reject” or “Accept”

Disabling Making/Receiving

Calls, etc.

You can set the FOMA terminal not to make or receive

voice or videophone calls, use i-mode, or send or

receive mails. This is useful when you want to use the

FOMA terminal without worrying about interruptions

such as incoming voice or videophone calls.

zYou can make voice calls to emergency numbers

(110, 119 and 118) even when Self mode is set.

Note that making a voice call at an emergency

number cancels Self mode.

1i“SETTINGS”“Lock/Security”

“Self mode”“YES”

Self mode is set and “ ” appears.

■To cancel Self mode

Repeat step 1

Self mode is canceled and “ ” disappears.

●When Self mode is set

zReceived voice or videophone calls are not

recorded in the “Received calls” record and the

“Missed call” shortcut icon also does not appear on

the standby screen.

zMessageR/F or i-mode mails sent to you are kept

at the i-mode center and SMS are kept at the SMS

center.

zThe caller of the voice or videophone call is notified

with a guidance or message that the FOMA

terminal is in out of signal range or is turned off.

When you use the “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding”

service, you can use the same service provided

when the FOMA terminal is turned off.

zData exchange via Infrared data exchange/iC

communication, packet communication or 64K data

communication with a PC connected, user

authentication by IC card authentication are also

unavailable. However, you can read and write data

on the IC card using data transfer via USB

connection (OBEX™ connection) or Osaifu-Keitai

i-αppli.

Data Security Service

The automatic update function allows you to back up

the Phonebook and other data on your FOMA

terminal at Data Center to be able to smoothly restore

data if you lose your FOMA terminal or when

changing models. Broadcast report is available to let

others know that you changed your mail address.

Packet communications charges do not apply to send

mail. The service gives you even more convenience if

you have a PC (My docomo).

* For details on how to use the Data Security

Service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”.

zData Security Service is a pay service you need

subscription (you need to subscribe to i-mode

service in advance).

zWhen you receive a call from someone who is stored

in the phonebook as a secret data, the call is not

rejected regardless of this setting.

zWhen this function is set to “Reject”, the caller hears

the busy tone even if you have activated “Voice Mail” or

“Call Forwarding”. If the FOMA terminal is turned off or

“ ” is displayed or if the ringing time set for “Voice

Mail” or “Call Forwarding” is 0 (zero) second, the caller

does not hear the busy tone and is connected to the

Voice Mail service center or the forwarding number.

zThe FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS

regardless of this function.

How the service works

Internet

Data Security Center

PC, etc.

FOMA

terminal

Saving/Downloading

phonebook entries,

mails or images

Restoring data

easily when lost,

exposed to water

or changing model

Downloading data

edited on a PC

Viewing or editing data kept at the Center

116

Security Settings

zRefer to the following pages for storing operations

of Data Security Service:

• “Storing the Phonebook at the Data Security

Center”→p.79

• “Storing mails at the Data Security Center”

→p.176

• “Storing images at the Data Security Center”

→p.229

Other Security Settings

Apart from those explained in this chapter, there are

functions/services relating to security settings as

shown below.

* : Refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version”.

Purpose Function/

Service name

To prevent others from using the

IC card functions

IC card lock setting

→p.206

To avoid “nuisance phone calls”

such as prank phone calls or

unsolicited sales phone calls

Nuisance Call

Blocking →p.315

To reject calls that has no caller ID Caller ID Request

→p.316

To send data securely by using the

user certificate service

* Only available on sites that

support FirstPass

FirstPass→p.150

To update the FOMA terminal

software when necessary

Software Update

→p.377

Protecting the FOMA Terminal

from Harmful Data

Scanning function

→p.383

To accept only necessary mails

when receiving i-mode mails

Receive option

→p.164

To leave/hear the information

about the safety using i-mode at

the time of disaster

“i-mode Disaster

Message Board”

service*

To change your mail address

Change Mail Address

To reject mails with URLs Spam Mail

Prevention (Reject

Mail with URL)*

To accept/reject mail from specified domain

Spam Mail

Prevention (Reject/

Receive Mail

Settings)*

To accept/reject i-mode mail only

To accept/reject mail from specified address

To set the recommended settings

of Spam Mail Prevention easily

Spam Mail Prevention

(

かんたんメール設定

(Simple mail setting))

To reject i-mode mail from senders

who have already sent 500 or more

messages from the same i-mode

mobile phone in the same day

Spam Mail

Prevention (Reject

Mass i-mode Mail

Senders)*

To reject SMS Spam Mail

Prevention (SMS

Rejection

Settings)*

To reject advertisements Spam Mail

Prevention (Reject

Unsolicited Ad

Mail)*

To restrict the size of received mail Limit Mail Size*

To check the status of the mail

function settings

Confirm Settings*

To temporarily stop the mail

function

Suspend Mail*

To search for the rough location of

your lost mobile phone

Keitai-Osagashi

Service*

zBe careful when calling back to the numbers you do

not know. In particular, sending your caller ID to the

unknown party may cause unnecessary problems.

zPriority is assigned when nuisance call barring

function is set at the same time:

①Nuisance Call Blocking service

②Reject unknown or Ring time(sec.)/Call setting w/o

ID/Call rejection

Purpose Function/

Service name

117

Camera

Before Using the Camera ............................................................................................... 118

Shooting Still Images .................................................................................... 123

Shooting Movies ........................................................................................... 126

Capturing Important Scenes.................................................................... 128

Using Voice Mode .......................................................................................... 128

Changing the Shooting Settings ..................................................................................... 128

Using the Bar Code Reader..................................................................... 129

Scanning Text ................................................................................................. 131

Take care not to infringe on the copyrights when you duplicate or edit the images you shot or

recorded using the FOMA terminal. Also take care not to infringe on the portrait rights by using

or altering another person’s portrait without his or her permission. It may be prohibited to shoot

or record the stage performance, entertainment or exhibition even if you only want to enjoy it

personally.

Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending

photos using camera-equipped mobile phones.

Photo mode

Movie mode

Chance capture

Voice mode

Bar code reader

Text reader

118

Camera

Before Using the Camera

You can use the FOMA terminal’s built-in camera to

shoot photos (still images) and movies.

zYou cannot activate the camera function or shoot

images when the FOMA terminal is folded.

Using the camera

●To set to camera mode

There are 3 methods:

①Select the shortcut icon ( ) on the standby screen

②Press p (1 second or longer) on the standby

screen.

③Select “Camera” from “LIFEKIT” of the main menu

or Simple Menu.

zWhen there is no key operation for more than about

3 minutes, the camera mode ends automatically.

●Lens selector switch

zTo take a close-up image, set to the close-up mode

by moving the lens selector switch to (macro

lens). When set to the close-up mode, the camera

is focused on an object approx. 6 to 8 cm away

from the camera.

zTo use Bar code reader or Text reader, set to the

close-up mode by moving the lens selector switch

to (macro lens).

zWhen you move the lens selector switch, move the

switch to the ● (standard lens) position or the

(macro lens) position. Do not leave the switch in the

middle of these positions.

When using the camera

■Notes on shooting

zThe camera of the FOMA terminal is made with the

extremely high-precision technology. However, it

may include lines or spots that look dark or bright.

Noises such as white lines may also appear on the

photographed images particularly when shooting in

very poorly lit locations.

zBefore shooting, wipe the lens clean with a soft

cloth. Fingerprints or grease spots on the lens

could prevent the camera from focusing properly

and cause blurred images.

zTake care not to press the lens with excessive force

when folding the FOMA terminal. This may cause

malfunction.

zImage quality may be adversely affected if the FOMA

terminal is left in a hot location for a long period of time.

zThe color tones and brightness levels in still images

and movies shot may differ from those of the actual

object.

zDo not leave the camera under the direct sunlight

for a long period of time or shoot the sun or a

powerful lamp directly. This could lead to the

discoloration of the photographed images or cause

the camera to malfunction.

zTake care that your fingers, hair, or the strap do not

cover the lens when you shoot images.

zThe shooting uses a large amount of the battery. It is

recommended to turn off the camera immediately

after you finish shooting. The screen may look dark or

blurred if you shoot images when the battery is low.

zYou cannot change or delete the volume of the

shutter sound and Auto timer tone. Also, you cannot

set the downloaded melody as the shutter sound.

zWhen shooting a still image, keep the FOMA

terminal steady until it emits the shutter sound and

finishes loading the shot image.

zWhen you take pictures indoors, flickering may

appear due to the effect of fluorescent lighting, etc.

In such a case, changing the “Flicker” setting to the

electric wave frequency in the use region

additionally may suppress flickering.

zAfter you display the shooting screen, switch the

camera modes or change the camera settings, it

may take time for the brightness or color tone to

become its best.

zTo paste the shortcut icon again after deleting it, select

“Camera” in step ③’s main menu above and press

u (FUNC) to select “Add shortcut”.

Lens selector switch

Using the

standard lens

Slide to the

position

Using the

macro lens

Slide to the

position

119

Continued on next page

Camera

■Flashing of illumination when shooting

zThe center illumination lamp lights up or flashes as

follows:

• Shooting screen activated: Flashes in red

• Shooting still images, M-continuous mode: Lights

in red (about 3 seconds)

• A-continuous mode: Lights in red (when

shooting)

• Shooting movies, recording in Voice mode:

Flashes in red

• Auto timer activated: Flashes in blue→p.128

■Saving the still images, movies, etc. you shot

zThe images, movies, etc. are saved in the folder

specified in “Select to save”.

zYou can save the still images, movies, etc. you shot

automatically when “Auto save set” is set to “ON”.

zIf the battery is low, you may not be able to save the

still images, movies, etc. you shot.

zIf the FOMA terminal is turned off or the battery

pack is removed while saving the files, incomplete

files may be saved.

■When the shooting is interrupted

zThe shooting is interrupted when you receive a

voice/videophone or 64K data communication, or

alarm notification (1Seg booking program, 1Seg

timer recording, Alarm, Schedule or To Do list), or

operate other functions.

• When shooting images continuously or shooting

movies, the shooting is interrupted and

respective screens appear. When you exit from

these screens, the camera screen reappears so

that you can save the data you shot before

receiving calls or alarm notification.

• When adjusting the zoom or brightness of the

camera, the adjusting setting is set and the

screen returns to the camera menu.

• The Auto timer is canceled.

zThe shooting is not interrupted in the following cases:

• When you receive mails or MessageR/F when

using the camera (including the case that the

shooting screen appears), the reception result

screen does not appear and the shooting mode

continues regardless of the “Receiving setting”.

• When “Alarm setting” is set to “Operation preferred”,

you can continue the shooting, make settings or

operate the Auto timer without interruption even

when the alarm specified time is reached.

■ When using the microSD card

zWhen saving the data on the microSD card, “ ”

flashes. Do not remove the microSD card during

this period. This may cause a malfunction to the

FOMA terminal or microSD card.

zWhen “microSD” is selected in “Select to save” and

there is no folder in the microSD card, a folder is

created automatically.

zIf the number of files in the microSD folder selected

in “Select to save” has reached the maximum, you

cannot set to the folder.

Image size and maximum number of

images/shooting time

The following Table 1 to 3 (pp.119, 120) shows the

image sizes, number of still images and movie

shooting time supported by FOMA SO706i.

[Table 1] The image sizes and shooting mode

[Table 2] The approximate number of still images that can be saved by destination to save

• The number of images that can be saved varies depending on the shooting environment, etc.

Image size Photo

mode

Continuous

mode

Movie

mode

2M (1,200 × 1,600) ○××

1M (960 × 1,280) ○××

VGA (640 × 480) ○××

CIF (352 × 288) ○○×

Screen (240 × 427) ○○×

QVGA V. (240 × 320) ○○×

QVGA (320 × 240) ××○

QCIF (176 × 144) ○○○

SubQCIF (128 × 96) ○○○

Quality

2M 1M

VGA CIF Screen

QVGA V.

QCIF SubQCIF

Destination: FOMA SO706i (Phone)

Super Fine 116 140 341 700 1,000

Fine 140 700 1,000

Normal 229 1,000

Destination: microSD (64M bytes)

Super Fine 99 118 291 542 948 1,897

Fine 118 542 948 1,897

Normal 189 948 1,265 3,795

120

Camera

[Table 3] The approximate shooting time that can be saved by destination to save

• Available recording times if deletable pre-installed data are deleted.

• The time is the approximate time that can be shot with the file size.

• The available shooting time varies depending on the shooting environment, etc.

Image

Size

File

size

Movie

type set

Available shooting time for a single movie Available total shooting time

Quality setting Quality setting

Long dur.

mode Normal Fine

mode

Super Fine

mode

Long dur.

mode Normal

Fine

mode

Super Fine

mode

Destination: FOMA SO706i (Phone)

QVGA 2MB Normal 82s 34s 16s 8s 47min. 19min. 9min. 280s

Video 88s 35s 17s 8s 50min. 20min. 10min. 280s

Voice 21min. 735min.

QCIF 500KB Normal 104s 53s 20s 16s 247min. 125min. 47min. 38min.

Video 128s 64s 22s 16s 303min. 151min. 52min. 38min.

Voice 316s 750min.

2MB Normal 428s 219s 82s 63s 249min. 127min. 47min. 37min.

Video 524s 262s 88s 66s 305min. 152min. 51min. 39min.

Voice 21min. 735min.

Sub

QCIF

500KB Normal 176s 67s 29s 20s 418min. 159min. 68min. 47min.

Video 256s 86s 32s 22s 608min. 204min. 75min. 52min.

Voice 316s 750min.

2MB Normal 12min. 276s 119s 82s 420min. 161min. 69min. 47min.

Video 17min. 350s 131s 88s 595min. 204min. 76min. 51min.

Voice 21min. 735min.

Destination: microSD (64M bytes)

QVGA 2MB Normal 82s 34s 16s 8s 43min. 18min. 512s 256s

Video 88s 35s 17s 8s 46min. 18min. 544s 256s

Voice 21min. 672min.

Long

time

Normal 27min. 11min. 327s 164s 27min. 11min. 327s 164s

Video 28min. 11min. 331s 165s 28min. 11min. 331s 165s

Voice 120min. 672min.

QCIF 500KB Normal 104s 53s 20s 16s 227min. 115min. 43min. 34min.

Video 128s 64s 22s 16s 279min. 139min. 48min. 34min.

Voice 316s 689min.

2MB Normal 428s 219s 82s 63s 228min. 116min. 43min. 33min.

Video 524s 262s 88s 66s 279min. 139min. 46min. 35min.

Voice 21min. 672min.

Long

time

Normal 120min. 71min. 27min. 20min. 228min. 71min. 27min. 20min.

Video 120min. 86min. 28min. 21min. 279min. 86min. 28min. 21min.

Voice 120min. 672min.

Sub

QCIF

500KB Normal 176s 67s 29s 20s 384min. 146min. 63min. 43min.

Video 256s 86s 32s 22s 558min. 187min. 69min. 48min.

Voice 316s 689min.

2MB Normal 12min. 276s 119s 82s 384min. 147min. 63min. 43min.

Video 17min. 350s 131s 88s 544min. 186min. 69min. 46min.

Voice 21min. 672min.

Long

time

Normal 120min. 90min. 39min. 27min. 384min. 90min. 39min. 27min.

Video 120min. 115min. 43min. 28min. 544min. 115min. 43min. 28min.

Voice 120min. 672min.

121

Camera

Key operation for camera mode

①d: Shutter

②j: Zoom in

③h: Zoom out

④1 to 6: Displays the following shooting menu

respectively

1: CHG camera-mode

2: Select size

3: Quality setting or File size setting

4: Photo mode

5: Brightness

6: White balance

zSome menus are not displayed depending on

the camera mode.

⑤0: Displays the explanation of keys

Guide to the shooting screen

The shooting screens display the icons of the Camera

settings. Each icon means as follows:

①Remaining storage count/Memory info*1

…… The number of images that can be saved

•White: 11 or more

•Yellow: 10 or less

•Red: No memory available

……The available capacity that can be saved

against the total capacity

• Blue: 500K bytes or more remaining

• Yellow: Less than 500K bytes remaining

• Red: No memory available*2

*1: The displayed count and the capacity are only an

approximate figure. This icon does not appear when the

destination to save is set to “microSD” and no microSD

card is inserted.

*2: Shooting is available except when shooting movies with

“File size” set to “Long time”. The shot is saved or

overwrites the data in the FOMA terminal (Phone)/

microSD card after shooting.

②Select to save (pp.123, 127)

…… The destination set to save (FOMA

terminal (Phone)/microSD card)

③Shooting menu (p.122)

……The settings of the

shooting menu

④Auto timer (p.128)

……The Auto timer is set

⑤Zoom (p.128)

to to ……The zoom settings

⑥Movie type set (p.127)

……Normal (video and voice)

……Video only

……Voice only

⑦Quality setting (p.127)

……Long dur. mode

……Normal

……Fine mode

……Super Fine mode

⑧Shooting status

…… The movie is being shot

…… The movie shooting is in standby

mode

⑨Shooting time

……Remaining time (hour:

minutes: seconds)

Photo mode shooting Movie mode standby

Movie mode shooting

122

Camera

Selecting the shooting menu

When you display the shooting menu on the screen,

you can set various settings only by selecting icons.

●Icons and settings of the shooting menu

zThe selectable items are different depending on the

camera mode.

zSome menus are unavailable depending on the

shooting condition (when using the camera from

other function such as mail function, etc.)

①CHG camera-mode

Movie mode……p.126

Chance capture……p.128

Photo mode……p.123

A-Continuous mode……p.124

M-Continuous mode……p.124

Voice mode……p.128

②Select size Photo mode

(Default: Screen)

to …… 2M (1,200 × 1,600) to SubQCIF

(128 × 96)

Movie mode (Default: QCIF)

to …… QVGA (320 × 240) to SubQCIF

(128 × 96)

③Quality setting/File size setting

Photo mode (Quality setting)

(Default: Super Fine)

Super Fine……Super Fine mode (File size:

large)

Fine……Fine mode (File size: medium)

Normal……Normal mode (File size: small)

Movie mode (File size setting)

(Default: 2MB)

500KB……Up to 500K bytes

2MB……Up to 2M bytes

Long time……Long time (microSD only)

④Photo mode

Photo mode (Default: Auto)

Movie mode (Default: Portrait)

Auto……Automatic shooting mode

Portrait……Suitable for shooting portraits

Scenery…… Suitable for shooting scenery

(including night view)

Close-up……Suitable for close-up shooting

Sports mode…… Suitable for shooting moving

objects

Night mode…… Suitable for shooting

portraits, etc. in the dark

Description of the displayed

menu and highlighted icon

Shooting screen

When you press one of

1 to 6 keys,

respective menus are

displayed directly.

* In this chapter, operations

are described in this way.

Press d (Select)

and set to the

function of the

highlighted icon.

①

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

123

Continued on next page

Camera

OFF……Turns off the shooting effects.

* Only “Portrait”, “Scenery” or “Close-up” can be set for

Movie mode.

⑤Brightness (When the camera launched: ±0)

////…… Brightness of the image (+2/

+1/±0/-1/-2)

⑥White balance (Default: Auto)

In Photo mode, this can be set only when “Photo

mode” is set to “OFF”.

Auto……Compensates the tone automatically

Fine…… Suitable for shooting outside on a

sunny day

Cloudy……Suitable for shooting outside on a

cloudy day or in the shade

Light bulb…… Suitable for shooting under the

incandescence

Fluorescent lamp…… Suitable for shooting

under the fluorescence

Shooting Still Images

1On the standby screendSelect

“”

The “Photo mode shooting”

screen appears.

2Point the camera at the object

d (Record)

The “Photo mode checking”

screen appears.

■To retake the shot

t“YES”

3d (Save)

Photo mode shooting screen

(p.123)/Continuous mode

screen (p.124)

CHG camera-mode……Changes the camera mode.

Select size・Quality setting……Sets the same setting

as the shooting menu (p.122).

Interval/Number*2……Sets the shooting interval and the

number of images you want to take on the continuous

mode.→p.125

Camera Settings

Photo mode……Sets the same setting as the

shooting menu (p.122).

Brightness……Adjusts the brightness for shooting

in 5 steps “-2 ∼±0∼+2” using v.

The brightness is automatically specified if you do

not press any key for 2 seconds.

“±0” is the default setting when you launch the

camera.

White balance……Sets the same settings as the

shooting menu (p.123).

Color mode set……Selects the effect for the

photographed image from “Normal/Sepia/

Monochrome”.

Flicker……Avoids the flicker on the shooting

screen. Selects from “Auto/Mode 1(50Hz)/Mode

2(60Hz)”.

Shutter sound (default: Sound 1)……Sets the shutter

sound.

Auto timer……Sets the auto timer.→p.128

Select frame*2……Sets the frames for images.→p.126

Auto save set……Specifies whether to save a shot

image to the folder selected in “Select to save”

automatically or not (ON/OFF).

Select to save (default: “Camera” of Phone)……Sets the

folder to save the shot image.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image.

→p.228

Memory info……Displays the amount of stored images.

Help……Displays the guide for shooting.

*1: This function is available only for the Continuous mode

screen.

*2: This function is available only for the Photo mode screen.

zDepending on image size, image quality may be

degraded.

Photo mode shooting

Function menu



p.123

Photo mode checking

Function menu



p.124

zWhen Manner mode is set (“VM tone” set to “OFF”),

the FOMA terminal does not play the shutter sound for

checking.

124

Camera

Photo mode checking screen

(p.123)

Save……Saves the images to the folder specified in

“Select to save”.

Mirror save……Inverts the left and right of the displayed

image and saves the image to the folder specified in the

“Select to save” setting.

Compose message*→p.126

You can also compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail® by

pressing o (MAIL) on the Photo mode checking screen.

Edit image……Adds a frame or effect to the image.

“Editing Images”→p.231

Set as display……Sets the still image to the standby

screen, etc.

“Changing the Display”→p.88

“Setting an image to send”→p.67

Change frame……“Shooting framed images”→p.126

Mirror display⇔Normal display……Selects the

checking screen display from normal display or mirrored

display.

Select to save (default: “Camera” of Phone)……Sets the

folder to save the shot image.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image.

→p.228

Cancel……Deletes the photographed image and returns

to the photo mode shooting screen.

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Shooting continuously

You can shoot up to 20 still images continuously.

There are two types of continuous mode: A-Continuous

mode (Auto) and M-Continuous mode (Manual).

zA-Continuous mode is the function that

automatically shoots images of specified numbers

at the set interval once you release the shutter.

zM-Continuous mode enables you to shoot images for

the set number, releasing the shutter for one by one.

zYou can enjoy the continuously shot images as an

animation after putting them into the Original animation.

zFolding the FOMA terminal terminates the

continuous mode.

1Photo mode shooting screen (p.123)

1“” or “”

The “Continuous mode”

screen appears.

2Point the camera at the object

d (Cont./Record)

■To stop the continuous

mode

A-Continuous mode:

 y“NO”

M-Continuous mode:

 t

The shooting is finished and

the “Continuous mode

checking” screen appears.

■To check the images in

detail

Use b to move the frame

to the image you want to

checko (Detail)

Use v to change the image

to check.

■To save only 1 still

image displayed in

detail

d (Save)

zThe displayed file size is only an approximation.

zSelecting “Edit image” changes the display to the

Normal display.

zYou cannot edit the image larger than 1M (960 ×

1,280).

zYou cannot set the image larger than 1M (960 ×

1,280). If the file size exceeds 100K bytes, the image

cannot be set other than stand-by screen and wake-up

display.

zThe still images to be set to the standby screen are

saved to the folder set in “Select to save”. However,

when set to “microSD”, the images are saved to the

Camera folder under My pictures of the FOMA

terminal (Phone) (the images is not saved on the

microSD card).

Continuous mode

(Ex. manual)

Shot number/

Max. shot count

Function menu



p.123

Continuous mode

checking

Function menu



p.125

Continuous mode

detail checking

Function menu



p.12

125

Camera

3p ( ) (1 second or longer)

“Save” or “Mirror save”

The image is saved to the folder specified in

“Select to save”.

■To store selection

Select images you want to savep ()

“Save” or “Mirror save”

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

■To store Original animation

u (FUNC)“Store all&anime”“Save” or

“Mirror save”

●Setting the shooting interval and

number of images

1Continuous mode screen (p.124)

u (FUNC)“Interval/Number”Select

any item:

Shot interval (default: 0.5 seconds)……Selects the

interval for shooting images from “0.5 seconds/1.0

seconds/2.0 seconds”.

Cannot be set for M-Continuous mode.

Shot number (default: 5)……Sets the number of

images (05 to 20 images in 2 digits).

The maximum number of images varies by the

image size. When the image size is CIF (352 × 288),

the number of shots is automatically set to 4. When

the image size is Screen (240 × 427) or QVGA V.

(240 × 320), the number of shots is set to about 5 to

10.

2After setting is finished, press t

The continuous mode screen reappears.

Continuous mode checking

screen (p.124)

Store selection……Saves the still image marked with a

checkbox ( ).

Store all……Saves all the still images in normal or mirror

display.

Store all&anime……Saves all the still images you shot in

normal or mirror display, and stores as the Original

animation.

Select this……Selects the still image indicated by the

frame and marks the checkbox of the image ( ).

Select all……Selects all the still images you shot and

marks the checkboxes of the images ( ).

Release this……Releases the still image indicated by the

frame and releases the checkbox of the image ( ).

Release all……Releases all the still images and releases

the checkboxes of the images ( ).

Mirror display ⇔Normal display……Selects the

checking screen display from Mirror display or Normal

display.

Select to save (default: “Camera” of Phone)……Sets the

folder to save the shot image.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the image with .

→p.228

Restriction all (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of all the shot image.

→p.228

Cancel……Deletes all the photographed images and

returns to the continuous mode screen.

Continuous mode detail

checking screen (p.124)

Save……Saves the images to the folder specified in

“Select to save”.

Mirror save……Inverts the left and right of the displayed

image and saves the image to the folder specified in the

“Select to save” setting.

Compose message*→p.126

You can also compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail® by

pressing o (MAIL) on the Continuous mode detail

checking screen.

Mirror display⇔Normal display……Selects the checking

screen display from normal display or mirrored display.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image.→p.228

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

zIf you shoot strong light or moving object in

A-Continuous mode, the interval may become longer

than the specified one.

zWhen “Select to save” is set to “microSD”, the images

are saved to the Camera folder under My pictures of

the FOMA terminal (Phone) (the images is not saved

on the microSD card).

126

Camera

Shooting framed images

The image sizes supported by FOMA SO706i is

under VGA (640 × 480).

zYou can use the downloaded frames in addition to

the pre-installed ones.

1Photo mode shooting screen (p.123)

u (FUNC)“Select frame”Select a

frame

■To cancel the framed image

“OFF”

2Point the camera at the object

d (Record)

The “Frame shooting check” screen appears.

■To change the frame before saving

u (FUNC)“Change frame”

3d (Save)

Composing an i-mode mail message or

Deco-mail

message using the still image

You can compose an i-mode mail message with the

still image you shot attached or insert the still image

into the Deco-mail® message body.

1Photo mode checking screen (p.123)

o (MAIL) Select any item:

Attach image*1

Attach mail……Attaches the image without

changing the image size.

QVGA scale down……Attaches the image by

changing the image and file size without

changing the aspect ratio.

Insert image*2

Insert mail*3……Inserts the image without

changing the image size.

SubQCIF scale down……Inserts the image

by changing the image and file size without

changing the aspect ratio.

*1: When the image is shot with the image size smaller

than QVGA V. (240 × 320), the selection screen of

“Attach mail/QVGA scale down” does not appear.

*2: When the image is shot with the image size of

SubQCIF (128 × 96), the selection screen of “Insert

mail/SubQCIF scale down” does not appear.

*3: Cannot be selected when the image size is other

than QCIF (176 × 144).

2Compose the message

Composing and sending i-mode mail→p.156

Composing and sending Deco-mail®→p.158

Shooting Movies

zWhen “File size” is set to “Long time”, the shooting

ends after saving the shot movie on the microSD

card.

zThe shooting time varies by the conditions.

zYou cannot shoot a movie while you are talking on

the phone.

zFolding the FOMA terminal terminates the movie

shooting.

1Photo mode shooting screen (p.123)

1“”

The “Movie mode shooting”

screen appears.

2Point the camera at the object

d (Record)

The shooting starts.

You can zoom in/out during

the shooting.

■If the file size reaches

the limit specified in File size

“OK”

The movie mode checking screen appears.

3d (Stop)

The shooting terminates

and the “Movie mode

checking” screen appears.

■To play the movie you

shot

p (Play)

■To retake the shot

t“YES”

4d (Save)

zNot available when 2in1 is in B mode.

zIf you perform a key operation such as zoom in/out

during the shooting, the operation sound may be

recorded.

Movie mode shooting

Function menu



p.127

Movie mode shooting

screen

Movie mode checking

Function menu



p.127

127

Camera

Movie mode shooting screen

(p.126)

Front camera⇔Rear camera……Switches between

front camera and rear camera.

CHG camera-mode……Changes the camera mode.

Select size・File size……Sets the same setting as the

shooting menu (p.122).

Quality setting (default: Normal)……Selects the quality

and duration for shooting movies from “Long dur. mode/

Normal/Fine mode/Super Fine mode”.

When set to “Long dur. mode”, the shooting time becomes

the longest but the image quality becomes the lowest.

Contrary, when set to “Super Fine mode”, the image

quality becomes the highest but the shooting time

becomes the shortest.

Camera Settings

Photo mode*……Sets the same setting as the

shooting menu (p.122).

Brightness……Adjusts the brightness for shooting

in 5 steps “-2 ∼±0∼+2” using v.

The brightness is automatically specified if you do

not press any key for 2 seconds.

“±0” is the default setting when you launch the

camera.

White balance……Sets the same settings as the

shooting menu (p.123).

Color mode set……Selects the effect for the

photographed image from “Normal/Sepia/Monochrome”.

Flicker*……Avoids the flicker on the shooting screen.

Selects from “Auto/Mode 1(50Hz)/Mode 2(60Hz)”.

Shutter sound (default: Sound 1)……Sets the shutter

sound.

Auto timer……Sets the auto timer.→p.128

Movie type set

Normal (when the camera is launched)……Records

video and voice.

Video……Shoots a movie without any voice.

Voi ce……Records voice without movies.

Auto save set……Specifies whether to save a shot movie

to the folder selected in “Select to save” automatically or

not (ON/OFF).

Select to save (default: “Camera” of Phone)……Sets the

folder to save the shot movie or movie with voice only.

When saving the movie on the microSD card, movie with

video is saved in “SD Video folder” and movie with voice

only is saved in “Multi media folder”.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the shot movie.→p.228

Memory info……Displays the amount of stored data for

movies.

Help……Displays the guide for shooting.

* : Cannot be operated/set for the front camera.

Movie mode checking screen

(p.126)

Play……Plays the movie you shot.

Save……Saves the movie to the folder specified in

“Select to save”.

Compose message*……Composes an i-mode mail with

the shot movie attached.→p.156

You can compose an i-mode mail with the shot movie

attached by pressing o (MAIL) on the movie mode

checking screen.

Set as stand-by……Sets the shot movie to the standby

screen.

Edit title……Edits the movie title. You can enter up to 9

double-byte or 18 single-byte characters.

Select to save (default: “Camera” of Phone)……Sets the

folder to save the shot movie or movie with voice only.

When saving the movie on the microSD card, movie with

video is saved in “SD Video folder” and movie with voice

only is saved in “Multi media folder”.

File restriction (default: File unrestricted)……Specifies

whether to allow the redistribution of the shot movie.→p.228

Cancel……Deletes the movie and returns to the movie

mode screen.

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

zThe Photo mode is fixed to the Portrait for the front

camera.

zWhen Manner mode is set (“VM tone” set to “OFF”),

the FOMA terminal does not play the shutter sound for

checking.

zYou cannot set the downloaded melody as the shutter

sound. In addition, you cannot change the volume of

the shutter sound.

zThe displayed file size is only an approximation.

zThe movie to set to the standby screen is saved to the

folder set in “Select to save”. However, when set to

“microSD”, the movie is saved to the Camera folder

under i-motion of the FOMA terminal (Phone).

128

Camera

Capturing Important Scenes

Even if the available shooting time is reached when

shooting a movie, you can continue the shooting until

the scene you want to shoot comes.

zThe movie you shot is saved for the available

shooting time (the default is 3 minutes 38 seconds)

from the end of the movie with the starting point

reset to fit that time. The movie shot before that

time is not saved.

1Photo mode shooting screen (p.123)

1“”

2Point the camera at the object

d (Record)

The shooting starts.

You can zoom in/out during the shooting.

After the available shooting time is reached, the

remaining time display flashes.

3d (Stop)

The shooting is finished.

4d (Save)

Using Voice Mode

You can record your voice without movies.

1Photo mode shooting screen (p.123)

1“”

The “Recording start” screen appears.

Function menu of the movie mode screen

→p.127

2d (Record)

The recording starts.

3d (Stop)

The recording finished. The “Recording check”

screen appears.

Function menu of the movie mode checking

screen→p.127

4d (Save)

Changing the Shooting

Settings

You can change the camera settings such as the

zoom or Auto timer.

Using the zoom

Using the zoom enables you to adjust the image

being shot to your desired size.

zThe zoom is digital.

1Each shooting screenUse v to

adjust the zoom

The image is zoomed in/out by one step each

time you press v, and hold down it to zoom in/

out continuously.

■Maximum zoom rate (16 steps) for each image

size

Using the auto timer

zThe Auto timer is reset to “OFF” each time you

finish shooting.

1Each shooting screenu (FUNC)

“Auto timer”“ON”Enter the time for

the Auto timer (01 to 15 seconds in 2

digits)

“10 seconds” is the default setting.

●If you set the Auto timer

“ ” appears on the screen to indicate that the Auto

timer is set.

Pressing d (Record) plays the Auto timer tone and

the Auto timer starts.

The center illumination lamp flashes in blue and “ ”

on the screen also flashes.

The countdown tone sounds about 5 seconds before

the shooting. The illumination flashes rapidly.

z“1×” is the default setting when you launch the

camera. Changing the image size or camera mode

also changes the zoom to “1×”.

Image size Photo mode Movie mode

2M/1M ――

VGA Approx. 1.8× ―

CIF Approx. 1.7× ―

Screen Approx. 1.8× ―

QVGA V. Approx. 2.4× ―

QVGA ―Approx. 1.8×

QCIF Approx. 3.3× Approx. 3.3×

SubQCIF Approx. 4.6× Approx. 4.6×

129

Continued on next page

Camera

■To cancel the Auto timer settings

u (FUNC)“Auto timer”“OFF”

■To stop the timer while it is running

o (Quit) or t

Using the Bar Code Reader

The FOMA terminal can scan JAN codes and QR

codes using the camera. The scanned data can

be used for displaying/copying the text, using the

functions of Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web

To, i- αppli To, or adding to bookmark/phonebook

especially in QR code. The FOMA terminal can

also scan the image, melody or ToruCa data to

play or save.

zThe FOMA terminal can save up to 5 scanned bar

codes.

zHold the FOMA terminal firmly to ensure that it

does not shake during the scanning.

zWhen scanning bar codes, use the rear camera

and hold the FOMA terminal about 6 to 8 cm away

from the scanned code.

■JAN codes and QR codes

zJAN code

A bar code consisting of

vertical lines (bars) of

various widths and

spaces to represent

numbers. The FOMA terminal can scan 8-digit

(JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13) bar codes.

* When the FOMA terminal scans the JAN code on the

right above, it is displayed as “4942857113068”.

zQR code

A type of two-dimensional codes

consisting of the horizontal and

vertical patterns to represent

numbers, alphabets, kanji, kana or

pictographs. Some QR codes

express images or melodies. Some data are

divided into several QR codes.

* When the FOMA terminal scans the QR code on the

right above, it is displayed as “株式会社NTT ドコモ”

(NTT DOCOMO, Inc.).

Scanning codes

zBefore scanning, set to the close-up mode by

moving the lens selector switch to (macro

lens).→p.118

1i“LIFEKIT”“Bar code reader”

2Position the JAN code or QR code

inside the recognition field

The scanning starts

automatically.

The recognition field is

expressed using “┏,┓, ┗,

┛” at the corners of the

screen.

Focus the JAN code or QR

code so that the entire

code is displayed as big as

possible inside the

recognition field.

Finishing the scan plays the completion sound.

It may take time to scan the data.

■To cancel the scanning

d (Quit) “OK”

■To adjust the zoom

j: Zooms in.

h: Returns to default.

■To scan the data consisting of several QR

codes

“OK”d (Read) Position the QR code

inside the recognition field

The FOMA terminal can scan up to 16 QR codes

expressing one data.

3Check the scanned data

■To discard the scanned data

t“YES”

4u (FUNC) “Store”“YES”“OK”

The scanned data is saved.

zDuring the Auto timer countdown, you can shoot

manually by pressing d (Record).

zThe Auto timer cannot be used in M-Continuous

mode.

zThe FOMA terminal cannot scan a code if it is not a

JAN code or QR code. You may be unable to scan

some bar code, depending on the size.

zThe FOMA terminal may fail to scan the code,

depending on the scratch, stain, damage, print quality,

the reflection of light or the QR code version.

zYou can also run the Bar code reader from the text

editing screen. The scanned data is entered in the

screen.

zSome scanned images cannot be saved depending on

the image size or file size.

Scanning

Function menu



p.130

130

Camera

Scanning screen (p.129)

Reading data list……“Using the scanned data”→p.130

Add shortcut →p.94

Using the scanned data

zYou can use the following scanned data:

1Scanning screen (p.129)u (FUNC)

“Reading data list”

The “Reading data list”

screen appears.

2Select the scanned data

The “Reading data detail”

screen appears.

3Select any of the displayed items

Reading data list screen

(p.130)

Edit title……Edits the title of the data. You can enter up to

9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters.

Result……Displays the Bar code reader reading data

detail screen.

Delete this・Delete all……Deletes one or all scanned

data.

Reading data detail screen

(p.130)

Store……Saves the reading data.

Display list……Displays the Reading data list screen.

If the displayed data is not stored yet, a message appears

asking whether to delete the data.

Internet……Accesses the site when the URL is

highlighted. “Web To function”→p.147

Compose message*……Composes an i-mode mail with

the reading data entered when “Compose message” is

highlighted.

When the mail address is highlighted, an i-mode mail with

the address entered is composed.

Dialing……Calls the phone number when it is

highlighted. “Phone To/AV Phone To function” →p.147

zYou cannot save the scanned data to the microSD

card.

Item Description

Add to

phonebook

Stores the name, reading, phone

number, mail address, birthday, postal

code, address and memo to the

phonebook→p.70

Compose

message

Composes an i-mode mail with the

recipient address, subject and message

entered→p.156

Add

bookmark

Stores the URL and title to the Bookmark

→p.142

Activate

i-αppli

Runs the specified i-αppli →p.187

Melody icon Plays the melody→p.240

Phone

number

“Phone To/AV Phone To function”

→p.147

To r u C a

Icon

Displays the ToruCa→p.204

Mail

address

“Mail To function”→p.147

URL “Web To function”→p.147

Image Save image→p.144

Reading data list

Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅｒｅａｄｅｒ

２００８０７２７＿１５３９＿００００

２００８０７２６＿２２０５＿００００

２００８０７２６＿１８２３＿００００

Function menu



p.130

zIf the data you want to scan contains characters that

cannot be read by the Bar code reader, those

characters are converted to spaces (blanks).

zThe title of the scanned data will be:

• Title: yyyymmdd_hhmm_xxxx (Year/month/

day_time_4-digit number)

If the same date and time are set for more than

once, the 4-digit numbers are assigned to the data

in numerical order.

Reading data detail

Ａｄｄｔｏｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ

ＮａｍｅＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

ＴＥＬ０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Ｅ−ｍａｉｌｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ．△△＠ｄｏ

Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ２．１２．１９７０

cｏｍｏ．ｎｅ．ｊｐ

Ｂａｒｃｏｄｅｒｅａｄｅｒ

ＲｅａｄｉｎｇＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

ＴＥＬ０３ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

〒

１ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ１−２−３ＸＸ，ＸＸ−ｋｕ，

Function menu



p.130

131

Continued on next page

Camera

Add to phonebook……Stores the scanned data to the

phonebook when “Add to phonebook” is highlighted.→p.70

When a phone number is highlighted, it is stored to the

phonebook.

When a mail address is highlighted, it is stored to the

phonebook.

Add bookmark……Stores the reading data to Bookmark

when “Add bookmark” is highlighted. →p.142

When a URL is highlighted, it is stored to Bookmark.

Save image……Stores the image data to My picture of

the Data box.

If you do not set the image to the standby screen, select

“NO” after selecting the folder.

Save melody……Stores the melody data to Melody of

the Data box.

If you do not set the melody to the ring tone, select “NO”

after selecting the folder.

Save ToruCa……Stores the ToruCa to the ToruCa folder.

Start i-αppli……Runs the i-αppli specified in the scanned

data when “Start i-αppli” is highlighted.

Copy……Copies the text included in the scanned data.

→p.308

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Scanning Text

Using the camera, the FOMA terminal can scan

printed text then add the scanned text data as a

phonebook entry or bookmark, or use the data to

compose a mail. You can also make a call or access

website using the data.

zThe FOMA terminal can save up to 8 scanned bar

codes.

zHold the FOMA terminal firmly to ensure that it

does not shake during the scanning.

zWhen scanning text, hold the camera about 6 to

8 cm away from the text.

zThe FOMA terminal can scan vertically written

Japanese text.

■Scanning mode

The following are the scan modes. Select the mode

suitable for the data to scan:

■The number of characters that can be scanned

The following table shows the maximum number of

characters that can be scanned for each item:

zYou cannot use the Web To function or add a

bookmark if there are unusable characters in the URL.

zThe address cannot be entered if it includes

characters that cannot be entered.

zAs the image settings for videophone are not retained

after the dialing or talking is finished, set this item

each time you make a call.

Item Description

Card

read

Scans the name, phone number, mail

address, postal code, address and memo

printed on the business card to add to the

phonebook.

Compose

message

Composes an i-mode message with the

scanned recipient address, subject and

message entered.

URL Scans URL, and accesses the site or adds

the URL to bookmark.

Mail

address

Scans the mail address and composes an

i-mode message.

Phone

number

Scans the phone number and makes a call.

Free

memo

Scans Japanese or English text to save to

Text memo.

Item

Maximum number of

characters that can be

scanned

Card

read

Name 16 in double-byte, 32 in single-

byte

Phone

number

26 in single-byte numbers

including #, ＊, +, p (pause),

(, ), -

Mail

address

50 in single-byte alphabets,

numbers and symbols

Postal

code

7 in single-byte

Address 50 in double-byte, 100 in single-

byte

Memo 100 in double-byte, 200 in

single-byte

Compose

message

Receiver 50 in single-byte alphabets,

numbers and symbols

Subject 100 in double-byte, 200 in

single-byte

Message 128 in double-byte, 256 in

single-byte

URL 256 in single-byte alphabets,

numbers and symbols

Mail address 256 in single-byte alphabets,

numbers and symbols

Phone number 256 in single-byte numbers

including #, (, ), -

Free memo 128 in double-byte, 256 in

single-byte

132

Camera

* : This option is available when the Text reader is launched

from Dictionary.

■Guide to the scanning screen

<Example: Card read mode>

Guidance : Displays the operation.

Recognition frame: Displays the recognition field.

Item icon : Displays the item to scan.

Card read mode: “Name/phone

number/mail address/postal code/

address/memo”

Compose message mode:

“Receiver/subject/message”

Recognized text field:

Displays the scanned text (The

guidance appears on some

screens).

Recognition mode:

Displays the recognition mode used

for scanning “Kanji (lateral writing/

vertical writing)/postal code/phone

number/mail address/URL”.

Remaining characters:

Displays the remaining number of

single-byte characters that can be

scanned.

NEGA mode : Appears if the NEGA/POSI mode is

set to Negative fix.

Scanning text

<Example: To scan text in Card read mode>

zBefore scanning, set to the close-up mode by

moving the lens selector switch to (macro

lens).→p.118

1i“LIFEKIT”“Text reader”

The “Text reader” screen

appears.

2“New”

The “Scanning mode

selection” screen appears.

“Scanning mode”→p.131

3“Card read”

The “Text reader scanning”

screen appears.

4Use v to highlight the

icon for the item to scanDisplay the

text in the recognition field

Focus the text so that the entire text appears as

large as possible inside the recognition field.

If the recognition field cannot display the whole

text, the text can be scanned several times.

■To adjust the zoom

f: Changes from “Normal” to “Large”.

g: Returns from “Large” to “Normal”.

5d (Read)

The FOMA terminal scans the text, and the

recognized text appears in red.

■To rescan the text

t“YES”

If the screen does not display the entire text,

press b to check.

Pressing o (Store) stores the scanned text,

and then the reading data screen (detail)

appears.

The following are the two methods to edit the

scanned text:

Dictionary

*Japanese 32 in double-byte, 64 in single-

byte

English 64 in single-byte

Item

Maximum number of

characters that can be

scanned

Guidance

Recognition frame

Item icon

Remaining characters

Recognition modeNEGA mode

Recognition text field

Text reader

Function menu



p.133

Text reader scanning

Function menu



p.133

133

Continued on next page

Camera

■To select the

character to edit

Use v to highlight the

character to editPress

the candidate No.

Press r to change the

cases between upper and

lower if it can be changed.

■To edit in the text editing

u (FUNC) “Edit”Edit

the text

The text can be edited in the

typical text editing.

To return to the candidate

selection, press u (FUNC) and select “Select

recog. data”.

Go on to Step 6 when you finish editing.

6d (Set)

The entry is fixed as the text.

■To scan the remaining text

Display text in the recognition rangeRepeat

Steps 5 to 6

Ensure that the last two or more characters of

the scanned text are included in the recognition

field.

■To scan another item

Repeat Steps 4 to 6

In Card read mode, you can scan up to 4 phone

numbers and up to 3 mail addresses.

7u (FUNC) “Store”

The Reading data detail screen appears. Press

t to return to the Reading data list screen.

Text reader screen (p.132)

Add shortcut →p.94

Using the text data

zYou can use the following scanned data:

* Select any displayed item such as Phone number or Mail

address to edit the data.

1i“LIFEKIT”“Text reader”

“Reading data list”

The “Reading data screen

(list)” appears.

2Select the scanned data

The “Reading data screen

(detail)” appears.

3Select any of the displayed items

Text reader scanning screen

(p.132)/Reading data screen

(list/detail) (p.133)

Edit*1……Edits the scanned text.

Store*2……Saves the reading data.

Internet……Accesses the site of the scanned URL in

URL mode. “Web To function” →p.147

Compose message*3……Displays the New mail screen

with the reading data entered and composes i-mode mail.

The entered data varies depending on the displayed

reading data or screen.

Dialing……Calls or sends the SMS of the phone number

in Phone number mode.

“Phone To/AV Phone To function”→p.147

zDo not move the FOMA terminal while the

“Processing” message appears on the screen.

zThe FOMA terminal cannot recognize handwritten

characters. If the text is faxed or copied, if the fonts are

decorated, if the character spaces are not fixed, or if

the fonts and background cannot be easily

distinguished, the FOMA terminal may fail to

recognize the text. Also, the FOMA terminal may not

recognize the text correctly depend on the ambient

lighting.

Candidate

Item Description

Add to

phonebook

Adds the name, phone number, mail

address, postal code, address and memo

to the phonebook→p.70

Compose

message

Composes an i-mode mail with the

recipient address, subject and message

entered →p.156

Reading data (list)

ｈｔｔｐ：／／ｗｗｗ．△△△ａｂｃ．ｃｏ．ｊ

０３ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Ｔｅｘｔｒｅａｄｅｒ

ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

Function menu



p.133

Reading data (detail)

Ａｄｄｔｏｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ

Ｎａｍｅ

ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

ＴＥＬ０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Ｅ−ｍａｉｌｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ．△△ａｂ

ＰｏｓｔＣｏｄｅ１ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ１−２−３，ＸＸ，△△−ｋｕ，

Ｔｏｋｙｏ

ＭｅｍｏＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

ｃ＠ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｎｅ．ｊｐ

Ｔｅｘｔｒｅａｄｅｒ

Function menu



p.133

134

Camera

Add to phonebook……Adds the scanned data to the

phonebook. The stored data varies depending on the

displayed reading data or screen.

Add bookmark……Add the URL to the Bookmark in URL

mode.

Search phonebook……Searches the phonebook using

the scanned data.

You cannot search the phonebook on the scanning

screen, in Card read mode or Compose message mode.

Add to memo……Adds the scanned data to Text memo.

You cannot store the scanned data in Card read mode or

Compose message mode.

Reading mode set*2……Selects the scanning mode from

“Card read/Compose message/URL/Mail address/Phone

number/Free memo”.

NEGA/POSI mode*2 ……Sets the type of printing.

Auto setting……Automatically sets the positive or

negative.

Positive fix……Suitable for printing the dark text on

the light background.

Negative fix……Suitable for printing the light text on

the dark background.

Guidance OFF ⇔Guidance ON*2……Sets whether to

display the guidance or not.

Vertical writing⇔Lateral writing*2……Selects the

vertical writing or lateral writing for the Japanese text to

scan.

Display detail*4……Displays the Reading data screen

(detail).

Display list*5……Displays the Reading data screen (list).

Copy*6……Copies text contained in the scanned data.

Delete this・Delete all*6……Deletes one or all scanned

data.

*1: Unavailable on the Reading data screen (list).

*2: Available only on the Scanning screen.

*3: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*4: Available only on the Reading data screen (list).

*5: Available only on the Reading data screen (detail).

*6: Unavailable on the Scanning screen.

zAs the image settings for videophone are not retained

after the dialing or talking is finished, set this item

each time you make a call.

135

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

What is i-mode?.............................................................................................................. 136

■Viewing sites

Viewing a Site ........................................................................................ 136

Viewing and Using Sites................................................................................................. 139

Registering My Menu Entries............................................................................ 141

Changing Your i-mode Password................................................ 141

Viewing Websites................................................................................. 141

Accessing Websites and Sites Quickly ............................................................ 142

Saving Site Contents .................................................................................. 143

■Downloading images and melodies from sites

Downloading Charged Contents..................................................................................... 144

Downloading Images from Sites .................................................................... 144

Downloading Melodies from Sites ..................................................................... 145

Downloading PDF Data from Sites................................................................................. 145

Downloading Kisekae Tool from Sites ............................................................................ 146

Downloading Various Data from Sites ............................................................................ 146

■i-mode utility functions

Using the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To Functions

................................................................. 147

Using Location Information ............................................................................................. 148

■Specifying your i-mode settings

Specifying Your i-mode Settings ..................................................................................... 148

■Using certificates

Using SSL Certificates.................................................................................................... 149

Setting FirstPass............................................................................................................. 150

Changing the Certificate Host......................................................................................... 151

■Using i-motion

What is i-motion?............................................................................................................ 151

Downloading i-motion .......................................................................... 152

Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Automatically ............................. 152

■Using i-Channel

What is i-Channel? ......................................................................................................... 153

Viewing Sites from the Channel List ............................................................................... 153

Setting i-Channel .................................................................................... 154

i-mode menu/site

My Menu

Change i-mode Password

Internet connection

Bookmark

Screen memo

Save image

i-melody

Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To

Download i-motion

i-motion auto-replay

i-Channel setting

136

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

What is i-mode?

The i-mode service enables you to use an i-mode-

compatible FOMA terminal (i-mode terminal) display

to access online services such as i-mode mail,

connecting to the Internet and sites (programs), etc.

■Notes on using i-mode

• Contents on sites (programs) or Internet websites

are normally protected by copyright laws. The

loaded documents, pictures, and other data from

these sites (programs) or websites to your i-mode

terminal is permitted only when intended for your

personal use only. No data may be copied in part or

in whole, whether modified or not, for resale or

redistribution without the consent of the copyright

holder.

• Note also that when the FOMA card (UIM) is

replaced or the mobile phone is turned on with no

FOMA card (UIM) inserted, some types of mobile

phone may be incapable of viewing or playing

melodies, images and movies downloaded from

sites, files attached to sent or received mail

(images, movies or melodies), screen memos and

MessageR/F.

• If a file with restrictions on viewing and playback

imposed by the FOMA card (UIM) is set as the

standby screen or as a ring tone, the FOMA

terminal operates under the default settings if the

FOMA card (UIM) is replaced or the FOMA

terminal is turned on without the FOMA card (UIM)

inserted.

Viewing a Site

<i-mode menu/site>

You can access the services provided by IPs

(information service provider). (You may need a

subscription.)

1o“iMenu”

“i-mode menu” screen appears first, then

“iMenu” screen appears.

Select “iMenu” in the i-mode menu screen, then

i-mode communication starts.

“ ” icon flashes while the communication with

the i-mode Center is in progress, and “ ” icon

flashes when you are receiving i-mode service

(during i-mode).

2Select links and other options to

display the site screen you want to

view

“Viewing and Using Sites”

→p.139

■To cancel the

download of pages

t

3To quit i-mode, press y“YES”

After “ ” blinks, “ ” disappears.

zi-mode is a pay service you need to apply for.

zFor details on i-mode, refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

zThe i-mode service area is the same as the FOMA

service area (the area in which calls can be made and

received).

zSome sites may require you to pay additional

information fee.

zThe number of colors displayed on certain sites

exceeds the maximum number of colors that the

FOMA terminal can display. For this reason, the site

may not appear as intended.

i-mode menu iMenu

Sites

Function menu



p.137

137

Continued on next page

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

●iMenu in English

English iMenu is available.

1o“iMenu”Scroll down to the

bottom to select “English”

Select “日本語” to return to the Japanese display.

●Mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM)

manufacturer numbers

If you select an item while a site or website is

displayed on the FOMA terminal, a message may

appear notifying you that the mobile phone/FOMA

card (UIM) manufacturer numbers will be sent.

zThe disclosure notification message is always

displayed before your mobile phone/FOMA card

(UIM) manufacturer numbers are sent. Such

information is never sent automatically.

Sites screen (p.136)

Add bookmark→p.142

Bookmark→p.142

Add screen memo→p.143

Screen memo list→p.143

Save image →p.144

URL history→p.138

Window

Open new window……“Using multi window”

→p.140

Close window……Closes the displayed window.

Change window……Switches windows when

multiple websites are open.

i-Channel→p.153

Enter URL……Enters a URL to connect to the website.

Add to phonebook→p.140

Add shortcut→p.94

Save schedule……Stores a scheduled event while

browsing the page.→p.285

Refer dictionary……Starts the dictionary. →p.296

Home

Set as home URL……Stores the URL of the

displayed page as home URL. You can only store 1

URL as the home URL.

Display home……Displays the page stored as the

home URL.

Available when “Home URL” is set to “Valid”.→p.148

Reload……Refreshes the page.

Compose message*……Composes i-mode mail or

Deco-mail® with a URL for the page pasted into the

message or the image pasted/attached.

iMenu……Displays the iMenu screen.

zOn some i-mode-compatible site and websites, some

characters may be difficult or impossible to see due to

the selected colors.

zWhen you are requested information on music you

play by the site, the confirmation screen concerning

transmission of music information appears. Select

“YES” to send the information (title, artist name and

play date) on the music you play in your FOMA

terminal. The information is used to offer information

that IP (information service provider) customized to

the customer.

zEnglish iMenu is not available for とくするメニュー

(tokusuru menu), 楽オク (Rakuten-auction), ｉエリア

(i-area), マイボックス (My Box) and お知らせ (News).

zGenerally, the What’s New site is updated every other

Monday.

zEnglish iMenu sites differ from Japanese version.

“English”

zThe sent information “mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM)

manufacturer numbers” is used by the IP (information

service provider) to classify customers and provide

customized services for you and to confirm that you

can use the content the IP is offering.

zThe “Mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacture

numbers” is sent to the IP (information service

provider) via the internet and may be disclosed to the

third party as a result. However, this operation does

not disclose your phone number, address, age and

gender to the IP (information service provider), etc.

138

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Site info

Title……Displays the page title to check.

URL……Displays the page URL to check. If the

entire URL does not appear, press d (Select), then

use c to move the cursor to check the rest of the

URL. Pressing d (Select) again hides the cursor.

Certificate……Displays the contents of the SSL

certificate when the page is compatible with SSL.

Site settings

Replay……Plays the Flash movie or animation on

the page again from the beginning.

Set image disp.……Sets whether to display the

images on the page or not. When set to “OFF”, “ ”

appears instead of the image which is not displayed.

Sound effect……Sets whether to play the Flash

movie sound effect or not (ON/OFF).

Change CHR code……Changes the character code

to redisplay the page that is not displayed correctly.

Switch to FB……Switches to the Full Browser to display

a website that cannot be displayed in i-mode.→p.218

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Displaying SSL pages

To view SSL pages, the following certificates are

required:

zCA certificate: Issued by an certification

organization and stored in your FOMA terminal at

the time of purchase.

zDOCOMO CA certificate: Required for connecting

to the FirstPass center and stored in the FOMA

card (green/white).

zClient certificate: Downloaded from the FirstPass

center by selecting “Client certificate” in the i-mode

menu and stored in the FOMA card (green/white).

1Display an SSL page

The SSL page and the “ ”

icon appears.

■To cancel the

authentication

“Cancel”

2Move from the SSL

page to an ordinary page“YES”

SSL communication ends and the “ ” icon

disappears.

Reconnecting to sites you visited

before

“URL history” records the last 30 URLs of the sites

you visited before. You can reconnect to the website

displayed using the “URL history”.

1o“URL history”

The “URL history” screen

appears.

2Select the record

URL history screen (p.138)

Add bookmark→p.142

URL……Displays the stored URL.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

zWhen certificates are displayed, the screen scrolls at

the regular speed regardless of the “Scroll” setting.

zIf text is not displayed correctly, repeat the procedure.

Note that when you perform the procedure for the 4th

time, the site is displayed in the original character

code setting.

zSome sites may not be displayed correctly even when

the character code is changed.

zIf you change the character code when a site is

displayed correctly, the site may not be displayed

correctly.

zThe message “This site is not certified Connect?” may

appear when you attempt to open an SSL page. This

message appears when the SSL certificate for the

page has expired or is not supported. In this case, you

can continue to view the page by selecting “YES”.

However, you may not be able to safely send your

personal information such as your credit card number

or contacts.

ＣｈａｎｇｅＭｙＭｅｎｕ

Ｂａｃｋ

Ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｒａｔｅｓ

Ｂｒａｎｃｈｅｓ＆ＡＴＭｓ

Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅｓ

Ｕｓａｇｅ

《

ＸＸＢａｎｋ

》

SSL page

Ｍｅｍｂｅｒｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ

URL history

Function menu



p.138

139

Continued on next page

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Viewing and Using Sites

This section describes the operations for viewing

sites or websites.

Image display

zThe FOMA SO706i can display GIF and JPEG

format images and Flash movies (p.140). However,

the FOMA terminal may be unable to display some

images regardless of the format.

zWhen a Flash movie is displayed, the display

operation may differ from that on a normal site.

zWhen you play the Flash movie that is stored in

Data Box, Screen memo, microSD card, the display

operation may differ in some stored parts.

zYou can specify whether or not images are

displayed in the “Set image disp.” setting.

■Displayed image icons

(color): Displayed while an image is loaded or

when “OFF” is selected in the “Set

image disp.” setting

: Displayed when image loading is failed

(B/W): Displayed when image cannot be

loaded

Scroll function

When you are viewing a page on a site and the text or

a list does not fit in the screen, you can scroll up or

down to view the rest of the text.

g: Scrolls down

f: Scrolls up

s (▼メモ): Scrolls down by screens

a (▲マナー ): Scrolls up by screens

• Scroll setting→p.148

Selecting links and other options

When you are using i-mode, you may need to perform

operations such as those described below.

①Link

Select the item to proceed to the linked page.

②Text box

You can enter text directly. When you select a text

box, the Character entry (edit) screen appears.

③Pull-down menu

You can select one option from the list of selectable

options. Only a part of the selectable options is

displayed but hidden options appear as a list when

you select the pull-down menu.

④Radio button

You can select only one option. indicates a

selected radio button.

⑤Checkbox

You can select multiple options from a range of

options. indicates a selected checkbox.

⑥Button

When you select a button, the function assigned to

the button is activated.

Jumping to previous/next pages

You can jump forward or back to a page that has been

stored in the FOMA terminal’s cache. Up to 30 pages

are stored in per window (up to 100 pages are stored

in all windows).

1Press h to jump back to the previous

page or j to jump forward to the next

page

■When the page display sequence is “A”, “B”,

“C”, “B” and “D”

■To display the pages stored in cache

• Cache refers to an area of memory on the FOMA

terminal itself in which data from sites or Internet

websites you have visited is temporarily stored. If

you press v to move to another page while you

are viewing a site or website, the FOMA terminal

displays the page stored in cache rather than

connecting to the i-mode Center and accessing the

page on the actual site. However, if the cache is full

or if the page is set to always display the latest

information, the FOMA terminal connects to the

site even when you press v. Also, even when the

page is stored in the cache, if the date and time

information for that page has been updated, the

FOMA terminal connects to the site and displays

the latest data.

ＵｓｅｒＡｇｒｅｅｍｅｎｔ

Ｎａｍｅ

Ａｒｅａ

Ｋａｎｔｏ

Ｓｅｘ

Ｍａｌｅ

Ｆｅｍａｌｅ

Ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔ

□

Ｓｐｏｒｔｓ

□

Ｂｏｏｋｓ

□

Ｍｕｓｉｃ

Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒ

−

Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｒａｔｉｏｎ

−

①Link

②Text box

③Pull-down menu

④Radio button

⑤Checkbox

⑥Button

B CA vv

: Sequence of viewing pages

: Back from the screen “D”

140

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

• When site data is loaded from cache, the text and

settings you entered on previous visits is not

displayed.

• The cache is cleared when you exit i-mode.

• When you download SSL-compatible pages from

cache, the message appears indicating that the

SSL page will be displayed.

Using multi window

You can open up to 5 websites (up to 6 websites

when including i-Channel).

zYou can use the tab to switch pages with

o ( ) when multiple websites are opened.

1Sites screen (p.136)Highlight the link

p (Open)

The page opens with a new window.

■To close a opened website

t“YES”

●Opening websites other than linked

pages

1Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC)

“Window”“Open new window”

Select any item:

Link……Displays the linked pages in the same way

as p (Open).

Bookmark……Displays the website registered as

bookmark.

Enter URL……Enters a URL to display the website.

Display home……Displays a website registered as

home URL.

Adding phone number and e-mail

address to the phonebook

You can add a phone number or e-mail address

displayed on a site page or screen memo to your

phonebook.

<Example: To add a phone number displayed on a

site page>

1Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC)

“Add to phonebook”“YES”Add the

phone number to phonebook

Adding information to the phonebook→p.70

If the name, reading and mail address are

attached to phone number, they are also entered

to the phonebook together with phone number.

Enter remains of necessary items and then save

to the phonebook.

Operating the Flash movies

Flash is an animation technique supported by the

FOMA terminal that uses both images and sound.

Flash gives you access to a wide range of animations

and visually exciting sites. You can also download a

Flash movie to your FOMA terminal and set it as the

standby screen.

zA Flash playing error prevents successful

completion of the saving.

zNote that if you play a Flash movie to which

vibration is set, your FOMA terminal vibrates

regardless of the “Vibrator” setting.

zSome Flash movies may not run correctly.

zYou may also be able to control a Flash movie even

when “ ” does not appear at the bottom of the

screen.

zFlash movies are not displayed if you select “OFF”

in “Set image disp.”.

zSelecting “YES” in “Use phone information” allows

you to use the FOMA terminal data (time, date,

reception level, battery level, ring volume,

language, model type and model info).

zYou cannot arrange the multi-opened websites side-

by-side.

Tab

o ( )

−Ｓｅｌｅｃｔｔｈｅａｒｅａ−

Ｈｏｋｋａｉｄｏ

Ｔｏｈｏｋｕ

Ｋａｎｔｏｋｏｓｈｉｎｎｅｔｓｕ

ＡｒｅａＰｒｅｆｅｃｔｕｒｅ

Ｋａｎｓａｉ

Ｓｈｉｋｏｋｕ

Ｋｙｕｓｈｕ／Ｏｋｉｎａｗａ

Ａｏｍｏｒｉ

Ａｋｉｔａ

Ｉｗａｔｅ

Ｙａｍａｇａｔａ

Ｆｕｋｕｓｈｉｍａ

Ｍｉｙａｇｉ

ＡｒｅａＰｒｅｆｅｃｔｕｒｅ

zSome Flash movies use sound effects. To run a Flash

movie without the sound effects, select “Sound effect”

and then select “OFF”. Even if “Vibrator” is set to

“Melody linkage”, this setting is invalid for sound

effects of Flash movie.

zWhen a Flash movie is set as a screen such as

standby by using “Display setting”, the sound effects

or vibrator that are set in the Flash movie do not run.

“Replay” is also unavailable.→p.138

141

Continued on next page

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Registering My Menu Entries

My Menu provides you with a quick and convenient

way to connect to frequently visited sites.

zYou can register up to 45 sites in My Menu.

zSome sites cannot be registered to My Menu.

zTo connect quickly to a website, use “Bookmark”.

1Sites screen (p.136)“My Menu

Registration”



Select the “Input

password” box



Enter your i-mode

password



“Select”

i-mode password→p.141

Viewing sites registered to My Menu

1o“iMenu”“English”“My Menu”

Select a site

Changing Your i-mode

Password

You need a 4-digit “i-mode password” to register or

unregistered sites in My Menu, to subscribe to or

unsubscribe to message services and to set your mail

preferences.

zAt the time of subscription, it is set to “0000” (4

zeros) by default. Change the i-mode password to

your favorite one.

zTake particular care not to disclose your i-mode

password to others.

zIf you forget your i-mode password, the registered

service subscriber must take a form of identification

(such as a driver’s license) to an NTT DOCOMO

service counter.



“iMenu”“English”“Options”

“Change i-mode Password”

2Select the “Current Password” box

Enter your current i-mode password

The numbers of the entered password is

displayed as “

＊

”.

3Select the “New Password” boxEnter

the new i-mode password

Enter a 4-digit number.

4Select the “New Password

(Confirmation)” boxEnter the new

i-mode password again

Enter the number you entered in step 3.

5“Select”

Viewing Websites

This function allows you to view website by entering

its URL.

zWebsites that are not i-mode-compliant may not be

displayed properly.

zA website may be displayed differently in your

terminal from when it is viewed on PC.

zYou can view websites designed for a PC in Full

Browser.

zYou can enter a URL up to 256 single-byte

characters long including “http://” or “https://”.

1o“Go to location”“Enter URL”

The “URL list” screen

appears.

2“<NEW>”Enter URL“OK”

Viewing sites from the URL history

The FOMA terminal records the last 10 URLs you

entered in the URL history.

1o“Go to location”“Enter URL”

2Select a URL“OK”

■To edit the selected URL

Select the “Internet address” boxEdit the

URL

zWhen some Flash movies are saved or saved as a

screen memo, part of the images may not be saved or

they may otherwise differ from the way they appear on

the site.

zCharged sites in the iMenu list are automatically

registered to My Menu after subscription.

URL list

Function menu



p.142

142

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

URL list screen (p.141)

Add shortcut →p.94

Compose message*……Composes an i-mode mail with

the URL pasted in the message.

Set as home URL……Stores a URL as your home URL.

You can only store 1 URL as your home URL.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Accessing Websites and

Sites Quickly

Adding frequently visited websites or sites to your

Bookmarks folders allows you to access those sites

quickly and easily.

zYou can change the titles of your bookmarks and

organize the bookmarks into categories by using

folders.

Adding bookmarks

zYou can bookmark up to 100 sites.

zYou can enter up to 256 single-byte characters for a

URL.

zSome sites cannot be bookmarked.

<Example: While displaying a site>

1Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC)

“Add bookmark”“YES”Select a

folder

Using a bookmark to access a site or

website

1o“Bookmark”

The “Bookmark folder list”

screen appears.

When the FOMA terminal is

in Secret mode or Secret

data only mode, the Secret

folder is also displayed.

2Select a folder

The “Bookmark list” screen

appears.

3Select a bookmark

Bookmark folder list screen

(p.142)

zYou cannot rename or delete the “Bookmark” folder

already created on the FOMA terminal at the time

of purchase.

Add folder……Enters a folder name to add a folder. You

can add up to 9 folders. You can enter up to 10 double-

byte or 20 single-byte characters.

Edit folder name……Edits the folder name of the added

folder. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-

byte characters.

Sort folder……Selects the position to move to and

rearranges the folder.

No. of bookmarks……Displays the total number of

bookmarks in all the folders.

iC trans. all→p.260

Send all Ir data→p.258

CopyAll to microSD→p.248

Delete folder……Deletes the folder and bookmarks in the

folder.

Delete all……Deletes all the bookmarks. However, the

bookmark folders are not deleted.

zWhen you enter URLs and connect to sites, visits to

the same URL are logged as separate entries.

zBookmark titles can consist of up to 12 double-byte or

24 single-byte characters. Longer titles are truncated

when the bookmark is added. If no title is given, the

URL is displayed (excluding “http://” or “https://”).

<No. of bookmarks>

zThe number of data in the microSD folder and Secret

folder are not displayed.

Bookmark folder list

Function menu



p.142

Bookmark list

Function menu



p.143

143

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Bookmark list screen (p.142)

Move……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the bookmark to the other folder you

select. “About multiple-choice”→p.38

Edit title……Edits the title. You can enter up to 12 double-

byte or 24 single-byte characters.

Add shortcut →p.94

Compose message*1……Composes an i-mode mail with

the URL pasted in the message.

Attach to mail*1……Composes an i-mode mail with a

bookmark attached.

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data→p.258

Copy to microSD→p.248

Set as home URL……Stores a URL as your home URL.

You can only store 1 URL as your home URL.

Copy URL……Copies a bookmarked URL.

Use b to move the cursor to the first character to

copyd (Start)Use b to highlight the end of text

to copyd (End)

You can paste the copied URL to the Character entry

(edit) screen. →p.309

No. of bookmarks……Displays the total number of

bookmarks in the folder.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Keep in secret ⇔Put out*2……“Preventing Others from

Viewing Data”→p.104

Bookmark info*3……Displays the bookmark information.

*1: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*2: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.

*3: Available only for bookmarks stored on the microSD card.

Saving Site Contents

When you have found some useful information (travel

information, etc.), you can save the displayed page

on your FOMA terminal as a screen memo for later

reference.

zYou can save up to 100 screen memos. However,

the number you can actually save varies depending

on the amount of data on each saved page.

Saving a screen memo

1Sites screen (p.136)



u (FUNC)



“Add screen memo”“YES”

Displaying a screen memo

1o“Screen memo”

The “Screen memo list”

screen appears.

2Select a screen memo

The “Screen memo detail”

screen appears.

zWhen you save a screen memo of an SSL page, the

SSL certificate for that page is also saved.

zIf you save the same page twice, it is saved as a new

screen memo and is not replaced with the earlier save.

zIf you save a site in which an item is already entered in

a radio button, checkbox, text box, pull-down menu or

selection box as a screen memo, you cannot view the

item when displaying the screen memo.

zWhen you save a screen such as the data acquisition

screen, the data for that screen is saved along with the

screen. However, the data acquisition screen for

i-motion or Chaku-Uta-Full® with set playback period

can not be saved as a screen memo.

zInformation on the screen memo is the one stored and

may differ from the latest one.

Screen memo list

Function menu



p.144

Screen memo

(Screen memo detail)

ＥｎｊｏｙＦｉｓｈｉｎｇ

ＴｏｋｙｏＢａｙ（Ｍｉｕｒａ）

Ｃｈｏｓｈｉ

Ｉｚｕ

Ｉｚｕｉｓｌａｎｄｓ

▼

Ｆｉｓｈｉｎｇａｒｅａ：Ｌａｋｅ

Ｆｕｊｉｆｉｖｅｌａｋｅｓ

Ａｓｈｉｎｏｋｏ

Ｓａｇａｍｉｇａｗａ

▼

Ｆｉｓｈｉｎｇａｒｅａ：Ｓｅａ

ＴｏｋｙｏＢａｙ（Ｃｈｉｂａ）

Function menu



p.144

144

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Screen memo list screen

(p.143)

Edit title……Edits the title. You can enter up to 11 double-

byte or 22 single-byte characters.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects screen

memo. Protected memo titles are marked with “ ”.

No. of memos……Displays the numbers of stored and

protected screen memos respectively.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Screen memo detail screen

(p.143)

Save image……Saves the images displayed in a screen

memo.→p.144

Add to phonebook……Adds the phone number and

e-mail address displayed on the screen memo to the

Phonebook.→p.70

Edit title……Edits the title of the screen memo. You can

enter up to 11 double-byte or 22 single-byte characters.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects screen

memo. Protected memo titles are marked with “ ”.

Compose message*……Composes i-mode mail and

Deco-mail® with the URL for a screen memo pasted into

the message or the image pasted/attached.

Save schedule……Stores a scheduled event by

browsing the screen memos.

Refer dictionary……Starts the dictionary.→p.296

URL……Displays and checks the screen memo URL.

Certificate……Displays the SSL certificate details when

the screen memo is SSL-compatible.

Sound effect……Specifies whether the settings for Flash

movie sound effects are enabled or not (ON/OFF).

Replay……Plays the Flash movie or animation in the

screen memo again from the beginning.

Delete……Deletes the screen memo.

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Downloading Charged

Contents

Some sites may charge you for downloading contents

(images, melodies or Chaku-Uta-Full®). When you try

to download charged contents, a confirmation

message for the purchase and the i-mode password

entry screen appears.

Downloading Images from

Sites

You can save an image, background image or animation

displayed or attached to the currently displayed site,

screen memo, i-mode mail or MessageR/F, then set the

saved image in screens such as standby screen and

wake-up display.

zYou can store up to 1,000 images including images

that can be set as Deco-mail® pictures or Deco-

mail® pictographs as well as shot still images (the

number of images you can actually store may be

reduced depending on the file size).

<Example: To save a normal image displayed on a

site page>

1Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC)

“Save image”“Normal image”

Select an image“YES”Select a

folder

Position the frame over the image to be

saved.

■ To save the background image

“Save image”“Background image”“YES”

Select a folder

2“YES”Select an item

■When you do not set the image to the

standby screen, etc.

“NO”

zUp to 50 screen memos can be protected. However,

the number of screen memos you can protect varies

depending on the data size.

zYou cannot download the contents if more than 2

minutes have passed before starting downloading

after you enter the i-mode password. Enter the

i-mode password again.

zWhen 2in1 is set to Dual mode or B mode, and also

“Setting standby screens for each mode” is set to

other than “Same as A Number”, the saved image

cannot be set to the standby screen. The screen for A

mode or OFF in 2in1 mode is applied.

145

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Downloading Melodies from

Sites

<i-melody>

You can set your favorite song, the latest hit song

downloaded from a site or a stored melody attached

to an i-mode mail as a ring tone on your FOMA

terminal.

zYou can store up to 200 melodies (the number of

melodies you can actually store may be reduced

depending on the file size).

<Example: To save a melody downloaded from a

site>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a melody

2“Save”“YES”Select a folder

■To play a melody

“Play”

■To display melody information

“Property”

3“YES”Select an item

■When you do not set the melody to the

ring tone, etc.

“NO”

Downloading PDF Data from

Sites

You can download PDF-formatted data from a

website and display it on the FOMA terminal (Phone).

zYou can store up to 400 PDF data on the FOMA

terminal. (The number of data you can actually

store may be reduced depending on the file size.)

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a PDF data

file

The “PDF data” (p.261) screen appears.

Operation for viewing a PDF document →p.263

* When a PDF file that enables you to download

the specified pages is selected, the first

downloaded page appears. The subsequent

pages are downloaded when you move to

those pages.

■To cancel the download

o (Quit) or t

When the message asking whether to save the

partly downloaded data appears, select “YES” to

save it. In this case, you can download the

remaining data later.→p.146

■If the password entry screen appears

Enter the password set to the PDF data.

■To save the PDF data

u (FUNC)“Save”“YES”Select a folder

For PDF data that requires download of all the

data, all the pages are saved. For PDF data that

enables you to download the specified pages,

the data (pages) downloaded so far are saved.

You can download the remaining pages later.

→p.145

■To end display of PDF data

t

When the PDF data is not saved, a message

asking whether to close the PDF appears. To

save the PDF data, select “NO”.

Downloading remaining PDF data

after downloading partially

When you have saved partly downloaded PDF data,

you can download the remaining pages (data) later.

The method of downloading varies depending on the

status of the downloaded PDF data.

●For partially downloaded (by page) PDF

data ( (pale blue))

1PDF list screen (p.261)Select a PDF

file to view

The message notifying that downloading will

resume appears and then the “PDF data” screen

(p.261) appears.

Operation for viewing a PDF document →p.263

2o (Tool)Press on the toolbar

to view pages not yet downloaded

Connected to the site to download the pages.

■To specify the page number you want to

download

Select page number display on the toolbar

Enter the page number you want to view

■To download all the remaining data at one

time

u (FUNC)“DL remaining data”“YES”

■To save the PDF data

u (FUNC)“Save”“YES”

The document including the newly downloaded

pages is saved.

zDownloaded melodies may be subject to restrictions

such that only a pre-designated part of the melody

can be played. While a melody of this type is played in

full when played back on the FOMA terminal, when it

is set as a ring tone, only the designated section is

played.

146

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

●For PDF data that could only be

downloaded partially < (pale blue),

(pale blue)>

1PDF list screen (p.261)Select a PDF

file to view

Before the document is displayed, a message

appears asking whether to download all the

remaining data.

2“YES”

Connected to the site and downloading of all the

remaining data starts. After downloading is

completed, the “PDF data” screen (p.261)

appears. (Some documents may not be viewable

even if the download was successful.)

■To save the PDF data

u (FUNC)“Save”“YES”

Downloading Kisekae Tool

from Sites

You can download Kisekae Tool packages from

i-mode sites and save them on your FOMA terminal.

zYou can save up to 100 Kisekae Tool packages,

including the pre-installed ones (the number of

packages that can be saved may be less

depending on the size of Kisekae Tool data).

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a Kisekae

Tool package

■To cancel the download

 t

You can resume downloading if the message

asking whether to do it appears.

Selecting “NO” allows you to save the partly

downloaded data.

2“Save”“YES”

■To check the Kisekae Tool package

“Preview”

■To display the Kisekae Tool package

information

“Property”

Downloading Various Data

from Sites

You can enormously expand the range of uses for

your FOMA terminal by downloading additional data

such as dictionaries, Deco-mail® pictures, Template,

Chara-den, and ToruCa from sites.

zYou can save up to the following number of

downloaded data, including the pre-installed data.

• Dictionary : up to 5

• Deco-mail® picture, etc. : up to 1000

• Template : up to 500

• Chara-den : 10

• ToruCa : up to 100

* The number of data you can actually store may be

reduced depending on the file size.

<Example: To download a dictionary from a site>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a data

“Save”“YES”

■To display dictionary information

“Property”

■When the dictionaries are full

Select the dictionary to delete“YES”

The selected dictionary is overwritten and new

dictionary is saved.

zIt may take a long time to display some PDF data.

zPDF data may not be properly displayed if it contains

formats unsupported by PDF viewer or complicated

designs.

zNote that the communication fee for downloading

large amounts of data will be expensive.

zIf you attempt to download a PDF file larger than 500K

bytes, the confirmation message asking whether to

download the file appears.

zYou cannot download a PDF file whose size is

unknown or larger than 2M bytes.

zWhen the PDF data that you try to download has the

same definition file (information file for defining PDF)

as the PDF data stored in the FOMA terminal or

microSD card, they are recognized as the same data.

Consequently, the PDF data will not be downloaded

and the saved PDF data will be displayed.

zIf the pre-installed Kisekae Tool is

deleted, you can download from

“PlayNow” by SO.

“iMenu”“メニューリスト” (Menu List)

“ケータイ電話メーカー ” (Mobile

phone manufacturer)“PlayNow by SO”

You can read the QR code on the right and select the

displayed URL to access website.

147

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Using the Phone To/AV Phone

To, Mail To, Web To and Media

To Functions

These functions provide quick and simple procedures

for making calls, composing SMS, sending mail or

viewing websites using information (phone numbers,

e-mail addresses, URLs, etc.) displayed in mail or on

a site. 1seg can be activated.

zYou may not be able to use this function for the

mails or sites sent from a PC.

zYou may use items in which a phone number, mail

address, and URL are not indicated but linked (e.g.

“Please contact here”).

Phone To/AV Phone To function

You can call or compose an SMS for the phone

number in the displayed site or mail.

zYou can enter up to 26 digits as a phone number.

<Example: To make a voice call to a number

displayed on a site>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a phone

number

■When the 2in1 is in Dual mode

The Outgoing number selection screen appears.

Select a phone number.

2“Voice phone”

3“Dial”

Mail To function

You can send a mail to a mail address displayed on a

site, in a mail, PDF data or the Full Browser screen.

zYou cannot use the Mail To function when draft

mails are full.

zYou may not be able to use the Mail To function

when 2 or more e-mail addresses are displayed in

sequence.

zYou can enter up to 50 single-byte characters as an

e-mail address.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, this function is not

available.

<Example: To send mail from the sites screen>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a mail

address

2Compose and send an i-mode mail

→p.156

Web To function

You can display websites in the displayed site or mail.

zYou can enter up to 512 single-byte characters as a

URL.

<Example: To open another website from the sites

screen>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a URL

Media To function

Use information such as date and time, channel and

program name displayed in a web page or mail to

activate 1seg or book viewing/recording.

<Example: To activate 1seg from a site>

1Site screen (p.136)Select date and

time, channel, program name, etc.

zIf the pre-installed Chara-den is deleted,

you can download from “PlayNow” by

SO.

“iMenu”“メニューリスト” (Menu List)

“ケータイ電話メーカー ” (Mobile

phone manufacturer)“PlayNow by SO”

You can read the QR code on the right and select the

displayed URL to access website.

zThe file name used for Template with no title is “YYYY/

MM/DD hh:mm” (Y = year, M = month, D = day, h =

hour, m = minute).

zYou may not be able to download data depending on

sites or the file size.

zThe Media To function may not work even if

information is selected.

148

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Using Location Information

Select a link with location information added on a site,

use the location information.

<Example: To use the information on a site>

1Sites screen (p.136)Select a link with

location information addedSelect any

item:

Run i-αppli……Displays the list of i-αppli

compatible with the location information function

(that can use location information).

Read a Map……Accesses the i-mode site and

displays the peripheral map, etc. using the location

information.

Paste to mail*……Pastes the location information

URL into an i-mode message to compose a new

message.

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

Specifying Your i-mode

Settings

1o“i-mode settings”

The “i-mode settings” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Scroll……Sets the scrolling speed and link display

of the detail screen for a site, screen memo or

MessageR/F.

Speed (default: High speed)……Selects the

scrolling speed from “High speed/Low speed”.

During scroll in focus (default: OFF)……Sets

whether to highlight the linked pages while

scrolling.

Font size (default: Standard)……Selects the

character size of the detail screen for a screen

memo, MessageR/F or a page on a site, from

“Small/Standard/Large/X-large”.→p.93

Set image disp. (default: ON)……Sets whether the

detail screen for screen memos and pages on a site

are displayed or not. If you select “OFF”, the “ ”

icon will be displayed instead of the images not to be

displayed.

i-motion auto-replay (default: ON)→p.152

Auto-display setting (default: MessageR preferred)

……Sets for the automatic display of MessageR/F.

Start attachment (auto) (default: ON)……Sets

whether the attached/pasted melody automatically

plays when opening the MessageR/F.

Use phone information (default: Accept)→p.149

Message list display (default: 2 lines)……Sets the

number of lines in the message list screen.

Home URL……Sets for using the home URL display

function. When set to “Valid”, pressing a on the

standby screen displays the screen of the stored

URL. You can enter up to 256 single-byte characters

for the URL.

Invalid (default)……Disables the home URL

display setting.

Valid……Enables the home URL display

setting.

Select the Home URL field and enter a URL to

be stored.

Sound effect (default: ON)……Sets whether to play

the sound effects for the Flash movies in a site or

screen memo.

Tab display setting (default: Open at the back side)

……Sets whether to change (Open at the front) or

keep (Open at the back side) the current display

when you open a website in new window.

Check settings……Displays the settings set in

“i-mode settings”.

Reset……Resets the settings specified in “i-mode

settings” to the default settings.

zWhen the location information URL is pasted into the

message, “ ” is prefixed to the location information

URL.

zThe number of characters of the pasted location

information URL is counted as the number of

characters of the message.

i-mode settings N

zIf a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch

(optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal,

pressing the switch in the standby screen will also

display the site set as the home.

zEven if sound effects are set to “ON”, some Flash

movies may not make any sound.

149

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Setting the connection timeout

This option sets time-out duration for which the

FOMA terminal automatically stops trying to connect

when a site is busy and there is no response.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“Set connection timeout”

Select any item:

60 seconds……Automatically stops connecting if

there is no response for 60 seconds.

90 seconds……Automatically stops connecting if

there is no response for 90 seconds.

Unlimited……Does not automatically stop

connecting.

Setting a host different from i-mode

host (ISP connection)

You need to select a different host when you want to

use a service other than i-mode. If you change the

host to a host other than i-mode, you can not use

i-mode and i-mode mail.

zYou can store up to 10 hosts other than “i-mode”.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“Host selection”Highlight

“<Not recorded>”o (Edit)Enter

your security codeSelect any item:

Host name……Sets the host name. You can enter

up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters.

Host number……Sets the host number. You can

enter up to 99 single-byte characters.

Host address……Sets the host address. You can

enter up to 30 single-byte characters.

Host address2……Sets the host address2. You can

enter up to 30 single-byte characters.

2Set the respective items



o (Finish)

Specifying whether to use terminal

data in Flash movies

Use this function to specify whether terminal data is

used when a Flash movie is running.

zThe terminal data may be used depending on the

particular Flash movie. Select “Accept” in “Use

phone information” of “i-mode settings” so that

images use the terminal data. The default setting is

“Accept”. Such movies may use the following types

of terminal data:

• Battery level • Ring volume setting

• Signal strength • Select language

• Date and time • Model data

1i-mode setting screen (p.148)“Use

phone information”“Accept” or

“Reject”

Using SSL Certificates

You can check the details of an SSL certificate or to

set to valid/invalid.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“Certificate”

2Select a certificateCheck the details

■To validate or invalidate SSL certificates

Highlight a certificateu (FUNC)“Valid/

Invalid”

* There is normally no need to change this

setting.

zNote that costs of packet communication while you are

connected to a host other than i-mode are not covered

by the Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.

zWhen you change the host, the ticker of i-Channel is

turned off. The ticker is turned on again automatically

when the information is updated automatically or

when p is pressed to receive the latest information.

zAfter changing the host, the i-Channel information

may not be updated automatically. To receive the

latest information, press p to display the channel list

screen.

zWhen set to “Valid”, “ ” appears. When set to

“Invalid”, “ ” appears.

zIf you select “Invalid”, you cannot view SSL pages with

that SSL certificate.

150

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Setting FirstPass

User certificates prove that the user is a proper FOMA

service subscriber. Downloaded user certificates are

saved on your FOMA card (UIM) and enable you to

access client authentication-compliant sites.

Connect to the FirstPass Center

Follow the procedure below to request and download

the user certificate.

zYou can request a user certificate or download from

the FirstPass Center.

zUser certificates cannot be used with the FOMA

card (blue).

zThe FirstPass cannot be used overseas.

zTo connect to the FirstPass Center, you must first

set the date and time on your FOMA terminal.

→p.45

zThe screens and procedures used at the FirstPass

Center are subject to change.

1o“Client certificate”Check the

description“English”

2“Request your certificate”

■To apply invalidation

Select “Other settings” and then select “Revoke

your certificate”.

Enter your PIN2 code and then proceed as

directed by the on-screen instructions.

3Check the description“Continue”

4Enter the PIN2 code

PIN2 code→p.100

5Check the message“Download”

Check the description“Continue”

“Menu”

The confirmation message appears.

The FirstPass menu screen reappears after the

downloading is completed.

Using a user certificate to connect to a

site

1Sites screen (p.136)Confirm user

certificate transmission“YES”Enter

your PIN2 code

■Notes on using FirstPass

• FirstPass is DOCOMO’s digital authentication

service. Using FirstPass enables the client

authentication in which the site authenticates the

FOMA terminal.

zPacket communication charge for connection to the

FirstPass Center is free.

zBefore using the FirstPass Center, select “The usage

regulation (Japanese only)” and read the information

carefully.

zYou cannot use the following function during

connection to the FirstPass Center.

• Sending or receiving i-mode mail (sending and

receiving SMS is available)

• Check new message (Check new SMS is available)

• Reception of MessageR/F

• Downloading attached files of mails manually

• Web To function from the mail detail screen

zAlways send a certificate request before downloading

a new or updated user certificate. You cannot

download a certificate without first requesting the

certificate.

zOnce an application for user certificate invalidation

has been completed, you can no longer access

FirstPass-compliant sites that require that user

certificate.

zIf you use FirstPass after completion of invalidation,

apply issue for the user certification again and

download it.

zThe Packet communication charge of connecting to

FirstPass-compliant sites is covered by the Pake-

Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.

zFirstPass is also available in Full Browser. However,

the packet communication charge for connecting to

FirstPass-compliant sites in Full Browser is not

covered by the Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.

zIf you connect to a FirstPass-compliant site without a

user certificate, or if your user certificate has expired,

a message appears informing you of that fact. You can

still connect to the site and view subsequent pages by

selecting “YES” in some cases, but note that it may

not be safe to send your personal information (credit

card number, contact details, etc.). To disconnect,

select “NO”, then reconnect the site after downloading

the user certificate from the FirstPass Center.

151

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

• FirstPass can be used either when the FOMA

terminal is directly connected to the Internet or

when it is connected via a PC. When the FOMA

terminal is connected to the Internet via a PC, the

FirstPass PC software included in the provided CD-

ROM for FOMA SO706i is required. For more

information, refer to the PDF-format “FirstPass-

Manual” contained in the “FirstPassPCSoft” folder

on the CD-ROM. (The “FirstPass-Manual” is in

Japanese only.)

To view the PDF-format “FirstPass Manual”,

Adobe® Reader® is required.

If this software is not installed on your PC, install

the Adobe® Reader® in the provided CD-ROM to

view the file.

Refer to the “Adobe Reader ヘルプ” (Help of the

Adobe Reader) for details on how to use it.

• When requesting a user certificate, carefully read

and agree to the “The usage regulation” of

FirstPass displayed on your screen before

proceeding with your request.

• To use a user certificate, you will need to enter your

PIN2 code (p.100). Take great care to prevent

unauthorized persons from using your FOMA card

(UIM) or PIN2 code since all the actions performed

subsequent to PIN2 code entry will be assumed to

have been performed by you.

• If your FOMA card (UIM) is lost or stolen, you can

have your user certificates invalidated at NTT

DOCOMO Information counter on the back cover of

this manual.

• NTT DOCOMO is not responsible for and accepts

no liability whatsoever regarding the sites or the

content provided by FirstPass-compliant sites. Any

disputes are to be resolved between the customer

and the FirstPass-compliant site.

• NTT DOCOMO and its authentication company

provide no guarantee regarding security or secrecy

in the use of FirstPass and SSL certificates. Such

certificates are used entirely at the discretion of the

user.

Changing the Certificate Host

You can set the host for downloading the user

certificate.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“Certificate host”

2Highlight “<Not recorded>”o (Edit)

Enter your security codeSelect any

item:

Default URL……Sets the URL of the initial screen

for the host. You can enter up to 100 single-byte

characters.

Host number……Sets the host number. You can

enter up to 99 single-byte characters.

3Set the respective items



o (Finish)

What is i-motion?

An i-motion is a file containing video, voice and music

data. It can be downloaded from an i-motion site to

your FOMA terminal. You can also set an i-motion as

a ring tone. Chaku-motion→p.82

●i-motion types

i-motion can be broadly divided into 2 types as

follows. The type of the i-motion you downloaded

depends on the site or data.

* : May not be saved depending on the i-motion.

* There is normally no need to change this

setting.

zTo change a stored “User setting host”, use the same

procedure for storing.

zTo delete a stored “User setting host”, select “Delete”

from the function menu.

Type

Description

Type Playback

type

Standard

type

(Can be

saved*)

(Up to 10M

bytes)

Playback

after

downloading

Plays the i-motion after

downloading all the

data.

Playback

while

downloading

Plays the i-motion while

downloading the

i-motion data.

Streaming

type

(Cannot be

saved)

(Up to 10M

bytes)

Playback

while

downloading

Plays the i-motion while

downloading the

i-motion data. As the

data is discarded after

the playback, you

cannot repeat playback

or save the i-motion to

the FOMA terminal.

152

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Downloading i-motion

1Sites screen (p.136)Select i-motion

When data downloading is completed, the “Data

acquisition” screen appears.

■To cancel downloading

t

2“Play”

The downloaded i-motion is

played.

“Operations on the Music

Player” screen→p.278

Data acquisition screen (p.152)

Add screen memo……Saves the data acquisition screen

to the screen memo.→p.143

Certificate……Displays the contents of the SSL

certificate when the page is compatible with SSL.

Saving i-motion

zSome i-motion cannot be saved on the FOMA

terminal.

zYou can save up to 100 i-motion, including the

movies shot by the camera. The maximum

number of i-motion to be stored varies

depending on the amount of various stored

data.

zi-motion folder→p.224

1Data acquisition screen (p.152)

“Save”“YES”

■To cancel the saving

“NO”

Returns to the data acquisition screen without

saving the i-motion.

2Select a folder

Viewing i-motion details

You can check the details of the i-motion, including

the title, file size and replay restrictions.

1Data acquisition screen (p.152)

“Property”

The i-motion info screen appears. Use c to

scroll the display up or down to check the details

such as the remaining count of the replay, the

playback period and the time limit.

Setting Whether to Play an

i-motion Automatically

<i-motion auto-replay>

zYou can set whether to play an i-motion

automatically when:

• Downloading i-motion from the site screen

• Displaying the Screen memo of the data

acquisition screen

z“i-motion auto-replay” setting is activated only for

the standard type i-motion. The streaming type

i-motion is played back automatically regardless of

this setting.

i-motion types→p.151

zSome sites and i-motion do not allow downloading or

the playback during the download.

zFor standard type i-motion, the downloading itself

continues even if the playback is stopped during

downloading.

zSome i-motion is restricted to be played. “ ” is

displayed at the beginning of the title for the i-motion

with restrictions on the play count, period or time limit.

The i-motion restricted on the playback period cannot

be played before or after the period. If the battery pack

is removed from the FOMA terminal for a long period of

time, the date and time settings stored on the FOMA

terminal may be reset. In this case i-motion restricted

on the playback period or time limit cannot be played.

zSome i-motion cannot be correctly played.

zThe playback while downloading may be interrupted or

the images may be distorted due to the signal reception.

zYou can also play an i-motion from a “Screen memo”

after saving the data acquisition screen as a screen

memo.

However, you cannot save the data acquisition screen of:

• i-motion restricted to be played

• Streaming type i-motion

• Incomplete i-motion

Data acquisition

Function menu



p.152

zAn i-motion without title is listed as “movieXXX” (XXX

are numbers).

153

Continued on next page

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

1i-mode settings screen (p.148)

“i-motion auto-replay”Select any

item:

ON (default)……Automatically plays the i-motion

after downloading. Some i-motion is played while

downloading.

OFF……Displays the data acquisition screen

without playing the i-motion automatically after

downloading.

What is i-Channel?

i-channel is a news and information service

distributed for i-mode subscribers with i-channel

compatible handsets. A variety of information

including news and weather forecasts is automatically

delivered to the phone’s standby screen as subtitles,

and subscribers can check a channel list of the

information received by simply pressing the i-channel

button (p). (Displaying the channel list →p.153)

i-Channel is a pay service you need to subscribe to

(you need to subscribe to i-mode service).

There are two types of channels that you can enjoy

with i-channel service: “Basic Channel” distributed by

DOCOMO and “Optional Channel” by information

service providers (IP). “Basic Channel” does not incur

packet communications charges when information is

updated. “Optional Channel” that users can choose

and register at their own will incurs packet

communications charges when information is

updated. Detailed content will incur packet

communications charges. During international

roaming, both auto update and detailed content view

incur packet communications charges.

For details on i-Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

●Ticker on the standby screen

If you have subscribed to i-Channel, the information is

displayed on the standby screen as a ticker when the

information is received.

z“ ” flashes while i-Channel information is being

delivered.

zYou can set the ticker display with “i-Channel

setting”.→p.154

Viewing Sites from the

Channel List

You can display channel list screen to access

information sites of i-Channel.

You can display up to 15 channels including both

“Basic channel” and “Optional channel” on the

channel list.

1On the standby screenp

The “Channel list” screen

appears.

■From the main menu

o“i-Channel”

“i-Channel list”

2Select channel item

This service provides only Japanese channels.

zTicker is displayed even when i-motion or i-αppli

standby screen is set on the standby screen. Ticker is

also displayed when the Self mode is set.

zThe ticker does not appear when the FOMA card

(UIM) is not inserted, when Public mode (Driving

mode) is set or in Power saver mode.

zInformation may be received when the channel list

screen is displayed in some cases.

Ticker

あすの天気：東京最高

２８

Channel list

Function menu



p.154

154

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Channel list screen (p.153)

Add shortcut →p.94

Replay……Displays the channel list screen from the

beginning.

Sound effect……Sets whether to play the sound effect of

the channel list screen or not (ON/OFF).

Window

Open new window……“Using multi window”

→p.140

Close window……Closes the displayed i-Channel

window.

Change window……Switches windows when

multiple websites are open.

Setting i-Channel

<i-Channel setting>

You can set whether i-Channel information is

displayed on the standby screen as a ticker or not.

You can also set the scroll speed, color/front size of

the ticker on the standby screen.

zWhen set to “ON”, ticker always appears on the

standby screen. When set to “Receiving”, ticker

appears twice on the standby screen when news is

received.



“i-Channel”



Select any item:

i-Channel list……Displays the channel list.

i-Channel setting

Ticker display setting (default: ON)……Sets

whether the ticker of channel information is

displayed on the standby screen (ON/

Receiving/OFF).

Ticker speed setting (default: Normal)……

Selects the scrolling speed of the ticker from

“Normal/High/Low”.

Ticker color setting*……Selects the ticker

color (“White”/“Yellow”/“Blue”/“Red”/“Green”).

* : Move the highlight to display the ticker color.

Ticker size setting (default: Standard)……

Selects the ticker font size from “Small/

Standard/Large”.→p.93

Reset i-Channel……Resets the i-Channel settings

to the default settings.

zWhen information is received, the ring tone will not

sound, and the vibrator does not vibrate. Also, the

illumination does not flash.

zThe setting of “Sound effect” set on the channel list

screen is applied to “Sound effect” of “i-mode

settings”.

zThe i-Channel setting cannot be changed in Public

mode (Driving mode), at the time of purchase (Reset

i-Channel) or if the FOMA card (UIM) is not inserted,

etc.

zThe ticker display setting remains when you

unsubscribe from i-Channel or when you unsubscribe

from i-mode service before unsubscribing from

i-Channel, but tickers will not be displayed

automatically.

zSettings are retained for each mode of 2in1.

zi-Channel tickers are not displayed just after resetting

i-Channel. The ticker is turned on again automatically

when the information is updated automatically or

when p is pressed to receive the latest information.

155

Mail

What is i-mode Mail? ...................................................................................................... 156

■Composing i-mode mail/Deco-mail®

Composing and Sending i-mode Mail......................................... 156

Composing Deco-mail®...................................................................................................... 158

Using Templates to Create Deco-mail®............................................................................ 159

Attaching Files ................................................................................................. 160

Saving i-mode Mail to Send Later.......................................................... 161

Storing Addresses in Mailing Lists.................................................................................. 162

■Receiving and using i-mode mail

When You Receive i-mode Mail ...................................................................................... 162

Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively ............................................................. 164

Checking for i-mode Mail ................................................................. 164

Replying to i-mode Mail ............................................................................... 165

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Recipients................................................ 165

Adding Mail Addresses to Phonebook............................................................................ 166

Downloading Attached Files Selectively ......................................................................... 166

Checking and Saving the File Attached to i-mode Mail .................................................. 166

Having the FOMA Terminal Read Out Mail..................................................................... 168

■Using mail boxes

Displaying Mail in the Inbox and Outbox...................................................... 170

■Using mail records

Using Mail Records............................................................ 177

■Specifying mail settings

Setting up the FOMA Terminal Mail Functions .............................................. 178

■Using the message services

When You Receive a Message ....................................................................................... 179

Viewing Messages in the Message Box ...................................................... 180

■Using Early Warning “Area Mail”

What is Early Warning “Area Mail”?................................................................................ 181

When You Receive Early Warning “Area Mail” ..................................... 181

Setting Early Warning “Area Mail” .......................................................... 182

■Using SMS

Composing and Sending SMS.......................................................... 182

When You Receive an SMS........................................................................ 183

Checking for SMS ................................................................................... 184

Specifying the SMS center setting.................................................... 184

Compose message/Send

Deco-mail®

Te m p l a t e

Attach file

Save i-mode mail

Receive option

Check new messages

Reply to mail

Forward mail

Inbox/Outbox

Sent address/Received address

Mail Setting

MessageR/F

Receive Area Mail

Area Mail setting

Compose SMS/Send

Receive SMS

Check new SMS

SMS center selection

156

Mail

What is i-mode Mail?

Subscribing to i-mode enables you to send and

receive e-mail messages via the Internet not only

between i-mode terminals.

In addition to the message body, you can attach up to

10 files (pictures, videos, etc.) within the total of 2M

bytes. As the FOMA terminal is compatible with

Deco-mail®, you can send expressive mail by

changing font color, size, or background color of the

message body or using Deco-mail® pictographs.

zFor details on i-mode mail, refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

Composing and Sending

i-mode Mail

Use this procedure to compose and send a new

i-mode mail message.

zYou can change the size and color of the text used

in the message body, assign actions to the text and

insert images, lines and other decorative features.

Deco-mail®→p.158

zYou can store up to 500 sent mails (i-mode mail

and SMS) (the number of mails you can actually

store may be reduced depending on the file size).

1u“Compose message”

The “New mail” screen appears.

2“ <No address>”Enter an

address

Enter an address to select the mail address

input method.

■Searching in the phonebook

“Phonebook”



Search the phonebook (p.73)



Select a mail address in the phonebook detail

screen

■Searching in the address list

“Sent address” or “Received address”



Select

a mail address

■Using Mail member

“Mail member”



Select a mail member

For information on mail member→p.162

■Entering a mail address directly

“Enter address”



Enter a mail address

You can enter up to 50 single-byte alphabets,

numbers or symbols for a mail address.

When you enter a mail address, the new mail

address field is displayed below the filled field.

You can enter other mail addresses and send a

same mail message to multiple recipients. You

can enter up to 5 mail addresses.

3“”Enter a subject

The “Subject” screen appears.

You can enter up to 100 double-byte or 200

single-byte characters.

4“ <No message>”Enter the

message body

You can enter up to 5,000

double-byte characters.

You can also insert a line

feed (hard return) while

editing the message. You

can also insert a line feed

by pressing g at the end of

a sentence. “ ” is also

counted as 1 double-byte character. Spaces are

also counted in the same way as characters.

You can also compose Deco-mail®.→p.158

You can use Template to compose and send the

Deco-mail®.→p.159

5o (Send)

When you enter the

message, number of bytes

of the message appears on

the upper right corner of the

message.

An animation appears while

sending a mail. After

sending a mail, select “OK” to return to the mail

menu screen. After sending a mail, select “OK”

to return to the mail menu screen.

■To cancel the transmission

p (Quit) or t (1 second or longer)

Depending on the timing, the i-mode mail may

be sent.

■When you are requested to send the mail

again

“YES”

New mailMail menu

Function menu



p.157

Message

Function menu



pp.158,

306

157

Continued on next page

Mail

●Entering Deco-mail® pictographs

Deco-mail® pictograph is an image which fulfills

certain conditions including moving pictograph. On

the SO706i, you can enter Deco-mail® pictograph in

the mail message easily because Deco-mail®

pictograph entry is arranged by the categories.

zYou can download Deco-mail® pictograph from

websites, in addition to the pre-installed

Deco-mail® pictograph.→p.144

zMails with Deco-mail® pictographs are handled as

Deco-mail®.

■Entering Deco-mail® pictograph

Press and hold p (Pict/Sym) (“ Pictograph D” in

the operation guidance area) for 1 second or longer on

the Message screen to display the Pictograph D

(Deco-mail® pictograph) entry screen which is

arranged by the categories. Use b to move the frame

and press d (Select) to enter Deco-mail® pictograph.

[Other key operations]

u (←Switch): Displays the previous category

o (Switch→): Displays the next category

p (JUMP): Displays the category list

t: Quits entering Deco-mail® pictograph

●Composing i-mode mail from the

phonebook screen

Locate and display an e-mail address stored in the

phonebook and then press d (MAIL), then the new

mail screen with the mail address entered to the

address appears.

Searching the phonebook→p.73

●WEB mail

Selecting “WEB mail” on the Mail menu (p.156), you

can access the WEB mail site and compose and send

mail from Address B of 2in1*.

* : For details on 2in1, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[2in1]”.

New mail screen (p.156)

Send……Sends i-mode mail.

Save→p.161

Delete receiver……If there are 2 or more addresses

entered, you can delete the address you select.

Change rcv. type……Changes the address type with an

address highlighted.

To……The recipient’s address. The mail address entered

in the “To” field is displayed in other recipient’s terminals.

Cc……Broadcasts address. The mail address entered

in the Cc field are also displayed to the other recipients.

Select this option to send copies of the message sent

to the address in the To field to other addresses.

Bcc……Broadcasts address. The mail address entered

in the Bcc field are not displayed to the other recipients.

Template →p.159

Attach file……Attaches a file such as melody, image or

i-motion to an i-mode mail.→p.160

Activate camera……Activates the camera function to

shoot still images or movies.

Photo mode→p.123

Movie mode →p.126

Delete att. file・Del all att. files……Deletes one or all

attached file(s).

Add header……Pastes a header into the i-mode mail

message.

zIf the storage capacity for sent mails is full when you send

a mail, mails are deleted from the oldest one (protected

mails and mails in the Secret folder are not deleted).

[Category]

顔文字・ｉ絵文字 (Face

mark/i-pictograph)

装飾 (Decoration)

天気・季節

(Weather/Seasons)

生活 (Life)

食べ物 (Food)

キャラクター (Character)

文字・せりふ (Text/Phrase)

いろいろ (Miscellaneous)

zSome phones may be unable to receive a part of a

subject.

zWhen you use pictographs in the subject or message

body and send the mail to the devices of other mobile

phone companies (au/SoftBank), the pictographs are

automatically converted to similar ones on the other

party’s device. However, pictographs may not be

displayed properly depending on the model or functions

of the other party’s mobile Phone. When the receiver

does not have the corresponding pictographs, the

pictographs are converted to characters or “〓”.

zWhen the recipient address is a phone number and the

number is preceded by the “184” or “186” prefix, a

message appears asking whether to delete the prefix

before sending the mail when you try to send i-mode mail.

zDepending on the signal quality, the recipient may not

be able to display the text correctly. Also, the

“Transmission failed” message may appear even after

the message has been sent.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and

send i-mode mail.

158

Mail

Add signature……Pastes your signature into the i-mode

mail message.

Erase message……Erases the message body in the

current i-mode mail message.

Delete……Deletes the current i-mode mail message.

Message screen (p.156)

zFor the functions other than the following, refer to

the function menu of the “Character entry (edit)”

screen (p.306).

Decorate mail……“Decoration menus” →p.158

Select area……You can decorate, copy or cut the

selected text. →p.308

Property……Displays the file name and size of an image

inserted into the message when the cursor is at the left of

the image.

Preview……Displays a preview of the message.

Composing Deco-mail

<Deco-mail®>

The Deco-mail® function allows you to make your text

in the i-mode mail more visually appealing and

exciting by changing the size and color of the text, the

background color, assigning actions to text, and

inserting images into your message.

zIf you decorate the message, you can enter fewer

characters than in the i-mode mail which is not

decorated.

zWhen decorating text, you can enter text while

decorating or you can decorate text after entering.

1Message screen (p.156)rUse b

to move the frame to select the

decoration menu

The “Decoration menu”

appears.→p.158

■Decorating text while

entering

Decorated text is entered

after decoration menu is

selected.

■Decorating the entered text

Select from the decoration menu, specify

the text you want to decorate and select

decorating menu. The specified text is decorated.

2Press u (Exit) to end the decoration

●Decoration menus

zWhen decoration applied by lines (ticker/swing/

inserting line/alignment) is selected, a line feed is

automatically inserted when the menu is selected.

zYou can combine multiple decorations (example:

changing the color and size of characters and

making them blink).

zE-mail addresses entered in the “To” and “Cc” fields are

usually displayed to the recipient. However, depending

on the terminal device and mail software used by the

recipient, the e-mail addresses may not be displayed.

Decoration menu

zIf you forward received Deco-mail® or quote

Deco-mail® in a reply, inserted images and

decorations appear as quoted in the message.

zIf you quote or forward Deco-mail® that includes an

image that cannot be sent as mail, the image is deleted.

zSome i-mode terminals receive mail that includes URL

for viewing the Deco-mail®. However, incompatible

terminals may receive only the message with no URL.

Menu Description

Changes the character color. You can

select the pallet of 25 colors or 256 colors.

<25 colors>

Selects the character size from /

/ (Large/Standard/Small).

*1 Selects the image to insert from My

picture folder.

Makes characters “Blink/Scroll from right

to left (Ticker)/Scroll from right to left and

left to right (Swing)”.

“Starts” or “Ends” the

decoration.

“Sets” or “Releases” the

decoration of specified

area.

The latest 5 colors

selected from the pallet

of 256 colors are

displayed at the

bottom.

The pallet of 25 colors and 256 colors switches

each time you press o (Change).

Use b to move the

frame and select the

color to change.

159

Mail

*1: Cannot be selected in the decoration menu when is

selected.

*2: Available in the decoration menu only when is

selected.

Using Templates to Create

Deco-mail

Template is a form for Deco-mail® to which the layout

and the ornament are already set. By using a

template, you can compose Deco-mail® easily.

zYou can download Template from sites.→p.146

zWhen you try to use Template in the following

cases, a message appears asking whether to

delete the edited content in the message:

• When text is already entered in the mail message

• When the header or signature is automatically

inserted

• When there is an attached file

1u“Template”

The “Template list” screen

appears.

■To search templates by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

 “YES”

2Select Template

The “Template preview”

screen appears.

• During preview display,

use v to display other

templates.

3o (MAIL)Edit the message body

■To activate Template from the New mail

screen (p.156)

u (FUNC)“Template”“Load template”

Select Template

Selects the character alignment position

from / / (Left/Center/

Right).

*1 Inserts a line.

*1 Changes the background color of the

message.

Select the background color from the

pallet in the same way as the character

color.

Return the entered character or message

decoration 1 step back.

*1 Decorates the entered characters, or sets/

releases the decoration.

*2 Releases the decoration.

*1 Releases all the decoration.

Displays the preview screen of the

decoration.

zPictographs are also displayed in the specified color.

To return them to their original color, select “ ”,

specify the area to be changed and then select

“ ”. However, you cannot specify the character

color of Deco-mail® pictographs.

zYou cannot change the size of Deco-mail® pictographs.

zYou can insert up to 20 files, up to 90K bytes, of JPEG

or GIF images, or Deco-mail® pictographs regardless

of the number of bytes of the message body or the file

size of the attached file (the maximum number

depends on the file size).

zIf you insert multiple copies of the same image, they

are handled as 1 image. However, if you save or send

an image once and then edit the image and insert it

again, it is handled as a separate image.

zIf you insert an animation, the animation stops once a

set time has elapsed.

zBlinking, ticker subtitling or swinging stops once a set

time has elapsed.

zEven if you delete the decorated text, the decoration

data itself may be retained and the number of

characters that can be entered may be reduced. You

should remove the decorations and then delete the

text. If you hold down t for 1 second or longer, all

the characters and decoration data are deleted.

Menu Description

Template list

Function menu



p.160

Template preview

Function menu



p.160

160

Mail

Saving a template

You can save Deco-mail® you compose as Template.

zYou can save up to 500 Templates.

zIf the message has any attached file other than

inserted images, the file is deleted.

zTemplate is saved in “Template” in the Mail menu.

1Message-decorated New mail screen

u (FUNC)“Template”“Save

template”“YES”

Template list screen (p.159)

Compose message……Uses Template to create

Deco-mail®.→p.159

Sort……Sorts Template in a selected criteria.

Edit title……Edits the title of Template. You can enter up

to 10 double-byte or 20 single-byte characters.

Info……Displays Template size, save date and whether or

not it includes images.

No. of messages……Displays the number of saved

Template.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Template preview screen

(p.159)

Compose message……Uses Template to create

Deco-mail®.→p.159

Edit……Edits Template.

Save insert image……Selects the image inserted to

Template and saves it on the My picture folder. If the image

can be set as the standby screen, you can select whether

to set it as the standby screen or not after saving it.

Attaching Files

You can send i-mode mails with files attached.

zYou can attach the following files:

• Image (still image, image)

• SWF Flash movie

• movie, i-motion

• Melody

• PDF data

• Documents in a microSD card

• ToruCa, ToruCa (detail)

• Phonebook entry

• My profile data

• Schedule or To Do list entry

• Bookmark

• Other files in the microSD card

1New mail screen (p.156)p (Att.)

Select any item:

Image・i-motion・Melody・PDF……Selects a

folder on the Phone or microSD, and then selects

data to attach.

The number of selecting folders varies depending on

the selected device (Phone/microSD).

Document……Select a document in a microSD

card.

ToruCa……Selects a folder on the Phone or

microSD, and then selects data to attach.

The number of selecting folders varies depending on

the selected device (Phone/microSD).

Phonebook……Selects the phonebook on the

Phone or microSD, and then searches for a

phonebook entry (selects a folder for microSD) to

select data to attach.

How to search the phonebook→p.73

My Profile……Attaches the My Profile data.

Schedule……Selects the Schedule or To Do list,

and then selects data to attach.

Bookmark……Selects the bookmark on the Phone

(i-mode/Full Browser) or microSD, and then selects

data to attach.

Other……Selects other files in the microSD card.

zThe subject of the message being composed is used

as Template title. If no subject is entered, “YYYY/MM/

DD hh:mm” is used as the title (Y: year, M: month, D:

day, h: hour, m: minute).

zTemplate is not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

<Edit>

zThe title used when the template is saved as a

separate file is “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm” (Y: year, M:

month, D: day, h: hour, m: minute).

161

Continued on next page

Mail

■To send an image to a mova terminal as

i-shot

You can send a mail attached with an image to a

mova terminal as i-shot.

When you send a mail to a mova terminal, you

can attach only 1 JPEG image. If you attach a

GIF image downloaded from sites, etc., the

attached file is deleted and only the message

reaches the recipient.

When you send mail to a mova terminal, unless

the recipient has set the incoming message

length, he or she can only receive a message up

to 184 double-byte characters (369 bytes) long.

If the recipient has set the incoming message

length, the recipient can receive a message up

to 2,000 double-byte characters including the

i-shot URL (where the image is kept).

2Compose and send an i-mode mail

■To check the attached file

Select a file

You cannot play the melody which exceeds 100K

bytes or the SWF Flash movie.

■To delete the attached file

Highlight the fileu (FUNC)“Delete att.

file”“YES”

To delete all the attached files, select “Del all att.

files”.

For details of the subsequent procedure, see

“Composing and Sending i-mode Mail” (p.156).

Saving i-mode Mail to Send

Later

You can save the composing mail on the FOMA

terminal temporarily, then edit and send the saved

mail afterwards.

Saving i-mode mail

zThe Draft mailbox can hold up to 50 i-mode mail

and SMS in total.

zYou cannot compose i-mode mail when draft mails

are full.

1New mail screen (p.156)u (FUNC)

“Save”

The mail which is not edited cannot be saved.

Sending draft i-mode mail

1u“Draft”

The “Draft mail list” screen

appears.

2Select a mailEdit the address,

subject or message body and then

send the mail

zYou can attach up to 10 files, up to 2M bytes

regardless of the number of bytes of the message

body or the file size of the inserted image (the

maximum number depends on the file size). When

attaching ToruCa, you can attach ToruCa up to 1K

bytes and ToruCa (detail) up to 100K bytes for 1 case.

zYou cannot attach a file which is forbidden to be sent

as a mail attachment or output from your FOMA

terminal.

zYou can attach images or movies shot with the camera

even if “File restriction” is set to “File restricted”.

zIf you send an attached file which is not supported by

the receiving terminal, the attached file may be

deleted automatically at the i-mode Center. In this

case, the “添付ファイル削除 ” (Attached file deleted)

message is added to the mail message.

zIf an image selected for “Image” is larger than 320

dots wide × 240 dots high or 240 dots wide × 320 dots

high, “Attach image” appears and you can select

“Attach mail” or “QVGA scale down”.

zDepending on the recipient’s mobile phone model,

sent image may be displayed incorrectly or may not be

displayed. A coarse image may also be displayed.

zWhen you send an i-motion mail to the terminal which

is not compatible with the i-motion mail (i-motion

attached i-mode mail), the recipient receives an mail

with the URL for viewing the i-motion and can view the

i-motion by selecting the URL.

zWhen you send an i-motion mail, depending on the

recipient’s mobile phone model, movies may not be

received or displayed correctly, may be choppy or

converted to continuous still images for viewing. When

sending a mail to a terminal other than 2MB-compatible

handsets, it is recommended to set “File size” to

“500KB”, “Select size” to “QCIF (176 × 144)” and

“Quality setting” to “Fine mode” when shooting movies.

Playing movies→p.233

zIf the recipient is not FOMA SO706i, melodies you

send may not be played correctly.

Draft mail list

７：０６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２９

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７／２６ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

Ｄｒａｆｔ

Ｔｈａｎｋｓｆｏｒｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ．Ｉ

ｈａｄａｌｏｔｏｆｆｕｎ．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

１／２

Function menu



p.162

162

Mail

Draft mail list screen (p.161)

List setting……Selects a mail-list format from “Subject/

Name/Address”.

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data→p.258

iC trans. all→p.260

Send all Ir data→p.258

Copy to microSD→p.248

No. of messages……Displays the number of mails in the

Draft mailbox.

Store in Center→p.176

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Storing Addresses in Mailing

Lists

By storing addresses in the Mail member, you can

easily enter multiple addresses only by selecting the

Mail member.

zYou can store up to 20 mail members with up to 5

e-mail addresses in each list.

1i“OWN DATA”“Mail member”

The “Mail member list”

screen appears.

2Select a mail member

The “Mail member detail”

screen appears.

3Highlight “<Not stored>”o (Edit)

Enter the mail address

To store more e-mail addresses, repeat step 3.

Mail member list screen (p.162)

Compose message……Composes an i-mode mail

message with the members of the mail member pasted

into the recipients field.

Edit member name……Edits the name of the mail

member. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-

byte characters.

Reset member name……Resets the mail member name

to the default name.

Mail member detail screen (p.162)

Edit address……Edits the e-mail address.

Look-up address……Enters the e-mail address by

browsing the phonebook, sent address list or received

address list.

Delete this・Delete all……Deletes one or all mail

member(s).

When You Receive i-mode Mail

When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, i-mode

mail or MessageR/F is automatically sent to the

FOMA terminal from the i-mode Center.

zYou can store up to 1,000 received mails (i-mode mail

and SMS) (the number of mails you can actually store

may be reduced depending on the file size).

zYou can have the FOMA terminal read out the

received mail message.→p.168

Displaying new messages

automatically

［1］The “Receiving” screen appears when the

reception of i-mode mail or Message starts and

the “Received result” screen appears when the

reception is finished.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot display the Draft

mail list screen.

Mail member list

Function menu



p.162

Mail member detail

Function menu



p.162

163

Mail

z“ ” flashes while receiving a mail and “ ”

stops flashing and lights up when the

reception is finished.

z“ ” or “ ” flashes while receiving a Message.

［2］The number of received mail or MessageR/F

appears on the received result screen.

zThe number of mails includes the number of

SMS.

zWhen you select mail or Message on the

received result screen, the Received mail list

screen (pp.170, 171) or Message list screen

(p.180) appears.

zIf no operation is performed for about 15

seconds while the received result screen is

displayed, the previous screen appears for

mails and Detail screen appears for Message.

The display duration may vary depending on

the “Mail/Msg. ring time” setting.

zPress o (Read) on the received result screen

to have the FOMA terminal read out the mail

message.→p.168

zThe detail screen of MessageR/F is displayed

automatically when the message is received

on the standby screen.

zIf no operation is performed for about 15

seconds while the Message detail screen is

displayed, the standby screen reappears.

However, if you use operations such as scrolling,

the detail screen continues to be displayed.

zYou can set the FOMA terminal to display the

detail screen of MessageR/F automatically

with “Auto-display setting”.

■When you receive a mail exceeds 100K bytes

If the total amount of mail message, inserted image(s)

and attached file(s) exceeds 100K bytes, the attached

file(s) cannot be automatically received when receiving

mail. In this case, receive manually later on.

You can download the attached file which exceeds

100K bytes manually from the i-mode Center.→p.166

Viewing a new mail

1On the standby screendSelect

“”

■To display the unread mail list

On the standby screendUse b to select

“”

The “Unread mail list” screen appears.

zIf the storage capacity for received mails is full when

you receive a mail, mails are deleted from oldest read

mails (unread or protected mails and mails in the

Secret folder are not deleted).

zWhen the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more

mails (because it is full with unread and protected

mails), (red)/ (red) appear. Read the unread

mails or unprotect the unnecessary mails.

zWhen 2in1 is in A mode or B mode and a mail arrives

only at address in unspecified mode, the “Mail

Receiving...” screen appears, but the receiving results

screen and “ ” do not appear. In addition, the mail

ring tone does not sound.

zIf you receive i-mode mail from a terminal capable of

specifying “To”, “Cc” and “Bcc” recipients, refer to the

mail detail screen to see whether your own address is

in the “To”, “Cc” or “Bcc” field.→pp.170, 172

zIf you receive i-mode mail when the standby screen is

not displayed and “Operation preferred” is set in

“Receiving setting”, the FOMA terminal does not ring.

When “Alarm preferred” is selected, the FOMA

terminal plays the ring tone and displays the reception

results screen.

zIf you receive an i-shot service mail sent from a mova

terminal, images arrive as attached files.

zCharacters that cannot be displayed appear as spaces.

zIf the number of characters in the i-mode mail

message body exceeds the maximum number of

characters that can be received, either “/” or “//” is

inserted at the end of the message and the remaining

portion is automatically deleted.

zIf the size of received i-mode mail exceeds the size set

in “Limit Mail Size”, the pasted data is deleted at the

i-mode Center and you cannot download it.

zIf you receive decorated mail (HTML mail) from a PC,

the decorations may not be displayed correctly.

Shortcut icon

Unread mail list

７／２９

ＳｈｉｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２７

ＳｈｉｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｕｎｒｅａｄｍａｉｌ

６：４５ＳｈｉｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

１／２

Unread mail icon

Function menu



p.175

164

Mail

Receiving i-mode Mail

Selectively

You can check the subject of i-mode mail kept at the

i-mode Center, then select the mail to receive or delete

the mail at the i-mode Center without receiving.

zTo use this function, set “Receive option setting” to

“ON” beforehand. When set to “ON”, you cannot

receive i-mode mail automatically.

When mail arrives

A message appears saying that mail is kept at the

i-mode Center, and “ ” icon is displayed at the top of

the screen. When you confirm the message and

press any key, the message and icon disappear.

Receiving mail selectively

1u“Receive option”

You can also access “Receive option” as follows:

•o“iMenu”“メニューリスト (Menu List)”

“メール選択受信” (Receive option)

■If “Receive option setting” is set to “OFF”

A message appears asking whether you want to

enable mail receive options. Select “Receive

option setting” to specify the “Receive option”

setting. When you set the receive option to “ON”,

the Mail menu screen reappears.

2Select and set option for each item of

i-mode mail

受信 (Accept): Accepts the selected mail.

削除 (Delete): Deletes the selected mail.

保留 (Hold): Leaves the selected mail at the

i-mode Center.

Use “Check new message” to receive the mail.

■To delete all mails

“削除” (Delete) at the bottom of the page“決

定” (OK)

■When there are multiple pages of mail

“前ページ” (Previous page) or “次ページ”

(Next page)Move to other pages and select

the mail to be accepted

When you view the 2nd page, your selections on

the 1st page remain valid.

The meanings of the icons displayed after “サイ

ズ (Size):XXXバイト (bytes)” are as follows:

: Image file attached

: Melody file attached

: i-motion attached

: ToruCa attached

: Other file attached

3“受信／削除” (Receive/Delete)

“決定” (OK)

The completion screen appears and mail

reception begins.

■To cancel selective reception

“キャンセル” (Cancel)

■When there are multiple pages of mail

Selecting “受信/削除” (Receive/Delete) mid-way

through the pages applies your options (hold,

receive or delete) to the mail up to the selected

page and mail on the remaining pages remains

kept at the i-mode Center.

Checking for i-mode Mail

The i-mode mail or Messages which the FOMA

terminal could not receive are kept at the i-mode

Center. You can receive the kept i-mode mail or

Messages by checking for i-mode mail at the i-mode

Center.

i-mode mail messages are kept at the i-mode Center

in the following cases:

• When the FOMA terminal is turned off

• When “ ” is displayed

• When the Inbox is full

• When “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”

• During a videophone call

• When Self mode is set

• When connecting to the FirstPass Center

zUse “Set check new messages” to specify which

items are checked for.

zIf you use “Check new messages”, all messages are

received even if the receive option setting is set to

“ON”. Deselect “Mail” in “Set check new messages” if

you do not want to receive any mail.

zIf you display the receive option screen, the “ ” icon

disappears even when you do not receive or delete

mail.

The “ ” icon also disappears if you turn the FOMA

terminal off or display the mail screen.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot launch the

Receive option.

165

Mail

1u (1 second or longer)

The check new messages screen appears.

You can also check new messages by following

procedures.

•o“Check new messages”

•u“Check new messages”

■To cancel the inquiry

p (Quit) or t (1 second or longer) during

the inquiry

A message may be received depending on the

timing of the cancellation.

2Check for new i-mode mails, Message

R/F“Back”

Replying to i-mode Mail

You can send a reply to an i-mode mail message. You

can also quote the received i-mode mail in your reply.

1Received mail list screen (p.171)/

Received mail detail screen (p.172)

o (Reply)

■To reply by quoting the received message

u (FUNC)“Reply with quote”

You can select this option on the received mail

detail screen.

A single quotation symbol (set to “>” by default)

is displayed at the start of the quoted message

in the reply.

To edit the quotation symbol→p.179

■To reply to the sender of mail with multiple

addresses

“Reply” or “Reply with quote”“To sender”

■To reply to the sender and all addresses of

mail with multiple addresses

“Reply” or “Reply with quote”“To all”

If replies cannot be sent to the sender, all the

addresses, including the other broadcast

addresses, are deleted from the displayed mail

reply screen.

If the list of broadcast addresses includes some

to which replies cannot be sent, these

addresses to which replies cannot be sent are

deleted from the displayed mail reply screen.

2Edit the subject and message body

o (Send)

After the reply has been sent the “ ” icon

changes to “ ”.

Forwarding i-mode Mail to

Other Recipients

You can forward i-mode mail you have received to

other people.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)u (FUNC)“Forward”“

<No address>”Enter an address

You can edit the subject and message body

before you send a mail.

2o (Send)

After the reply has been sent the “ ” icon

changes to “ ”.

zDepending on the signal reception status, you cannot

check for new mails or the checking may be canceled.

zEven when there is i-mode mail kept at the i-mode

Center, the “ ” icon may not be displayed if the mail

arrived at the Center while the FOMA terminal is

turned off or the “ ” is displayed.

zYou can store up to 100 MessageR/F respectively at

the i-mode Center, and stored up to 72 hours. Once

the maximum number of stored messages is reached,

messages are deleted as a new message arrives,

starting with the oldest message.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode or Dual mode, you cannot

reply or reply with quote an i-mode mail sent to

Address B.

zWhen data such as a melody or specification for

activating i-αppli is pasted into the mail message, the

pasted data is deleted.

zIf the file which is prohibited to be attached to mails or

output from the FOMA terminal is attached to or

pasted, the file and its information are deleted.

zWhen data such as a melody or specification for

activating i-αppli is pasted into the mail message, the

pasted data is deleted.

zWhen there is any attached file whose downloading is

not completed, the file is not attached.→p.166

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot forward the mail.

zWhen 2in1 is in Dual mode, a forwarded mail to

Address B is sent as a mail of Address A.

166

Mail

Adding Mail Addresses to

Phonebook

You can add the e-mail address or phone number of

the sender of received mail to your phonebook.

zFor the received SMS message, the sender’s

phone number is stored in the Phonebook as a

phone number.

<Example: To add the sender’s e-mail address to the

phonebook>

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)u (FUNC)“Save address”

■When there are multiple e-mail addresses

to be added

On the e-mail address selection screen, select

the e-mail address you want to add

■To add an e-mail address or phone

number included in the body

Mail detail screenHighlight an e-mail

address or phone number you want to add

u (FUNC)“Add to phonebook”

2“YES”“Phone” or “UIM”

Adding information to the phonebook→p.70

Downloading Attached Files

Selectively

When the size of a mail including the message body,

inserted images and attached files exceeds 100K

bytes, you cannot receive the attached files

automatically when you receive the mail. In this case,

you need to download the attached files, manually.

zYou also have to download the files manually for the

files that are not checked in “Prefer attachment”.

zOn the received mail detail screen, “ ” appears

when the attached file is not downloaded and “ ”

appears when the attached file is downloaded halfway.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Select the attached file with

“” or “” icon

Data downloading begins.

When data downloading is completed, the screen

about data downloading completion appears.

■To cancel downloading

p (Quit)

The data downloaded halfway is saved. In this

case, you can download the rest of the data

repeating step 1.

2After downloading the data, contents

of the data is displayed according to

the file type of the attached file

Checking and Saving the File

Attached to i-mode Mail

You can check and save the data attached to or

pasted into received i-mode mail.

zYou cannot save the attached file whose

downloading has not completed. To save the data,

download the data beforehand.→p.166

Saving melodies

You can save a melody ( ) attached to or pasted

into received i-mode mail to the FOMA terminal.

zIf the sender is not FOMA SO706i, the received

melodies may not be played correctly.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Highlight the melody

u (FUNC)“Save data”“YES”

Select a folder

■To stop the melody

p, r, 0 to 9, w, q

2“YES”Select an item

■When you do not set the melody to the

ring tone, etc.

“NO”

zWhen there is any attached file whose downloading is

not completed, the data retention period of the

attached file is displayed on the “Received mail detail”

screen(pp.170, 172). When all the attached files are

downloaded, the retention period disappears from the

screen. You cannot download the attached file whose

retention period is expired.

zWhen the storage capacity of Inbox is exceeded when

you receive an attached file, the received mails are

deleted automatically according to the size of the

attached file (many received mails may be deleted

depending on the size of the attached file). Note that

unread or protected received mails and received mails

in Secret folder are not deleted. It is recommended to

protect mails you want to keep.→p.175

zIf there are multiple pasted files, you may not be able

to view the pasted files themselves.

zTo prevent melodies from playing automatically when

you open mail, set “Start attachment (auto)” to “OFF”.

167

Mail

Saving images

You can save images ( ) attached to or pasted into

received i-mode mail.

Saving the inserted image →p.176

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Move the frame to the image

u (FUNC)“Save data”“YES”

Select a folder

■To change image display to file name

display

Select an image

To return to the image display, select the file name.

2“YES”Select an item

■When you do not set the image to the

standby screen, etc.

“NO”

Saving i-motion

You can save the i-motion ( ) attached to received

i-mode mail.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172) Highlight an i-motion

u (FUNC)“Save data”“YES”

Select a folder

Saving ToruCa

You can save the ToruCa and ToruCa (detail) ( )

attached to received i-mode mail.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Select a ToruCa

The ToruCa appears.

2o (Save)Select a folder

You can also save the data by selecting “Save

data” from the function menu.

Saving PDF data and documents

Save PDF data ( ) or documents ( ) attached to

received i-mode mail.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Select a file

A PDF data or document appears.

Viewing PDF data or documents→p.263

2u (FUNC)“Save”“YES”Select a

folder

• Documents can only be saved to a microSD

card.

• If there is no folder in the microSD card, a

folder is created automatically and there is no

need to select one.

■To return to the received mail detail

screen

t

Saving the tool data

You can save the tool data (phonebook, schedule or

bookmark) ( ) attached to received i-mode mail.

<Example: To save the schedule>

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Select a file

The information of schedule appears.

You can also save the data by selecting “Save

data” from the function menu.

2d (Save)

■Phonebook

d (Save)“Phone” or “UIM”

Adding information to the phonebook→p.70

■Bookmark

d (Select)Select the destination

For i-mode, “i-mode Browser” and “microSD”

can be selected. For the Full Browser, “Full

Browser” and “microSD” can be selected.

Saving other files

You can save other files ( ) attached to received

i-mode mail.

zOther files are automatically saved to the “Other”

folder on the microSD card. When the data is

saved, the file name is changed. →p.244

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Highlight the other file

u (FUNC)“Save data”“YES”

zYou cannot save the schedule on the microSD card.

zWhen you save the file which contains multiple data

on the FOMA terminal, only the first data is saved

(when you save the data on the microSD card, all the

data is saved).

168

Mail

Having the FOMA Terminal

Read Out Mail

zThe voice may be heard by others while reading

out, so move to an area where it will not disturb

other people.

zThe FOMA terminal reads out at the volume level

set in “Phone” in “Ring volume”. When set to

“Silent” or “Step”, messages are read out at the

“Level 2” volume.

zA mail is not read out when:

• “Read out received mail” under “Read out

setting” is set to “OFF”

• During a call or data communication (excluding

packet communication)

• In Manner mode and no equipment such as a flat

plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional)

is connected

• Playing music with the Music Player

Having the FOMA terminal read out

new mail

When the reception results screen appears with

receiving the mail or when the checking result screen

appears after performing “Check new messages”, the

FOMA terminal can read out the mail message.

zWhen “Select language” is set to English, a mail is

not read out.

<Example: When Check new messages is

performed>

1Press o (Read) while the checking

result screen is displayed

If the sender’s name and e-mail address are

stored in the phonebook, the message is read

out after the voice notification “○○さんからの

メール” (This is from ○○).

When reading out mails is completed, the FOMA

terminal emits the “pipip” tone and ends the

reading out screen.

■When you receive multiple mail at the

same time

The FOMA terminal reads out mails in reverse

chronological order of reception date.

When you press j during reading out, the

FOMA terminal emits the beep sound before

reading out the next mail. If there is no more

mail, the FOMA terminal stops the reading out.

Having the FOMA terminal read out

mail in the mail box

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)u (FUNC)“Read out message”

■To cancel reading out

d (Stop)

Press d (PLAY) again to start over reading out.

■To end reading out

o (Exit)

Reading out rules

The read out mail function generally follows the

following rules when reading out received mail.

■Symbols and pictographs

Symbols and pictographs are not read out, except for

certain symbols.

* The FOMA terminal may not correctly read out sentences

that include symbols and pictographs.

■Numbers

The FOMA terminal reads out numbers up to 16

digits long.

Example: 1234 → “Sen nihyaku sanju yon”

Messages written in English are spelled out in

alphabetic reading.

zWhile a message is being read out, an image appears

in the upper half of the screen. When the sent address

and image of the received mail are stored in the

phonebook, the stored image appears.

zWhile a message is being read out, press c, a (▲マ

ナー ) or s (▼メモ) to scroll the message. Pressing

any of other keys cancels reading out. However, when

you press 5 or 2 for 1 second or longer to turn

the display light or Shield view function ON or OFF, it

does not end reading out.

zIf you receive a call while a message is being read out,

reading out is canceled and the ringing screen appears.

zIf you receive a new mail or message while a message

is being read out, the setting in “Receiving setting” is

applied. When the specified alarm time is reached

while a message is being read out, the setting in

“Alarm setting” is applied.

zMail-linked i-αppli mail cannot be read out on the

result screen but on the detail screen.

zThe FOMA terminal cannot read out SMS report.

zThe FOMA terminal may not be able to read out mails

received from PCs.

169

Continued on next page

Mail

■Amount of money

If a currency symbol (e.g. “￥” (single-byte or double-

byte)) is placed at the beginning of a number up to 16

digits long, the FOMA terminal reads out the number

as amount of money.

If commas (,) are used as a delimiting character in an input

string, the FOMA will recognize the string as amount of

money only if the commas are used every 3 digits.

■Phone number

If numbers are delimited by hyphens “-” or parentheses

“()” as the phone number for the general phone, the

mobile phone or the free dial phone, the FOMA

terminal reads them out as phone numbers but not as

sequences of digits. The FOMA terminal will also read

numbers preceded by “Tel:” as phone numbers.

Example: Tel: 0120-102-... → Teru zeroichinizero

ichizeroni ...

■Time

Numbers separated by a colon “:” are read out as time.* If

the hour component is a 1- or 2-digit number and the

minute component is a 2-digit number, the number is

read out as time. If “AM” or “PM” is added before or after

the number, it is read out before the number.

* : The time entered in the format of “Hour” : “Minute” :

“Second” (e.g. 23:15:10) is not read out.

■Date

Numbers separated by a slash (/) or a period (.) in the

pattern for date are read out as date. If “M”, “T”, “S” or

“H” (upper case) is inserted before a date, the

corresponding (Japanese) era name (Meiji, Taisho,

Showa, Heisei) is read out.

zThe above formats for numbers, amount of money,

phone numbers, time and date are also used for

double-byte characters.

zWhen amount of money, phone numbers, time or date

are read out and the string read out is immediately

preceded or followed by any of the characters listed

below, the numbers will not be delimited correctly. If

you want to have the FOMA terminal read out amount

of money, phone numbers, time or date correctly, it is

recommended to use a space as the delimiting

character before and after the string.

“0 to 9”, “A to Z (upper case)”, “:”, “￥”, “/”, “.”, “-”

(double-byte or single-byte)

■Symbol

The FOMA terminal can read out the following

symbols when used with numbers.

■Others

zAlphabetic characters are read out in alphabet reading,

but may be read otherwise in certain combinations.

zDepending on the content of a sentence or

description (especially geographic names or proper

nouns), the FOMA terminal may not read out the

sentence or may read it out incorrectly.

zThe voice used to read out is different from natural

voice. The pronunciation or accent may be difficult

to understand in some cases.

zThe FOMA terminal separates sentences to read

out when there is punctuation marks (periods and

commas), line feeds and spaces, except when a

period (.) or comma (,) is preceded and/or followed

by numbers. When there is no delimiting

punctuation in the text, the sentences are

separated automatically.

Depending on the sentences, it may take time

before the FOMA terminal starts reading out. The

FOMA terminal may read out incorrectly when

there are kanji characters. To ensure that the

content of the mail is read out correctly, it is

“Hour” : “Minute” (“Hour” = 0 to 29: “Minute” = 00 to 59)

Example: 23:15 → “Nijusanji jugofun”

AM “Hour” : “Minute” or “Hour” : “Minute” AM

(“Hour” = 0 to 12: “Minute” = 00 to 59)

Example: AM 5:05 → “Gozen goji gofun”

“Year”/“Month”/“Day” or “Year”.“Month”.“Day”

(“Year” = 0 to 9999; “Month” = 1 to 12; “Day” = 1 to 31)

“H” “Year”/“Month”/“Day” or “H” “Year”.“Month”.“Day”

(“Year” = 0 to 99; “Month” = 1 to 12; “Day” = 1 to 31)

Example: H20.8.1 → “Heisei nijunen hachigatsu

tsuitachi”

Example: ￥12345

￥12,345

“Ichiman nisen sanbyaku

yonjuu goen”

xamp

2008/8/1

2008/8/01

2008.8.1

2008.8.01

“Nisenhachinen

hachigatsu tsuitachi”

(dollars)→doru

(percent)→paasento

￥

(yen)→en °(degrees)→do

℃(degrees) →do ￥ (yen)→en

(dollars)→doru ％ (percent)→paasento

(mm)→miri (kilograms)→kiro

(cm)→senchi (meters)→meetoru

(grams)→guramu (tons)→ton

(ares)→aaru (hectares)→hekutaaru

(liters)→rittoru (watts)→watto

(calories) → karorii (dollars)→doru

(cents)→sento (percent) →paasento

(millibars)→miribaaru (pages)→peeji

㎜ (millimeters) →

mirimeetoru

㎝ (centimeters) →

senchimeetoru

㎞ (kilometers)→

kiromeetoru

㎎ (milligrams)→

miriguramu

㎏ (kilograms) →

kiroguramu

㏄ (cc)→siisii

㎡ (square meters)→

heihoumeetoru

170

Mail

recommended to ask people you frequently

correspond to follow the following guidelines:

• Create message using katakana for nouns,

especially and proper nouns such as geographic

names and personal names.

• Create message using punctuation marks.

Displaying Mail in the Inbox

and Outbox

zThe FOMA terminal can store up to 500

received i-mode mail and SMS in total and up to

400 sent i-mode mail and SMS in total.

zYou can protect up to 500 received mails and 250

sent mails.

zThe number of the messages the FOMA terminal

can store or protect varies depending on the data

size. When data with large file size is stored, the

number decreases.

Reading i-mode mail messages

<Example: To read a received mail message>

1u“Inbox”Select a folderSelect a

mail

The Secret folder is displayed in the folder list

screen when the FOMA terminal is in Secret

mode or Secret data only mode.

Press v on the mail detail screen too view the

previous or next mail.

Changing the mail character size or

list display mode

●Changing the mail character size

zPress v on the mail detail screen for 1 second or

longer to change the character size.

●Changing the mail list screen display

mode (1line+body/2 lines/1 line)

zYou can switch among “1line + body”, “2 lines” and

“1 line” using the “Mail list disp.” setting in “Mail

Setting” in the Mail menu.

●Changing the mail list screen display

mode (Name/Address/Subject)

zPress q on the mail detail screen for 1 second or

longer to switch the “Subject” “Name” “Address”.

<Example: “1 line+body”>

Received mail detail

Mail menu

Received mail list

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２９ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

１／３

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

２００８／８／１７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｓ

♪

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

ｍｅｌｏｄｙ．ｍｉｄ

Ｒｅｃｖ．ｍａｉｌ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

２ＫＢｙｔｅｓ

Inbox folder list

１／６

Function menu



p.175 Function menu



p.176

Function menu



p.173

zOn the received mail detail screen, you can have the

FOMA terminal read out the mail message.→p.168

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot display the

Outbox folder list screen.

zWhen you change the display mode with the above

keypad operation, the settings of “Mail” of “Character

size” in “Font” and “Font size” also changes.

１／３

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｓ

♪

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

Ｈｉ

Ｔｉｃｋｅｔ

７

／３０

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７

／２９

ドコモ四郎

Ｍａｐ

７

／２７

ドコモ四郎

Ｔｈｅｏｔｈｅｒｄａｙｗｅｄｉｓ

７

／２６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２９

ドコモ四郎

７／２６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７／２６ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ．△△

７／２６

ドコモ四郎

７／２６ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ．△△

７／２６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２５

ドコモ四郎

７／２５

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

１／２

1 line2 lines1line+body

７／２９

ドコモ四郎

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｉｎｂｏｘ１／３

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

ＩｎｂｏｘＩｎｂｏｘ

７／２９

Ｍａｐ

７／２７

Ｔｈｅｏｔｈｅｒｄａ

７／２６Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

７：０６Ｔｈａｎｋｓ

♪

Ｉｎｂｏｘ１／３

６：４５Ｈｉ

７／３０Ｔｉｃｋｅｔ

７／２９

ドコモ四郎

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｉｎｂｏｘ１／３

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７：０６ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．△△△．ｎｅ

６：４５ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ー△△ーｔａｒｏ

７／３０ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．△△△．ｔａｒｏ

７／２７０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

７／２９ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ー△△ー．ｎ

Ｉｎｂｏｘ

１／3

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

７／２６ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．△△△．ｔａｒｏ

Name Address

Subject

171

Continued on next page

Mail

●Display light function

zWhen you open the FOMA terminal, press a key or

send or receive an i-mode mail or SMS, the FOMA

terminal’s display light is turned on for about 15

seconds (The time for which the backlight stays on

varies depending on “Mail/Msg. ring time” setting).

However, when an i-mode mail or SMS is

displayed, the time for which the backlight stays on

varies depending on the length of the message.

zThe backlight does not turn on if “Lighting” is set to

“OFF” in “Backlight”.

Guide to the mail folder list screens

: Contains unread mail

: Folder lock set

: Automatic sorting settings (p.174) set

Guide to the mail list screens

①Mail status

①-1 Received mail

: Protected

①-2 Sent mail

: Protected

: Failed to send some mails

: Failed to send

②Message sent/received time and date

②-1 The time is displayed for mail sent/received

today

②-2 The date is displayed for mail sent/received

yesterday or earlier

③Sender/receiver, subject or information

When there is no subject, “No title” is displayed.

④Mail type, attached file information

zYou can also change the display mode by selecting

“List setting” from the function menu of the mail list

screen, then selecting “Subject”, “Name”, or

“Address”.

zThe part of Subject/Name/Address may not be

displayed properly.

Icon Description

Normal folder

Mail-linked i-αppli folder

Secret folder

Inbox folder list Outbox folder list

Icon Description

Unread mail

Read mail

Read and protected mail

Forwarded mail

Replied-to mail

Icon Description

Mail to one recipient

Mail to multiple recipients

(broadcast mail)

Icon Description

SMS in the FOMA terminal

SMS in the FOMA card

７／２９

ドコモ四郎

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７／２６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｉｎｂｏｘ

１／３

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

Ｏｕｔｂｏｘ

１／２

Ｔｈａｎｋｓｆｏｒｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ．Ｉ

ｈａｄａｌｏｔｏｆｆｕｎ．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

７：０６ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２７

ドコモ四郎

７／２６

ドコモ四郎

６：４５

ドコモ四郎

７／３０ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２９

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Received mail list Sent mail list

172

Mail

* : Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode

: Attached file is deleted (for ToruCa or Flash

movie, also displayed when the attached

file is deleted by scanning function)

All the files of multiple files are deleted

: A part of the file of multiple files is deleted

Guide to the mail detail screens

①Mail status

Refer to ① of “Guide to the mail list” screen (p.171)

②Mail sent/received time and date

③Recipient type (Received mail)

④Mail address information of the 2in1 setting

* : Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode

⑤Sender (Received mail)

: Cannot reply-to

⑥Icon stored in the phonebook

When the mail address or phone number is stored

in the phonebook, the icon stored in the phonebook

is displayed.

SMS with SMS report received

Area Mail

*Mail to Address B of 2in1

Time-adjusted mail

Mail with an attached or pasted

melody

Mail with attached or inserted

images

Mail with an attached i-motion

Mail with attached ToruCa or ToruCa

(detail)

PDF-attached mail

Mail with attached Tool data

(phonebook, schedule or bookmark)

Document-attached mail

Mail with attached Other files

An i-αppli can be launched from the

message body

An i-αppli cannot be launched from

the message body (the mail is

moved to the Secret folder)

Mails sent/received by a mail-linked

i-αppli

Mail with undownloaded attached file

→p.166

Mail with incomplete attached file

→p.166

Mail with undownloadable attached

file

Mail with multiple attached files or

mixture of attached files and pasted

files

Mail with multiple pasted data (also

displayed when the data is pasted

along with i-αppli To)

Mail with the FOMA card security

function (you use the FOMA card

different from the one used when the

mail is sent/received)

Icon Description N

zWhen you view i-mode mail with an attached image in

the received mail detail screen, the screen switches

between image display and file name display each

time you move the frame to the image and press

d (Select). On the sent mail detail screen, selecting

file name display displays images. Press t or y

to display file names.

zWhen 2in1 is in A mode or B mode, a mail arrived at

the unused address is not displayed.

Icon Description

The recipient type addressed by

the sender→p.157

Icon Description

*Mail to Address B of 2in1

Icon Description

The name or e-mail address of

the sender

２００８／８／１７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

ドコモ四郎

Ｒｅ：Ｔｈａｎｋｓ

♪

Ｓｅｎｔｍａｉｌ

０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

２００８／８／１７：０６

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

Ｔｈａｎｋｓ

♪

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

Ｒｅｃｖ．ｍａｉｌ

ドコモ四郎

ｍｅｌｏｄｙ．ｍｉｄ

Ｔｈａｎｋｙｏｕｆｏｒｌａｓｔｎｉｇｈｔ

．

２ＫＢｙｔｅｓ

Ｈｏｐｅｔｏｓｅｅｙｏｕｓｏｏｎ．

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

２／１０６／１５

Received mail detail Sent mail detail

173

Continued on next page

Mail

⑦Recipient and recipient type (Sent mail)

: Failed to send

⑧Recipient and recipient type of broadcast mail

(Received mail)

Up to 4 recipients can be displayed.

: Cannot reply-to

⑨Subject

If there is no subject, “No title” is displayed.

Displays “ ” at the beginning for received SMS

(displays the “ ” when the SMS is on the FOMA

card)

When an SMS report has been received, “ ” is

also displayed.

Displays “Area Mail” when an Area Mail has been

received

⑩Message body

⑪Displayed at the end of the message body

⑫Attached file information

The file name and file size are also displayed.

* Other than the above icons, the same icons as the list

screen may appear in some cases. Refer to “④Mail

type, attached file information” in p.171.

Mail folder list screen

(pp.170, 171)

Add folder……Adds a folder and set the Auto-sort for the

new folder. Also, set whether to add the same folder to the

Inbox/Outbox.

You can add up to 22 folders.

“Setting Auto-sort”→p.174

Auto-sort→p.174

Edit folder name……Edits the folder name of the added

folder. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-

byte characters.

Folder lock……Sets/Releases the folder lock.→p.112

Sort folder……Selects the position to move to and

rearranges the folder.

No. of messages……Displays the number of messages,

unread messages and protected messages in all the

folders.

Open folder……Displays list of the mails in a folder.

Add shortcut*→p.94

iC trans. all→p.260

Send all Ir data→p.258

CopyAll to microSD →p.248

Delete folder……Deletes a folder.

Delete read*……Deletes all the read mails.

Delete all……Deletes all mails.

* : This function is available only for the Inbox folder list

screen.

Icon Description

The name, e-mail address of

the recipient and the recipient

type→p.157

Icon Description

The names, e-mail addresses

of the recipients except yourself

and the recipient type for

broadcast mail→p.157

Icon Description

Invalid inserted image

zIn the following cases, the e-mail address is displayed

instead of “Name”, even when the phone number or e-

mail address is stored in the phonebook:

• When “Restrict dialing” is set and the phone number

is not designated in the “Restrict dialing” setting

• When the FOMA terminal is in Secret data only

mode and the phone number or e-mail address is

not stored as secret data

• When the FOMA terminal is not in Secret or Secret

data only mode and the phone number or e-mail

address is stored as secret data

• When 2in1 is set to A mode and the phonebook is

set to B mode, or the mode is set to B mode and the

phonebook is set to A mode.

zYou cannot delete, sort or rename the folders (Inbox

and Outbox) that are already installed on the FOMA

terminal at the time of purchase. You cannot use the

Auto-sort function with these folders either.

zWhen you download a mail-linked i-αppli, an i-αppli

mail folder is automatically created (up to 5).

zYou cannot run Sort folder when only one folder is

added.

<No. of messages>

zYou cannot check the number of the following i-mode

mail or SMS messages.

• Messages in the Secret folder

• Messages set not to be displayed in the 2in1 setting

zYou cannot check the MessageR/F.

<iC trans. all> <Send all Ir data> <CopyAll to

microSD>

zThe MessageR/F are not included.

174

Mail

●Setting Auto-sort

You can sort mail messages into the specified folders

by the set criteria such as mail address or subject.

1Mail folder list screen (pp.170, 171)

Highlight the destination folder

u (FUNC)“Auto-sort”Set any item

from the following

When the sorting is already set, the setting is

displayed. Press u (FUNC) again.

■When Original lock is set to the

Phonebook or mail members

When checking auto-sort-set folder conditions,

the group name appears as “Group” even after

changed, and the mail member name appears

as “Mail member” even after changed.

Address sort……Sets the e-mail address.

Look-up address……Sets the e-mail address

by browsing the phonebook or address list.

Look-up group……Sets the group of the

phonebook.

Look-up member……Sets the mail member.

Enter address……Sets a mail addresses by

entering it.

Subject sort……Sets the subject.

Reply impossible (Send impossible)……Sets an

e-mail address to which you cannot reply or you

could not send a mail as an Auto-sort criteria.

Sort all……This can only be set for mail-linked

i-αppli folders. Sorts all mails into a mail-linked

i-αppli folder.

Edit addr/subj……Edits a previously specified

e-mail address or mail subject.

List setting……Selects a mail-list format from

“Name/Address”.

Release……Releases the Auto-sort criteria by

selecting “Release this/Release selected/Release

all”. “About multiple-choice” →p.38

zYou cannot delete an i-αppli mail folder if there is a

corresponding mail-linked i-αppli. You can delete an i-

αppli mail folder if there is no corresponding software,

but the folder created in the Inbox folder screen or

Outbox folder screen is also deleted.

zIf you delete a folder that is specified in the “Auto-sort”

settings, the automatic sorting setting for that folder is

also canceled.

zThe following i-mode mail or SMS messages will not

be deleted.

• Protected messages

• Messages in the Secret folder

zFor Delete all, hidden mail messages are also deleted

by 2in1 setting.

zThe MessageR/F are not deleted.

zIf received or sent mail meets multiple sort criteria, the

priority of the Auto-sort settings is assigned as follows.

①Sort all ②Subject sort

③Reply/Send impossible

④Mail address/Phone number

⑤Mail member ⑥Phonebook group

zMail received or sent before the Auto-sort settings are

not sorted.

zThe mails sent as broadcast message are searched

for the sorting criteria in the order of address entered.

zWhen using 2in1 and setting Auto-sort, select the

criteria from “Look-up address (Phonebook,/Sent

address/Received address list)”, “Look-up member”,

“Direct input”, “Subject sort”, “Reply impossible”, “Sort

all”, or “Edit addr/subj”.

zThe Area Mail is not included for “Address sort”,

“Subject sort” and “Reply impossible”.

zYou can set a total of 700 addresses for automatic

sorting (more than one setting is available for 1 folder).

zWhen you set address sort to the mail address stored

as secret data and receive mail from the address, the

mail is stored in the “Inbox” folder when the FOMA

terminal is not in Secret or Secret data only mode and

stored in the sorting destination folder when the

FOMA terminal is in Secret or Secret data only mode.

zEnsure that the e-mail address domain (the part that

follows the @ symbol) is entered correctly. However, if

the address format is “[phone number]@docomo.ne.

jp”, simply enter the phone number.

zIf the subject meets the sort criteria for multiple

folders, the mail is sorted into the folder closest to the

Inbox or Outbox folder.

zYou cannot use this function to sort i-mode mail that

has no subject entered and is displayed as “No title”

even if you set “No title” as a sort criteria.

zYou cannot use this option to sort SMS.

zYou cannot use this option to sort SMS reports.

z“Reply impossible” can only be set for 1 folder of

Inbox.

z“Send impossible” can only be set for 1 folder of Inbox.

175

Continued on next page

Mail

Mail list screen (pp.170, 171)

Reply*1→p.165

Edit*2……Edits the recipient, subject or message body of

the sent mail. Press o (Send) to send the mail.

Move……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the mail to the other folder you select.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Search mail……Searches for mail using a specified

criteria.

Search sender*1/Search receiver*2……Searches

for mail by specifying the mail address from the

phonebook mail address list or entering the mail

address manually.

Search subject……Enters a subject to search.

Display all……Returns the search and sort displays or

displays that use filter functions to their original display

settings (all Chronological↑).

Sort……Sorts the mail in a selected criteria.

Filter……Displays only the mails which meet the selected

criteria.

Color coding……Sets the color coding for the mail from

“Default (black)/Red/Blue”. You can also change the color

by pressing w (1 second or longer) in the mail list

screen.

List setting……Selects a mail-list format from “Subject/

Name/Address”.

Read all*1……Marks all the unread mail in the folder as

read.

Protect*1……Selects the protecting method from “Protect

this/Protect selected/Protect all”*3.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Unprotect*1……Selects the unprotecting method from

“Unprotect this/Unprotect selected/Unprotect all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Protect ON/OFF*2……Protects or unprotects mail.

Unprotect all*2……Unprotects all protected mail.

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data→p.258

Copy to microSD→p.248

UIM operation……“Moving or copying SMS from the mail

screen”→p.255

Mail info*1……Displays the information such as sender of

the mail.

No. of messages……Displays the total number of mails

in the folder.

Store in Center→p.176

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

• For received mails, you can delete only read mails or

SMS reports at once by selecting “Delete read/Delete

all SMS-R”.

Keep in secret ⇔Put out*4……Select the setting from

“Keep this/keep selected/keep all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

“Preventing Others from Viewing Data”→p.104

*1: Available only with the received mail list screen.

*2: Available only with the sent mail list screen.

*3: Only available in the Secret folder.

*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode. Unread

mail or Area Mail cannot be saved to the Secret folder.

Unread mail list screen (p.163)

Reply→p.165

List setting……Selects a mail-list format from “Subject/

Name/Address”.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects mail.

Delete this……Deletes one mail.

zYou cannot use this option to sort SMS reports or

SMS received directly to the FOMA card (UIM).

z“Sort all” can only be set for 1 i-αppli mail folder for

received and sent i-αppli mail respectively.

zYou can also search the results of a search.

zYou cannot use this function to search i-mode mail

that has no subject entered and is displayed as “No

title” even if you set “No title” as a criteria for searching

by subject.

zThe sort and filter function can be used together. For

example, to view only the unread mail in the received

mail list screen in chronological order, select

“Chronological↓” in the sort menu and then “Unread”

in the Filter menu.

zWhen you exit from the mail list screen, the sort

display and filter function are canceled.

zIf you view mail with the filter function and then select

“Read all”, only the currently displayed mail is marked

as read.

176

Mail

●Storing mails at the Data Security

Center

You can store i-mode mails and SMS stored in the

FOMA terminal at the Data Security Center.

zData Security Service is a pay service you need to

apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service

and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the

notification screen appears.

1Mail list screen (pp.161, 170)

u (FUNC)“Store in Center”Use c

to select □ (checkbox)o (Finish)

You can select up to 10 mails.

2Enter your security code“YES”

The FOMA terminal connects to the Data

Security Center to start saving the mails.

3o (Finish)

■To restore the mail

The mail data stored at the Data Security Center can be

stored on the FOMA terminal from the site of the Data

Security Center. For details on how to use, refer to

“Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

Mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)

Reply*1*2 →p.165

Reply with quote*1*2 →p.165

Forward*1*2→p.165

Edit*3……Edits the recipient, subject or message body of

the sent mail. Press o (Send) to send the mail.

Resend*3……Resends the message.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects mail.

Move……Selects the destination folder to move a mail

message to the folder.

Copy……Copies the message body, subject or e-mail

address. The copied text can be pasted into the Character

entry screens, etc.→p.308

Save address・Add to phonebook→p.166

Save data……“Checking and Saving the File Attached to

i-mode Mail”→p.166

Save insert image……Selects the image inserted to the

Deco-mail® and saves it on the My picture folder. After

saving the image, you can specify whether to set it as the

standby screen.

Add shortcut →p.94

Save template……Saves an i-mode mail as a template.

→p.160

Refer dictionary……Starts the dictionary.→p.296

Property……Selects an image to display the file name

and size of an image inserted into the message in

Deco-mail®.

Read out message*1→p.168

Disp. SMS report*3……Displays the SMS report for an

SMS.

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data→p.258

Copy to microSD→p.248

UIM operation……“Moving or copying SMS from the mail

screen”→p.255

Message scroll (default: 1 line)……Selects the number

of scrolling lines in a screen from “1 line/3 lines/5 lines”.

Font size (default: Standard)……Selects the font size

from “Small/Standard/Large/X-large”.→p.93

Delete att. file・Del all att. files……Deletes one or all

attached file(s).

Delete……Deletes a mail.

Keep in secret⇔Put out*4……“Preventing Others from

Viewing Data”→p.104

*1: Available only with the received mail detail screen.

*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*3: Available only with the sent mail detail screen.

*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.

zA mail that is not displayed by the setting of 2in1 is not

targeted for setting of “Protect all” nor “Unprotect all”

even if either of them is selected.

zA mail that is not displayed by the setting of 2in1 is not

targeted for setting of “Keep all” nor “Put out all” even

if either of them is selected.

zYou cannot store SMS stored in the FOMA card at the

Data Security Center.

zWhen saving mails with attached files, the attached

files are deleted.

zWhen saving received mails in which images

prohibited to be output from the FOMA terminal are

pasted into, these images are deleted.

zThe setting of “Color coding” is not saved.

zYou cannot delete the data pasted into the message

body or undownloadable file ( ).

177

Mail

Using Mail Records

When you send or receive mail, the mail addresses

are recorded in the Sent address list or Received

address list. You can send mail by selecting an

address from these address lists.

zUp to 30 i-mode mail address or SMS phone

number entries can be stored in the respective

Sent address and Received address lists. However,

up to 60 received addresses can be stored if you

use 2in1.

zWhen the Mail box lock is set to Inbox or Outbox,

the mail address is not recorded in the address list.

Checking an address list

<Example: To open the received address screen>

1On the standby screenh (1 second

or longer)

The “Received address

screen (list)” appears.

■To display the sent

address screen (list)

j (1 second or longer)

■Displayed icon on the

Address screen (list)

/ : i-mode mail

transmission successful/

failed

/ : SMS transmission

successful/failed

2Select a sender

The “Received address

screen (detail)” appears.

■Displayed icon on the

Address screen (detail)

/ : i-mode mail

transmission successful/

failed

/ : SMS

transmission successful/

failed

3Check the details

Address screen (list/detail)

(p.177)

Add to phonebook……Adds the mail address to the

phonebook.→p.166

Look-up phonebook……Displays the detail screen of

the phonebook in which the mail address is stored.

Add shortcut→p.94

Compose message*……Composes an i-mode mail with

the mail address set as the recipient.

Dialing……Uses the Phone To/AV Phone To function to

make a voice/videophone call for the phone number in the

phonebook entry that contains the e-mail address.

→p.147

Received calls*2……Switches to the Received calls

record screen.→p.53

Redial*3……Switches to the Redial screen.→p.53

Big font⇔Standard font*4……Switches the font size

between “Big font/Standard font”.→p.93

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

*1: When an SMS is selected, this option changes to

“Compose SMS”, which composes an SMS with the

phone number pasted in as the recipient.

“Composing and Sending SMS” →p.182

*2: This function is available only for the received address

screens (list/detail).

*3: This function is available only for the sent address

screens (list/detail). If the Sent address screen appears

from Dialed calls, “Dialed calls” appears.

*4: Only available on the Address screen (list).

zTurning the FOMA terminal off or deleting sent or

received mail messages does not delete the entries in

the address lists. You should delete the record entries

themselves to prevent others from viewing them.

Received address (list)

７／２６１７：４１

０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

７／２５２１：５８

ＨａｎａｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／３０１１：３５

ＡｋｉｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

７／２９１１：５３

ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２７２３：４３

ＴａｒｏＤｏｃｏｍｏ

７／２５８：５０

ドコモ四郎

Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄａｄｄｒｅｓｓ１／２

Function menu



p.177

Received address (detail)

７／３０（Ｗｅｄ）11：３５

ＡｋｉｋｏＫｅｉｔａｉ

ｋｅｉｔａｉ．ａｋｉｋｏ．△△＠ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｎ

ｅ．ｊｐ

Function menu



p.177

zWhen 2in1 is set to A mode or B mode, up to 30

message histories arrived at or sent from the used

address are displayed. However, if set to B mode, the

Sent address list screen cannot be displayed.

zWhen 2in1 mode is set to Dual mode, “ ” icon

appears in Number B/Address B received records.

178

Mail

Setting up the FOMA Terminal

Mail Functions

1u“Mail settings”

The “Mail Setting” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Message scroll (default: 1 line)……Selects the

number of lines that are scrolled when you press c

on the mail detail screen, from “1 line/3 lines/5 lines”.

Font size (default: Standard)……Selects the font

size displayed on the mail detail screen from “Small/

Standard/Large/X-large”.→p.93

Mail list disp. (default: 1line+body)……Sets the

number of lines and item to be displayed on the mail

list screen. Select the lines to display from “2 lines/1

line/1 line+body” and the format from “Subject/

Name/Address”.

Message display……Sets the position from where

to start displaying the message body.

From header (default)……Displays the

message from the headers onwards (date and

time received/sent).

From message……Displays the message

from the message body onwards.

Start attachment (auto) (default: ON)……Sets

whether to automatically play the attached or pasted

melody when opening an i-mode mail.

Header/Signature→p.179

Mail box lock→p.112

Receiving setting……Sets whether to give display

priority to the receiving and received result screen if

a mail, MessageR/F is received while you are using

the FOMA terminal.

Alarm preferred (default)……Displays the

receiving and received result screen.

Operation preferred……Gives priority to the

screen being used rather than displaying the

receiving and received result screen.

Receive option setting (default: OFF)……Sets

whether to receive mails selectively (ON) or

automatically(OFF).

Prefer attachment (default: all selected)……Selects

the attached file type to receive at the time you

receive the mail from “Image/i-motion/Melody/PDF/

ToruCa/Tool data (Phonebook, Schedule,

Bookmark)/Other (including documents)”. “About

multiple-choice” →p.38

Read out setting

Select voice (default: Female 1)……Sets the

type of voice used for reading out mail.

Read out received mail (default: ON)……Sets

whether to allow the mail to be read out or not

when it is received.

SMS settings

SMS report request (detail: OFF)……Sets

whether to request an SMS report after

sending an SMS.

SMS validity period (default: 3 days)……

Selects the storage period of the sent SMS

kept at the SMS center from “None/1 day/2

days/3 days”. When set to “None”, SMS

messages are not stored at the SMS center.

SMS input character (default: Japanese

(70char.))……Sets the SMS body character

input method. When set to Japanese, you can

enter up to 70 characters regardless of double-

byte or single-byte. When set to English, you

can enter up to 160 single-byte alphanumeric

characters.

Area Mail setting→p.182

Check settings……Allows you to check the settings

specified in “Mail Setting”.

Reset……Resets the settings specified in “Mail

Setting” to the default settings.

Mail Setting

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot select “Mail

Setting”.

zWhen set to “X-large”, the “Mail list disp.” setting is

automatically set to “2 lines”. When “Mail list disp.” is

set to “1 line” or “1 line+body” while Font size is set to

“X-large”, automatically switch it setting to “Large”.

zWhen you are receiving/sending a voice call, during a

voice call or using functions such as an i-αppli or the

camera, the receiving and received result screen may

not appear when you receive mail or Message R/F

even when set to “Alarm preferred”.

zWhen 2in1 is in A mode and a mail arrives only at the

mail address of B mode, the receiving screen

appears, but the received result screen does not

appear even when set to “Alarm preferred”.

179

Mail

Editing Headers, Signatures and

Quotation Marks

By storing your header or signature, you can

automatically paste it into an i-mode message. You

can also edit the quotation marks when you reply to

received mail by quoting the original message.

1Mail Setting screen (p.178)“Header/

Signature”

2“Edit header” or “Edit signature”

d (Edit)

■To edit the quotation marks

“Edit Quotation marks”

3Enter the header or signature

o (Finish)

You can enter up to 5,000 double-byte or 10,000

single-byte characters for the header and

signature.

You can decorate the header or signature.

→p.158

■To enter the quotation marks

Enter the quotation marks

You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-

byte characters.

■When you add the header or signature

automatically

“Insert setting”Select the checkbox of

“Header” and/or “Signature”o (Finish)

Deselect the checkbox when you do not add it

automatically.

Specifying which items are checked

for in Center inquiries

You can specify which items are checked for “Check

new messages” whether to check for “Mail” (i-mode

mail), “MessageR” and/or “MessageF”.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“Set check new messages”

2Use c to select □ (checkbox)

o (Finish)

A deselected checkbox (□) denotes that the

FOMA terminal will not check for that item.

When You Receive a Message

When the FOMA terminal is in a service area,

MessageR/F are automatically sent to the FOMA

terminal from the i-mode Center.→p.162

zYou can store up to 100 MessageR/F respectively

on the FOMA terminal (the number of messages

you can actually store may be reduced depending

on the file size).

zPerform “Check new messages” when you receive

the messages kept in i-mode center.→p.164

zThis option applies to i-mode mail only. SMS,

MessageR/F are received automatically regardless of

this setting.

zTo check the contents of the file, you have to download

the file manually afterwards.→p.166

zWhen “Other” is deselected, documents are not

received.

zEven if you select the “Insert setting” checkbox, the

header or signature is not pasted into i-mode mail

composed using Template. Insertion is also

unavailable when sending i-αppli mail with mail-linked

i-αppli.

zIf the storage capacity for messages is full when you

receive a message, read messages are deleted from

the oldest one (unread or protected messages are not

deleted).

zWhen the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more

messages (because it is full with unread and protected

messages), (red)/ (red) appears ( (red),

(R: red), (F: red) may appear to display the 2

conditions simultaneously). Read the unread

messages or unprotect the unnecessary messages.

zWhen the i-mode center keeps Messages, /

appears. Perform “Check new messages” to receive

messages. When the messages kept at the i-mode

center are full, (red)/ (red) appears.

zReceived MessageR/F are not automatically displayed

when displaying other than the standby screen, an

i-αppli is running, Public mode (Driving mode) is set,

Dial lock is set, or when Original lock is set to “i-mode”

or “Mail disp.”

180

Mail

How to view the MessageR/F screens

①Message status

: Protected

②Message received time and date

②-1 The time is displayed for Message received

today

②-2 The date is displayed for Message received

yesterday or earlier

③Attached file information

: One or more data is invalid

: Invalid data

: Deleted by the scanning function

: Invalid data

④Subject

Viewing Messages in the

Message Box

zWhen a MessageR/F from the i-mode Center

arrives on the FOMA terminal, the “ ” or “ ” icon

appears at the top of the screen.

1u“Inbox”“MessageR” or

“MessageF”

The “Message list” screen

appears.

2Select a message

The “Message detail”

screen appears.

To display the next or

previous message in the

message detail screen,

press v.

In the message detail

screen, press t to return

to the message list screen.

Message list screen (p.180)

Display all……The original display (all Chronological↑)

is reverted from a sorted or filtered display.

Sort……Sorts the messages in a selected criteria.

Filter……Displays only the messages which meet the

selected criteria.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects MessageR/F.

Unprotect all……Unprotects all the protected

MessageR/F.

No. of messages……Displays the number of stored

MessageR/F, unread messages and protected messages.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete read/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

• When selecting “Delete read”, you can delete only the

read messages at once.

Icon Description

Unread Message

Read Message

Read and protected Message

Icon Description

Message with an attached or

pasted melody

Message with an attached image

Message with an attached ToruCa

Message with multiple attached or

pasted data

Icon Description

Pasted melody

グルメ情報

２００８／８／１７：０６

渋谷のフランス料理店「○

○○○○」では、今週１週

間は１周年記念として朝食

を毎日８時からご提供。

コーヒーおかわり自由。

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ

１／１２

List (2-line display) Detail

７：０６

グルメ情報

７／２２

峠の天気

７／１８

交通情報

７／３０

ホテル情報

７／２７

天気予報

ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ

１／３

７／１１

映画館案内

Message list

７：０６

グルメ情報

７／２２

峠の天気

７／１８

交通情報

７／３０

ホテル情報

７／２７

天気予報

ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ

１／３

７／１１

映画館案内

Function menu



p.180

Message detail

２００８／８／１７：０６

グルメ情報

渋谷のフランス料理店「○

○○○○」では、今週１週

間は１周年記念として朝食

を毎日８時からご提供。

コーヒーおかわり自由。

ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ

−−−−

ＥＮＤ

−−−−

１／１２

Function menu



p.181

181

Continued on next page

Mail

Message detail screen (p.180)

Add to phonebook……Adds the phone number and

e-mail address displayed on MessageR/F to the

phonebook.→p.70

Save melody……Saves a melody attached to

MessageR/F.

Save image……Saves an image attached to or inserted

in MessageR/F.

Save ToruCa……Saves a ToruCa attached to

MessageR/F.

Protect ON/OFF……Protects or unprotects MessageR/F.

Delete……Deletes the MessageR/F.

What is Early Warning “Area

Mail”?

A service that you can receive the urgent earthquake

news flash, etc. delivered by the Meteorological

Agency.

zArea Mail is available without subscribing to

i-mode.

zTo receive Area Mail, the receiving setting is

required.→p.182

In the following situations, area mails are not

received regardless of this setting.

• During international roaming

• Omakase Lock is set

• When Self mode is set

zArea Mails may not be received when:

• During a videophone call

• Data communication in progress

When You Receive Early

Warning “Area Mail”

When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, the

Area Mail is automatically received.

zWhen you receive Area Mail, the “ ” icon

appears at the top of the screen.

zReceived Area Mail is stored in Inbox.

zYou can store up to 100 Area Mails on the FOMA

terminal.

zThe Area Mail ring tone sounds in the pattern and

color set in “Mail receiving” under “Illumination set”.

→p.92

●When you receive the Area Mail for the

earthquake early warning

When you receive the Area Mail, you are notified on

the description screen with beep and vibration.

The screen returns to the previous screen, when you

press any of d, t and y .

zThe beep tone volume is fixed to “Level 6” and

cannot be adjusted. However, you can set the ring

time for beep or the beep ON/OFF with setting for

“Beep setting” in the “Area Mail setting”.

The ring tone for the Area Mail sounds when the

beep sound setting is set to “OFF”.

zWhen Manner mode is set, the beep is determined

by “Manner mode set”.

zVibrator pattern links to the beep while in beep

sounding, and follows the “Mail” setting under

“Vibrator” while in incoming mail sounding. If an

earthquake early warning is received, the vibrator

always works regardless of the manner mode setting.

●When you receive the Area Mail other

than the earthquake early warning

When you receive the Area Mail, you are notified on

the “Receive Area Mail” or the “Description Screen”,

then notifies them with a beep for the Area Mail (the

screen is specified by the provider).

The “Receive Area Mail” screen returns to the previous

screen, if no operation is performed or you press any

key. The description screen returns to the previous

screen, when you press any key d, t and y .

zThe sort display and filter function can be used

together. For example, if you want to display the

unread messages in chronological order, select

“Chronological ↓” in the sort menu, then select

“Unread” in the filter menu.

zWhen you exit from the MessageR/F list screen, the

sort and filter are canceled.

zSome saved melodies may not play correctly.

zThe vibration pattern links to the beep tone/ring tone

regardless of the “Vibrator” setting.

zIf the storage capacity for Area Mails is full when you

receive an Area Mail, Area Mails are deleted from the

older read mails first and then the older unread ones

in order.

182

Mail

Setting Early Warning “Area

Mail”

Make the settings for receiving Area Mail.

1Mail Setting screen (p.178)“Area Mail

setting”

“Area Mail setting” screen

appears.

2Select any item:

Receive setting (default: No)……Sets whether to

receive the Area Mail.

• The confirmation message asking whether to use

Area Mail appears before setting, read the given

notes carefully and select “YES”/“NO”.

Beep setting

Beep setting (default: ON)……Turns the beep

ON/OFF.

Beep time (default: 10 seconds)……Sets the

beep time between 01 and 30 seconds.

Receive entry……Registers “Area Mail name” (any

name) and “Message ID” (provided by the service

provider) of information you want to receive except

early warning. Select “<Not recorded>” at the

“Receive entry” screen, and enter “Area Mail name”

and “Message ID” after you enter your security code.

The urgent news flash is sent regardless of the

settings of Receive entry.

Composing and Sending SMS

zYour SMS address is your “subscriber mobile

phone number”.

zThis service allows you to exchange text messages

with subscribers to overseas carriers other than

DOCOMO. For information on the supported

country and the supported overseas carriers, refer

to the DOCOMO website.

1u“Compose SMS”

The “New SMS” screen

appears.

2“ <No address>”Enter an

address

Select the mail address input

method to enter the address.

Sets the e-mail address by

browsing the phonebook,

received address list or

entering text directly→p.156

■If the recipient is using

an overseas carrier other than DOCOMO

Enter + (0 (1 second or longer)), the

country code, the other party’s mobile phone

number

If the mobile phone number begins with zero (0),

omit the zero.

You can also send SMS by entering “010”, the

country code, the other party’s mobile phone

number in this order. (To reply to received SMS

from overseas, enter “010”.)

3“”Enter the message body

The numbers and types of characters that can

be entered are as specified in the “SMS input

character” settings. When set to “Japanese”, you

can enter up to 70 characters regardless of

double-byte or single-byte. When set to

“English”, you can enter up to 160 single-byte

alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Spaces are also counted in the same way as

characters.

4o (Send)

An animation is displayed while the SMS is

being sent.

Editing sent and unsent SMS→pp.175, 176

zThe volume of the ring tone is set to the same volume

set at “Mail” of “Ring volume”.

zThe description screen or “Receive Area Mail” screen

may not appear when you receive the Area Mail

during using functions such as an i-αppli or the

camera. If an earthquake early warning is received,

the vibrator always works regardless of the manner

mode setting.

Area Mail setting

New SMS

Function menu



p.183

183

Mail

New SMS screen (p.182)

Send……Sends an SMS.

Preview……Allows you to check the SMS recipient and

message before sending it.

Save→p.161

SMS report req.* (detail: OFF)……Sets whether to

request an SMS report after sending an SMS.

SMS valid. per. *(default: 3 days)……Selects the storage

period of the sent SMS kept at the SMS center from

“None/1 day/2 days/3 days”. When set to “None”, the SMS

is resent and deleted when set time elapses.

SMS input char.*……Sets the SMS body character input

method.

Japanese (default)……You can enter up to 70

characters regardless of double-byte or single-byte.

English……You can enter up to 160 single-byte

alphanumeric characters.

Erase message……Only the message body is deleted.

Delete……Deletes the SMS being edited.

* : This function menu is only valid for the current SMS. Set in

the “Mail Setting” (p.178) if you want to keep the setting to

all SMS.

●SMS reports <SMS report req.>

SMS reports are the mail to notify you that the other

party has received SMS. You can check SMS reports

in the Inbox or in the “Disp. SMS report” in the function

menu of the sent SMS detail screen. SMS reports are

indicated by “SMS report” in the subject line.

When You Receive an SMS

When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, SMS is

automatically sent to the FOMA terminal from the

SMS Center.

zThe operations when SMS is received is same as

the operations when i-mode mail is received. Also,

the storage capacity and the operation when the

storage capacity for received mails becomes full

are the same as i-mode mail.→p.162

zSMS in the received mail list screen, the beginning

of the message is displayed as the subject.

Forwarding and replying to received

SMS

You can forward SMS and send a reply to the sender.

→p.165

zYou cannot enter a subject.

zYou cannot send SMS to the entered address when:

• The address contains the characters other than

numbers, “*” or “#”

• The address contains “+” except for the head of the

address

• The address contains a space

zDepending on the signal quality, types of characters or

device of the other party, the recipient may not be able

to display the text correctly.

zEven when “Caller ID Notification” is set to “OFF”, your

caller ID is provided to the recipient during SMS

transmission.

zThe line feed symbol is counted as 2 characters in

Japanese input mode and as 1 character in English

input mode.

zYou cannot send an SMS from the additional number

of multi number. Set the multi number setting to the

basic number.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and

send SMS.

zIf you receive Short Mail sent from a mova terminal,

etc., the sender’s phone number is displayed. If the

caller ID is not provided, the reason is displayed.

zIf a received SMS includes double-byte characters

that are not listed in the Kuten code list, those

characters are displayed as blanks (spaces). For the

Kuten code list, refer to the PDF format “Kuten Code

List” in the provided CD-ROM.

zPressing d (Select) while the sender of the current

SMS is highlighted allows you to make a voice or

videophone call to that number, compose SMS or

select an image for videophone (Phone To, AV Phone

To, and Mail To function).→p.147

zYou cannot reply to an SMS when the sender has

withheld his or her caller ID (User unset) or is sending

from a pay phone (Payphone) or a phone that does

not support caller ID notification (Not supported).

zEven if you reply to or forward an SMS on the FOMA

card (UIM), the “ ” remains on the received mail list

screen and received mail detail screen and the “ ”/

“ ” icon does not appear.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode or Dual mode, you cannot

reply an SMS sent to Number B.

184

Mail

Checking for SMS

The SMS that are not received by the FOMA terminal

are kept at the SMS Center. You can receive the kept

SMS by checking new SMS.

zSMS are kept in the following cases:

• When the FOMA terminal is turned off

• When “ ” is displayed

• When the Inbox is full

• When Self mode is set

1u“Check new SMS”

“SMS Checking” appears while you check for

new SMS. Press d (Select) after checking for

new SMS. The automatic receiving starts if the

center keeps any SMS.

The automatic receiving may not start

immediately after inquiry.

Specifying the SMS center

setting

zRefer to the “SMS settings” (p.178) in the “Mail

Setting” screen about the SMS settings other than

the SMS center.

Use this setting to specify whether the FOMA

terminal uses the DOCOMO SMS Center or another

provider’s SMS center for SMS.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-mode common

set”“SMS center selection” Select

any item:

DoCoMo……Uses the DOCOMO SMS Center.

User setting……Enters SMS center’s address, then

selects from “International/Unknown” to use the

other SMS center.

Reset……Deletes the “User setting” data and resets

the setting to “DoCoMo”.

* There is normally no need to change this setting.

zIf the entered SMS Center address includes “#” or

“*”, you cannot select “International”.

185

i-αppli

What is an i-αppli? .......................................................................................................... 186

Downloading i-αppli from Sites ....................................................................................... 186

Launching an i-αppli ....................................................................................................... 187

Pre-installed Software..................................................................................................... 190

Launching i-αppli Automatically ...................................................................................... 197

Launching an i-αppli from a Site or Mail ........................................................... 197

Setting the i-αppli Standby Screen ..................................................... 198

Organizing i-αppli............................................................................................................ 199

i-αppli To

Set i-αppli stand-by

186

i-αppli

What is an i-

ppli?

Downloading an i-αppli from a site enables you to use

i-mode terminal in more convenient. Some i-αppli allow

you to store data from the i-αppli directly into the

phonebook or your schedule, and Some i-αppli linked

to Data box allow you to save or download images.

As the FOMA terminal supports mega i-αppli with

large capacity, you can enjoy high-resolution 3D

games or long roll-playing games.

zFor details on i-αppli, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

Downloading i-

ppli from

Sites

You can download software from an i-mode site and

run the software on your FOMA terminal.

zUp to 1M-byte i-αppli can be downloaded. Up to

200 i-αppli can be stored. The maximum number of

software applications that can be saved varies

depending on the data size. The number includes

partly downloaded i-αppli.

1Select software

Press d (Select) when the “Completed” message

appears. For the software that is immediately

launched from the site, the software starts up

without displaying a completion message.

■To cancel data downloading in progress

During downloadingd (Cancel) or t

■When the software setting screen appears

Set the software“YES”

Software settings→p.188

2“YES”

The downloaded software is launched.

■Not to launch the software

“NO”

●Downloading Mail-linked i-αppli

zWhen you download a mail-linked i-αppli, an i-αppli

mail folder is automatically created in the inbox or

Outbox folder. The folder names are assigned by

the downloaded mail-linked i-αppli and cannot be

changed. The FOMA terminal can store up to 5

mail-linked i-αppli.

zMail sent and received using a mail-linked i-αppli is

automatically sorted into the dedicated folders

created when that mail-linked i-αppli was

downloaded. You can also manually sort received

mails.

zYou cannot download mail-linked i-αppli in the

following cases:

• If there are already 5 dedicated folders for mail-

linked i-αppli

• If there is already saved a mail-linked i-αppli that

uses the same folder

• Mail box lock is set for Inbox/Outbox

Viewing i-

ppli information during

downloading

<Disp. Software info>

You can specify whether the software information is

displayed for checking when downloading software.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-αppli settings”

“Disp. Software info”“Display”

■Not to check information

“Not display”

zTo restore deleted software that had

been pre-installed, download from

“PlayNow” by SO.

“iMenu”“メニューリスト”“ケータイ

電話メーカー ”“PlayNow by SO”

QR code on the right is also available

to select the displayed URL and access the site.

zSome i-αppli software automatically opens

communication after being downloaded. You can set

your terminal not to automatically communicate by

using “Network set” in “Software setting”.

zIf you download an i-αppli that uses the terminal data

(the stored information or mobile phone/FOMA card

(UIM) manufacture numbers) or an i-αppli DX, a

message appears notifying that the i-αppli uses the

terminal data. When you select “YES”, your terminal

information is sent to the IP (information service

provider) via the internet and may be disclosed to the

third party as a result.

zDepending on the data storage capacity of the IC

card, you may not be able to download Osaifu-Keitai

i-αppli even when there is capacity available in the

software storage area. Follow the confirmation screen,

delete the displayed software and download again.

You may not be able to delete the software depending

on the software type you are going to download.

Depending on the software, the software itself is

deleted after the software is launched and data in the

IC card is deleted.

zWhen 2in1 is set to B mode, the activation

confirmation screen may not appear after download,

depending on the i-αppli.

187

i-αppli

Launching an i-

ppli

Launching an i-

ppli

1o (1 second or longer)

The “Software list” screen

appears at the bottom of the

screen.

■To search i-αppli by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

“YES”

2Select software

When you launch the software, “ ” or “ ”

appears at the bottom of the screen.

Pre-installed software→p.190

Quitting an i-

ppli

1t (1 second or longer) or y

“YES”

●Motion tracking

The FOMA terminal supports “motion tracking” that

operates i-αppli using camera recognition technology

(by waving or shaking the FOMA terminal).

zThe function may not be available in the following

cases:

• The camera lens is dirty

• Clothes and background colors are similar

• Background changes quickly, e.g. when in transit

• The location is dark or too bright

zIf you receive a voice or videophone call while i-αppli

is active, the software is paused. The software screen

reappears when the call ends. However, the setting of

“V-phone while packet” applies to videophone during

i-αppli communication.

zThe i-αppli mail used with mail-linked i-αppli may not

be displayed correctly.

zYou can save the data you use (i-αppli data (microSD))

to the microSD card depending on the software.

zSome i-αppli allows you to use the Phone To/AV

Phone To or Web To function from the i-αppli.

However, you cannot use these functions from the

i-αppli standby screen. (You can use these functions

when an i-αppli is activated.)

zImages used in i-αppli* and data you enter may be

automatically sent to the server via the Internet.

* : Images used in i-αppli refers to images shot by the

camera activated by a camera-linked i-αppli, images

retrieved using an i-αppli Infrared data exchange or

iC communication function, images downloaded by

an i-αppli from an i-mode site or website or images

loaded by an i-αppli from Data box.

Software list

Function menu



p.188

zIf the memory used to store trace information is full,

the oldest entry is overwritten.

zSome i-αppli software may not make sounds.

zIf the camera is activated from an i-αppli, the shot

images are saved and used as part of the i-αppli.

zYou can use an i-αppli to activate the Bar code reader

and read JAN codes and QR codes. The read data are

used by the software.

zWith some software applications, the IP (information

service provider) may access software stored on your

FOMA terminal and directly disable the use of the

software. In this case, you can no longer launch,

upgrade or set the software as the standby screen. You

can only delete the software or view the software

information. To use the software again, you have to

contact the IP and have them send an instruction to re-

enable the software.

zWith some software applications, the IP (information

service provider) may send data to software stored on

your FOMA terminal.

zWhen an IP (information service provider) sends a

disable or re-enable instruction or other data to

software stored on your FOMA terminal, the “ ” icon

flashes. No communication charges are applied in this

case.

zWhen 2in1 is set to B mode or Dual mode, you may

not be able to launch, operate or set an i-αppli

depending on the i-αppli.

zYou cannot launch an i-αppli:

• While an image is edited

• While an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® is downloaded

zSome software is displayed on fullscreen, and the

remaining battery icon or the signal strength icon may

not be displayed.

■Warning

zMotion tracking i-αppli is a game that you play by

tilting or shaking the FOMA terminal. Shaking the

terminal may hit a person, thing, etc. and result in an

accident or damage. When playing the game, firmly

grip the FOMA terminal, do not shake it too much,

and confirm safety around.

188

i-αppli

Software list screen (p.187)/

IC card content screen (p.202)

Software setting……Specifies the software settings.

Press o (Finish) to finish the setting operation.

Stand-by display→p.198

Network set……Sets whether to communicate

when an i-αppli is launched. When “Check every

start” is selected, you can select whether to

communicate every time you launch an i-αppli.

Stand-by net……Sets whether the i-αppli set as

standby screen communicates.

Icon info……Specifies whether the use of unread

mail or message icon information is permitted when

an i-αppli is running.

Change mld./img.……Specifies whether to allow

the ring tones for phone calls, mail and messages,

images such as those used in the standby screen or

when mail is sent or received or menu icon to be

changed when an i-αppli DX is running. When

“Check every change” is set, you can select whether

to change the ring tone or image every time an

i-αppli attempt to change such item automatically.

See P.book/hist.……Sets whether to allow the

application to look up the phonebook, the latest Dialed

and Received calls records, and the latest unread mail

automatically when an i-αppli DX is launched.

Program guide……Sets whether to use the software

as program guide i-αppli to activate by pressing

p (EPG) on the 1seg screen (p.210). Downloaded

program guide i-αppli can also be set. “Gガイド番組表

リモコン” (G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control) is set at

the time of purchase.

Power saver……Sets whether to set the Power

saver during i-αppli is activated. Sets whether to

pause the i-αppli when the FOMA terminal is folded

during i-αppli is activated, or sets whether to pause

the i-αppli following the setting of “Backlight ” in

“Settings” when the FOMA terminal is not operated

during i-αppli is activated.

Software info →p.189

Upgrade→p.199

List setting……Selects the list display style for i-αppli

from “Title image+icon/Icon/Software name”.

Set i-αppli To→p.197

Auto-start time→p.197

Add shortcut icon→p.94

Move to microSD……Moves one i-αppli or i-αppli data in

the FOMA terminal to the microSD card.

“Displaying the i-αppli data in the microSD card”→p.199

Memory info……Displays the amount of the stored i-αppli.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

zIf you specify “OFF”, note that you may not be able to

receive timely information.

zIf you set this function to “ON”, as information about

whether there are unread messages and mail, icons

for in/out of service area, the battery level and the

status of manner mode are sent to the IP (information

service provider) via the Internet in the same way as

your mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacturer

numbers, there is a possibility that the information may

be disclosed to the third party.

zIf this function is set to “OFF”, some i-αppli that

require the icon information may not work.

zWhen “No” is selected, a message appears asking

whether to release the setting. When “Yes” is selected,

the pre-installed “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE

EPG Remote Control) is set.

zThis can only be set for 1seg-linked i-αppli DX whose

“Program guide key “i-αppli To”” in “Software info” is

set to “ON”.

zWhen “After folded” is set to “ON”, the software is

paused when the FOMA terminal is folded. Note that

you may not be able to receive timely information.

zWhen “Timer” is set to “ON”, the software is paused

following the setting of “Backlight ” in “Settings” when

FOMA terminal is not operated during i-αppli is

activated. Note that you may not be able to receive

timely information.

zWhen i-αppli on the FOMA terminal (Phone) is moved

to the microSD card, the data of i-αppli on the FOMA

terminal (Phone) is also moved to the microSD card.

zMail-linked i-αppli folder in the FOMA terminal is not

deleted even if the mail-linked i-αppli is moved to the

microSD card.

zUse “Software info” (p.189) to check whether the

i-αppli can be saved to the microSD card.

189

i-αppli

Adjusting the volume of i-

ppli

<i-αppli vol.>

You can adjust the volume of i-αppli.

1i“SETTINGS”“i-αppli settings”

“i-αppli vol.”

2Adjust the volume

Checking the information of i-

ppli

1Software list screen (p.187)

u (FUNC)“Software info”Check

the software information

Checking the security error history

When an i-αppli or i-αppli DX attempts to launch a

function that is not permitted to run, a security error

occurs and the details of the error are recorded in the

security error history.

1i“I-APPLI”“i-αppli action info”

“Security error history”

The “Security error history”

screen appears.

2Check the details of the security errors

zWhen deleting a mail-linked i-αppli, a message

appears asking if you also delete the corresponding

dedicated folder for the mail-linked i-αppli. Select “NO”

to delete only the software and select “YES” to delete

the folder at the same time. However, even when you

select “YES”, you cannot delete the folder dedicated

for the mail-linked i-αppli if it is being used, if the folder

is locked, or if the folder contains a protected mail.

zFor some Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli, the software itself is

deleted after the data in the IC card is deleted. After

selecting “Delete this” for this kind of software, launch

and delete the data in the IC card following the

confirmation screen, then delete the software itself.

Since “Delete selected” or “Delete all” cannot launch

the software, delete the data before deleting the

software.

zSome Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli cannot be deleted.

zWhen 2in1 is in B mode, some i-αppli cannot be

deleted.

zYou can set the volume depending on the software.

However, when “i-αppli vol.” is set to “Silent”, there is

no sound regardless of the volume setting of the

software.

zWhen Manner mode is set, the volume of the i-αppli is

set to the Manner mode setting.

zThe software name displayed by this function cannot

be changed.

zOn the software list screen, software types and

settings can be checked by the following icons.

: i-αppli DX

: Mail-linked i-αppli

: “Auto-start time” is set

: “Set i-αppli stand-by” is set

: “Auto-start time” and “Set i-αppli stand-by” are

set

: “i-αppli To setting” can be set

: “Set i-αppli stand-by” can be set

: “i-αppli To setting” and “Set i-αppli stand-by” can

be set

: Software downloaded from an SSL-compatible

page

: Software whose data can be saved to the

microSD card→p.200

: Partially downloaded i-αppli

: Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli→p.202

zWhen you select partly downloaded i-αppli ( ) or

i-αppli only with management information ( ) on

the “Software list” screen (p.187) or “IC card content”

screen (p.202), you can download the rest of the data.

Security error history

１／４

Ｓｅｃｕｒｅｅｒｒｏｒｈｉｓｔ．

【

Ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅｎａｍｅ

】

アニメ１

【

Ｄａｔｅ

】

２００８／８／１７：０６

【

Ｒｅａｓｏｎｆｏｒｔｈｅｅｎｄ

】

Ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅｔｅｒｍｉｎａｔｅｄ

ｄｕｅｔｏｓｅｃｕｒｉｔｙｅｒｒｏｒ

Function menu



p.190

190

i-αppli

Security error history screen

(p.189)

Copy info……Copies the security error details.

Delete info……Deletes the security error details.

Launching software from active

software

Activate software from the currently active software.

Downloading software that launches the specified

software enables you to launch that software without

returning to the software list screen.

zIf the software to be launched is not specified,

specify the software.

zIf the software to be launched is specified but is not

stored on the FOMA terminal, you must download

the software beforehand.

1Select an item for launching software

Pre-installed Software

10 applications are pre-installed at the time of

purchase.

zNote that looking at the display for extended

periods of time may cause eye strain.

モバイル

Google

マップ

(Mobile Google

map)

Enjoy interactive maps, aerial photos and rich

shopping store/service information. Zoom in/out and

scrolling are available. You can look up detailed maps

or local information on 16 or more countries over the

world including United States and Europe.

zFor first time use, agree with the terms of service.

1Software list screen (p.187)“モバイル

Googleマップ” (Mobile Google map)

■To exit

u (メニュー (Menu))“終

了” (Exit)

■To see how to play

u (メニュー (Menu))“ヘ

ルプ” (Help)

デコ絵つくーる

(deco-e maker

)

Clip text, face, etc. out of pictures taken with Camera

and edit them to use for Deco-mail®.

1Software list screen (p.187)“デコ絵つ

くーる” (deco-e maker)

■To exit

u (終了 (Exit))“はい”

(YES)

■To mu te

“サウンド：オン” (Sound:

On)

■To see how to play

“ヘルプ” (Help)

はじめてのおつかい

for SO

Shopping game to buy requested things. Cooperate

with fellows to enjoy shopping.

1Software list screen (p.187)“はじめて

のおつかい”

■To exit

o (終了 (Exit))

■To mu te

u (♪○)

■To see how to play

“ヘルプ” (Help)

Map i-

ppli

“地図アプリ” (Map i-αppli) is i-αppli that you can get

the confirmation at current location with Open i-area,

get a map you specify or find the route.

You can use transfer guide easily through voice input.

zPacket communications charges apply for use. For

this software, use of Pake-hodai/Pack-hodai Full is

recommended.

zTo restore this software after deletion, download

from “ｉエリア−周辺情報−” (i-area -Surrounding

area information-).

zNot available if 2in1 is in the B mode.

zWe are not liable for accuracy and immediacy of

the map and route information.

zDuring driving, a person other than the driver must

operate the software.

Zenrin, Europa Technologie

191

i-αppli

●Basic service and additional service

This software provides the basic service and

additional service.

Basic service: Service provided by DOCOMO free

of charge

Additional service: Pay service provided by

ZENRIN DataCom

The additional services other than traffic information

are available free of charge for 90 days from the first

launch of this software.

To use additional services thereafter, membership

registration (charged) for “ゼンリン地図＋ナビ ”

(ZENRIN Map + Navi) provided by ZENRIN DataCom

is necessary.

If you register membership during the use of this

software, you need not download the software again.

This software can be used as it is.

●Screen and operation for the TOP menu

of “Map i-αppli”

zThe screens shown here are for reference only and

may look different from the actual screens.

zUpon the initial activation, the terms of service and

precautions on use are displayed.

■Top screen

Menu list appears on the front

top screen. Closing menu

returns to the last map

accessed.

■If 91 days elapse without membership

registration

Message appears to notify

limitation of the available function

and make inquiry for subscription

when using this software first time

on 91st day or later.

The similar messages are

displayed when the additional

service menu is selected.

* Subscribe on the website of “ゼ

ンリン地図＋ナビ” (ZENRIN

Map+Navi) using this software

when you register as a member.

Menu Description

91st day

and later

地図

(Map)

• Use Open i-area or enter a

keyword, address, phone

number, etc. to view the current

location map.

• Enter an address by voice to view

a map easily.

Free

• Check the map of the location

stored in this software or the

server, or the location you

previously searched.

• Saving location into the server

shares its information in PC.

Charged

周辺検索

(Local

Search)

• Check information including

shops (iD accepted shop as well)

or facilities around the current or

specified location, and acquire

coupons from gourmet

information.

• Check information on parking lots

nearby.

• Check surrounding area

information simply through voice

input.

Free

ルート案内

(Route)

• Search for routes by all

transportation means including

vehicle, walk and car.

• Search for routes to home you

marked.

Charged

乗換案内

(Transfer)

• Check transfer and timetable of

the train.

• Check the train route by map and

set the alarm before departure.

• Start the transfer guidance simply

through voice input.

Charged

エクストラ

(Extra)

• Change the map mode to the

normal map, moving map by waving

the FOMA terminal, 3D map, train-

route-emphasized map, etc.

• Show colored views of previously

Open i-area-positioned locations

in the unit of city, town, village,

ward and prefecture.

Free

• Back up information on

previously Open i-area-

positioned locations to the server.

Charged

災害用メ

ニュー

(Emergency)

• Search for facilities useful in case

of emergency.

• Emergency i-αppli without any

communication required, linking

to the map i-αppli.

Charged

設定/

ヘルプ

(Setting/

Help)

• Check the settings and usage of

map view and route view.

Free

Menu Description

91st day

and later

Top menu

192

i-αppli

●Map view and operations

■Map view

■Key operations in map view

■Key operations in the easy access menu

●Screen and operation for the search

result for surrounding area information

zThe screens shown here are for reference only and

may look different from the actual screens.

zThe screen and operation are provided when the

search result is displayed with the map but not

provided as a result of selection from the list.

■Search result screen for

surrounding area

information

■Key operation in the search result screen for

surrounding area information

zIf the cursor does not hit the shop, etc. as the

search result, the easy access menu appears.

●Finding the route

Set the start and destination to search for a route.

Displays the route for walk, public transport, and cars.

1Top Menu screen (p.191)“ルート案内”

(Route) “ルート検索” (Search route)

2Select “ 出発地” (Start) from following

items:

このあたり (Here)……Positions and sets the

approximate location by Open i-area.

フリーワード検索 (By keyword)……Searches by

keyword.

Key operation

Action

(

メニュー

(Menu))

Displays menu screen.

dDisplays easy access menu

o (拡縮

(Zoom))

A scale slide bar appears. Press f

and g to zoom in and out,

respectively. Press o (閉じる ) to set

the scale and clear up the slide bar.

bMoves on the map in all directions.

tCloses menu screen or returns to the

location accessed last.

wRotates the map counterclockwise.

0Sets the north of the map to the north.

qRotates the map clockwise.

Key operation

Action

f (周辺を調

べる (Search

around))

Checks information on the focused

area of the map shown and the

surrounding area as well.

g (ココヘの

ルート

(Here))

Searches for a route from a specified

starting location to the center of the

displayed map.

h (ココを

送信

(Send here))

Fires off the URL of the displayed map.

j (ココを登

録 (Save

here))

Saves location information on the

center of the map into this software or

the server. Saving location into the

server enables you to share its

information in PC as well.

d (地図へ

(To map))

Exits the easy access menu.

1 (3Dパノ

ラマ (3D

Panorama))

Displays the point that allows you to

browse the 3d intersection or

panorama image. When the point is

selected, you can view the 3d

intersection or panorama image.

(

ビルテナ

ント

(Tenant))

Displays buildings in the area and allows

you to check the tenants by clicking.

DataCom CO., LTD.

Key operation

Action

dChecks detail information of the search

result.

bMoves the map in four directions.

5Re-searches with the displayed map as

the center.

4Checks the previous search result.

6Checks the next search result.

(

メニュー

(Menu))

Displays menu screen.

o (拡縮

(Zoom))

The scale slide bar appears. Press f

to display a wider range, or g to

display the detailed map. Press o ( 閉

じる) (close) to set the scale and clear

up the slide bar.

DataCom CO., LTD.

193

Continued on next page

i-αppli

地図上で指定 (From map)……Sets the starting

location with map.

TEL／〒検索 (By number/code)……Searches by

phone number or zip code.

住所一覧から (From address list)……Selects an

address.

ジャンルから (From genre)……Selects a category.

履歴から (From history)……Selects from previously

viewed maps.

登録地点から (From marked point)……Sets from the

location information stored in this software or the

server.

自宅 (Home)……Sets location information on your

home.

出発地の確認 (Check)……Checks information on

the starting location.

3Select “目的地” (Destination) as in

Step 2

4Select “時間指定” (Time) from the

following item:

現時刻で検索 (Current time)……Checks the route

using the current time.

出発時刻指定 (Start time)……Sets the start time to

check the route.

到着時刻指定 (Arrival time)……Sets the arrival time

to check the route.

終電を利用 (Last train)……Checks the route with the

last train of the day.

5Select “ 条件設定 ” (Condition) from the

following item“上記で設定” (Set

above)

乗換条件 (Transfer)……Selects transfer priority

criteria from “早い／安い／楽々” (Fast/Cheap/Easy).

徒歩ルート (Walking route)……Selects route priority

criteria from “おまかせ／屋根多い／階段少ない”

(Recommended/Many roofs/Less up-and-down).

特急利用 (Express)……Selects whether to use

an express if the total distance of the route is 100km

or shorter.

通常利用車種 (Vehicle type)……Selects the vehicle

type to be used.

6Search for route

Using a variety of route search “ で検索”

(Search by ) and car route search “ の

みで検索” (Search only by car), you can search

and find the route. As a search result, a route

(up to 6 routes) are displayed. If there is another

transfer route, the characteristics of the route are

indicated by icon.

■To register the route

“ルートを登録” (Register route)

7Select the route“ルート確認” (Check

route)

Starts checking route to the destination.

●Using the voice input

The voice input menu enables voice input to simply

check surrounding area information and transfer

guidance, or view a map.

<Example: To use the Local Search voice input>

1TOP menu screen (p.191)“周辺検索”

(Local Search)“音声入力” (Voice

input)

The voice input guidance screen appears.

2“音声入力開始” (Voice input start)

Enter information through voice input

After the voice input screen appears, enter the

desired peripheral information through voice

input.

<Example: “この辺のコンビニ” (Convenience

stores near here)>

Route Level Meaning

早 (Fast) Takes a short time

安 (Cheap) Low cost

楽 (Easy) Fewer transfer times

オススメ

(Recommended)

Meets the above three conditions

有料 (Toll) Uses toll road (car)

一般 (Open) Uses open road (car)

194

i-αppli

3Voice is recognized and a confirmation

screen appears

■When recognition is incorrect

“音声再入力” (Retry)

●Using 設定/ヘルプ (Setting/Help)

1TOP menu screen (p.191)“設定/ヘル

プ” (Setting/Help)Select any item:

各種設定 (Settings)……Make the basic settings/

route guide settings/home settings/station settings,

delete history and reset the settings.

ヘルプ・規約 (Help/Terms)……Shows usage, FAQ

and terms of service.

会員情報確認 (Membership information)……

Checks your subscription state to “ゼンリン地図

＋ナビ” (ZENRIN Map+Navi).

PC確認方法 (PC check method)……View URL,

i-αppli site.

ガイド番組表リモコン

(G-GUIDE EPG

Remote Control)

This is a useful monthly-charge-free i-αppli containing

the program guide and AV remote control function. You

can obtain digital, analog or BS digital TV program

information easily anywhere at any time. You can

check the program title, contents of program and start/

end time, etc. 1seg can be activated from the program

guide. The program guide can be activated from 1seg.

If you are interested in some program, you can set timer

recording via the Internet to record the program on the

DVD recorder (a DVD recorder compatible with the

online timer recording function is required. To use this

function, you need initial settings on this application).

You can also search for program information by

keyword such as TV program genre, your favorite

personality or pickup keyword on the top of the main

screen. Moreover, the remote control is possible for

TV/Video/DVD player (some models do not support

this function).

zWhen you use this application for the first time,

agree to the license agreement and set the default

settings.

zPacket communication charges will apply.

zWhen using this software overseas, set “Set main

time” to the Japanese time.

zFor details on Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE

EPG Remote Control), refer to “Mobile Phone

User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

■Booking program function

You can book a 1seg view by selecting a program

from the program guide of this application.

zTimer activation

Activate this application to select a program you

want to watch. Select “予約実行” (Book) from “視聴

予約” (Book program) in メニュー (Menu) to

activate the booking scheduler. Follow the

on-screen instructions.

■Timer recording function

You can reserve 1seg recording by selecting a

program from the program guide of this application.

zTimer recording

Activate this application to select a program you

want to record. Select “予約実行” (Book) from “＃ワ

ンセグ録画予約 ” (#1Seg timer recording) in メ

ニュー (Menu) to activate the booking scheduler.

Follow on-screen instructions.

(* Alternatively, activate this application, select a

program, and press q.)

■Online timer recording

If you have a DVD recorder compatible with the online

timer recording, you can set timer recording from the

program guide of this application via the Internet

while you are away from your house. To use online

timer recording, you need initial settings on this

application.

zInitial settings

①Perform the Internet connection setting on the

DVD recorder (refer to the manual supplied with

the DVD recorder).

②Launch this application. When you select “リ

モート録画予約 ” (Online timer recording) on メ

ニュー (Menu), instructions appear. Follow the

instructions to perform initial settings.

* The above is a screen image.

The actual screen may look

different. The displayed TV

guide corresponds to the area

where you live.

195

Continued on next page

i-αppli

zTimer recording

After initial settings completes, specify the program

and select リモート録画予約 (Online timer

recording) from the menu. You can connect to the

DVD player set with this application and set the

timer recording.

* If a timer recording is already set for the time you set, a

message appears on the program guide.

zYou are charged for the packet communication.

設定アプリ

(iD setting application)

The electronic cash “iD” does not

need to be charged, it is the credit

service which enables you to pay

or use a cashing service only by

holding the Osaifu-Keitai. You can

easily enjoy shopping without

leaving signature. The cash

service is also available

according to the credit card

company.

zTo use “iD”, besides a

subscription to a company issuing iD-supported

credit card, you also need iD application and

Osaifu-Keitai for which settings for the card

application provided by the card company are

completed or a credit card that contains “iD”.

zTo use “iD” as Osaifu-Keitai, complete the iD appli

settings, download or start the card application

provided by the card issuer, and configure the

specified settings on the card application.

Depending on the card, only the card application

settings are required, and the iD appli settings not

required.

zThe cost for using the card compatible with iD

(such as annual fee) varies depending on the card

company.

zSee the i-mode site of “iD” for

information on “iD”.

• i-mode site (Japanese) :

oiMenu“メニューリスト”

(Menu List)“iD”

DCMX

クレジットアプリ

(DCMX credit

application)

“DCMX” is the iD-compatible

credit service provided by NTT

DOCOMO. DCMX is categorized

into DCMX mini that will offer a

monthly credit line of 10,000 yen,

and DCMX/DCMX GOLD that

offers the higher limit than DCMX

mini while earning DOCOMO

Point.

You can easily apply for “DCMX

mini” from this application and

start the mobile credit service

immediately.

*1 : A simple audit will be performed online at the time of

application. Applications for other than DCMX mini will

be connected to the application page on i-mode.

*2 : Security code entry may be required.

*3 : Only available for DCMX mini.

zSee the i-mode site of DCMX for

details on the service contents or

how to apply.

• i-mode site (Japanese) :

oiMenuDCMX iD

zNot available when 2in1 is in B mode.

zNTT DOCOMO accepts no liability whatsoever

regarding the information set on the FOMA terminal.

* The above is a

screen image.

The actual

screen may look

different.

* The above is a

screen image.

The actual

screen may look

different.

■ Function

Application/Audit*1

Set card information

Use

No complicated

charging! Wave

your mobile phone

over a reader at

stores with the

following iD mark,

and enjoy

shopping without

your signature*2.

Check

Check the DCMX

service content,

monthly available

credit*3, receipt,

etc!

Change

Make model

change settings or

validity term

updates!

196

i-αppli

ｉアプリバンキング

(i-

ppli banking)

This i-αppli enables you to conveniently use mobile

banking. Mobile banking is a service that you can

check your bank balance or account activity, or you

can transfer money whenever or wherever, by using a

mobile phone. You can use Mobile banking for up to 2

banking facilities, only by entering the password you

have set when launching the i-αppli.

zTo use the mobile banking

service, a bank account of the

banking facility and application

to the mobile banking service is

required.

zYou are charged for the packet

communication.

zFor details on i-αppli banking,

refer to “Mobile Phone User’s

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

zFor information on i-αppli

banking, see the i-mode site.

• i-mode site (Japanese) :

oiMenu“メニューリスト”

(Menu List)モバイルバンキン

グｉアプリバンキング

楽オク出品アプリ

2 (Rakuten Auction

application 2)

楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuten Auction application 2) is

a useful application that you can easily sell goods at

Rakuten Auction site. It provides a guidance display for

new users who use the i-αppli for the first time. There

are helpful functions such as shooting/editing a photo

or saving the history, and you can bring goods to the

auction in a shorter time than from a site.

zYou need to agree to “利用規

約” (Terms and conditions)

before you use i-αppli for the

first time.

zPacket communication is

charged.

zFor more information, refer to

“Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”.

zMember subscription and

auctioneer registration to

Rakuten are required to sell

goods on Rakuten Auction.

zFor details, see i-mode site

(Japanese).

• i-mode site:

oiMenuオークション

(Auction)

FOMA

通信環境確認アプリ

(FOMA communication environment

check application)

FOMA communication environment check application

is the application that checks whether the FOMA

terminal can use the FOMA High-speed area.

zTo use the FOMA

communication environment

check application, agree with

“ご利用上の注意 ” (Notes on

using the application).

zWhen you launch this application for the first time,

agree with “ ご利用上の注意” (Notes on using the

application).

zPacket communication charges are applied for

settings or operations.

■Notes on Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli

zNTT DOCOMO accepts no liability whatsoever

regarding the information set on the IC card.

* The above is a

screen image.

The actual

screen may look

different.

zThe displayed items may be different or the

description that the FOMA terminal is out of service

area is displayed depending on the conditions

(weather, the signal quality, or network traffic) even if it

is the same place and time.

zWhen you use other functions during this application

is activated, the checking may fail.

* The above is a

screen image.

The actual

screen may look

different.

* The above is a

screen image.

The actual

screen may look

different.

197

i-αppli

Launching i-

ppli

Automatically

You can set the software to launch automatically at

the specified date and time or interval of time.

Enabling automatic launching

<Auto-start set>

zYou can set 3 automatic startup times for each

application.

zSet to “OFF” at the time of purchase.

1i“I-APPLI”“Auto-start set”“ON”

or “OFF”

Setting the launch date/time

<Auto-start time>

You can specify the date and time to launch the

software automatically.

zSoftware does not start up automatically in the

following cases:

• When the FOMA terminal is turned off

• When another function is running

• During calls

• During communication

• When the time for Software Update, Alarm,

Schedule, To Do list or 1Seg booking program is

the same as Auto-start time

• If the time to launch is set within 10 minutes after

the same application is automatically launched

for the last time

1Software list screen (p.187)

u (FUNC)“Auto-start time”Use c

to select a checkbox (□)

■To enable the time interval set for the

software

Check the “Time interval set” checkbox

■To set the launch date and time

Check the “Start time set” checkbox

2o (Finish)Set the launch date and

time

■To set the launch date and time

Select a date and timeEnter the launch date

and time

■To set the automatic launch repetition

Select the repeat setting item“Daily” or

“Weekly”

If you select “Weekly”, use c to select a

checkbox (□) and press o (Finish).

3o (Finish)

Checking whether an i-

ppli launched

automatically

You can check whether an i-αppli automatically

started up at the specified time.

zYou can also check for the software whose

launching from the IC card function failed.

1i“I-APPLI”“i-αppli action info”

“Auto-start info”

The screen displays information such as the

software name, the automatic launch time and

whether or not the software was launched.

“StartO” indicates that the software started up

automatically, “StartX” indicates that it did not

start up automatically and “Start-” indicates that

the time for automatic launch has not yet been

reached.

Launching an i-

ppli from a

Site or Mail

<i-αppli To>

You can launch an i-αppli from a function other than

i-αppli, such as an i-mode site or mail.

Enabling software launching with

ppli To

You can specify whether i-αppli software can be

launched from i-mode sites, mail, the Infrared data

exchange function, Bar code reader, IC card function,

ToruCa or data broadcast.

zThis setting can be specified separately for each

software application.

1Software list screen (p.187)

u (FUNC)“Set i-αppli To”

2Use c to select □ (checkbox)

o (Finish)

zIf the software could not be launched automatically,

the “ ” (Not run soft) shortcut icon appears on the

standby screen. Select the icon to view the Auto-start

info screen. Select software that could not be

activated.

Shortcut icons that provide information→p.94

198

i-αppli

Launching i-

ppli from a site

When an i-αppli software launch specification is

displayed on an i-mode site, this setting allows the

software to be launched from the site.

zThis function cannot be used with some sites.

1Sites screen (p.136)Select an item for

launching the software“YES”

Launching i-

ppli from a mail

When an i-αppli software launch specification is

pasted into a received i-mode mail, this setting allows

the software to be launched from the i-mode mail.

1Received mail detail screen (pp.170,

172)Select an item for launching the

software“YES”

Launching i-

ppli from other

functions

You can launch an i-αppli from various functions such

as Infrared data exchange function, Bar code reader,

IC card function, ToruCa, data broadcast, etc.

■Infrared data exchange function

When the FOMA terminal received the i-αppli

launching signal while Infrared data exchange, i-αppli

software launches.

■Bar code reader

When the data scanned by the Bar code reader

contains an i-αppli software launch specification, you

can launch the software from the Bar code reader.

■IC card function

You can launch the software by holding the FeliCa

mark on the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer

unit.

■ToruCa

When an i-αppli software launch specification is

pasted into an acquired ToruCa, you can launch the

software from ToruCa.

■Data broadcast

When 1seg data broadcast site contains i-αppli

activation specification, the software can be activated

from the site.

Setting the i-

ppli Standby

Screen

You can set a selected i-αppli software as the standby

screen.

zSome software applications cannot be set as the

standby screen.

1Software list screen (p.187)o (Set)

“Stand-by display”“ON”o (Finish)

Activating the i-

ppli standby screen

You can activate the software set as the i-αppli

standby screen.

1On the i-αppli standby screent

The i-αppli is activated and or flashes

at the bottom of the screen.

zUnlike ordinary i-αppli, some i-αppli software is

immediately launched from an i-mode site.

• These i-αppli are not stored on the FOMA terminal

after downloading from i-mode sites,

•Some i-αppli software cannot be stored on the

FOMA terminal.

zThe i-αppli launch specification cannot be quoted

even when you reply with a quote or forward the

i-mode mail. You cannot quote a launch specification

of an i-αppli by forwarding mail using the Infrared data

exchange function or DOCOMO keitai datalink

(p.329), etc.

zThe software is not launched in the following cases:

• When another function is running

• During calls

• When the software you want to launch cannot be

found

zOnly 1 i-αppli can be set as the i-αppli standby screen.

zIf software that communicates is set as the standby

screen, it may not run correctly when problems such

as poor signal quality occur.

zIf you select “OFF” for “Stand-by net” in “Software

setting”, note that you may not be able to receive

timely information.

zIf “Dial lock” or “Original lock” is set or 2in1 is set to B

mode or Dual mode while the i-αppli standby screen is

displayed, the i-αppli standby screen ends. If “Dial

lock” or “Original lock” is released or 2in1 is set to A

mode, the i-αppli standby screen reappears.

zWhen you switch tasks and display the standby

screen, the screen specified in “Stand-by display” of

“Display setting” appears even though the i-αppli

standby screen is set.

199

Continued on next page

i-αppli

Deactivating the i-

ppli standby

screen

<Deactivate i-

ppli standby screen>

●Deactivating the i-αppli standby screen

while running an i-αppli

1While running an i-αpplit (1

second or longer) or ySelect any

item:

Cancel……Returns to the screen of running the

i-αppli standby screen.

End……Returns to the i-αppli standby screen.

Terminate……Deactivates the setting of the i-αppli

standby screen.

●Deactivating the i-αppli standby screen

while it is displayed

1i“SETTINGS”“i-αppli settings”

“End stand-by display”

2“Terminate”“Yes”

■To cancel deactivating

“End”

Checking the i-

ppli standby screen

exit information

If an error occurs that causes the i-αppli standby

screen to be deactivated, you can check the recorded

information on the name of the software in which the

error occurred, the time of the error and the reason.

1i“I-APPLI”“i-αppli action info”

“End stand-by info”

The “End stand-by info”

screen appears.

End stand-by info screen

(p.199)

Copy info……Copies the contents of the end stand-by

info screen.

Delete info……Deletes the contents of the end stand-by

info screen.

Organizing i-

ppli

Upgrading i-

ppli

You can upgrade downloaded software when a new

version is available on the site.

1Software list screen (p.187)

u (FUNC)“Upgrade”“YES”

Displaying the i-

ppli software in the

microSD card

You can display the i-αppli data list which is stored on

the microSD card.

1i“I-APPLI”“microSD”“microSD

software”

The “microSD software list” screen appears.

Function menu→p.199

microSD software list screen

(p.199)

Software info……Displays the i-αppli software data

which is stored on the microSD card.

Move to phone……Moves one i-αppli or i-αppli data in

the microSD card to the FOMA terminal.

Memory info……Displays the amount of the stored

i-αppli.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

End stand-by info

アニメ１

２００８／８／１７：０６

【

Ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅｎａｍｅ

】

【

Ｄａｔｅ

】

【

Ｒｅａｓｏｎｆｏｒｔｈｅｅｎｄ

】

Ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅｉｓｓｔｏｐｐｅｄ

ｂｅｃａｕｓｅｏｆａｎｅｒｒｏｒ

Ｅｎｄｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙｉｎｆｏ

Function menu



p.199

zNo information is recorded if the i-αppli standby

screen ends normally (at normal exit).

zYou cannot upgrade mail-linked i-αppli that rename

mail folders in the following cases:

• Mail box lock is set

• Folder lock is set

• Inbox or Outbox folder for the mail-linked i-αppli to

be upgraded is being used

zYou cannot launch an i-αppli from the microSD software

list.

zYou may not be able to use the i-αppli saved on the

microSD card on the other FOMA terminal.

200

i-αppli

Displaying the i-

ppli data in the

microSD card

You can display the folder name list of the i-αppli data

(microSD) stored on the microSD card.

1i“I-APPLI”“microSD”“microSD

data”

The “microSD data list” screen appears.

Function menu→p.200

microSD data list screen

(p.200)

Display info……Displays the maker of the i-αppli, the

available software and whether to use the microSD card.

Delete this・Delete selected・Delete all……Select the

deleting method. “About multiple-choice”→p.38

zWhen i-αppli that is stored on the microSD card is

moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone), the data of

i-αppli that is stored on the microSD card is also

moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone).

zUse “Software info” (p.189) to check whether the

i-αppli can be moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone)

from the microSD card.

zYou may not be able to use the i-αppli data saved on

the microSD card from the software on the other

FOMA terminal.

zUse “Software info” (p.189) to check whether the

i-αppli data will be saved to the microSD card from the

software.

201

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

What is Osaifu-Keitai? .................................................................................................... 202

What is iC Transfer Service? .......................................................................................... 202

Launching Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli....................................................................................... 202

Checking the IC Card Owner Information ................................................ 203

What is ToruCa? .................................................................................................. 203

Acquiring ToruCa ...................................................................................... 204

Viewing ToruCa.......................................................................................... 204

Making the ToruCa Settings..................................................................... 206

Setting Illumination for IC Card Function ............................................ 206

Locking the IC Card Function .............................................................. 206

Check IC owner

To r u C a

Acquire ToruCa

To r u C a v i e w e r

ToruCa settings

IC card Illumination

IC card lock setting

202

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

What is Osaifu-Keitai?

Hold the “Osaifu-Keitai” up to a reader/writer at a

member store and pay for your shopping, or utilize as

membership card, coupons, and more.

You can also use the i-mode network to add e-money

credit, check balances and usage history. Enough

security is provided so the Osaifu-Keitai can be used

without worries.

zFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”.

* In order to use Osaifu-Keitai services, please

download the i-αppli for Osaifu-Keitai from the Osaifu-

Keitai site* and then make the necessary settings.

*: i-mode site (Japanese): oiMenuメニューリスト

(Menu List)おサイフケータイ (Osaifu-Keitai)

• If a malfunction occurs with the FOMA terminal, the

data (including e-money, points, etc.) on the IC card

may be erased or altered (If you need to send your cell

phone to NTT DOCOMO for repairs, please delete the

data yourself as we cannot accept your cell phone for

repair if there is data on it). For support such as having

data reissued or restored or to have it temporarily kept

or transferred (except for transferring data using iC

transfer service), please contact your Osaifu-Keitai

service provider. Make sure to use the service which

provides backup service for important data.

• NTT DOCOMO shall not be liable for any loss of or

damage to data stored on the IC card, or any other

loss related to Osaifu-Keitai service under any

circumstances whatsoever, including but not limited

to malfunctions, model changes, etc.

• If the FOMA terminal is lost or stolen, contact your

Osaifu-Keitai service provider immediately about

what to do. Please note, you can use Omakase

Lock and IC Card lock with this FOMA terminal.

→pp.101, 206

What is iC Transfer Service?

The iC Transfer Service*1 is a service that allows you

to move all the data on your Osaifu-Keitai’s IC card*2

to a replacement Osaifu-Keitai*3 when your Osaifu-

Keitai is replaced due to a model change, repairs, etc.

Once you move the IC card data, it is a snap to start using

the Osaifu-Keitai services by simply downloading*4 the

Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli. The iC transfer service is available at

a NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter near you.

zFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version”.

*1 : To use the iC Transfer Service, both the new and the old

phones must be Osaifu-Keitai compatible. To use the

service, please visit your nearest DOCOMO shop.

*2 : Some iC transfer services may not be supported by all

Osaifu-Keitai services; only the data inside the IC card of

an iC transfer service compatible Osaifu-Keitai service

can be moved.

*3 : This service does not copy the data; it moves it, so no

data inside the IC card is left on the source FOMA

terminal. There may be instances when the iC transfer

service may not be utilized. Use back-up services of

your Osaifu-Keitai service.

*4 : Packet communication charges do apply for

downloading i-αppli and the different kinds of settings.

Launching Osaifu-Keitai i-

ppli

You can launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli from the

software list screen. You can use the Osaifu-Keitai

i-αppli to read and write the data in the IC card to use

useful functions such as charging electronic money or

ticket, or browsing the balance and transaction

history on the FOMA terminal.

zTake great care not to disclose your security code

and passwords of each service to others.

zThe reading/writing of the data from the software to

the IC card is interrupted in the following cases. In

this case, the read/written data is discarded. The

operation after the call varies depending on the

service.

• If you receive a call while launching i-αppli

• If the battery fails

zWhen Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli is activated or

downloaded for the first time, FOMA card (UIM)

information is linked to an IC card. After this, you

cannot use the IC card function unless the linked

FOMA card (UIM) is inserted.

If you use another FOMA card (UIM), you cannot

use the IC card functions unless you delete (Reset

IC owner) Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli first.

i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“IC card

content”

The “IC card content”

screen appears.

Select the Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli

You can also launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli

from the “Software list” screen (p.187).

IC card content

Function menu



p.188

203

Continued on next page

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

Using the Osaifu-Keitai

By holding the FeliCa mark “e” on the FOMA

terminal over the reader/writer unit, you can pay with

the electronic cash or use the FOMA terminal as a

ticket. These functions can be used without launching

the software.

zThough you cannot launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli

during a call, you can use the Osaifu-Keitai by

holding the FeliCa mark over the reader/writer unit.

1Hold the FeliCa mark “e” over the

reader/writer unit to use the service

you want

The center illumination flashes following the “IC

card Illumination” setting when you use Osaifu-

Keitai.

Checking the IC Card Owner

Information

Check if the IC card in Osaifu-Keitai links to the

inserted FOMA card (UIM).

To use another FOMA card (UIM), delete (reset) the

Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli then use the IC card functions.

1i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“Check IC

owner”

If another FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, select

“Reset IC owner” to change the IC owner (reset

Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli).

■To change the IC owner (reset Osaifu-

Keitai i-αppli)

“Change IC owner”“Reset IC owner”“YES”

Enter your security code“YES”

What is ToruCa?

ToruCa is the electronic card that can be acquired via

Osaifu-Keitai, which can be used as an flyer,

restaurant card, coupon, etc.

ToruCa can be acquired via a reader/writer unit or

websites, and can be easily exchanged via mail,

Infrared data exchange or microSD card.

zThe acquired ToruCa is stored in “ToruCa” of

“OSAIFU-KEITAI” menu.

zThis function is available with ToruCa-compatible

models. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

ToruCa usage flow

zWhen 2in1 is set to B mode, you cannot launch an

i-αppli which uses the mail function.

zYou can use the IC card function by holding the FeliCa

mark over the reader/writer unit even when the FOMA

terminal is turned off or the battery is low. (You cannot

launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli.) However, you may

not be able to use this function when the battery pack

is not attached, the battery pack is attached but not

used for a long period of time, or when the FOMA

terminal is left uncharged after the battery alarm

sounds, so be sure to charge the battery pack.

zDo not shock the FOMA terminal when holding the

FeliCa mark over a reader/writer unit.

zIf the FeliCa mark is not recognized, hold the FOMA

terminal close to the reader/writer section of the unit,

move the FOMA terminal back and forth and around to

be parallel to the reader/writer unit.

zThe Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli may be launched when you

hold the FeliCa mark over the reader/writer unit.

Hold the FeliCa mark (

) over

the reader unit

Hold Osaifu-Keitai over the reader

unit to acquire ToruCa

ToruCa (detail)ToruCa

Select ToruCa from the list.

Pressing the “詳細” (Detail)

button displays the detailed

information.

Ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ

204

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

How to acquire ToruCa

Acquiring ToruCa

You can acquire ToruCa from the reader/writer unit.

zYou can save up to 100* ToruCa on the ToruCa

folder. You can save up to 1K bytes for 1 ToruCa.

You can save up to 100K bytes for 1 ToruCa (detail).

* : You can save up to 20 ToruCa separately in the used

ToruCa folder.

1Hold the FeliCa mark “e” on the FOMA

terminal over the reader/writer unit

The illumination flashes following the “IC card

Illumination” setting. ToruCa acquisition tone

sounds, and the acquired ToruCa or ToruCa

(detail) are displayed for about 15 seconds.

When holding the FOMA terminal over the

reader/writer unit→p.203

Viewing ToruCa

1i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“ToruCa”

The “ToruCa folder list”

screen appears.

2Select a folderSelect ToruCa

The “ToruCa display” screen appears.

●Guide to the ToruCa list screens/ToruCa

display screen

①Folder title

②ToruCa category icon

③ToruCa status

: Unread ToruCa

: Read ToruCa

: Expired ToruCa

④Location, etc. (index)

⑤ToruCa title

⑥ToruCa contents (you can also use the Phone To/AV

Phone To, Mail To, Web To or i-αppli To* function)

*: Available with ToruCa (detail) only

⑦Acquire ToruCa (detail)

zPacket communication charge is applied when

acquiring ToruCa or ToruCa (detail) from sites.

zDepending on settings of the IP (Information service

provider), some ToruCa cannot be updated or

redistributed using a mail or Infrared data exchange.

zAcquired ToruCa is not displayed when another

function is activated.

zYou cannot change the ToruCa acquisition tone. The

volume is set to the same volume set at “Phone” of

“Ring volume”. When set to “Step”, the tone sounds at

the volume of “Level 4”.

zYou cannot acquire ToruCa from the reader/writer unit

when IC card lock or Omakase Lock is set.

Reader unit

Website

External memory

(microSD card)

Exchanging

ToruCa between

i-mode terminals

i-αppli

QR code

Mail

Infrared data

exchange

iC communication ToruCa folder list

Function menu



p.205

ToruCa list

ToruCa display (ToruCa)

ToruCa display (ToruCa (detail))

Ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ

③

①

②④

⑤

⑥

⑤

⑦

④

② ②

⑥

⑤

④

Function menu



p.205

Function menu



p.205

Function menu



p.205

205

Continued on next page

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

ToruCa folder list screen

(p.204)

Add folder……Enters a folder name to add a folder.

You can add up to 20 folders on the FOMA terminal. For

the folders on the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 10

double-byte or 20 single-byte characters, and for the

folder on the microSD card, you can enter up to 31

double-byte or 63 single-byte characters.

Edit folder name*1……Edits the folder name of the

added folder.

Search all*2*3……Displays the corresponding ToruCa list

by selecting the item (Index/Title) and entering the text to

search.

Filter all*2*3……Displays only the ToruCa which meets

the selected criteria.

Display all*2*3……Displays all the saved ToruCa after

releasing the display arranged by Search all or Filter all

function (except for data in the “microSD” or “Used

ToruCa” folder).

iC trans. all*2*3 →p.260

Send all Ir data*2*3→p.258

Delete folder*1……Deletes the folder.

No. of ToruCa*3……Displays the number of ToruCa

stored on the FOMA terminal.

Delete all……Deletes all the ToruCa stored on the FOMA

terminal.

*1: Unavailable with the folder other than the user-created

folders.

*2: Unavailable with the folder in the “microSD” folder.

*3: Except for the data in the “microSD” and “Used ToruCa”

folders.

ToruCa list screen (p.204)

Move*1……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves ToruCa to the other folder you select.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Copy*1……Selects from “Copy this/Copy selected/Copy

all” and copies the ToruCa to the other folder you

selected. “About multiple-choice” →p.38

Search*2……Displays the corresponding ToruCa list by

selecting the item (Index/Title) and entering the text to

search.

Disp all in folder*2……Releases the search, sort or filter

result display, and all ToruCa in the folder appear.

• When “Search all”, “Filter all” or “Display all” is

performed on the ToruCa folder list screen, this item is

displays as “Display all”.

Sort*2……Sorts ToruCa in a selected criteria.

Filter*2……Displays only the ToruCa which meets the

selected criteria.

Compose message*1*3……Composes an i-mode mail

with ToruCa attached.

iC transmission*2→p.259

Send Ir data*2 →p.258

Copy to microSD*2 →p.248

Copy to phone*4 →p.249

No. of ToruCa*1……Displays the number of ToruCa

saved in the FOMA terminal.

ToruCa info*1……Displays the ToruCa information.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

*1: Unavailable in the “used ToruCa” folder.

*2: Unavailable in the “microSD” and “Used ToruCa” folders.

*3: Unavailable when 2in1 is in B mode.

*4: Available only for ToruCa stored on the microSD card.

ToruCa display screen (p.204)

Move……Selects the destination folder to move a ToruCa

to the folder.

Copy……Selects the destination folder to copy a ToruCa

to the folder.

Compose message*1……Composes an i-mode mail with

ToruCa attached.

iC transmission*2→p.259

Send Ir data*2 →p.258

Copy to microSD*2 →p.248

Copy to phone*3 →p.249

Update*2*4……Updates ToruCa (detail) information.

Save image*2*4……Saves the ToruCa (detail) image.

Selects the setting from “Normal image/Background

image”.

Add to phonebook*2……Stores the phone number or

mail address displayed on ToruCa.→p.70

Replay*2*4……Plays the Flash movie or animation of

ToruCa (detail) again from the beginning.

Delete……Deletes 1 ToruCa.

*1: Unavailable when 2in1 is in B mode.

zYou may not be able to use the Phone To/AV Phone

To, Mail To, We b To or i-αppli To function depending

on ToruCa.

206

Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa

*2: Unavailable in the “microSD” folder.

*3: Available only for ToruCa stored on the microSD card.

*4: Available only when ToruCa (detail) stored on the FOMA

terminal is displayed.

Making the ToruCa Settings

1i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“Setting”

“ToruCa settings”Select any item:

Receive from R/W……Sets whether to acquire

(Accept) ToruCa or not (Reject) when holding the

FeliCa mark over a reader/writer unit.

When set to “Accept”, set whether to check if the

acquired ToruCa is duplicated with those stored on

the FOMA terminal (except for “Used ToruCa” folder

and expired ToruCa).

Auto reading setting……Sets whether to

automatically read the available ToruCa when

holding the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer

unit to use ToruCa.

When set to “ON”, an available ToruCa on the FOMA

terminal (except for “Used ToruCa” folder and

expired ToruCa) is recognized automatically and

moved to “Used ToruCa” folder.

Scroll……Selects the number of scrolling lines in a

screen from “1 line/3 lines/5 lines”.

Setting Illumination for IC

Card Function

Turn on/off the illumination for IC card function.

1i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“Setting” “IC

card Illumination”“ON” or “OFF”

Locking the IC Card Function

You can lock the IC card function to prevent others

from using the IC card functions without your consent.

zIC card lock is not released even when the power is

turned off.

1On the standby screenw (1 second

or longer)

IC card lock is set and “ ”

appears.

■To release the setting

w (1 second or longer)

Enter your security code

Locking the IC card function when the

power is turned off

You can lock the IC card function to disable the

Osaifu-Keitai when the power is turned off.

1i“OSAIFU-KEITAI”“IC card lock

setting”Enter your security code

“IC lock (power-off)”Select any item:

Maintain……Keeps the same IC card lock setting as

before turning off the power.

IC card lock ON……The IC card function is locked

regardless of the IC card lock setting.

zYou may not be able to copy ToruCa, perform

attaching ToruCa to mail, iC transmission, Send Ir

data, copying to the microSD card or updating

depending on ToruCa.

zWhen the Repetition check is set to “Yes”, you cannot

acquire the same ToruCa. If you want to acquire the

same ToruCa, set to “No”. The default setting is “Yes”.

zIf you hold the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer

when set to “OFF”, a confirmation message about

using the auto reading function or a message that the

auto reading is not available may appear. To use

ToruCa, select “YES” and set this function to “ON”.

zWhen you remove the battery pack, IC card lock is set

automatically. In this case, attaching the battery pack

automatically release IC card lock.

zIC card lock is not released even when the power is

turned off because the battery runs out when IC card

lock is set.

zYou may not be able to download, version upgrade or

uninstall some Osaifu-Keitai i-αppli when IC card lock

is set.

207

1seg

What is 1seg?................................................................................................................. 208

Setting Channels ..................................................................................... 209

Watching 1seg Programs............................................................................... 210

Using G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control ............................... 212

Using Data Broadcasting .......................................................................... 212

Using TV Link ...................................................................................................... 213

Recording Scenes While Watching.............................................................. 213

Using Timer Activation/Recording .......................... 214

Configuring 1seg Settings............................................................................ 215

Notifying New Message Arrival While Watching .............................................. 216

Channel setting

Active 1Seg

G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control

Data broadcast

TV link

Record 1seg

Booking program list/Timer recording list

User settings

Mail ticker

208

1seg

What is 1seg?

1seg is a mobile digital terrestrial audio/video and

data broadcasting service. Use i-mode to get detailed

program information, join a quiz show, enjoy TV

shopping, etc.

For 1seg service details, visit the following website:

The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting

(Dpa)

PC: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/index.html

i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese)

●Using 1seg

z1seg service is provided by TV broadcast station,

etc.

z1seg video/audio/data broadcast can be received

for free, and no application is required.

zThere are two types of data displayed in the

storage area: “Data broadcast” and “Data

broadcast site”.

“Data broadcast” is broadcast with video and audio.

By “Data broadcast site”, a site that TV broadcast

station, etc. prepares is accessed from broadcast

information. “i-mode site”, etc. may be accessed.

i-mode application is required for site access.

zPacket communications charges apply to view

“Data broadcast site” and “i-mode site”.

Information charges may apply for some sites

(i-mode pay sites).

●Signals

1seg is one of the broadcast services, and receive

signals (broadcast waves) different from those of

FOMA services. Programs cannot be viewed in/out of

FOMA range when waves do not reach or broadcast

is paused.

Even in digital terrestrial broadcast range, signals

may be weak or not be received in the following

cases:

• Far from the signal tower

• Hiding behind objects; e.g. in a mountain or

building

• In tunnels, underground areas, buildings, etc.

1seg antenna is built in the FOMA terminal. Also,

attempt to move the antenna, keep the FOMA

terminal away from/close to your body, or move to

another location for better reception.

●Display when using 1seg for the first

time

The disclaimer screen appears.

Press g or j to check content, press d (OK),

then select “YES”.

If “NO” is selected, the screen will not appear from

the next time.

●Storage area for broadcasts

The storage area for broadcasts is a storage area in

the handset that is dedicated to 1seg. Some

information you enter while following the instructions

of data broadcasts when watching programs may be

saved to the storage area for broadcasts.

That includes answers to quizzes, membership

numbers, and your gender, age, and occupation.

Furthermore, stored information may be displayed

while viewing a data broadcast or data broadcasting

site without re-entering or sent to the corresponding

broadcasting company (broadcaster).

To reset storage area→p.215

If another FOMA card is inserted, a message

appears asking whether to initialize storage area.

Select “YES” to initialize. When “NO” is selected,

storage area services are not available.

■Display when reading storage area

When using information stored in storage area while

watching program, “Use saved information? It may

include information used by the same broadcasting

group” appears. Select “YES” not to confirm by

screen display when reading information while

watching the same program hereafter.

If “YES(Always)” is selected, the screen will not

appear from the next time even if programs are

changed.

209

Continued on next page

1seg

Before use

●View procedure

■When a call, etc. arrives while watching or

recording

When one of the following arrives while watching or

recording, video and audio are interrupted and each

function activates (Recording is not interrupted).

Watching can be resumed after each function is

finished.

• Voice call

• Videophone call

• Alarm, Schedule, To Do, booked program (When

“Alarm setting” is set to “Alarm preferred”)

Setting Channels

To use 1seg, set channels and select a channel list

beforehand. Register a channel list for each area.

Selecting the channel list allows you to watch local

channels.

zUp to 10 channel lists can be registered, each of

which can contain up to 50 broadcast stations.

zReceivable channels vary depending on the area.

Registering channel lists

1i“1SEG”“Channel setting”

“Select area”

■To search for channels automatically and

“Auto channel setting”“YES”“YES”Enter

title

To interrupt search, press o (Cancel) or t

then select “YES”.

2Select areaSelect prefecture“YES”

Changing channel lists

Select a channel list to set channels.

1i“1SEG”“Channel list”

The “Channel list” screen

appears.

z1seg programs cannot be viewed if FOMA card (UIM)

is not inserted, subscription to DOCOMO is canceled,

or FOMA service usage is stopped.

zEven if subscribed FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, 1seg

may not be activated, e.g. if 1seg programs are

watched repeatedly out of FOMA range. In this case,

move into FOMA range and retry activation.

zDo not activate in the following situations when

watching 1seg programs for the first time:

• Out of FOMA range

• Self mode activating

zProlonged 1seg watching while charging may shorten

battery life.

■Important

zThe information stored in your mobile phone (still

images recorded with 1seg, TV links, information

saved to the storage area for broadcasts, etc.)

cannot be transferred. We recommend that you take

precautions such as keeping a separate note of

important information.

Step 1 Set channels→p.209

Step 2 View 1seg→p.210

z“Select area” may not work properly depending on the

area. In this case, use “Auto channel setting”.

zPerform “Auto channel setting” in a digital terrestrial

TV service area with strong signals.

z“Remote control No. duplicated” may appear in “Auto

channel setting”. In this case, select area manually.

Channel list

Function menu



p.210

210

1seg

2Select channel list

Channel list is set, and the

“Channel info” screen

appears.

Channel list screen (p.209)

Channel setting→p.209

Edit title……Edit channel list title.

Delete this……Delete the channel list.

Channel info screen (p.210)

Remote control No.……Change channel set to remote

control No.

Delete this……Delete the channel.

When all channels in the channel list are deleted, the

channel list is also deleted.

Watching 1seg Programs

1i“1SEG”“Active 1Seg”

The “1seg” screen appears

with last-viewed channel.

• To end watching, press

y, or t (1 second or

longer), then select “YES”.

• The disclaimer screen

appears the first time 1seg

activates.→p.208

Guide to the 1seg screen

①Program title

②Video

③Subtitles

④Data broadcasting

⑤TV/Data mode→p.212

……TV mode

……Data broadcast mode

⑥ECO mode→p.215

……ECO mode activating

⑦Recording status

……Recording/Timer recording

……Recording paused

⑧Save destination

……microSD

⑨Signal strength (approximate)

appears when out of range.

⑩Channel (remote control No.)

⑪Subtitle reception

appears when receiving subtitles.

⑫Volume

zCurrent channel list cannot be deleted on the channel

list selection screen or channel info screen. Change

the channel list then delete.

Channel info

Function menu



p.210

1seg

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響い

ています。

■○○ニュース

今年の冬は厳しい寒さにな

■今日の天気

東京：晴

Function menu



p.211

zG-GUIDE EPG Remote Control, channel link

displayed on a site or mail message, etc. are also

available to activate 1seg.

“Media To function”→p.147

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響い

ています。

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

■○○ニュース

今年の冬は厳しい寒さにな

■今日の天気

東京：晴

テレビ××

ドキュメンタリー

１１：００−１１：３０

Portrait

Landscape

①

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑬

⑨

⑩

⑪

⑫

⑬

⑧

⑦

⑩

②

③

⑨

①⑪

⑥

⑫

⑧

⑦

Good Poor

211

Continued on next page

1seg

⑬Mail ticker

Ticker displays information on i-mode mail, SMS,

Area Mail and MessageR/F received while viewing

1seg.

Operations available while viewing

1seg

zSome key operations are not available in data

broadcast mode.

• In data broadcast mode, press c/d to highlight/

select a link, v to move between pages, and t

to go back.

1seg screen (p.210)

Program info……Display information on the viewed

program.

Mail*

Inbox……Shows the Inbox folder list screen.

Compose message→p.156

Suggested message……Compose mail by pasting

information on a channel being viewed into the

message body.→p.156

On the recipient handset, the program can be

activated using the Media To function.

Program guide……Activate G-GUIDE EPG Remote

Control.→p.212

Display setting

Switch display……Change screens.

Visual image+DBC……Display TV/data

broadcast.

V.img+Caption+DBC……Display TV, subtitles

and data broadcast.

Data broadcast……Display data broadcast

only. 1seg audio plays.

Subtitles……Show subtitles at bottom

(ON(Wide:Bottom)), at top (ON(Wide:Top)), or hide

(OFF).

Brightness……Adjust brightness between three

levels.

Icon show(Wide) (default: Show always)……Set

whether to always or temporarily show icons other

than program title in landscape mode (p.210).

Sound

Main/Sub sound (default: Main sound)……Set

sound output mode.

Sound switch……Change sounds. Can only be

performed when the sound can be changed.

TV sound w/ closed……Set whether to continue

outputting sound when the FOMA terminal is closed

while watching.

ECO mode (default: OFF)……Set whether to reduce

backlight brightness to conserve battery.

Channel

Channel info……Display information on the

selected channel list.

Channel list→p.209

Channel setting→p.209

Key Action

vForward channel selection

0 to 9

One-touch channel selection

Press keys corresponding to

channels from 1 to 12.

v (1 second or

longer)

Channel search

Searches for receivable channels

in frequency order. To interrupt

search, press o or t.

c (a ( ▲マナー)/

s (▼メモ))

Volume adjustment

tMute

9 (1 second or

longer)

Switch screen directions

In order of “Portrait” → “Wide (90°

right)” → “Wide (90° left)”

rSwitch TV/data BC

r (1 second or

longer)

Switch display

In order of “Data broadcast”→

“Visual image+DBC” →

“V.img+Caption+DBC”

oStill image recording,

Recording end

o (1 second or

longer)

Recording start

pActivate G-GUIDE EPG Remote

Control

zSubtitles may not appear depending on the program.

zData broadcast cannot be displayed in landscape

display.

zE.g. when you move to another location and perform

channel search, you may find a channel that was not

found in Auto channel setting. Perform “Add Channel”

to watch the channel from the next time.

212

1seg

Select service……Select service to view when

multiple services (programs) are broadcast from the

same channel.

Add channel……Add currently viewed channel to

channel list.

Data broadcast

TV link list……Display the TV link list screen.

→p.213

Re-read……Reload the displayed data broadcast

site.

Show certificate……Display certificate used on

SSL communication.→p.149

Back to data BC……End viewing data broadcast

site and return to data broadcast.

Data BC settings

Set image disp. (default: ON)……Set whether

to display images on data broadcast site.

Sound effect (default: ON)……Set whether to

enable sound effects for data broadcast/data

broadcast site.

Reset disp. set.……Set to hide a confirmation

screen afterwards by selecting “YES(Always)”.

Perform this setting to redisplay a confirmation

screen.

Switch TV/data BC……Switch between TV and data

broadcast modes while viewing.

Add desktop icon→p.94

*: When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and send

i-mode mail.→p.320

Using G-GUIDE EPG Remote

Control

<G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control>

G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control allows activating

1seg from program guide or booking program/timer

recording.→p.194

1i“1SEG”“Program guide”

The program guide appears.

■To view a program

Highlight a programu (TV起動 (Activate

TV))

Using Data Broadcasting

In 1seg, use data broadcast as well as video/audio.

Make use of program-linked site and other various

information including pictures and videos.

Select item (link) to use Phone To/Mail To functions,

etc.→p.147

zData broadcast cannot be displayed in landscape

display.

11seg screen (TV mode) (p.210)

r

Data broadcast mode activates and

appears.

■To view data broadcast only

1Seg screenu (FUNC)“Display setting”

“Switch display”“Data broadcast”

2Select an item (link)

If i-mode access confirmation appears, select

“YES”. If “YES(Always)” is selected, the screen

will not appear from the next time.

• Operation during site viewing→p.139

zTo use downloaded Program guide i-αppli, select

“Program guide” from the Software setting on the

Software list screen (p.188).

z1seg audio plays in data broadcast mode.

zIn data broadcast/data broadcast site text entry,

pictographs cannot be entered.

zIf “YES(Always)” is selected on the data broadcast

confirmation screen, data broadcast information

automatically updates and packet communications

charges may apply.

213

Continued on next page

1seg

Using TV Link

Sites or memos can be added to TV link depending

on data broadcast/data broadcast site. Add to TV link

to view often-used sites or memos easily.

Adding to TV link

If selected item (link) can be added to TV link, a

message appears asking whether to add to TV link.

zUp to 50 entries can be added.

1On the 1seg screen (data broadcast

mode) (p.212)Select available

item“YES”

■If selected URL or memo is already added

A message appears asking whether to overwrite

the existing one. Select “YES” to overwrite.

Opening sites or memos from TV link

1i“1SEG”“TV link”Select TV link

If i-mode access

confirmation appears, select

“YES”.

■If validity period has

expired

A message appears asking

whether to delete the link.

●TV link list icons

zVideos/Subtitles do not appear even if accessing

data broadcast site.

TV link list screen (p.213)

Display detail……View Title, URL, Outline, Contents

type and Expiration Date.

No. of TVlink……View the number of stored TV links.

Delete this/Delete selected/Delete all……Select the

deletion method.

“Selecting multiple”→p.38

Recording Scenes While

Watching

Save current program as a video or picture.

zRecorded videos are saved to a microSD card.

• Maximum number of videos: 99*1

• Maximum recording time*2: 600 min.*3

*1 : Actual storable count may be decreased

depending on the data size.

*2 : Maximum recording time varies depending on the

channel or program.

*3 : Figure estimated with 2GB microSD card.

zPictures are saved to the Image folder in Data Box

1Seg folder.

<Example: To record video>

1On the 1seg screen (p.210)

o (1 second or longer)

Recording starts.

Channels cannot be changed during recording.

■To record picture

o

Picture is saved.

Recording ends and video is saved.

• If storage area becomes full, recording

automatically ends and video recorded until

then is saved.

zURLs or memos added to TV link are only available on

1seg, not on i-mode or full browser.

zSome links may have validity periods.

Icon Type

Memo

Data broadcast site

i-mode contents

ＴＶｌｉｎｋ

□□□□

○○○○

△△△△

××××

TV link list

Function menu



p.213

zRecording may not be performed due to copyright

restrictions, etc.

zRecorded video or picture cannot be set as standby

screen, ring tone, receiving screen, etc.

zData broadcast cannot be recorded.

zThe following shows saved video file name and title:

File name: PRGXXX (XXX: Alphanumeric)

Title: YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX (Y: Year, M: Month, D:

Day, h: Hour, m: Minute, X: Number)

zThe following shows saved picture file name and title:

YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX (Y: Year, M: Month, D: Day, h:

Hour, m: Minute, X: Number)

zVideo cannot be recorded if signal strength is .

214

1seg

Using Timer Activation/

Recording

Set date and time, channel, program title, etc. Alarm

sounds at specified date and time indicating the

program/recording start.

zTimer activation/recording alarms→p.289

zUp to 100 activation/recording entries can be

booked.

zProgram guide i-αppli, channel link displayed on a

site or mail message, etc. are also available for

timer activation/recording.

<Example: To book activation>

1i“1SEG”“Booking program list”

The “Booking program list”

screen appears.

■To book timer

recording

“Timer recording list”

The “Timer recording list”

screen appears.

2u (FUNC)“New”

■To edit booked schedule

u (FUNC)“Edit”

Software key o displays “New” if no entry is

stored and “Edit” if any.

3Select any item

Date setting (Start/End)*1……Enter date and

time to start/end.

Enter date……Enter date and time.

Choose date……Select date from Calendar,

then enter time.

Channel……Select channel.

Edit title……Enter program title.

Repeat……Select “1 time”, “Daily” or “Select

day”.

Alarm*2……Set whether to play the alarm at

specified date and time of time recording.

Alarm*3……Select “ON”, “ON/Set time” (“15

seconds before” to “10 seconds before”) or “OFF” for

alarm at timer activation date and time.

Alarm tone……Select the alarm tone from

Clock Alarm Tone or melody, i-motion or music

folders at timer activation date and time.

Vol ume……Use c to adjust the alarm tone

volume.

Priority*2……Set operation to be performed

when the start date and time arrives while using

1seg/Music group (1seg, Data Box (1seg), Music,

Music&Video Channel).

Recording……Interrupt/End current operation

to start recording.

Operation preferred……A screen appears

asking whether to start recording. Select “YES”

to interrupt/end current operation to start

recording.

Activate TV w/ alarm……Set whether to

activate 1seg from the alarm notification screen.

If “ON” is selected, press d (TV) then select “YES”

to activate 1seg in alarm notification.

*1 : For booking program, set “Date setting(from)”.

*2 : Set only for timer recording.

*3 : Set only for booking program.

4Set each itemo (Finish)

zIf signal strength becomes , recording continues

but video/audio are not saved.

z“ ” flashes during recording.

zRecording is not interrupted even if screens are

changed by Multitask or a call arrives.

zDuring recording, alarm sounds for about 2 seconds,

one minute before recording scheduled time.

Operation is performed based on “Priority” set at the

time of timer recording registration as follows:

• “Recording”: Confirmation message appears, video

recording is finished and timer recording starts.

• “Operation preferred”: Message appears asking

whether to start timer recording. Select “YES” to

end video recording and start timer recording.

Select “NO” to continue video recording.

zSome data cannot be recorded until the memory is

full.

z1seg contains copy control signals: “Copy Never”,

“Copy Once”, “Copy Free”. Each broadcast station

sets copy control signals.

z“Copy Never” program cannot be recorded. When

copy control signal changes to “Copy Never” during

recording, recording stops and video recorded until

then will be saved.

Booking program list

Function menu



p.215

215

Continued on next page

1seg

●When recording is finished

“ ” appears on the standby screen. Select “ ” to

view up to 100 results from the latest.

Select recording result to play recorded program.

Booking program list screen

(p.214)/Timer recording list

screen (p.214)

New, Edit……Newly add or edit booking program/timer

recording entries.→p.214

Sort……Sort entries by selected condition.

Delete……Select “Delete this”, “Delete selected”, “Delete

past” or “Delete all”.

“Selecting multiple”→p.38

• “Delete past” deletes entries with start date and time set

before current date and time.

Memory info*……View video storage capacity.

*: Only available on the Timer recording list screen.

Configuring 1seg Settings

1i“1SEG”“User settings”

2Select any item

Subtitles……Show subtitles at bottom

(ON(Wide:Bottom)), at top (ON(Wide:Top)), or hide

(OFF).

Rec. while low battery……Set whether to continue

recording when battery becomes low while recording.

ON (default)……Continue recording without

displaying the confirmation screen.

OFF……A screen appears asking whether to

finish recording.

TV sound while closed (default: ON)……Set

whether to continue outputting sound when the

FOMA terminal is closed while watching.

ECO mode (default: OFF)……Set whether to

reduce backlight brightness to conserve battery.

Display light……Set display light for watching.

Constant light (default)……Always turn on

display light.

Lighting duration……Set display light

duration (01 to 30 minutes).

Data BC settings

Set image disp. (default: ON)……Set whether

to display images on data broadcast site.

Sound effect (default: ON)……Set whether to

enable sound effects for data broadcast/data

broadcast site.

Reset disp. set.……Set to hide a confirmation

screen afterwards by selecting “YES(Always)”.

Perform this setting to redisplay a confirmation

screen.

Icon show(Wide) (default: Show always)……Set

whether to always or temporarily show icons other

than program title in landscape display (p.210).

Check TV settings……Confirm User settings.

Reset channel setting……Delete all channels.

Reset storage area……Delete channel information

from storage area.

Delete this……Delete selected channel only.

Delete all……Delete all channels.

Reset TV settings……Reset “User settings” to

default.

zIf multiple alarm entries are added for the same date

and time, priority is given to an entry with earlier start

date and time. If the same start date and time is set,

priority is given to an entry added later.

zTo set alarm illumination, go to “Illumination set” then

“Schedule/Alarm”.

zRecording is not possible if the FOMA terminal is in

the following statuses one minute before start date

and time:

• Powered off

• During Dial lock/Omakase Lock

• During infrared data exchange/iC communication

• Software updating

zRecording may not start at specified date and time in

the following cases:

• Weak signals

• Unstable reception

• Video image is not provided

• Insufficient memory in destination

• During international roaming

• Out of FOMA service area

z1seg audio does not play while recording by timer

recording. To play audio, press t or adjust volume.

216

1seg

Notifying New Message

Arrival While Watching

Ticker shows new message arrival while viewing

1seg: i-mode mail, SMS, Area Mail and MessageR/F.

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“Mail

ticker”Select any item

Display sender……Display sender name stored in

Phonebook.

Display sender/subject……Display sender name

stored in Phonebook and subject.

Not display……Hide mail ticker.

zIf set to “ON”, data broadcast site information may

automatically update and packet communications

charges may apply even when the FOMA terminal is

closed.

zWhen activating the view style in ECO mode, cache

data broadcast site data will be cleared.

z1seg activation confirmation screen (p.208) is not

reset.

zEven if set to “Show temporarily”, an icon may appear

in a weak signal location.

zOnly new arrival appears in the following cases:

• Sender e-mail address is not stored in phonebook

• Area Mail or MessageR/F arrives

• New filtering message comes to lock-active folder

• Inbox is locked

• Original lock is active for the phonebook or message

217

Full Browser

Displaying Website Designed for PC ............................................................ 218

Setting the Full Browser.................................................................... 221

Cookie............................................................................................................................. 221

Referer............................................................................................................................ 222

Full Browser

Full Browser settings

Home URL, bookmark and other data registered in Full Browser are not available for i-mode.

Furthermore, the settings performed in Full Browser are invalid for i-mode.

218

Full Browser

Displaying Website Designed

for PC

You can enjoy viewing websites designed for PC with

the Full Browser function. Some websites

incompatible with i-mode can be displayed correctly.

zSome websites may not be displayed or be

displayed incorrectly.

zNote that the communication charge can become

expensive if large volumes of data is acquired by

viewing websites containing many image data or

downloading files. For details on packet

communication fee, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.

zYou can view a website composed of frames*1. You

can also select a frame to display it.→p.220

zYou can view SSL/TLS*2-compliant websites in Full

Browser.

*1: The “frame” used in this chapter refers to each of

separated sections that constitute a website page and

differs from that used for framed photography.

*2: SSL and TLS are authentication/encryption technology to

protect your privacy in data transmissions. Data sent to or

received from a SSL/TLS page is encrypted to prevent

hackers from eavesdropping data, site spoofing or

altering, thus making credit card transactions and the

sending of personal information (e.g. address) safer.

Displaying a website

1o“Full Browser”

2Select any item:

Home……Displays a website with the URL

registered as home URL.

Bookmark……Displays the website registered as

bookmark.

URL history→p.138

Enter URL……Enters a URL to display the website.

Full Browser settings→p.221

■When the confirmation message asking

whether to use Full Browser appears

The default setting of “Access setting” (setting

whether to use Full Browser) is “OFF”.

When “OFF” is set for “Access setting”, the

confirmation message asking whether to use

Full Browser appears. Read the given notes

carefully and perform the setting.

When you select “Yes” on the confirmation

message, “ON” is set for “Access setting” (p.221)

and the setting will be retained.

●Guide to the Full Browser screen

①Tab

• As many tabs and titles as the number of

websites displayed simultaneously (if there is no

title, the URL is displayed)

• “ ” indicating that the selected frame (p.220)

appears

• “ ” is also displayed when another frame is in

communication while the selected frame is

displayed (p.220).

②Scroll bar

Current position in the displayed website (Not

displayed for Mobile layout)

zYou cannot save a page displayed in Full Browser as a

screen memo.

zWebsites displayed in Full Browser cannot be viewed

in i-mode.

zThe Full Browser does not support Flash movies or

PDF.

zBe sure to insert the FOMA card (UIM) before setting

“Access setting”.

zWhen “Access setting” is set to “ON” and the FOMA

card (UIM) is replaced, the “Access setting” changes

to “OFF”.

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXX XXXX XX

●XXXX

②

①

③

Full Browser

④

Function menu



p.220

219

Full Browser

③Change window icon

Pressing o ( ) switches pages when

multiple websites are open.

④or

Appears during connection to the Internet with Full

Browser.

(Displays “ ” when Mobile layout mode is used)

●Layout

2 display mode are available (Original layout/Mobile

layout).

■Original layout

Websites are displayed in the similar size to the

display of 800 dots wide × 600 dots high on a PC. You

can view the area not displayed on the screen by

scrolling vertically and horizontally.

■Mobile layout

Websites are displayed in the width of a FOMA

terminal display. Only vertical scrolling is required for

viewing websites.

■Switching the display mode

The display mode switches between Original layout

and Mobile layout each time you select “Change disp.

mode” from the function menu.

• The default mode can be set in “Display mode

setting” (p.221) of “Full Browser settings”.

• The display mode is retained when Full Browser is

exit. The same display mode is applied when the

Full Browser is activated next time.

Operations on the Full Browser screen

●Scrolling

●Useful keys for the Full Browser screen

* : Available only in Original layout.

Mobile layout

Original layout

XXXXXX

XXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

Key Description

bScrolls to the direction that the

key is pressed.

Holding the key scrolls the

screen continuously in the same

direction.

a (▲マナー )

s (▼メモ)

Scrolls up or down by screens.

a (▲マナー ) (1

second or longer)

s (▼メモ) (1

second or longer)

Jumps to the top or bottom of

the website.

Key Description

1Zooms out

(Makes the font size smaller in Mobile

layout)

2*Selecting a desired portion of the entire

page, then displaying the designated part.

(Not available for the landscape screen)

3Zooms in

(Makes the font size bigger in Mobile layout)

4Goes back one page from the current page.

5Displays the Bookmark folder list screen.

6Jump forward to a page that has been

stored in the FOMA terminal’s cache.

9*Displays the website in landscape screen or

release the landscape screen (return to the

portrait screen).

0Displays a description of an operation

assigned to a key.

zThe function key is available in the landscape screen

even though the function screen is not displayed.

zThe landscape screen returns to the portrait screen

after pressing t to close any window while multiple

windows are active.

220

Full Browser

●Displaying a page composed of frames

You can view websites composed of frames that are

designed for PC.

1Full Browser screen (p.218)Display a

website composed of frames

2Select a frame

The selected frame is displayed.

■To return to the all frames screen

t

●Uploading images

You can upload JPEG or GIF images stored in your

FOMA terminal to websites depending on websites.

zProcedure for uploading images depends on

websites. Follow the procedure described on the

website you visit.

Full Browser screen (p.218)

Add bookmark……Adds the website to the bookmark.

Up to 100 entries can be stored.

Bookmark……Opens the Bookmark folder list screen. Up

to 12 Bookmark folders can be created, and the minimum

folders are 3 (including Secret folders).

Save image……Saves the image on the displayed page.

Enter URL……Enters a URL to display the website.

URL history→p.138

Change side mode⇔Release side mode*1……Displays

the website in landscape screen or release the landscape

screen (return to the portrait screen).

Zoom*2……Selects the screen size from “Small 2/Small

1/Standard/Large 1/Large 2/Zoom in position”.

When you select the “Zoom in position”, select a desired

portion of the entire page.

Change font size*3……Selects the font size from “Small/

Standard/Large/X-large”.→p.93

Window

Open new window……“Using multi window”

→p.140

Close window……Closes the displayed window.

Change window……Switches windows when

multiple websites are open.

All frames……Returns to the all frames screen from the

Selected frame screen

Change disp. mode……Switches between “Original

layout” and “Mobile layout”.

Reload……Refreshes the displayed website.

Compose message……Pastes the URL of the displayed

website to compose an i-mode message.

History back……Goes back one page from the current

page.

History forward……Returns to the page that had been

displayed before performing “History back”.

Add shortcut →p.94

Home

Set as home URL……Registers the URL of the

displayed website as the home URL. Only one URL

can be stored.

Display home……Displays a website registered as

home URL.

Site info

Title……Displays the title of the displayed website.

URL……Displays the URL of the displayed website.

zFor a website including several frames, all the frames

may not be displayed (resulting in frames without

characters or images).

zYou cannot upload multiple images that exceed 80K

bytes in total or data in which the selected image and

other data exceed 100K bytes in total.

zSome websites may not support uploading function.

zYou cannot upload images that are not allowed to be

output to a device outside the FOMA terminal.

XXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXX

＜＞

XXXXX

XXXX

XXX

XXXX

XXXXX

XXXX

・XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXX XXX XXXX

All frames

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXX

＜＞

XXXXX

XXXX

XXX

XXXXX

XXXX

・XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXX XXX XXX XXXX

Selected frame

XXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

●XXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

＜＞

221

Full Browser

Certificate……Displays the SSL/TLS certificate

details when the displayed website supports SSL/

TLS.

Browser settings

Replay……Plays an animation in the displayed

website from the beginning.

Set image disp. (default: ON)……Sets whether to

display images. When “OFF” is set, “ ” appears

instead of images.

Referer setting (default: Send)→p.222

Cookie settings (default: Valid)→p.222

Delete cookies→p.222

Change CHR code……Changes the character code

to redisplay a website that is not displayed correctly.

Help……Displays a description of an operation assigned

to a key.

*1: Unavailable in Mobile layout.

*2: Appears when Original layout mode is used.

*3: Appears when Mobile layout mode is used.

Setting the Full Browser

1o“Full Browser”“Full Browser

settings”Select any item:

Access setting (default: No)……Sets whether to

use the Full Browser.

Home URL (default: Google (http://www.google.co.jp))

……Sets the home URL.

Scroll

Speed (default: High speed)……Selects the

scrolling speed from “High speed/Low speed”.

During scroll in focus (default: OFF)……Sets

whether to highlight the linked pages while

scrolling.

Set image disp. (default: ON)……Sets whether to

display images. When “OFF” is set, “ ” appears

instead of images.

Cookie settings (default: Valid)→p.222

Delete cookies→p.222

Referer setting (default: Send)→p.222

Display mode setting (default: Original layout)

Original layout (default: Standard)……Selects

the display from “Small 2/Small 1/Standard/

Large 1/Large 2”.

Mobile layout (default: Standard)……Selects

the font size from “Small/Standard/Large/X-

large”.

Script setting (default: Valid)……Sets whether to

validate JavaScript * or not when displaying a page.

Some websites may be displayed incorrectly unless

“Script setting” is set to “Valid”.

Window open guard (default: Invalid)……Sets

whether to automatically open a new window by

using JavaScript*. When set to “Valid”, a window is

not opened automatically.

Tab display setting (default: Open at the back side)

……Sets whether to switch the screen (Open at the

front) or not (Open at the back side) while the current

screen is displayed.

Check settings……Checks the Full Browser

settings.

Reset……Resets the settings specified in “Full

Browser settings” to the default settings.

* : JavaScript is a programming language that can be

included on web pages to make them more

interactive.

Using Cookie* enables you to effectively access the

websites that you have seen once.

* : Cookie is the mechanism for temporarily saving the date

you accessed the website, number of accesses and your

other information. The information is sent from server,

saved temporarily in your FOMA terminal and used for

contents service.

If Cookie is sent, the information such as date you

accessed the website and number of accesses is also

sent to the site. Please note that NTT DOCOMO is not

responsible for any reveal of your information to third

parties because of sending Cookie.

However, some websites and contents services require

you to validate the Cookie settings for their correct display

and use.

zPNG and BMP images are automatically saved in an

“OUDXXX” (XXX are numerals) folder under the

“OTHER” folder of the microSD card.

222

Full Browser

Setting Cookie

1o“Full Browser”“Full Browser

settings”“Cookie settings”Select

any item:

Valid……Always validates Cookie.

No confirmation is made when Cookie is sent or

received.

Invalid……Always invalidates Cookie.

Notify (sending)……Enables you to choose

whether to send Cookie every time you connect to a

page. No confirmation is made when Cookie is

received and the information is saved in your FOMA

terminal.

Notify (receiving)……Enables you to choose

whether to receive Cookie every time you connect to

a page. No confirmation is made when Cookie is

sent.

Notify (send/recv.)……Enables you to choose

whether to send or receive Cookie every time you

connect to a page.

Deleting Cookie

You can delete the Cookies for Full Browser stored in

your FOMA terminal.

1o“Full Browser”“Full Browser

settings”“Delete Cookies”Enter

your security code“YES”

All the Cookies for Full Browser stored in your

FOMA terminal are deleted. (You cannot delete

them separately.)

Referer

You can set whether to send Referer*.

* : Referer is information of source link. Sending Referer

transfers information such as the page from which you

access the site.

Please note that NTT DOCOMO is not responsible for any

reveal of your information to third parties because of

sending Referer.

However, you may not access the linked pages in some

websites unless Referer is sent.

Setting Referer

1o“Full Browser”“Full Browser

settings”“Referer setting”Select

any item:

Send……Sends Referer.

Unsend……Does not send Referer.

Notify……Confirms whether to send Referer.

zCookies are deleted in the ascending order of no use

when the number and size of Cookies exceed the

maximum limit.

zResetting the Full Browser settings deletes Cookies.

223

Data Display/Edit/Management

Data Box ......................................................................................................................... 224

■Mastering still images

Displaying the Stored Images .......................................................................... 225

Editing Images................................................................................................ 231

■Mastering movies

Playing Movies/i-motion ...................................................................................... 233

Editing Movies ................................................................................................. 235

■Mastering video

Playing Video ................................................................................................ 235

■Mastering Chara-den

What is Chara-den?........................................................................................................ 237

Saving Chara-den Character as Image or Movie..................................... 239

■Mastering melodies

Playing Melodies.................................................................................................. 240

■Mastering Kisekae Tool

Managing Kisekae Tool................................................................................ 242

■Mastering Memory Cards

microSD Card ................................................................................................................. 243

Displaying the Data in the microSD Card ....................................................................... 247

Exchanging the Data Between the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal......................... 248

Moving the Copyrighted Data Among the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal

............................................................................................................... 250

Managing the microSD Card .......................................................................................... 251

Setting the USB Mode .......................................................................... 251

Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Reader/Writer................................................. 252

Setting How to Print Images Stored on the microSD Card ......................... 252

■Mastering various data

Working with Folders and Files....................................................................................... 253

Managing the Phonebook and SMS on the FOMA Card............................ 254

■

Transferring data with Infrared data exchange/iC communication/cable connection

Infrared Data Exchange/iC Communication ................................................................... 255

Forwarding Data with Infrared Data Exchange .............................. 257

Forwarding Data with iC Communication.............................................. 259

Forwarding Data by Cable Connection ............................................... 260

Barring Phonebook Image Forwarding ................................................. 260

Using the Infrared Remote Control Function .................................................................. 261

■Mastering PDF/Document viewer

Viewing PDF Data ...................................................................................... 261

Viewing Documents ............................................................................... 263

PDF Data Screen/Document View Screen ..................................................................... 263

My picture

Edit image

i-motion

Edit movie

Video player

Rec. Chara-den

Melody

Kisekae Tool

Movable contents

USB mode setting

DPOF setting

UIM operation

Infrared data exchange

iC communication

OBEX™ connection

Forwarding image

My document

Document viewer

224

Data Display/Edit/Management

Data Box

In Data Box, still images and movies shot using the

FOMA terminal’s camera or data downloaded from

mails or websites are saved.

■Folders

zThe following items and folders are prepared and

you can categorize the data into the folders

depending on the file type.

Folder Contents

My picture

Inbox You can select this folder to save

still images shot using the FOMA

terminal’s camera, and images

retrieved from websites, mails or

Bar code reader.

Images copied from the microSD

card or forwarded by infrared data

exchange are automatically saved

to this folder.

Camera You can select this folder to save

same images as Inbox.

Images shot with Chara-den

shooting are automatically saved

to this folder.

Decomail-

picture*1

Images for Deco-mail® are pre-

installed. You can select this folder

to save same images as Inbox.

Decorate PI*2 Deco-mail® pictographs are stored

in the folder which is arranged by

the categories.

Deco-mail® pictographs

downloaded from website,

attached to mails or copied from

the microSD card are saved.

Pre-installed Standby screens, wakeup images

and animations are pre-installed.

Secret*3 Save the images you want to

prevent others from viewing.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder to save

same images as Inbox.

Original animation Animations created from

continuous mode and original

animations are stored.

micro

Picture Still images you shot, JPEG/GIF

images copied from the FOMA

terminal, JPEG/GIF images stored

on the microSD card from a PC

are saved.

Decorate

PI*2

Deco-mail® pictographs copied

from the FOMA terminal or stored

on the microSD card from a PC

are saved.

Image

Box

GIF animations and SWF Flash

movie copied from the FOMA

terminal, JPEG images, GIF

animations stored and SWF Flash

on the microSD card from a PC

are saved.

Frame Frames are pre-installed.

Frames retrieved from websites

are automatically saved to this

folder.

Stamp Image stamps are pre-installed.

Stamps retrieved from websites

are automatically saved to this

folder.

Music

Playlist Playlists created on the FOMA

terminal are saved.

Inbox You can select this folder to save

music data.

WMA Music data transferred from a PC

to the microSD card is saved.

Movable contents Music data moved from the FOMA

terminal to the microSD card is

saved.

Pre-installed Music data is pre-installed.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder to save

same the music data as Inbox.

Music&Video Channel

Delivery program The stored programs appear.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder to save

the programs that is moved from

the Delivery program.

i-motion

Inbox You can select this folder to save

movies shot using the FOMA

terminal’s camera, movies and

i-motion retrieved from websites or

mails.

Movies/i-motion copied from the

microSD card or forwarded by

infrared data exchange are

automatically saved to this folder.

Camera You can select this folder to save

same movies and i-motion as Inbox.

Movies shot with Chara-den

shooting are automatically saved

to this folder.

Folder Contents

225

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

*1: Images set to functions cannot be saved.

*2: You can save only Deco-mail® pictographs (20 dots wide

× 20 dots high, non-file-restricted JPEG/GIF images, GIF

animations) to this folder.

*3: Displayed only in Secret or Secret data only mode.

*4: You can create up to 20 folders with “Add folder”. Enter

the folder name when using “Add folder”. You can change

the folder name afterwards using “Edit folder name”.

*5: Movies/i-motion with video are saved.

*6: Movies/i-motion with sound only (including the music data

of AAC format) can be stored.

Displaying the Stored Images

Still images shot using the FOMA terminal’s camera or

downloaded from websites can be displayed in My

picture of the Data Box.

1i“DATA BOX”“My picture”

The “Folder list” screen

appears.

Contents of the My picture

folder→p.224

■To view still images

recorded with 1seg

i“DATA BOX”“1Seg”

“Image”

2Select a folder

The “Image list” screen (9

images) appears.

Image list screen→p.226

■To search images by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

“YES”

Secret*3 Save the movies and i-motion you

want to prevent others from viewing.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder to save

same movies and i-motion as Inbox.

micro

SD Video

*5 Movies you shot, movies/i-motion

copied from the FOMA terminal or

movies stored on the microSD

card from a PC are saved.

Multimedia

Movable contents Movie/i-motion moved from the

FOMA terminal to the microSD

card is saved.

Playlist This folder is used for playing a

movie playlist.→p.234

Melody

Inbox You can select this folder to save

melodies retrieved from websites,

mails or Bar code reader.

Melodies copied from the microSD

card or forwarded by infrared data

exchange are automatically saved

to this folder.

Pre-installed Melodies and sound effect are pre-

installed.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder to save

same melodies as Inbox.

Voice announce Voice recorded using the voice

announce function is automatically

saved to this folder.

microSD Melodies copied from the FOMA

terminal or stored on the microSD

card from a PC are saved.

Playlist This folder is used for playing a

melody playlist.→p.242

My document

Inbox PDF data is pre-installed.

You can select this folder to save

PDF data obtained from websites

or mail. PDF files copied from a

microSD card or forwarded by

infrared data exchange are

automatically saved to this folder.

User-created

folder*4

You can select this folder like Inbox

to save PDF data.

microSD PDF files copied from the FOMA

terminal or PC to a microSD card

are saved.

Chara-den

Chara-den is pre-installed. Chara-den retrieved from

websites are automatically saved to this folder.

Kisekae Tool

Packages are pre-installed. Packages retrieved from

websites are automatically saved to this folder.

Folder Contents

1Seg

Image

Inbox 1seg still images are automatically

saved here.

User-

created

folder*4

Still images can be moved from

Inbox to save here.

Video microSD 1seg videos are saved here.

Document viewer

microSD Documents obtained from mail or

copied from a PC to a microSD

card are saved.

Folder Contents

Folder list

Function menu



p.253

Image list

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

Function menu



p.228

226

Data Display/Edit/Management

3Select an image

The “My picture” screen

appears.

Use v to display the

previous or next image.

■To switch the screen

mode

p (Normal/Full)

In the Full screen mode, the

oblong image is displayed

just as it is, and rectangular

image rotates to the right 90

degrees and displayed.

■To zoom in an image

d ()

The image is zoomed in or out by one step each

time you press o (+) or p (-).

Pressing u (Actual) displays the image in the

actual size.

If the image does not fit in the screen, use b to

scroll the image.

To return to the original zoom, press d (Back).

Guide to the 9 images view/list view

●Setting the Image list display mode

1i“SETTINGS”“Display”“Viewer

settings”Select any item:

List only (default)……Changes to the list view.

9 images……Changes to the images view.

●Guide to the 9 images view/list view

■9 images

9 images stored on the FOMA terminal appear on the

screen.

* Original animations are always displayed in list view.

■List only

11 images are listed on the screen.

■Image type icon

zThe following images cannot be displayed:

• An image which exceeds 2M bytes

• An image whose width or height exceeds 2,592 dots

or total number of dots exceeds 2,592 × 1,944 dots

• A progressive JPEG or GIF image whose total

number of dots exceeds 854 × 480

zWhile displaying in the large size, you cannot change

to the previous or next image by using v or display

the function menu.

zWhen enlarging an image larger than 1,705 dots wide

× 1,705 dots high, you may not be able to display the

image in the actual size.

zOriginal animation, GIF-formatted animation or Flash

movie cannot be displayed in the large size.

zFlash movies are played at the volume set in “Phone”

in the “Ring volume” settings (if “Step” is set, Flash

movies are played at the “Level 2” volume).

My picture

Function menu



p.228

Icon Description

JPEG format image

GIF format image

GIF (IFM) frame, image stamp

SWF Flash movie

MP4 movie/i-motion

(Blue note)

MP4 i-motion with sound effect

(Orange note)

ASF i-motion

MP4 i-motion with playback restriction

MP4 format i-motion with sound

effect and playback restriction

Partially downloaded i-motion

(Green note)

i-motion that can be moved to the

FOMA terminal (Phone)

(Blue note)

Sound effected i-motion that can be

moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone)

i-motion that is prohibited to move to the

FOMA terminal (Phone)

AFD Chara-den

Video recorded with 1seg

Image to which the FOMA card security

function applies

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

２００８／０８／０１０６：２０

２００８／０７／２８１７：１５

２００８／０７／２８０９：５０

２００８／０７／２７１０：４８

２００８／０７／２７０８：１８

２００８／０７／２６２２：３２

２００８／０７／２６１２：５５

２００８／０７／２６１０：２３

２００８／０７／２６１０：２０

２００８／０７／２６１０：１０

Pop-up

guide

Image type icon

Title

Allowable

operation

icon

9 images List only

Image type icon

Retrieval

method icon

Title

Allowable

operation icon

Retrieval method icon

(Disp SW)

Ｃａｍｅｒａ

227

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

: Data that are file-restricted or not allowed

to be attached to mails or output from the

FOMA terminal

: i-motion with playback restriction (“ ”

turns to “ ” when the playback count,

period or limit expires)

: Movable only when the FOMA card being used

was also used to save the i-motion

: Movable only when the model and FOMA card

being used were also used to save the

i-motion

■Retrieval method icon

■Allowable operation icon

: Movable only when the FOMA card being used

was also used to save the i-motion

: Movable only when the model and FOMA card

being used were also used to save the

i-motion

■File format

Icon Description

No icon Pre-installed data

Data downloaded from site, mail,

ToruCa or retrieved from i-αppli

Data you shot with camera

Data acquired via Infrared data exchange,

iC communication, the microSD card, Bar

code reader or PC

Downloaded frames and image stamps

Chara-den shots

Data recorded with 1seg

Data clipped out of PDF data

Icon Description

Movies/i-motion of QVGA size (can be

displayed only on the i-motion folder)

Movies/i-motion data of VGA size (can be

displayed only on the i-motion folder)

Can be attached to i-mode mail (2M bytes

or smaller)

Can be inserted into Deco-mail®

Can be set to the screen

Can be specified as Ring tone

Can be transferred via Infrared data

exchange and iC communication

Can be copied to the microSD card

Can be edited

i-motion data that can be moved to the

microSD card

Larger than 10M bytes (10M bytes is not

included) (can be displayed only on the

microSD folder)

Folder File format

My picture

Inbox JPEG, GIF, SWF

Camera

Decomail-picture

Decorate PI JPEG, GIF

Pre-installed JPEG, SWF

Secret JPEG, GIF, SWF

User-created folder

Original animation −

microSD JPEG, GIF, SWF

Frame IFM

Stamp

Music

Playlist −

Inbox 3GP

WMA WMA

Movable contents SB2

Pre-installed 3GP

User-created folder

Music&Video Channel

Delivery program 3GP, MP4

User-created folder

i-motion

Inbox MP4

Camera

Secret

User-created folder

microSD MP4, ASF (ASF is for

playback only)

Movable contents SB1

Playlist −

Melody

Inbox SMF, MFi

Pre-installed MFi

User-created folder SMF, MFi

Voice announce −

microSD SMF, MFi

Playlist −

My document

Inbox PDF

User-created folder

microSD

Chara-den

−AFD

228

Data Display/Edit/Management

■Titles and file names

• Still images or movies you shot are automatically

titled and named.

Title

: yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm

(Year/Month/Day Time

)

File name

: yyyymmddhhmmxxx

Date and time*

(3-digit number is added in the xxx part for still image)

* : The time when the still image is saved or when the

movie shooting is finished is used. Note that the time

when the movie is saved is used if the “Auto save set” is

set to “OFF”.

• Original titles are assigned to downloaded i-motion

and Chara-den characters.

• The file names and titles are the same for

downloaded images.

• Titles and file names of videos or still images

recorded with 1seg→p.213

• The title is displayed on the Image list screen of the

FOMA terminal.

• The file name is displayed when the data is

transmitted to PC.

• If the file name contains an inappropriate character,

the file is automatically renamed to “imagexxx” or

“moviexxx”.

■File restriction

This setting specifies whether you allow the receiver’s

FOMA terminal to redistribute (attach or forward) the

image or movie you shot or melody when attaching it to

a mail. When set to “File unrestricted”, the receiver can

redistribute the file freely. However, when set to “File

restricted”, the receiver cannot redistribute the file.

• You can change the file restriction setting after

saving the image or movie. →pp.228, 234, 241

Image list screen (p.225) /My

picture screen (p.226)

zThe available functions vary depending on the folders,

which means that the items listed in the function

menu are different.

Edit image→p.231

Edit title*1……Edits the title of the image.

You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte

characters (you can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36

single-byte characters for the microSD card.

Display image*1……Displays the image (displays the My

picture screen).

Set as display……Sets the image for screens such as

the standby screen.

“★” appears next to the selected item.

“Changing the Display”→p.88

“Setting an image to send”→p.67

Image info……File name and File save date and time are

displayed.

Compose message*2……Composes an i-mode mail by

selecting either attaching the still image or inserting it in

the message.→ p.230

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data・IrSS→p.258

Set image disp.*3……Sets the display size of images.

Normal (default)……Displays the image in the

actual size.

Fit in display……Displays the image fit in the

screen regardless of the image size.

Normal⇔Full screen*3……In the Full screen mode, the

oblong image is displayed just as it is, and rectangular

image rotates to the right 90 degrees and displayed. In the

Normal mode, the oblong image or the rectangular image

is displayed just as it is.

Add shortcut →p.94

Copy to microSD→p.248

Add image to PB……Saves the image to the phonebook.

→p.71

Edit file name*1……Edits the file name of the image.

You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric

characters and symbols (“-” and “_” only).

File restriction*1……Specifies whether to allow the

redistribution of the saved image.→p.228

Move*1……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the image to the other folder you select.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Memory info*1……Displays the amount of image stored

and available space (the amount of the data of the FOMA

terminal does not contain the amount of the secret data).

Sort*1……Sorts images in a selected criteria.

Chg. list view⇔Chg. images view*1……Switches

between list view and images view.

Composite image*1 →p.230

Retry*3……Replays the displayed animation from the

beginning.

Store in Center*1 →p.229

Kisekae Tool

−UCM, UCP

1Seg

Image JPEG

Video MPEG2-TS

Document viewer

microSD Word, Excel,

PowerPoint

Folder File format

229

Data Display/Edit/Management

Delete*1……Selects the deleting method from “Delete

this/Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

Delete this*3……Deletes one image.

Keep in secret⇔Put out*1*4……“Preventing Others from

Viewing Data”→p.104

Copy to Phone*5→p.249

DPOF setting*5 →p.252

Copy*1*5……“Copying the data to the different folder in

the microSD card”→p.250

*1: Available only with the Image list screen.

*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*3: Available only with the My picture screen.

*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.

*5: Available only for images stored on the microSD card.

●Storing images at the Data Security

Center

You can store images, etc. stored in the FOMA

terminal at the Data Security Center.

zData Security Service is a pay service you need to

apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service

and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the

notification screen appears.

1Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC)

“Store in Center”Use b to select

an imageo (Finish)

You can select up to 10 images.

2Enter your security code“YES”

The FOMA terminal connects to the Data

Security Center to start saving the images.

3o (Finish)

■To restore images

The image data stored at the Data Security Center

can be stored on the FOMA terminal from the site of

the Data Security Center. For details on how to use,

refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version”.

zYou may not be able to edit the title when the space is

not enough on the microSD card.

zYou cannot edit the titles of the pre-installed images.

zYou can set the images in Inbox, Camera or User-

created folder to the following screens:

• Standby screen, wake-up display

• Dialing/calling screens of voice or videophone calls

• Mail sending/receiving/checking/receiving result

• Answer hold/on hold/substitute image/record

message/preparing message/voice memo for

videophone calls

zYou cannot specify the following images to the screens:

• An image whose width or height is larger than 854

dots

• An image whose file size exceeds 100K bytes

(except for standby and wake-up display)

zIn case of GIF animations and SWF Flash movies, the

display does not change even if you switch the Normal

mode and Full screen.

zYou can add an image whose size is 100K bytes or

smaller and whose width or height is 854 dots or smaller.

zYou cannot add images other than JPEG or GIF.

zYou cannot edit the names of the following images:

• Pre-installed images

• A still image of Chara-den character with “Rec. File

Restriction”

• Images that is prohibited to be output from your

FOMA terminal

zYou cannot use single-byte spaces for file names.

zYou cannot change restrictions if it is:

• Neither JPEG nor GIF

• A still image of Chara-den character with “Rec. File

Restriction”

<Sort>

z“By source” sorts the images in the following order.

①Downloaded images or images acquired from

i-αppli or ToruCa

②Still images shot by the camera

③Images retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC

communication or from microSD card, etc.

④Chara-den shots

⑤Images clipped out of PDF data

⑥Pre-installed images

zYou cannot save images when the file size for a image

exceeds 100K bytes, when it is prohibited to be output

from the FOMA terminal, pre-installed Deco-mail®

pictures or pictographs.

230

Data Display/Edit/Management

●Attaching or inserting image to

compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail®

You can attach the saved still image to an i-mode mail

message or insert it in a Deco-mail® message.

1Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC)

“Compose message”Select any

item:

Attach image……Attaches the image that is not

larger than 240 dots wide × 320 dots high or 320

dots wide × 240 dots high. Select any of the

following items to attach an image that is larger than

the image described above.

Attach mail……Attaches the image without

changing the image size.

QVGA scale down……Attaches image by

reducing its image size to 240 dots wide × 320

dots high or 320 dots wide × 240 dots high or

smaller without changing its aspect ratio.

Insert image……Inserts the image that is smaller

than 96 dots wide × 128 dots high or 128 dots wide ×

96 dots high and its file size is 90K bytes or less to

the Deco-mail® message. Select any of the following

items to attach an image that is larger than the

image described above.

Insert mail……Inserts image by reducing its

file size to 90K bytes or less without changing

the image size.

SubQCIF scale down……Inserts image by

reducing its image size to 96 dots wide × 128

dots high or 128 dots wide × 96 dots high

without changing its aspect ratio. Also,

changes the file size if its file size is larger than

the maximum.

2 Check the edited imaged (Set)

Compose message

■When you select “Attach mail/Insert mail”

There is no checking operation of the image.

“Composing and Sending i-mode Mail”→p.156

“Composing Deco-mail®”→p.158

●Making a composite image from 4

images

zYou cannot specify images larger than 352 dots

wide × 288 dots high or 288 dots wide × 352 dots

high, except the following:

• VGA (640 × 480), VGA V. (480 × 640)

• Screen (240 × 427)

• CIF V. (288 × 352)

• QVGA V. (240 × 320)

1Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC)

“Composite image”

2Select the positionSelect a folder

Select an imageRepeat the step to

select 4 images

■To cancel the specified image

Select the image to cancel“Release this” on

the folder selection screen

3o (Finish)d (Save)

■To retry creating the composite image

o (Cancel)

Creating animations

You can create an animated cartoon made of up to 20

frames using stored images.

zYou can specify JPEG images which are 854

dots wide × 854 dots high or smaller as an

original animation.

zYou can create up to 20 animations.

1i“DATA BOX”“My picture”

“Original animation”

The “Original animation list”

screen appears.

2“<New>”

3Select a frameSelect a folderSelect

an imageRepeat the step to specify

images

■To cancel the specified image

Select the frame to cancel“Release this” on

the folder selection screen

Original animation list

Function menu



p.231

231

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

4o (Finish)

Original animation list screen

(p.230)

Edit title……Edits the title of the original animation.

You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte

characters.

Org. animation……Newly creates Original animation

when “<New>” is highlighted.

Edits the original animation when the existing one is

highlighted.

Display image……Plays the original animation (Displays

the original animation playback screen).

Set as display……Selects the item to which the original

animation is set.

Image info……Checks the destination to save the original

animation set in “Set as display”.

If there is no setting, “No set” is displayed.

Release animation……Cancels the original animation.

Playing the original animation

1Original animation list screen (p.230)

Select an original animation

The “Original animation

playback” screen appears.

If there are two original

animations or more, use v

to play the previous or next

animation.

Original animation playback

screen (p.231)

Set as display……Selects the item to which the image is

set.

Set image disp.……Specifies the display mode of an

image smaller than the image display area.

Normal (default)……Displays the image in the

actual size.

Fit in display……Enlarges the movie to the display

size.

Retry……Plays the animation from the beginning.

Editing Images

You can edit the still images you shot, etc.

zThe following are the contents and size you can

edit:

[Frame]

• 854 × 480, 480 × 854 dots

• 640 × 480, 480 × 640 dots

• 352 × 288, 288 × 352 dots

• 320 × 240, 240 × 320 dots

• 427 × 240, 240 × 427 dots

• 176 × 144, 144 × 176 dots

• 128 × 96, 96 × 128 dots

[Image effect/Correct backlight/Refresh skin tone]

• Up to 854 × 480, 480 × 854 dots

[Image stamp/Character stamp/Trim away/

Brightness/Rotate/Change size]

• 2,592 × 1,944, 1,944 × 2,592 dots

• 2,304 × 1,728, 1,728 × 2,304 dots

• 2,048 × 1,536, 1,536 × 2,048 dots

• 1,616 × 1,212, 1,212 × 1,616 dots

• 1,600 × 1,200, 1,200 × 1,600 dots

• 1,280 × 960, 960 × 1,280 dots

• Up to 854 × 480, 480 × 854 dots

However, an image larger than 854 × 480 or 480

× 854 dots is scaled dowen to 640 × 480 or 480 ×

640 dots before editing.

* Even if the image size is able to edit in the descriptions

above, some image may not support editing function. You

can edit only the image with “ ”. You cannot select the

menu that cannot be edited.

zWhen “Edit image” is selected in the photo mode

checking screen function menu, only the “Frame”,

“Image effect”, “Refresh skin tone” and “Correct

backlight” are available.

1My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)

“Edit image”Select any item:

Frame→p.232

Image effect……Applies effects to the image.

Sharp……Sharpens the outline of the image.

Blur……Softens the outline of the image.

Sepia……Makes the sepia-tone image.

Emboss……Brings out the image in relief.

Negative……Makes the negative image.

Horizontal flip……Reverses the left and right

in the image (mirroring).

Image stamp→p.232

Character stamp→p.232

Original animation

playback

Function menu



p.231

232

Data Display/Edit/Management

Trim away……Trim a constant size.

Select the image size for trimming Adjust the

position to trim with bd (Set)

Brightness……Selects the brightness in 5 levels

from “-2 to ±0 to +2” using v.

Rotate……Selects the angle to rotate the image

from “90° to right/90° to left/180°”.

Change size……Selects the image size for

changing. The image is enlarged or reduced to fit in

the selected size keeping the aspect ratio.

Correct backlight……Makes the dark part clear,

which is caused by the backlight.

Refresh skin tone……Corrects the skin parts.

Compose message*1*2 →p.230

Save*1……Saves the edited image.

*1: This function is available after editing an image.

*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

2Check the edited imaged (Set)

3d (Save)“YES” or “NO”

Selecting “YES” overwrites the original image.

Selecting “NO” saves a new image to the folder

where the original is stored.

●Adding frames

zYou can use the downloaded frames in addition to

the pre-installed ones.

1My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)

“Edit image”“Frame”Select a

frame

The image is displayed in the selected frame.

Use v to change to another frame.

■To rotate the frame 180°

o (Rotate)

■To cancel the selected frame

u (FUNC)“Cancel”

●Pasting image stamps

zYou can use downloaded image stamps in addition

to pre-installed ones.

zYou can rotate, enlarge or reduce image stamps.

1 My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)

“Edit image”“Image stamp”

Select an image stamp

■To edit an image stamp

u (FUNC)Select any item:

90° to right……Rotates 90° clockwise.

90° to left……Rotates 90° counterclockwise.

180°……Rotates 180°.

Scale up……Doubles the size.

Scale down……Reduces the size to half.

2Adjust the image stamp position with

bd (Put)

■To paste another image stamp

o (Add)Repeat steps 1 to 2

●Pasting character stamps

zYou can enter up to 15 double-byte or 30 single-

byte characters as a stamp. The number of

characters that can be entered differs depending

on the image size and character size.

zYou can change the character stamp color, font and

size.

1My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)

“Edit image”“Character stamp”

Enter characters

■To edit a character stamp

u (FUNC)Select any item:

Character input……Enters the character.

Character color……Sets the color.

To use another color palette, press o (Change).

Font type……Selects “Gothic” or “Ming-cho”.

Font size……Selects the size from “Enlargement

size/Standard size/Reduction size”.

2Adjust the character stamp position

with bd (Put)

zEditing repeatedly may impair the image quality or

increase the file size.

zIf the size of the image that has been trimmed or

resized is the same as that of the frame, the image

can be framed.

zYou can only use downloaded stamps of 240 dots

wide × 240 dots high or smaller. The stamps larger

than the above size are handled as GIF images.

zThe font thickness is specified in the “Font” setting.

233

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

Playing Movies/i-motion

<i-motion>

You can play movies you have shot and i-motion

downloaded from i-mode sites or websites.

1i“DATA BOX”“i-motion”

The “Folder list” screen

appears.

i-motion folder→p.224

2Select a folder

The “Movie list screen

(Preview)” appears.

Movie list screen→p.233

■To search i-motion by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

“YES”

■For partly downloaded

i-motion

A confirmation message

about downloading the

remaining data appears. You cannot play the

i-motion unless you download the rest of the

data.

• Selecting “YES” starts downloading of the rest

of the data.

• Selecting “NO” redisplays the “Movie list”

screen.

3Select a movie

The “Music Player” screen appears and the

movie playback starts.

“Guide to Music Player” screen→p.277

“Operations on the Music Player” screen→p.278

Guide to the preview/list view

• The icons for image types, retrieval methods and

the available settings→p.226

• Titles and file names→p.228

■Preview

The screen lists 6 movies and displays a preview

image of the highlighted movie under the list.

Preview images are not displayed for movies with no

video such as a sound only i-motion (an i-motion with

no video, such as a singer’s voice).

■List view

11 movies are listed on the screen.

Movie list screen (p.233)

zThe available functions vary depending on the

folders, which means that the items listed in the

function menu are different.

Edit movie→p.235

Edit title……Edits the movie title.

You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte

characters (You can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36

single-byte characters for the microSD card).

Select ring tone……Sets the movie sound as a ring tone.

→p.82

Stand-by display……Sets the movie to the standby

screen.

i-motion info……Displays an i-motion file name, a file

save date and whether the i-motion can be moved to the

microSD card.

Compose message*1……Composes an i-mode mail

message with the movie attached.→p.156

iC transmission→p.259

Send Ir data→p.258

zMovies transmitted from blu-ray disc recorder

can be played. For details, visit the following

website:

http://www.sonyericsson.co.jp/so706i/bd.html

zA movie may not be properly played if it was not

shot with FOMA SO706i.

zYou can start playback from the point the

playback was stopped last time when you receive

a call during playback or when the playback is

stopped by t or y. However, the playback

may not start the precise point the playback was

stopped last time.

Folder list

Function menu



p.253

Movie list (Preview)

Ｃａｍｅｒａ１／３

２００８／０８／０１０６：２０

２００８／０７／２８１７：１５

２００８／０７／２８０９：５０

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

２００８／０７／２７１０：４８

２００８／０７／２７０８：１８

Function menu



p.233

zFor some i-motion, you can also select a chapter to

play.

１／３

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

２００８／０８／０１０６：２０

２００８／０７／２８１７：１５

２００８／０７／２８０９：５０

２００８／０７／２７１０：４８

２００８／０７／２７０８：１８

１／２

２００８／０８／０１０６：３５

２００８／０８／０１０６：２０

２００８／０７／２８１７：１５

２００８／０７／２８０９：５０

２００８／０７／２７１０：４８

２００８／０７／２７０８：１８

２００８／０７／２６２２：３２

２００８／０７／２６１２：５５

２００８／０７／２６１０：２３

２００８／０７／２５１２：１２

２００８／０７／２５１０：１０

Retrieval method icon

Title

Preview

Allowable

operation

icon

Image type

Preview List view

Image type

Retrieval method icon

Title

Allowable

operation

icon

ＣａｍｅｒａＣａｍｅｒａ

234

Data Display/Edit/Management

Copy to microSD→p.248

Move to microSD→p.250

Move……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the movie to the other folder you select.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Add shortcut →p.94

Edit file name……Edits the file name of the movie.

You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric

characters and symbols (“-” and “_” only).

File restriction……Specifies whether to allow the

redistribution of the saved movie. “File restriction”→p.228

Reset title……Resets the title to the default.

Memory info……Displays the amount of movie stored

and available space (the amount of the data of the FOMA

terminal does not contain the amount of the secret data).

Sort……Sorts the movies in a selected criteria.

List setting……Specifies how to list the movies. The

displayed menu differs on the FOMA terminal and

microSD card.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Keep in secret⇔Put out*2……“Preventing Others from

Viewing Data”→p.104

Copy to Phone*3→p.249

Move to Phone*4→p.250

Copy*3……“Copying the data to the different folder in the

microSD card”→p.250

*1: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*2: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.

*3: Available only for movies stored on the microSD card.

*4: Available only for movies stored on the movable contents

folder.

●Playing movies in your preferred order

You can select and store up to 25 movies or i-motion

to play multiple movies in sequence.

zThere are 5 Playlist folders.

1Folder list screen (p.233)Select

“Playlist”

The “Playlist folder list”

screen appears.

2Highlight the

destination playlist

folderu (FUNC)

“Edit playlist”

3Select No. for the movieSelect a

folderSelect a movie Repeat steps

to add

■To release the added movie

Select the movie to releaseSelect “Release

this” on the folder selection screen“YES”

4o (Finish)

The i-motion Playlist folder list screen appears.

Selecting the Playlist folder starts the playback

of the playlist and the stored movie is played

repeatedly.

zYou can only set a movie or i-motion with the Set as

ring tone “Available”. Refer to the “i-motion info” to

check whether it is “Available” or “Unavailable”.

zYou cannot set the following movie or i-motion to the

ring tone:

• A movie or i-motion without audio

• i-motion with the playback restriction

• The size of the movie/i-motion is larger than QVGA

(320 × 240) and smaller than VGA (640 × 480)

zIf a movie larger than VGA (640 × 480) is set as a ring

tone, an i-motion image does not appear on the

screen.

<Stand-by display>

zYou cannot set the movie to the standby screen when:

• The movie or i-motion is voice only

• i-motion with the playback restriction

• The size of the movie is larger than QVGA (320 ×

240)

zThe displayed file size is only an approximation.

<Sort>

z“By source” sorts the images in the following order.

Movies or i-motion with the same retrieval icon are

arranged in the order in which they were displayed

before you selected “By source”.

①Downloaded i-motion or i-motion retrieved from

i-αppli, etc.

②Movies shot by camera

③Movies retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC

communication or from microSD card, etc.

④Chara-den shots

Playlist folder list

Function menu



p.235

235

Data Display/Edit/Management

Playlist folder list screen

(p.234)

Edit playlist……Starts editing the playlist. You can edit a

playlist which is already set.

Release playlist……Deletes the set movies and releases

a playlist.

Editing Movies

zYou can edit the movies with “ ” only.

<Example: Movie list screen for Inbox, Camera or

User-created folders>

1Movie list screen (p.233)u (FUNC)

“Edit movie”

The “Edit movie” screen

appears.

2u (FUNC)Select any item:

Trim i-motion→p.235

Compose message*……Composes an i-mode mail

with the movie attached.

File restriction……Specifies whether to allow the

redistribution of the trimmed movie with “Trim

i-motion”. “File restriction” →p.228

* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

●Trimming a part of the movie

1Edit movie screen (p.235)u (FUNC)

“Trim i-motion”

2“Any size” or “500KB”o (Start)

Trimming starts.

■To start trimming at a scene mid-way

through the movie

d (Play)Press d (Stop) when it is the first

frame you want to trimo (Start)

3 Press d (Stop) when it is the last

frame you want to trimo (End)

■When you select “500KB”

Trimming automatically stops once the trimmed

size reaches 500K bytes.

4The trimmed section of the movie is

played

The playback stops automatically when it ends.

5 d (Set)d (Save)“YES”

Playing Video

Use the Video Player to play videos recorded from

1seg.

1i“DATA BOX”“1Seg”“Video”

The “Folder list” screen

appears.

Contents in the Video folder

→p.225

2Select the microSD folder

The “Video list” screen

appears.

Guide to the Video list

screen→p.236

3Select the video

The “Video play” screen

appears and video playback

starts.

“Operation during the Video

playback”→p.237

zYou cannot use the Multitask function while editing

movies.

zEditing may impair the movie quality.

Edit movie

zA movie whose size is larger than QCIF (176 × 144)

cannot be trimmed away.

zSome types of video may not be played to the end.

Folder list

Function menu



p.236

Video list (Preview)

microSD

２００８０７１３１１３７００１

２００８０７１５２０００００２

２００８０７２８２１００００３

２００８０７２９１５３０００４

２００８０７２９１９２５００５

２００８０７３０２２３０００６

Function menu



p.237

Video playback

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響い

ています。

ドキュメンタリー

236

Data Display/Edit/Management

Guide to the preview/list view

zImage type icons and retrieval method icons

→p.226

zTitles and file names→p.226

■Preview

The screen lists 7 movies and displays a preview

image of the highlighted movie under the list.

■List view

12 images are listed on the screen.

Video list screen (p.235)

Edit title……Edits the video title.

Show info……Displays the video program name, date

and time of recording, etc.

Delete this/Delete all……Select the deletion method.

Multiple-choice……Delete multiple videos.

Check memory……Displays the video storage capacity.

Switch list……Specifies how to display the video list

screen.

Initialize title……Resets the title to the default.

Guide to the video player screen

①Program title

②Image

③Subtitles

④Play position indication

The current playback position is indicated with a

marker. Selecting “Position to play” from the

Function menu and moving the marker with v and

pressing d (Set) during pause starts playback

from the position.

⑤VIDEO MODE fixed display

⑥Playback status

: During playback

: During pause

: Quick view (x1.3)

⑦Subtitles on/off

“ ” is displayed if there are subtitles.

⑧Volume

Indicates volume level from 0 to 20.

Preview List view

Image type

Title

microSD

２００８０７１３１１３７００１

２００８０７１５２０００００２

２００８０７２８２１００００３

２００８０７２９１５３０００４

２００８０７２９１９２５００５

２００８０７３０２２３０００６

microSD

２００８０７１３１１３７００１

２００８０７１５２０００００２

２００８０７２８２１００００３

２００８０７２９１５３０００４

２００８０７２９１９２５００５

２００８０７３０２２３０００６

Image type

Title

Preview

Portrait display

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響い

ています。

ドキュメンタリー

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑧

⑦

①

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

涼やかな風鈴の音色が響いています

。

ドキュメンタリー

Landscape display

⑤

②

③

⑥

⑧

⑦

④

①

237

Data Display/Edit/Management

Operation during video playback

Video playback screen (p.235)

Show information……Displays the video program name,

date and time of recording, etc.

Subtitles*……Sets whether to display subtitles.

ON (Wide:Bottom) (default)……Displays subtitles

at the bottom of the video playback screen.

ON (Wide:Top)……Displays subtitles at the top of

the video playback screen.

OFF……No subtitle display.

Play……Plays at normal speed.

Quick view (×1.3)……Fast play at 1.3x speed.

Stop……Ends playback.

Location……Use v to adjust and select the play

position.

Main/Sub setting……Sets the audio output method.

Main sound (default)……Outputs main sound only.

Sub sound……Outputs secondary sound only.

Main+sub sound……Outputs both primary and

secondary sound.

Icon show(Wide)* (default: Show always)……Set

whether to always or temporarily show icons such as

playback position in landscape display.

*: This setting is also applied to the equivalent 1seg

functions.

What is Chara-den?

You can send a cartoon character to your party’s

FOMA terminal in a videophone call instead of the

image from your own FOMA terminal camera.

Displaying Chara-den

zDownloading “Chara-den” characters→p.146

1i“DATA BOX”“Chara-den”

The “Chara-den list” screen

appears.

2 Select Chara-den

The “Chara-den player”

screen appears.

Guide to the Chara-den list

zThe icons for image types, retrieval methods and

the available settings→p.226

zTitles and file names→p.228

Key press Operation

9 (1 second or longer)

Switch screen directions

In order of “Portrait” →

“Wide (90° right)” → “Wide

(90° left)”

oPause/Resume playback

pMute

c (a (▲マナー )/

s (▼メモ))

Adjust volume

jReturn to fast forward/

normal playback at 1.3×

(During pause) Frame

forward

hReturn to fast forward/

normal playback at 1.3×

h (1 second or longer) 30-second skip backward

j (1 second or longer) 30-second skip forward

r (1 second or longer) Turn subtitles on/off

tStops playback

zThe function menu is available only when playback is

paused.

zSound may hardly be heard during quick view.

Chara-den list

Function menu



p.238

Chara-den

Function menu



p.238

Ｃｈａｒａ−ｄｅｎ

ミッフィー

ＤＬ

キャラ電１

ＤＬ

キャラ電２

ＤＬ

キャラ電３

ＤＬ

キャラ電４

ＤＬ

キャラ電５

ＤＬ

キャラ電６

ＤＬ

キャラ電７

Image type icon (Chara-den)

Title

Retrieval method icon

Allowable

operation

icon

238

Data Display/Edit/Management

Using Chara-den characters

This function allows you to play a Chara-den

character by selecting from pre-installed actions.

1Chara-den player screen (p.237)

Using Chara-den characters

■To check the action list

w

The actions displayed in the list differ depending

on the type of character.

The number such as “1” or “#1” displayed on the

right of the action indicates that pressing that

key during the Chara-den playback will perform

the corresponding action.

Highlight the actiono (Detail)Check the

detailsu (Exit)

■To change the Action mode

o (Parts/Whole)

This command switches to Parts action mode

when is displayed and to Whole action

mode when is displayed.

(Whole): The action mode in which the

entire Chara-den character moves to express

feelings.

(Parts): The action mode in which the parts

of the Chara-den character (head, hands, feet,

etc.) move.

■To use the keypad to select actions during

the Chara-den playback

The keypad keys that can be pressed to make

the displayed character perform actions are as

follows:

“Whole”: 1 digit number on the right side of the

action name (1 to 9) or q1 to

“Parts”: 2 digit number on the right side of the

action name (11 to 99)

<Example: To select “おやすみ” (Good night) in

Whole action mode>

* The Chara-den is displayed normally (not in

mirror).

■To have the character’s mouth

synchronize your voice

Some Chara-den characters can move the

mouth synchronizing your voice as if it is talking.

If you use the Function menu or press the key to

make the character perform an action, the

character performs the selected action rather

than moving its mouth.

Chara-den list screen (p.237)/

Chara-den player screen

(p.237)

Chara-den call……Makes a videophone call with the

Chara-den character as the substitute image.

Use b to search for a phone number from the Received

calls, Redial or phonebook on the Chara-den dialing

screen.

Substitute image……Sets the Chara-den character as

the substitute image for videophone calls.

Rec. Chara-den→p.239

Edit title*1……Edits the title of the Chara-den.

You can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36 single-byte

characters.

Switch Chara-den*2……Selects the Chara-den to

display.

Action List*2……Displays the Action list.

Change Action*2……Changes the Action mode.

Chara-den info……Cara-den file name and file save date

and time are displayed.

Memory info*1……Displays the amount of the stored

Chara-den.

Add shortcut →p.94

Set image disp.

Normal……Displays the image in the actual size.

Fit in display (default)……Enlarges the image to

the display size.

Reset title*1……Resets the title to the default.

Delete*1……Selects the deleting method from “Delete

this/Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

*1: Available only with the Chara-den list screen.

*2: Available only with the Chara-den player screen.

(Whole) 8

239

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

Saving Chara-den character

as Image or Movie

<Rec. Chara-den>

■Guide to the Rec. Chara-den screen

①Currently selected action mode

: Whole

: Parts

②Shooting mode

: Photo mode

: Movie mode

③Setting of “Storage setting” (Image)

: Normal

: Fine

: Super Fine

④Setting of “Storage setting” (Movie)

: Normal

: Prefer img qual

: Prefer time

: Prefer motion spd

⑤Setting of “File size setting”

: 500KB

: 2MB

⑥Setting of “Movie type set”

: Video + voice

: Video

⑦Indicates the size selected in “Select size”

: QCIF (176 × 144)

: Small (117 × 96)

⑧Shooting status

: Stand-by

: Shooting

⑨Remaining shooting time in the “min:sec” format

(not displayed until shooting starts)

●Shooting Still Images

1Chara-den player screen (p.237)

u (FUNC)“Rec. Chara-den”

The “Rec. Chara-den

(image)” screen appears.

2Perform an action

d (Record)

Operation of actions

→p.238

■To perform a Parts

action

o (Parts)

■To compose an i-mode

message with a shot image attached/

inserted

o (MAIL)“Attach image” or “Insert image”

■To retake the shot

t

3d (Save)

The shot image is saved to the Camera folder

under My picture.

●Shooting movies

1Rec. Chara-den (image) screen (p.239)

u (FUNC)“Movie mode”

The “Rec. Chara-den

(movie)” screen appears.

2d (Record)

Perform an action

Operation of actions

→p.238

■To perform a Parts

action

o (Parts)

3d (Stop)

■To compose an i-mode message with the

recorded movie attached

o (MAIL)

■To check the movie

u (FUNC)“Check w/ playing”

■To retake the shot

t

4d (Save)

The movie is saved to the Camera folder under

i-motion.

Photo mode Movie mode

Rec. Chara-den (image)

Function menu



p.240

Rec. Chara-den (movie)

Function menu



p.240

240

Data Display/Edit/Management

Rec. Chara-den screen (p.239)

Switch Chara-den……Changes a Chara-den character

to shoot.

Substitute image……Sets the Chara-den character as

the substitute image for videophone calls.

Action List……Displays the Action list.

Change Action……Changes the Action mode.

Set image disp.

Normal……Displays the image in the actual size.

Fit in display (default)……Enlarges the image to

the display size.

Movie mode⇔Photo mode……Switches between

Movie mode and Photo mode.

Select size*1……Sets the size of character to shoot.

Numbers in parentheses displayed in the menu is the size

in dots (width × height).

Movie type set*2

Video + voice (default)……Shoots a movie

including sound.

Video……Shoots a movie without any voice.

Storage setting*2

Normal (default)……Shoots a movie with the normal

quality and duration.

Prefer img qual……Select this option to shoot a

movie with higher quality. The available shooting

time is shorter than for Normal.

Prefer time……Select this option to shoot a long

movie. The quality is not as high as for Normal.

Prefer motion spd……Select this option to shoot a

movie with smoother motion.

Storage setting*1……Selects the quality for image

shooting from “Normal/Fine/Super Fine”.

File size setting*2

500KB……You can shoot up to 500K bytes.

2MB (default)……You can shoot up to 2M bytes.

*1: Available only in the Photo mode.

*2: Available only in the Movie mode.

Playing Melodies

You can play the pre-installed melodies, sound effects

or the melodies downloaded from the sites in the

“Melody” folder of Data Box.

1i“DATA BOX”“Melody”

The “Folder list” screen

appears.

Contents in the Melody

folder→p.225

2Select a folder

The “Melody list” screen

appears.

Guide to the melody list

→p.241

■To search melody by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

 “YES”

3Select a melody

The “Melody” screen

appears and the melody

playback begins.

“Operation during the

melody playback”→p.241

zThe image size (QCIF (176 × 144)) cannot be

changed.

zPerforming an action during shooting may record

keypad sounds.

zChanging a Chara-den character sets the action mode

to Whole.

zMelodies are played at the volume set in “Phone”

under the “Ring volume” settings (played at “Level 2”

when “Silent” or “Step” is set).

zPlayback illumination pattern is “Melody linked” (if

Melody linked is not registered, “Flash” applies).

Folder list

Function menu



p.253

１／２

Melody list

Ｉｎｂｏｘ

ＥｖｅｎｉｎｇｉｎＨｏｎｏｌｕｌ

Ｔｈｅｍｅｓｏｎｇ

Ａｍｅｒｉｃａｎｒｏｃｋ

Ｓｏｕｎｄｔｒａｃｋ

Ｈｉｔｔｕｎｅ

Ｉｎｔｒｏｄｕｃｔｉｏｎｍｕｓｉｃ

Ｍｕｓｉｃｆｏｒａｄｖｅｒｔｉｓ

ＭＹ＆Ｋ

Ａｎｉｍａｔｉｏｎ

Ｒａｃｅ

Ｎｏｓｔａｌｇｉｃｍｅｌｏｄｙ

Function menu



p.241

Melody

ＥｖｅｎｉｎｇｉｎＨｏｎｏｌｕｌｕ

Function menu



p.241

241

Continued on next page

Data Display/Edit/Management

Guide to the Melody list

■Melody type icon

: Data that are file-restricted or not allowed to be

attached to mails or output from the FOMA terminal

■Retrieval method icon

■Allowable operation icon

■Titles and file names

Original titles are assigned to downloaded melodies.

The title is listed on the Melody list screen of the

FOMA terminal.

The file name is displayed when the data is

transmitted to PC.

If the file name contains an inappropriate character, it

is turned to “melodyxxx” (xxx: 3-digit number).

The 3-digit number at the end of the file name is a

serial number assigned to distinguish the file from

other files.

Operation during the melody playback

You can use the following operations during the

melody playback:

* : When the melody is finished, the volume is restored to the

level specified in “Ring volume”.

Melody list screen (p.240)/

Melody screen (p.240)

zThe function menu varies depending on the folder

containing the melody.

Edit title*1……Edits the title of the melody.

You can enter up to 25 double-byte or 50 single-byte

characters.

Edit file name*1……Edits the file name of the melody.

You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric

characters and symbols (“-” and “_” only).

Play melody*1……Plays the melody (Displays Melody

screen).

Ring tone……Selects the item to which the melody is set.

File restriction*1……Specifies whether to allow the

redistribution of the saved melody.→p.228

Set repeat play*2……Repeats the playback of the melody

in the same folder.

Add shortcut→p.94

Compose message*3……Composes an i-mode mail with

the melody attached.→p.156

iC transmission*1→p.259

Send Ir data*1 →p.258

Copy to microSD→p.248

Copy to Phone*4→p.249

Melody info……Melody file name and file save date and

time are displayed.

Memory info*1……Displays the amount of the stored

melody.

Copy*4……“Copying the data to the different folder in the

microSD card”→p.250

Reset title*1……Resets the title to the default.

Icon Description

MFi/SMF melody

Icon Description

No icon Pre-installed melody

Melody downloaded from sites

Melody retrieved through the Infrared data

exchange, iC communication, microSD

card, Bar code reader or PC

Icon Description

Can be attached to i-mode mail (2M bytes

or smaller)

Can be specified as Ring tone

Can be transmitted via infrared data

exchange or iC communication

Can be copied to the microSD card

１／２

Ｉｎｂｏｘ

ＥｖｅｎｉｎｇｉｎＨｏｎｏｌｕｌ

Ｔｈｅｍｅｓｏｎｇ

Ａｍｅｒｉｃａｎｒｏｃｋ

Ｓｏｕｎｄｔｒａｃｋ

Ｈｉｔｔｕｎｅ

Ｉｎｔｒｏｄｕｃｔｉｏｎｍｕｓｉｃ

Ｍｕｓｉｃｆｏｒａｄｖｅｒｔｉｓ

ＭＹ＆Ｋ

Ａｎｉｍａｔｉｏｎ

Ｒａｃｅ

Ｎｏｓｔａｌｇｉｃｍｅｌｏｄｙ

Melody type icon

Retrieval method icon

Title

Allowable operation icon

Key operation Operation

vPlays the previous

or next melody

f (a(▲マナー )),

g (s (▼メモ))

Adjusting the

volume*

0 to 9, w, q, r, u,

d, o, i, pStops the playback

tEnds

242

Data Display/Edit/Management

Sort*1……Sorts melodies in a selected criteria.

Move*1……Selects from “Move this/Move selected/Move

all” and moves the melody to the other folder you select.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

Delete*1……Selects the deleting method from “Delete

this/Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice” →p.38

*1: Available only with the melody list screen.

*2: Available only with the melody screen.

*3: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.

*4: Available only for melodies stored on the microSD card.

●Playing melodies in your preferred order

You can select and register up to 10 melodies, and

play them in sequence.

1Folder list screen (p.240)Highlight

“Playlist”u (FUNC)“Edit playlist”

Select the number to which the

melody is to be addedSelect a folder

Select a melodyRepeat the

procedure

■To release the added melody

Select the melody to releaseSelect “Release

this” on the folder selection screen

2o (Finish)

The “Folder list” screen appears.

Selecting the Playlist folder starts the playback

of the playlist and the stored melodies are

played repeatedly.

Managing Kisekae Tool

Check the packages of Kisekae Tool downloaded

from sites.

z“ダイレクトメニュー” and “ミッフィー” are stored

at the time of purchase.

zDownloading from sites→p.146

1i“DATA BOX”“Kisekae Tool”

The “Package list” screen

appears.

Package list screen→p.243

■To search packages by

i-mode

“Search by i-mode”

“YES”

2②

Select a package

■To set the package

u (FUNC)“Set all”

Kisekae Tool package settings→p.97

■When you select a partially downloaded

package

When you attempt to open a partially

downloaded package, due to interruption at data

acquisition, etc., a message appears asking

whether to download the remaining data. To

download the remaining data, follow the

message to download the data.

When the remaining data is downloaded, the

partially downloaded data will be deleted. If the

remaining data is invalid, the data downloading

cannot be completed. However, if you download

the data in this case, partially stored invalid data

will be deleted.

zYou cannot edit the file name of the file-restricted

melody. However, you can edit the file name of the

melody received by the Infrared data exchange, iC

communication or OBEX™ connection.

zSome melodies may have restrictions so that only a

designated part of the melody will be played. When

such melodies are set as a ring tone, only the

designated part can be played. Play the melody from

the Melody in Data Box to play all the parts of the

melody.

<Sort>

z“By source” sorts the melodies in the following order.

Melodies with the same retrieval icon are arranged in

the order in which they were displayed before you

selected “By source”:

①Melody downloaded from website or melody

retrieved from i-αppli

②Melodies retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC

communication or from microSD card, etc.

zThe playlist playback is canceled if the registered

melody titles or file names are changed or the data is

deleted.

zSound-related items such as ring tone are played at

the volume set in “Ring volume” while checking

(Played at “level 2” when set to “Step”, and no sound

when set to “Silent”).

However, i-motion sounds at “Level 2” when set to

“Silent”.

Package list

ＫｉｓｅｋａｅＴｏｏｌ

Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ２

Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ１

タ゛イレクトメニュー

ミッフィー

Ｓｅａｒｃｈｂｙｉｰｍｏｄｅ

unction menu



p.243

243

Data Display/Edit/Management

Guide to the package list

■Package type icon

■Retrieval method icon

■Allowable operation icon

* : “ ” also appears if the package contains large-font

menu.

Package list screen (p.242)

Set all……Sets the Kisekae Tool.→p.97

Edit title……Edits the package title.

You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-byte

characters.

Kisekae Tool info……Package file name and file save

date and time are displayed.

Reset title……Resets the title to the default.

Reset screen/sound……Resets the items that can be

set all at once to the default (p.97).

Memory info……Displays the amount of the stored

Kisekae Tool.

Sort……Sorts packages by the specified criteria.

Delete……Selects the deleting method from “Delete this/

Delete selected/Delete all”.

“About multiple-choice”→p.38

microSD Card

FOMA SO706i supports microSD cards with up to

2G-byte (commercially available) (As of May, 2008).

Visit the following website for the latest operation

check information such as the manufacturer or the

capacity of the microSD card. Note that the microSD

card which is not listed on the website may not be

operated on the FOMA terminal.

• i-mode: “PlayNow” by SO

(As of May, 2008)

“iMenu”“メニューリスト”

(Menu List)“ケータイ電話

メーカー ” (Mobile phone

manufacturer)“PlayNow by SO”

QR code on the right is also available to select

displayed URL and access the site.

• PC (Japanese):

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications

http://www.SonyEricsson.co.jp/memorycard/

Note that the information on the website is only the

result of the operation check and does not

guarantee all the operations.

Notes on handling

zInsert or remove the microSD card after turning off

the FOMA terminal.

zDo not paste a label or sticker on the microSD card.

zIt is your responsibility to keep a separate record of

all data saved on the microSD card. Under no

circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be liable for

any loss or alternation to the saved data.

Icon Description

All the data have been downloaded

Only a part of the data has been

downloaded

Subject to the FOMA card security

function

Icon Description

No icon Pre-installed Data

Downloaded data

Icon Description

Standby screen, wake-up display

Dialing screen, etc. (other than standby

screen and Wake-up display)

Ring tone or clock alarm tone

Menu*

Background on the Music Player screen

Clock display

Color pattern

Icons such as battery icon

ＫｉｓｅｋａｅＴｏｏｌ

Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ２

Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ１

タ゛イレクトメニュー

ミッフィー

Ｓｅａｒｃｈｂｙｉｰｍｏｄｅ

Package type icon

Retrieval method icon

Title

Allowable operation icon

* Make sure to format the microSD card on the

FOMA SO706i. You may not be able to use the

microSD card formatted on the other terminal or

PC.→p.251

244

Data Display/Edit/Management

Inserting/removing the microSD card

Insert or remove the microSD card after turning off

the FOMA terminal.

1Open the cap of the microSD card slot

2Insert the microSD card into the

microSD card slot and push it until it

locks into the place

Insert the microSD card straight and slowly with

the printed side up.

When fully inserted, the card is locked in the place.

■To remove the card

When you push the microSD card in and

release, the card pops up slightly.

* Note that the card may fly out of the slot.

Grip the groove of the microSD card and slowly

pull the card out.

3Close the cap of the microSD card slot

When you turn on the FOMA terminal after

inserting the microSD card, “ ” appears.

Folder tree on the microSD Card

When you copy the data from the FOMA terminal to

the microSD card, folders are created as shown in the

Table 1 (p.245) and the data are stored on the

respective folders. The folder name and file names

are set automatically as shown in the Table 1.

zWhen the data is copied from a PC to the microSD

card, the folder structure and file name shown in

the Table 1 (p.245) are needed.

zDo not insert or remove the microSD card with the

FOMA terminal turned on. Doing so may damage the

microSD card or the data on the card.

zNote that the microSD card may fly out of the slot

when inserting or removing the microSD card.

zWhen you remove the microSD card, make sure to

keep the card in the supplied protective case. You may

not be able to use the microSD card if the card is kept

in different protective case.

zMake sure to insert or remove the microSD card

straightly in the right direction (inserting the microSD

card at an angle may damage the card).

The printed

side up

Groove of the

microSD card

slot cover

zIt may take long to read or write data for the first time

after the microSD card is inserted.

zWhen you copy multiple data to the SD_PIM folder,

the data is automatically named with year/month/day/

hour/minute (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm).

zYou can save a movie with video from a PC to the

MMFILE folder, but you cannot play the movie on the

FOMA terminal.

zA file edited on a PC then saved to the microSD card

may not be displayed or played correctly on the FOMA

SO706i if you use characters different from the folder/

file names shown in Table 1 (p.245).

zFile names of PDF data/documents copied to a

microSD card remain unchanged (up to single-byte 59

characters/double-byte 29 characters). If a file name is

the same as that of an existing file stored in the

microSD card, a 3-digit number will be added to the

original file name.

zWhen the microSD card is formatted and

SDVIDEO.DAT, MMFILE.DAT or DCIM.DAT file is

deleted, the settings of the destination folder are

canceled. In this case, reset the setting of “Select to

save”.

zDo not delete or move folders in the microSD card on

a PC. Doing so may prevent FOMA SO706i from

reading the microSD card.

zYou may not be able to display or play the data on the

microSD card stored from the other device. Also, you

may not be able to display or play the data on the

microSD card stored from the FOMA terminal on the

other device.

zBefore purchasing the microSD card reader/writer or

PC card adapter, ask the manufacturer of the microSD

card if it is available for the FOMA SO706i.

245

Data Display/Edit/Management

(Table 1) Folder tree on the microSD Card and storage file (Enclosed in parentheses are file extensions)

* Alphabets in italic that is no explanation in table mean following single-byte numbers.

aaa: 100 to 999 bbbbb: 00001 to 09999 ddd: 001 to 999 eeeee: 00001 to 65535 (Decimal numbers)

ccc: 001 to FFF (hexadecimal numbers)

* When you store the data on the microSD card from a PC and edit the data on the microSD card, follow the instructions

of . The data may not be displayed or played correctly if you use wrong characters.

MGR_INFO

PRGccc

･･･････････････････････ Additional information on 1seg videos.

･･････････････････････････ 1seg videos. In “1Seg” – “Video” – “microSD” on the FOMA terminal.

DOCUMENT

PUDddd ･････････････････ Contains: PDF, incompletely-obtained PDF ($DF), PDF definition file (DDF)

･･････････････････ PDF data.

DOCddd ･････････････････ Contains: Word file (DOC), Excel file (XLS), PowerPoint file (PPT)

DOCUMENT ･･････････････････ Documents.

･････････････ Additional information on documents.

DOCUMENT

TABLE

SD_VIDEO

aaaSODCF

DSCbbbbb.hhh ･･････････････････Images (hhh: JPEG (JPG), GIF)

STILL

DOCOMO

PRIVATE

MOLccc.iii

･･････････････････････Movies (iii: 3GP, SDV, MP4, ASF)

PRLccc･･･････････････････････････ In “i-motion” – “SD-Video” on the FOMA terminal.

Root (microSD card)

DCIM

･････････････････････ Melody files.

Contains: SMF (MID), MFi (MLD)

････････････････････････････････ Images. Appears as “Picture” under “My picture” on the FOMA terminal.

･･･････････････････････ Images. Appears as “Image Box” under “My picture” on the FOMA terminal.

Contains: Animation (GIF), Image (JPEG (JPG)), Flash (swf)

･････････････････････ Movies or i-motion (including AAC music data). Appears as “Multimedia” under “i-motion” on the

FOMA terminal.

Contains: Movie (3GP), SDV, MP4, ASF

･･･････････････････ WMA data. Appears as “WMA” under “Music” on the FOMA terminal.

Contains: WMA (WMA)

･･･････････････････････････ Movies, i-motion and 1seg videos.

RINGER

MMFILE

････････････････････ ToruCa.

Contains: TRC

TORUCA

TABLE

･･･････････････････ Deco-mail® pictograph files.

Contains: JPEG (JPG), GIF

DECOIMG

･･････････････････････ Images downloaded through Full browser, or files that are attached to i-mode mail and cannot be

used in the FOMA terminal Data Box. Appears as “SD and Other” on the FOMA terminal.

Contains: Images (PNG, BMP), etc.

OTHER

・

････････ Additional information on

each file.

DCIM

TORUCA

SD_VIDEO

MMFILE

STILL

DECOIMG

DOCUMENT

RINGER

PIMeeeee.mmm ･････････････････････ PIM files (mmm: Phonebook files (VCF), mail files (VMG), text memo files (VNT),

bookmark files (VBM), Schedule/To Do list files (VCS))

SD_PIM

････････････････････････････ Movable i-motion, Chaku-Uta-Full®, i-αppli, i-αppli data.

SD_BIND

SAVEDIR ････････････････････ Destination setting files.

Contains: DAT

･･････････････････････････････PIM data such as phonebook, schedule and mail.

SEMC

・

246

Data Display/Edit/Management

●Number of files that can be stored on

the microSD card

The number of files that can be stored on the

microSD card varies depending on the memory

capacity of the microSD card. The maximum number

of files that can be stored in 1 folder and the

maximum number of folders are as follows:

zYou can save more files by adding folders and

changing the location to copy. However, you may

not be able to store the data to the maximum

number depending on the file size.

zYou can not copy or move the data when the space

is not enough on the microSD card.

zWhen the microSD card is full, you cannot add

folders or edit titles for still image, image, movies or

i-motion.

zMusic data cannot move from the FOMA terminal

to the microSD card.

zIf the number of files in the destination folder has

reached the maximum, a new folder is

automatically created and data will be saved to the

new folder (except SD-PIM). However, a folder is

not automatically created when taking a picture

with Camera and saving directly to a microSD card.

Data that can be exchanged between

the FOMA terminal and the microSD

card

■PIM data

*1: May be assigned to the available number to copy and

add.

*2: Secret store indicated whether the data is stored as a

secret data.

*3: Can be copied by “Copy all”.

*4: Category is the icon information set in the schedule.

*5: Category is the category set in the To Do list.

*6: Folders (folder names) can be transferred by copying all

the received mails, sent mails or bookmarks.

*7: When copied from the microSD card to the FOMA

terminal, i-mode bookmarks are stored in the “Bookmark”

folder of “i-mode menu”. Full Browser bookmarks are

saved to the “Bookmark” folder under “Full Browser”.

■Data in the Data Box

■Other data

Folder name

Maximum

number

of folders

Maximum number of

files that can be stored

in 1 folder

DCIM 900 9,999

PRL 4,095 4,095

PRG 99 4

SD_PIM 1 65,535

STILL 999 9,999

MMFILE 999 9,999

DECOIMG 999 9,999

OTHER 999 999

RINGER 999 9,999

TORUCA 999 999

DOCUMENT 999 999

Data type Details

Phonebook Name, Reading, Phone number,

Mail address, Memo, Address,

Birthday, Image, Memory number*1,

Secret store*2*3, Group number*3,

Group name*3, Phonebook 2in1

setting

Schedule Date (from), Date (to), Summary,

Contents, Secret store*2*3,

category*4, Alarm, Repeat

To Do list Contents, Category*5, Completion

date, Period, Change status,

Priority, Alarm

Text memo Make date, Last modify date,

Category, Contents

Received mail*6,

Sent mail*6,

Draft mail

Unread/Read, Message type, Saved

in, Sender, Receiver, Title, Receive/

Send date, Message, Attach, 2in1

setting

Bookmark*6*7 URL, Title

Data type Details

Still image JPEG, GIF and SWF data in the Inbox,

Camera, Decomail-picture, Decorate

PI, microSD or user created folder

Movie MP4 data in the Inbox, Camera,

microSD or user created folder

Melody MFi/SMF melody in the Inbox, microSD

or user created folder

PDF data PDF data in the Inbox, microSD or

user-created folder

Data type Details

Tor u C a To r u C a i n the Tor u C a ,

microSD or user created

folder

zIf a schedule with a user icon is copied, the “Category”

information is not copied.

zYou cannot copy while microSD card being accessed.

Data type Details

247

Data Display/Edit/Management

Displaying the Data in the

microSD Card

Displaying the PIM data on the

microSD card

You can display the PIM data such as phonebook,

schedule, mail or bookmarks on the microSD card.

1i“LIFEKIT”“microSD manager”

The “Categories” screen

appears.

2Select an item

The “File list” screen

appears.

3Select a file

The “Data list” screen

appears.

4Select a data

The “Data detail” screen

appears.

Categories screen (p.247)

microSD info →p.251

Copy from phone……Copies all the item data to the

microSD card.

• For “Schedule”, you can select from “Schedule/To Do

list/All”.

• For “Bookmark”, you can select from “i-mode brow./Full

Brow./All”.

microSD format →p.251

Check microSD……Checks the microSD card and fixes

errors.

zWhile running microSD manager or displaying the

data details, you cannot launch another function.

z“ ” appears for a bookmark added on the i-mode

browser screen, and “ ” for the one added on the

Full Browser screen.

Sony A3880003 Licensed transmitter User Manual 08 user guide part 1

Sony Mobile Communications Inc Licensed transmitter 08 user guide part 1

Contents

08 user guide part 1

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation